Ca Roscoe Ver6

CA-Roscoe



User Guide 6.0

SP3

This documentation and related computer software program (hereinafter referred to as the “Documentation”) is for the end user’s informational purposes only and is subject to change or withdrawal by Computer Associates International, Inc. (“CA”) at any time. This documentation may not be copied, transferred, reproduced, disclosed or duplicated, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of CA. This documentation is proprietary information of CA and protected by the copyright laws of the United States and international treaties. Notwithstanding the foregoing, licensed users may print a reasonable number of copies of this documentation for their own internal use, provided that all CA copyright notices and legends are affixed to each reproduced copy. Only authorized employees, consultants, or agents of the user who are bound by the confidentiality provisions of the license for the software are permitted to have access to such copies. This right to print copies is limited to the period during which the license for the product remains in full force and effect. Should the license terminate for any reason, it shall be the user’s responsibility to return to CA the reproduced copies or to certify to CA that same have been destroyed. To the extent permitted by applicable law, CA provides this documentation “as is” without warranty of any kind, including without limitation, any implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular purpose or noninfringement. In no event will CA be liable to the end user or any third party for any loss or damage, direct or indirect, from the use of this documentation, including without limitation, lost profits, business interruption, goodwill, or lost data, even if CA is expressly advised of such loss or damage. The use of any product referenced in this documentation and this documentation is governed by the end user’s applicable license agreement. The manufacturer of this documentation is Computer Associates International, Inc. Provided with “Restricted Rights” as set forth in 48 C.F.R. Section 12.212, 48 C.F.R. Sections 52.227-19(c)(1) and (2) or DFARS Section 252.227-7013(c)(1)(ii) or applicable successor provisions.

 2001 Computer Associates International, Inc. All trademarks, trade names, service marks, and logos referenced herein belong to their respective companies.

Contents About This Guide

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xvii

Part I. Getting Started (General Information) Chapter 1. Introduction

|

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components . . . . . . . 2.1 Command Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.1 Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.2 Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Command Conventions 2.2.1 Using Reserved Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1.1 Using the Double Comma (,,) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1.2 Using the Asterisk (*) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1.3 Using the Minus Sign (-) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.1.4 Using the Plus Sign (+) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Using String Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2.1 String Delimiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Command Execution Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Correcting Invalid/Incomplete Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.1.1 Handling Erroneous Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.4.1.2 Handling Erroneous Primary Commands 2.4.1.3 Handling Invalid PF/PA Key Assignment . . . . . . . 2.4.1.4 Handling Confirmation Messages/Information Displays 2.5 Displaying Previously Executed Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 2.6 Eliminating Duplicate Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition . . 3.1 Defining the Language Character Set . . . . . . . 3.2 Controlling Character Recognition and Treatment 3.2.1 Entering and Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.2 Specifying Character Strings With Commands 3.3 Controlling Non-Displayable Character Translation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries . . . . . . . . 4.1 Setting Temporary Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Setting Session Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1 2-1 2-2 2-2 2-3 2-5 2-5 2-5 2-6 2-6 2-7 2-7 2-8 2-9 2-10 2-10 2-11 2-11 2-12 2-13 2-15 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-4 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-3

Contents iii

4.2.1.1 When to Use STATUS DISPLAY 4.2.1.2 When to Use STATUS AWS . . 4.2.2 Using the SET BOUNDS Command 4.2.3 Using the BOUNDS Line Command

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 General Comments About Modifying the Display Format . . . . . . 5.2 Defining Display Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Setting Temporary Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Setting Session Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY and STATUS AWS Display 5.2.2.2 When to Use STATUS DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2.3 When to Use STATUS AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3 Using the SET DISPLAY Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.3 Defining Sequence Number Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Defining Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information 6.1 Displaying/Changing Display and Boundary Settings 6.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes . . . . . . 6.3 Display Site-Defined Attribute Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.4 Display Time and Date 6.5 Synopsis of Session Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 7. Printing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Identifying Data to be Printed . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Qualifying the Data to be Printed . . . . . . . 7.2.1 Controlling Sequence Numbers . . . . . 7.2.2 Formatting the Printed Data . . . . . . . 7.2.3 Naming and Referencing Print Requests 7.2.3.1 Naming Print Requests . . . . . . . 7.2.3.2 Referencing Print Requests . . . . . 7.2.4 Printing Multiple Copies . . . . . . . . . 7.2.5 Printing Selected Lines/Columns . . . . . 7.2.5.1 Limiting Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.5.2 Limiting Columns . . . . . . . . . . 7.2.6 Requesting Completion Notification . . . 7.2.7 Using a System Printer . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Controlling Printing Locations . . . . . . . . 7.3.1 Changing a Printing Location . . . . . . 7.3.1.1 Changing for a Single Request . . . 7.3.1.2 Changing for the Session . . . . . . 7.3.2 Displaying Printing Location Information 7.3.3 Obtaining Information About Printers . . 7.4 Controlling and Monitoring Print Requests . . 7.4.1 Cancelling Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.2 Displaying Print Request Status . . . . . 7.4.3 Holding/Releasing Request(s) . . . . . . 7.4.4 Rerouting Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format

iv CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-3 4-3 4-4 4-5 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-4 5-4 5-4 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 6-1 6-2 6-4 6-12 6-14 6-15 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-6 7-6 7-6 7-6 7-7 7-7 7-7 7-8 7-9 7-10 7-10 7-10 7-10 7-11 7-12 7-13 7-13 7-13 7-14 7-14 8-1

8.1 Screen Format Description . . . . . 8.1.1 The Command Area . . . . . 8.1.2 The System Control Area . . 8.1.3 The Execution Area . . . . . . 8.2 Splitting the Screen . . . . . . . . 8.2.1 Invoking a Full-Screen Split . 8.2.2 Invoking a Partial-Screen Split 8.2.3 Resplitting Screens . . . . . . 8.2.4 Swapping Active Screens . . . 8.2.5 Terminating Split Screens . . 8.3 Changing the Screen Size . . . . . 8.4 Locking the Screen . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages . . 9.1 Receiving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 Transmitting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.1 Using the SEND Command . . . . . 9.2.2 Using the BulletinBoard System (BBS)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 10. Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1 Signing On 10.1.1 Using the CA-Roscoe Sign-on Screen . . . . 10.1.2 Accessing CA-Roscoe from VTAM Terminals 10.1.3 Accessing CA-Roscoe Through XTPM . . . 10.1.3.1 CA-Roscoe From CA-Roscoe . . . . . . 10.1.3.2 CA-Roscoe From CICS Terminals . . . 10.1.3.3 CA-Roscoe From TSO . . . . . . . . . . 10.2 Customizing Sign On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.1 Changing/Creating a Password . . . . . . . . 10.2.2 Creating a Sign-on Program . . . . . . . . . 10.3 Signing Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.1 Automatic Signoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.2 Explicit Signoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys . . 11.1 The Default PF/PA Key Assignments . . . . . 11.2 Using PF/PA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.1 Types of Assignments: . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 Reviewing Processing Hierarchy . . . . . . . . 11.4 Changing Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4.2 Assigning Commands/Keyword Functions 11.4.2.1 Assignment Limitations: . . . . . . 11.4.2.2 Assignment Techniques: . . . . . . 11.4.3 Assigning Keyword Functions . . . . . . 11.4.3.1 Scroll Function Assignments . . . . 11.4.3.2 Special Purpose Function Assignments Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids 12.1 The CA-Roscoe Documentation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2 8-3 8-3 8-6 8-7 8-7 8-9 8-10 8-10 8-11 8-12 8-13 9-1 9-2 9-4 9-4 9-5

10-1 10-2 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-4 10-6 10-7 10-8 10-8 10-10 10-12 10-12 10-13 11-1 11-2 11-4 11-4 11-7 11-8 11-9 11-10 11-10 11-10 11-13 11-13 11-15 12-1 12-2

Contents v

12.2 The HELP Facility 12.3 The Online Tutorial

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

12-3 12-6

Part II. The AWS (Creating and Manipulating Data) Chapter 13. AWS: Introducing the AWS 13.1 Attaching an AWS to the Terminal . . 13.2 Attaching an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3 Bringing Data Into an AWS . . . . . . 13.4 Changing AWS Names/Attributes . . . 13.5 Creating an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6 Detaching an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7 Discarding an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . 13.8.1 Positioning via the Internal Pointer 13.8.2 Positioning to Specific Lines . . . 13.8.2.1 Using Primary Commands . . 13.8.2.2 Using Line Commands . . . . 13.9 Reattaching the Current AWS . . . . . 13.10 Selecting an AWS . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS 14.1 Adding Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1.1 Inserting a String Within a Line . . . . . . . 14.1.2 Prefixing or Suffixing a Line . . . . . . . . . 14.2 Reordering AWS Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3 Editing Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4 Editing Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . 14.4.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4.3 Tracking Edited Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS 15.1 Copying Data Within the Active AWS . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.1.1 To copy a single line: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.1.2 To copy a range of lines: . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.1.3 To duplicate the copied lines at the destination: 15.1.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.2.1 Copy Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.2.2 Using Overlay Destination Line Commands . . 15.1.2.3 Repeat Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2 Copying Data to an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.1 Alternate Form of Screen Copy . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.2 Copying All or a Range of Lines . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.3 Copying Based on a Character String . . . . . . . . 15.3 Copying Data Between Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.1 Copying All or a Range of Lines . . . . . . . . . . .

vi CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-1 13-2 13-3 13-4 13-5 13-6 13-8 13-9 13-10 13-10 13-11 13-11 13-12 13-13 13-14 14-1 14-2 14-2 14-2 14-3 14-4 14-4 14-5 14-6 14-6 14-7 14-8 15-1 15-2 15-2 15-3 15-3 15-3 15-3 15-3 15-6 15-7 15-8 15-9 15-10 15-10 15-12 15-13

15.3.2 Copying Based on a Character String

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS 16.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.1 Deleting by Line Number . . . . . . . . . 16.1.2 Deleting by Presence/Absence of a String 16.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3 Using 3270 Hardware Facilities . . . . . . . . 16.3.1 Using the ERASE EOF Key . . . . . . . 16.3.2 Using the DELETE Key . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information

. . . . . . . .

Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS 18.1 Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.1.1 Opening the Execution Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.1.2 Using Power Typing Techniques . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.2.1 Opening the Execution Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.2.2 Using SET AUTOINSERT . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.2.3 Using Power Typing Techniques . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.3 Using a Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.3.1 Defining a Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.3.2 Inserting a Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.4 Using a PF Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.5 Using the Command Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2 Formatting Inserted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.1 Using Automatic Indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.2 Using the Software Tab Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.2.1 Setting Tabs and Defining a Tab Character . . . . 18.2.2.2 Using Tabs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS 19.1 Centering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . 19.1.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2 Controlling Capitalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . 19.2.2 Using a Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3 Reformatting Text Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . 19.3.2 Using a Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4 Shifting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . 19.4.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.5 Splitting and Joining Text Lines . . . . . . . . . . 19.5.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . 19.5.1.1 Splitting Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.5.1.2 Joining Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

15-13 16-1 16-2 16-2 16-3 16-4 16-6 16-6 16-7 17-1 18-1 18-2 18-2 18-3 18-6 18-8 18-8 18-9 18-10 18-11 18-11 18-11 18-13 18-14 18-15 18-15 18-16 18-16 18-17 19-1 19-2 19-2 19-3 19-5 19-5 19-6 19-7 19-7 19-8 19-10 19-10 19-11 19-13 19-13 19-13 19-15

Contents vii

19.5.2 Using Line Commands 19.5.2.1 Splitting Lines . 19.5.2.2 Joining Lines . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS 20.1 Finding Specific Occurrences of a String . . . . 20.1.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . 20.1.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2 Including/Excluding Lines Containing a String . 20.2.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . 20.2.1.1 INCL and EXCL . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2.1.2 SEARCH and OMIT . . . . . . . . . . 20.2.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3.1 Translating the Search String . . . . . . . . 20.3.2 Delimiting the Search String . . . . . . . . 20.3.3 Qualifying the Search String . . . . . . . . 20.3.4 Specifying the String in Hexadecimal . . . 20.3.5 Positioning the Resulting Display . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.1 Using a Primary Command 21.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21.2.1.1 Using Overlay Destination Line Commands

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS . . . . . . . . . . 22.1.1 Renumbering Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1.2 Display Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1.3 Include Sequence Numbers in the Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1.4 Set AWS Sequence Number Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1.5 Including CA-Roscoe Sequence Numbers With PRINT/SUBMIT Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1 Creating a Library Member 23.1.1 A CA-Roscoe library member name MUST: . . . . . 23.1.2 Member Name Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1.3 Assigning a Description and/or Attributes . . . . . . . 23.2 Updating a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

19-17 19-17 19-18 20-1 20-2 20-3 20-5 20-6 20-6 20-6 20-7 20-8 20-10 20-10 20-10 20-10 20-11 20-13 21-1 21-2 21-3 21-5 22-1 22-1 22-2 22-2 22-3 22-3 23-1 23-2 23-2 23-3 23-4 23-5

Part III. Data Sets (Browsing and Maintaining Data Sets) Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . 24-1 24.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-2 24.1.1 Using Wildcard Characters to Create a Catalog or VTOC Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-8 24.1.2 Using Wildcard Characters to Create a CA-Librarian, PDS or Volume Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-9 24.2 Using Data Set Facility Function Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-10 24.3 Using Data Set Facility Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-12 24.3.1 Entering Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24-13

viii CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

24.3.2 Refreshing a Selection List

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25.1 Attaching a CA-Librarian Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.2 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.3 Selection List Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.3.1 Selecting Alternate Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.3.2 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.3.3 Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2 Attaching a Catalog Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2.2 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2.3 Selection List Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2.3.1 Selecting Alternate Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2.3.2 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2.3.3 Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3 Attaching a Generation Data Group Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4 Attaching a PDS Member/CA-Librarian Module . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4.2 Using the Data Set Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4.4 Attached Data Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5.2 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5.3 Selection List Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5.3.1 Load Library Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5.3.2 Selecting Alternate Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5.3.3 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5.3.4 Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5.3.5 Non-Load Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5.3.6 Selecting Alternate Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5.3.7 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5.3.8 Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.6 Attaching a Sequential Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.6.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.6.2 Using the Data Set Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.6.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.6.4 Attached Data Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.7 Attaching a Volume Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.7.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.7.2 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.7.3 Selection List Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.7.3.1 Selecting Alternate Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.7.3.2 Display Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.7.3.3 Field Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.8 Attaching a VTOC Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.8.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.8.2 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24-15 25-1 25-2 25-2 25-3 25-4 25-4 25-5 25-5 25-7 25-7 25-8 25-9 25-10 25-10 25-11 25-14 25-15 25-15 25-16 25-17 25-17 25-18 25-18 25-19 25-20 25-20 25-21 25-21 25-21 25-23 25-24 25-24 25-24 25-26 25-26 25-26 25-27 25-27 25-28 25-28 25-29 25-30 25-30 25-31 25-31 25-33 25-33 25-34

Contents ix

25.8.3 Selection List Description . . . . 25.8.3.1 Selecting Alternate Displays 25.8.3.2 Display Format . . . . . . . 25.8.3.3 Field Descriptions . . . . . 25.9 Selecting the Display . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects . . . . . . . . 26.1 Detaching Data Set Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2.2 Including/Excluding List Containing a String . . . . . . . . 26.2.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2.3.1 Translating the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2.3.2 Delimiting the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2.3.3 Qualifying the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2.3.4 Specifying the Hexadecimal Representation of a String 26.2.3.5 Screen Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.3 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.3.1 Positioning to Specific Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.3.2 Positioning to Name Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.4 Reattaching a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27.1 Allocating a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1.2.1 Allocate Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1.2.2 Allocate SMS Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2 Cataloging a Data Set 27.3 Copying a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3.1.1 Copying a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3.1.2 Copying Unattached Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4 Compressing a Partitioned Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.5 Define Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.5.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.5.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.6 Define GDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.6.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.6.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.7.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.7.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.7.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.7.4 Delete Confirmation Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.8 Inquiring About a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.9 Inquiring About a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.10 Printing a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.10.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

x CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25-35 25-36 25-36 25-36 25-38 26-1 26-2 26-3 26-3 26-4 26-5 26-5 26-5 26-6 26-6 26-7 26-8 26-8 26-8 26-10 27-1 27-2 27-2 27-3 27-4 27-7 27-11 27-13 27-13 27-14 27-15 27-16 27-20 27-21 27-22 27-23 27-23 27-25 27-25 27-25 27-28 27-29 27-29 27-33 27-33 27-36 27-40 27-44 27-44

27.10.1.1 Printing a Selection List . . 27.10.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . 27.10.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . 27.11 Releasing Allocated Space . . . . . . 27.12 Renaming Data Sets/Members/Modules 27.12.1 Using a Primary Command . . . 27.12.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . 27.12.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . 27.12.3.1 Renaming Members/Modules 27.12.3.2 Renaming Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . . 27.13 Uncataloging a Data Set 27.14 Writing to a Data Set . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27-45 27-46 27-51 27-52 27-53 27-53 27-54 27-57 27-57 27-57 27-58 27-59

Part IV. Jobs (Submitting and Managing Jobs) Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities 28.1 Check Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.1.1 JCL Syntax Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.1.2 COBOL Syntax Checking . . . . . . . . . . . 28.2 Submitting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.2.1 Controlling Notification Messages . . . . . . 28.2.2 Controlling Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . 28.2.3 Expanding +INC Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.2.4 Expanding -INC Statements 28.3 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.3.1 Wildcard Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.3.2 Using Job Facility Functions . . . . . . . . . 28.4 Using Job Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.4.1 Job Facility Operator Control . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information 29.1 Displaying Job Execution Status . . . . . . . . . . . 29.2 Displaying Class/Destination Status . . . . . . . . . 29.3 Displaying Initiator Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.4 Displaying Job Queue Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.5 Displaying Job-Specific Information . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1 Attaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1.1.1 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1.1.2 Using a Job Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1.1.3 When Can a Job be Viewed? . . . . . . . . . . 30.1.1.4 What is the SYSOUT class? . . . . . . . . . . . 30.1.1.5 What Is the Current Status of the Submitted Job? 30.1.1.6 Who Can Attach a Job? . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2 Browsing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2.1 Detaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2.1.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28-1 28-2 28-2 28-3 28-4 28-4 28-5 28-6 28-7 28-9 28-11 28-12 28-13 28-15 29-1 29-2 29-4 29-5 29-6 29-7 30-1 30-2 30-2 30-3 30-4 30-4 30-5 30-6 30-6 30-7 30-7 30-7

Contents xi

30.2.1.2 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2.2.3 Customizing the Operation 30.2.2.4 Specifying the Hexadecimal Representation of a String 30.2.2.5 Screen Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2.3 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2.3.1 Positioning Between Multiple Files . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2.3.2 Positioning Within a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2.3.3 Positioning to Named Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2.4 Reattaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.2.4.1 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3.1 Altering File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3.1.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3.1.2 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3.1.3 Using a Job Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3.2 Copying Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3.2.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3.2.2 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3.2.3 Using a Job Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3.3 Displaying File Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3.3.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3.3.2 Using the Job Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3.4 Printing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3.4.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3.4.2 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3.4.3 Using the Job Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3.5 Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3.5.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3.5.2 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30.3.5.3 Using the Job Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

30-8 30-8 30-8 30-9 30-10 30-11 30-11 30-12 30-12 30-13 30-13 30-15 30-16 30-17 30-17 30-17 30-18 30-19 30-20 30-20 30-20 30-22 30-23 30-23 30-25 30-26 30-26 30-26 30-29 30-30 30-30 30-30 30-31

Part V. The Library System (Browsing and Managing Local Data) Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility 31.1 Notes About the Library System . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2 Attaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3 Using Library Facility Function Panels . . . . . . . 31.4 Using the Library Facility Selection List . . . . . . 31.4.1 Entering Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.4.2 Refreshing a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal 32.1 Attaching a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1.2 Using the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1.3 Format of Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1.3.1 Selecting Alternate Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xii CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31-1 31-2 31-3 31-6 31-7 31-8 31-10 32-1 32-2 32-2 32-5 32-6 32-7

32.1.3.2 Field Descriptions . . . . 32.1.4 Reordering the Display . . . . 32.2 Attaching a Member Directly . . . 32.2.1 Using a Primary Command . . 32.2.2 Using the Library Facility Menu 32.2.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . 32.2.4 Format of Member Display . . 32.3 Selecting the Display . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data . . . . . . . . . . . 33.1 Detaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String 33.2.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2.3.1 Translating the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2.3.2 Delimiting the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2.3.3 Qualifying the Search String . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2.3.4 Specifying the Hexadecimal Representation of a String 33.2.3.5 Screen Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.1 Positioning to Specific Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.2 Positioning to Named Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.4 Reattaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks 34.1 Altering Member Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2 Copying a Member/Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.1.1 Copying Unattached Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.3 Delete a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.3.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.3.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.3.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.3.4 Delete Confirmation Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.4 Inquiring About a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.5 Printing a Library Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.5.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.5.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.5.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.6 Renaming Library Members . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.6.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.6.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.6.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

32-7 32-9 32-10 32-10 32-11 32-11 32-12 32-13 33-1 33-2 33-3 33-3 33-4 33-5 33-5 33-5 33-6 33-6 33-7 33-8 33-8 33-8 33-10 34-1 34-2 34-2 34-3 34-3 34-5 34-5 34-7 34-8 34-9 34-11 34-11 34-12 34-13 34-14 34-15 34-17 34-17 34-17 34-21 34-22 34-22 34-22 34-23

Contents xiii

Part VI. Additional Facilities Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.1 Beginning a Session 35.1.1 What can you do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.2 Message Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.3 Viewing a Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.3.1 Viewing a Thread Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.4 Create a Thread or Thread Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5 BulletinBoard Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.1 The Utility Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.2 Setting BulletinBoard Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.3 View News Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.4 Prune a BBS Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.5 Deleting an Unwanted Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.6 Print a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.7 Print a Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.6 CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.6.1 Send a Message to Another CA-Roscoe User . . . . . . . . . 35.6.2 The ZMsg Mode and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.6.3 ZMsg Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.6.4 Viewing Messages on ZMsg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.6.5 Sending a Message to a CA-Roscoe User . . . . . . . . . . . 35.6.6 Set ZMsg Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.6.7 Locate Another CA-Roscoe User VIA CA-SysView Interface

|

Chapter 36. CA-Roscoe and DB2

. . . .

35-1 35-2 35-2 35-3 35-5 35-6 35-8 35-11 35-12 35-13 35-15 35-16 35-16 35-17 35-18 35-20 35-20 35-21 35-22 35-24 35-25 35-27 35-28

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36-1

Chapter 37. DMF - Dialog Management Facility

xiv CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

37-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

38-1 38-2 38-3 38-4 38-4 38-4 38-5 38-5 38-7 38-8 38-9 38-10

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

39-1

Chapter 40. SKETCH - CICS/IMS Panel Generator

Appendixes

. . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System 38.1 Determining Executable Applications . . . . . . 38.2 Executing Applications Under ETSO . . . . . . 38.2.1 Allocating Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38.2.1.1 Allocating an AWS . . . . . . . . . . 38.2.1.2 Allocating a Library Member . . . . . 38.2.1.3 Allocating the Terminal . . . . . . . . 38.2.1.4 Allocating Data Sets . . . . . . . . . . 38.2.2 Querying and Freeing Files . . . . . . . . . 38.2.3 Initiating Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38.3 Executing Distributed Application . . . . . . . . 38.4 Executing TSO Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 39. RPF - Roscoe Programming Facility

. . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

40-1

Appendix A. Using Typewriter Devices With CA-Roscoe A.1 Beginning a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2 Establishing Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3 Signing On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.4 Ending a CA-Roscoe Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.5 Using a Typewriter Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.6 Using CA-Roscoe Commands and Facilities . . . . . . A.7 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.8 Viewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.9 Non-Executable Commands and Facilities . . . . . . . Index

A-1 A-2 . A-3 . A-4 . A-6 . A-7 . A-9 A-10 A-11 A-12

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

X-1

Contents xv

xvi CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

About This Guide This CA-Roscoe User Guide provides a task-oriented description of CA-Roscoe. It describes how you can use CA-Roscoe commands and facilities to perform a variety of activities.

About This Guide xvii

Organization Chapter

Description

1

Introduces CA-Roscoe.

2

Provides general information about CA-Roscoe commands.

3

Describes how to control character recognition.

4

Describes how to define column boundaries.

5

Describes how to define the display format.

6

Describes how to display and change the display and column boundaries and session attributes. Also describes how to display site-defined attribute values, the time, and the date.

7

Describes how to print data at a system or 328x-type printer.

8

Describes the CA-Roscoe screen format, how to split the screen, change screen sizes and lock the screen.

9

Describes how to send and receive messages.

10

Describes how sign on and off CA-Roscoe.

11

Describes how to use and customize PF and PA key assignments.

12

Describes how to obtain additional information about CA-Roscoe.

13

Introduces the AWS and describes how to attach, change, create, detach, discard, position, and reattach an AWS.

14

Describes how to change data within an AWS by adding or changing character strings.

15

Describes how to copy data within and into an AWS.

16

Describes how to delete data from an AWS.

17

Describes how to display and change AWS information.

18

Describes how to enter data into an AWS and format that data.

19

Describes how to format text within the AWS.

20

Describes how to locate all or specific occurrences of data within an AWS.

21

Describes how to move data within an AWS.

22

Describes how to renumber the contents of an AWS.

23

Describes how to save and update data as a library member.

24

Introduces the Data Set Facility.

xviii CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter

Description

25

Describes how to attach data or a Selection List.

26

Describes how to locate data, position the display, detach a data set object, and then reattach it.

27

Describes how to perform a variety of data management tasks. These tasks include allocating, cataloging, copying, compressing, deleting, inquiring, printing, releasing, renaming, uncataloging, and writing data.

28

Introduces the job output facilities and describes how to syntax check and submit jobs for execution.

29

Describes how to display job execution status, class/destination status, initiator status, and job queue status.

30

Describes how to attach job output, browse the job, and perform such tasks as altering file attributes, copying output, displaying file attributes and printing the job at a system or 328x-type printer.

31

Introduces the Library Facility.

32

Describes how to attach data or a Selection List.

33

Describes how to locate data, position the display, detach data, and then reattach it.

34

Describes how to perform such library management tasks as altering attributes, copying, deleting, inquiring, printing, and renaming members.

35

Introduces the BulletinBoard System.

36

Introduces CA-Roscoe/DB2.

37

Introduces the Dialog Management Facility.

38

Introduces the Extended Time Sharing Option (ETSO).

39

Introduces the ROSCOE Programming Facility (RPF).

40

Introduces SKETCH.

APPENDIX A

Describes how to use typewriter devices with CA-Roscoe.

About This Guide xix

Summary of Revisions in this Edition CA-Roscoe supports the six-digit job number support added with z/OS JES2/JES3 1.2. See Chapter 29, “Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information” on page 29-1 and 30.1.1, “Using a Primary Command” on page 30-2 for more information.

xx CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Summary of Revisions ■ Displaying Session Attributes/Information: The STATUS SESSION display now includes the new field: SPLIT

Contains current split screen setting.

■ The Job Facility: CA-Roscoe 6.0 contains a panel-driven RPF system to facilitate job processing. It is invoked using the AJOB command, and is referred to as the Job Facility. The Job Facility can be used to: – attach jobs – display a job's execution status – display job-related information – alter file attributes – copy jobs – print jobs – cancel jobs

About This Guide xxi

CA-Roscoe Publications The following publications are supplied with CA-Roscoe. They are divided into a User Series and a System Series. User Series Name

Contents

Command Reference Guide

Describes all CA-Roscoe primary and line commands and Monitor commands.

Extended Development Tools Guide

Describes how: 1) the Application Programming Interface (API) can be used by applications executing under ETSO to take advantage of CA-Roscoe facilities, and 2) the interactive facilities provided by SKETCH can be used to generate and maintain panels used in programs running under CICS or IMS.

Getting Started Guide

Introduces CA-Roscoe to non-programmers.

Reference Summary

Summarizes all CA-Roscoe primary and line commands and Monitor commands.

Reference Summary (for RPF)

Summarizes all Roscoe Programming Facility (RPF) commands, functions, expressions and variables.

Release Guide

Provides a summary of the enhancements included in this release.

RPF Language Guide

Describes all components of the RPF language and how to write RPF programs. It also describes the Dialog Management Facility (DMF) which can be used to develop, maintain and execute panel-driven RPF applications.

User Guide

Provides task-oriented descriptions of how to use CA-Roscoe.

xxii CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

System Series Name

Contents

CA-ACTIVATOR 2.1 Supplement

Presents CA-ACTIVATOR installation procedures.

Extended Facilities for System Programmers Guide

Describes how sites can make extensions to their CA-Roscoe system. This includes creating site-written Monitor routines and customizing security and other online exits.

Installation Guide

Describes the steps to follow when installing or upgrading CA-Roscoe.

Messages and Codes Guide

Explains all messages that might be received by individuals using CA-Roscoe and/or by the individual responsible for maintaining CA-Roscoe.

Programs and Utilities Guide

Describes CA-Roscoe execution requirements. Also describes maintenance and reporting programs for the accounting facility, Active Work Space (AWS), library system, and user profile system.

Security Administration Guide

Describes implementation of internal and external security to protect your CA-Roscoe system.

System Commands Guide

Describes commands used to control and monitor CA-Roscoe and to obtain performance information about that execution.

System Reference Guide

Intended for the individual responsible for maintaining CA-Roscoe. It describes CA-Roscoe and its components.

About This Guide xxiii

Related Publications The following manuals are included in the CA90s Services Documentation set: Title

Contents

CA90s Services Reference Guide

Operating Instructions for the CA90s Services.

CA90s Services Installation and Maintenance Guide

Installation procedure and installation JCL for CA90s Services.

CA90s Services Message Guide

Messages and codes for CA90s Services.

CA90s Services CA-ACTIVATOR 2.1 Supplement

Proceduresa for using CA-ACTIVATOR to install and maintain CA90s Services.

CA90s Services CA-ACTIVATOR Implementation and User Guide

Installation and upgrade instructions, and operating instructions for CA-ACTIVATOR.

CA-ViewPoint User Guide

Contains information and examples for implementing and using ViewPoint.

The following manuals relate to CA-Roscoe and are available from Computer Associates. Title

Contents

CA-Earl Reference Guide

Contains detailed information about CA-Earl statements, parameters, and coding rules. Also explains the CA-Earl Reporting Service.

CA-Earl User Guide

Designed for users interested in learning about CA-Earl. It presents an introduction to CA-Earl features and capabilities.

CA-Earl Systems Programmer Guide

Lists the installation options for CA-Earl and instructions for modifying them. Also describes size requirements and program execution.

CA-Earl Examples Guide

Contains sample programs that show a variety of common applications.

xxiv CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

CA90s Services CA90s Services are a common set of services that may be used by any MVS Computer Associates product. These services are maintained separately from the product and are documented and installed separately as well. CA-Roscoe uses CAIRIM for installation services and security. Licensing Management Program (LMP) CA-Roscoe now interfaces with CAIRIM services to determine product licensing authorization.

About This Guide xxv

Reading Syntax Diagrams The formats of all statements and some basic language elements are illustrated using syntax diagrams. Read syntax diagrams from left to right and top to bottom. The following terminology, symbols, and concepts are used in syntax diagrams. Keywords: Appear in uppercase letters, for example, COMMAND or PARM. These words must be entered exactly as shown. Variables: Appear in italicized lowercase letters, for example, variable. Required Keywords and Variables: Appear on a main line. Optional Keywords and Variables: Appear below a main line. Default Keywords and Variables: Appear above a main line. Double Arrowheads Pointing to the Right: Indicate the beginning of a statement. Double Arrowheads Pointing to Each Other: Indicate the end of a statement. Single Arrowheads Pointing to the Right: Indicate a portion of a statement, or that the statement continues in another diagram. Punctuation Marks or Arithmetic Symbols: If punctuation marks or arithmetic symbols are shown with a keyword or variable, they must be entered as part of the statement or command. Punctuation marks and arithmetic symbols can include: ,

comma

>

greater than symbol

.

period

<

less than symbol

(

open parenthesis

=

equal sign

)

close parenthesis

¬

not sign

+

addition

−

subtraction

*

multiplication

/

division

The following is an example of a statement without parameters. Statement Without Parameters ──COMMAND─────────────────────────────────────────────────────

You must write: COMMAND

xxvi CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Required parameters appear on the same horizontal line (the main path of the diagram) as the command or statement. The parameters must be separated by one or more blanks. Statement With Required Parameters ──COMMAND──PARM1──PARM2───────────────────────────────────────

You must write: COMMAND PARM1 PARM2 Delimiters such as parentheses around parameters or clauses must be included. Delimiters Around Parameters ──COMMAND──(PARM1)──PARM2='variable'──────────────────────────

If the word “variable” is a valid entry, you must write: COMMAND (PARM1) PARM2='variable' Where you see a vertical list of parameters as shown in the following example, you must choose one of the parameters. This indicates that one entry is required and only one of the displayed parameters is allowed in the statement. Choice of Required Parameters ──COMMAND──┬─PARM1─┬────────────────────────────────────────── ├─PARM2─┤ └─PARM3─┘

You can choose one of the parameters from the vertical list, such as in the following examples: COMMAND PARM1 COMMAND PARM2 COMMAND PARM3 A single optional parameter appears below the horizontal line that marks the main path. When a required parameter in a syntax diagram has a default value, it indicates the value for the parameter if the command is not specified. If you specify the command, you must code the parameter and specify one of the displayed values. Default Value for a Required Parameter ┌─YES─┐ ──COMMAND──PARM1=─┴─NO──┴───PARM2─────────────────────────────

If you specify the command, you must write one of the following:

About This Guide xxvii

COMMAND PARM1=NO PARM2 COMMAND PARM1=YES PARM2 Optional Parameter ──COMMAND──┬───────────┬────────────────────────────────────── └─PARAMETER─┘

You can choose (or not) to use the optional parameter, as shown in the following examples: COMMAND COMMAND PARAMETER If you have a choice of more than one optional parameter, the parameters appear in a vertical list below the main path. Choice of Optional Parameters ──COMMAND──┬───────┬────────────────────────────────────────── ├─PARM1─┤ └─PARM2─┘

You can choose any of the parameters from the vertical list, or you can write the statement without an optional parameter, such as in the following examples: COMMAND COMMAND PARM1 COMMAND PARM2 For some statements, you can specify a single parameter more than once. A repeat symbol (a backward-pointing arrow above the main horizontal line) indicates that you can specify multiple parameters. The following examples include the repeat symbol. Repeatable Variable Parameter ┌── ──────────┐ !─variable─┴─────────────────────────────────────── ──COMMAND───

In the above example, the word “variable” is in lowercase italics, indicating that it is a value you supply, but it is also on the main path, which means that you are required to specify at least one entry. The repeat symbol indicates that you can specify a parameter more than once. Assume that you have three values named VALUEX, VALUEY, and VALUEZ for the variable. Some of your choices are: COMMAND VALUEX COMMAND VALUEX VALUEY COMMAND VALUEX VALUEX VALUEZ

xxviii CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

If the repeat symbol contains punctuation such as a comma, you must separate multiple parameters with the punctuation. The following example includes the repeat symbol, a comma, and parentheses. Separator with Repeatable Variable and Delimiter ┌─,────────┐ !─variable─┴──)───────────────────────────────── ──COMMAND──(───

In the above example, the word “variable” is in lowercase italics, indicating that it is a value you supply. It is also on the main path, which means that you must specify at least one entry. The repeat symbol indicates that you can specify more than one variable and that you must separate the entries with commas. The parentheses indicate that the group of entries must be enclosed within parentheses. Assume that you have three values named VALUEA, VALUEB, and VALUEC for the variable. Some of your choices are: COMMAND COMMAND COMMAND COMMAND

(VALUEC) (VALUEB,VALUEC) (VALUEB,VALUEA) (VALUEA,VALUEB,VALUEC)

The following example shows a list of parameters with the repeat symbol. Optional Repeatable Parameters ┌── ─────────┐ ┌── ─────────┐ ┌── ─────────┐ !┬───────┬┴─── !┬───────┬┴─── !┬───────┬┴────────────── ──COMMAND─── └─PARM1─┘ └─PARM2─┘ └─PARM3─┘

Some choices you can make include: COMMAND PARM1 COMMAND PARM1 PARM2 PARM3 COMMAND PARM1 PARM1 PARM3 When a parameter in a syntax diagram is above the line, for example, YES in the following diagram, its special treatment indicates it is the default value for the parameter. If you do not include the parameter when you write the statement, the result is the same as if you had actually specified the parameter with the default value. Default Value for a Parameter ──COMMAND──┬─────────────────┬──PARM2───────────────────────── │ ┌─YES─┐ │ └─PARM1=─┴─NO──┴──┘

Because YES is the default in the example above, if you write: COMMAND PARM2

About This Guide xxix

you have written the equivalent of: COMMAND PARM1=YES PARM2 In some syntax diagrams, a set of several parameters is represented by a single reference, as in this example: Variables Representing Several Parameters ──COMMAND──┬─────────────────────┬──────────────────────────── ├─PARM1───────────────┤ └─┤ parameter-block ├─┘ parameter-block: ├──┬──────────────────┬──────────────────────────────────────────┤ ├─PARM2────────────┤ └─PARM3─┬───────┬──┘ ├─PARM4─┤ └─PARM5─┘

The “parameter-block” can be displayed in a separate syntax diagram. Choices you can make from this syntax diagram therefore include (but are not limited to) the following: COMMAND PARM1 COMMAND PARM3 COMMAND PARM3 PARM4 Note: Before you can specify PARM4 or PARM5 in this command, you must specify PARM3. A note in a syntax diagram is similar to a footnote except that the note appears at the bottom of the diagram box.

──COMMAND──┬─────────┬──────────────────────────────────────── (1) └─PARM1─── ┘ Note: 1 This is a note about the item.

xxx CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Part I. Getting Started (General Information) Chapter 1. Introduction

|

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components 2.1 Command Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.1 Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1.2 Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.2 Command Conventions 2.2.1 Using Reserved Characters . . . . . . . . . . 2.2.2 Using String Operands . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.3 Command Execution Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . 2.4 Correcting Invalid/Incomplete Commands . . . . 2.5 Displaying Previously Executed Commands . . . 2.6 Eliminating Duplicate Commands . . . . . . . . . Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition . . 3.1 Defining the Language Character Set . . . . . . . 3.2 Controlling Character Recognition and Treatment 3.2.1 Entering and Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . 3.2.2 Specifying Character Strings With Commands 3.3 Controlling Non-Displayable Character Translation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries . . . . . . . . 4.1 Setting Temporary Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2 Setting Session Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS 4.2.2 Using the SET BOUNDS Command . . . . . . 4.2.3 Using the BOUNDS Line Command . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 General Comments About Modifying the Display Format 5.2 Defining Display Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.1 Setting Temporary Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.2 Setting Session Margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.2.3 Using the SET DISPLAY Command . . . . . . . . 5.3 Defining Sequence Number Display . . . . . . . . . . . 5.4 Defining Data Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information 6.1 Displaying/Changing Display and Boundary Settings 6.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes . . . . . . 6.3 Display Site-Defined Attribute Values . . . . . . . 6.4 Display Time and Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-1 2-1 2-2 2-2 2-3 2-5 2-5 2-7 2-9 2-10 2-13 2-15 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-3 3-3 3-4 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-3 4-4 4-5 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 5-7 6-1 6-2 6-4 6-12 6-14

6.5 Synopsis of Session Attributes

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 7. Printing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 Identifying Data to be Printed . . . . . . . . . 7.2 Qualifying the Data to be Printed . . . . . . . 7.2.1 Controlling Sequence Numbers . . . . . 7.2.2 Formatting the Printed Data . . . . . . . 7.2.3 Naming and Referencing Print Requests 7.2.4 Printing Multiple Copies . . . . . . . . . 7.2.5 Printing Selected Lines/Columns . . . . . 7.2.6 Requesting Completion Notification . . . 7.2.7 Using a System Printer . . . . . . . . . . 7.3 Controlling Printing Locations . . . . . . . . 7.3.1 Changing a Printing Location . . . . . . 7.3.2 Displaying Printing Location Information 7.3.3 Obtaining Information About Printers . . 7.4 Controlling and Monitoring Print Requests . . 7.4.1 Cancelling Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . 7.4.2 Displaying Print Request Status . . . . . 7.4.3 Holding/Releasing Request(s) . . . . . . 7.4.4 Rerouting Request(s) . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format 8.1 Screen Format Description . . . . . . . . . . 8.1.1 The Command Area 8.1.2 The System Control Area . . 8.1.3 The Execution Area . . . . . . 8.2 Splitting the Screen . . . . . . . . 8.2.1 Invoking a Full-Screen Split . 8.2.2 Invoking a Partial-Screen Split 8.2.3 Resplitting Screens . . . . . . 8.2.4 Swapping Active Screens . . . 8.2.5 Terminating Split Screens . . 8.3 Changing the Screen Size . . . . . 8.4 Locking the Screen . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages . . 9.1 Receiving Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2 Transmitting Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 9.2.1 Using the SEND Command . . . . . 9.2.2 Using the BulletinBoard System (BBS)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . Chapter 10. Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe 10.1 Signing On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.1.1 Using the CA-Roscoe Sign-on Screen . . . . 10.1.2 Accessing CA-Roscoe from VTAM Terminals 10.1.3 Accessing CA-Roscoe Through XTPM . . . 10.2 Customizing Sign On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.2.1 Changing/Creating a Password . . . . . . . .

CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-15 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-3 7-3 7-6 7-6 7-7 7-8 7-9 7-10 7-10 7-11 7-12 7-13 7-13 7-13 7-14 7-14 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-3 8-6 8-7 8-7 8-9 8-10 8-10 8-11 8-12 8-13 9-1 9-2 9-4 9-4 9-5 10-1 10-2 10-2 10-3 10-4 10-8 10-8

10.2.2 Creating a Sign-on Program 10.3 Signing Off . . . . . . . . . . . 10.3.1 Automatic Signoff . . . . . 10.3.2 Explicit Signoff . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys . . 11.1 The Default PF/PA Key Assignments . . . . . 11.2 Using PF/PA Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.2.1 Types of Assignments: . . . . . . . . . . 11.3 Reviewing Processing Hierarchy . . . . . . . . 11.4 Changing Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4.1 Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11.4.2 Assigning Commands/Keyword Functions 11.4.3 Assigning Keyword Functions . . . . . . Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids 12.1 The CA-Roscoe Documentation 12.2 The HELP Facility . . . . . . . 12.3 The Online Tutorial . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

10-10 10-12 10-12 10-13 11-1 11-2 11-4 11-4 11-7 11-8 11-9 11-10 11-13 12-1 12-2 12-3 12-6

CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 1. Introduction CA-Roscoe is an online program development system that you can use to perform tasks such as: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Entering and editing data, Saving the data in the CA-Roscoe library or an OS data set for later use, Submitting the data as a jobstream for background execution, Viewing the files comprising a job, and Browsing and maintaining OS data sets.

CA-Roscoe can be used at any 3270-type terminal (such as the IBM 3278 or 3290) and at typewriter devices (such as the IBM 3767 or any device that operates in a manner similar to a teletype terminal). The sample screen displays used in this manual assume that you are using a 3270-type terminal. While the content of the displays is accurate, the width of the displays has been modified so that they will fit within the margins of this manual. If you are using a typewriter device, refer to Appendix A for additional information about using that device with CA-Roscoe.

Chapter 1. Introduction 1-1

1-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components This chapter describes: ■ The types of commands supported by CA-Roscoe (line commands and primary commands). ■ Conventions for using CA-Roscoe commands. This includes: – Using reserved characters. – Using reserved words. – Using a string operand with a command (like how the string may be specified and, if necessary, what characters to use as string delimiters). – The execution hierarchy used to evaluate commands. – How to correct invalid and incomplete commands. – How to redisplay previously executed commands.

Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components 2-1

2.1 Command Types

2.1 Command Types CA-Roscoe supports both primary commands and line commands. Primary Commands

Entered in the Command Area of the screen. Monitor commands and RPF program names are also entered in the Command Area.

Line Commands

Entered in the sequence number field of the Execution Area to modify the contents of the active AWS. To use line commands, the screen display format must have an unprotected sequence number field. You can establish this format by changing the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen or by entering: SET DISPLAY AWS NUMX If you use line commands frequently, you may want to add this command to your sign-on program.

The following example shows a screen where SET DISPLAY AWS NUMX is in effect. Here, primary and line commands are used together. When the ENTER key is pressed, a line for data entry will be inserted after line 3600, and then all occurrences of PRT will be changed to PART. SET DISPLAY AWS NUMX Display Format

7

EDIT /PRT/PART/

8

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... ...... ============================= T O P ================= ==34== RECORD CONTAINS 133 CHARACTERS ==35== LABEL RECORDS ARE OMITTED I=36== DATA RECORD IS INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE. ==37== =1 INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE. ==38== =5 CARRIAGE-CONTROL PIC X. ==39== =5 FILLER PIC X(9).

2.1.1 Primary Commands You can enter one or more primary commands on each line of the Command Area. When entering multiple commands on a line, you must remember that: 1. Each command must be complete within the line (for example, commands cannot be continued). 2. When multiple commands are typed on a line, they must be separated by a command delimiter. The default delimiter is usually the ampersand (&). The following illustrates how the ampersand is used to separate commands on a line.

2-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

2.1 Command Types

Using the Command Delimiter

7

8

RENUMBER & UPDATE INVLIST_ > > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 > <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5... ...... ================================ T O P ============== ===1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.

2.1.2 Line Commands You may enter one line command in any of the lines comprising the sequence number field. Note that at the top and bottom of an AWS, the sequence number field contains '......'. These periods are unprotected, and allow you to enter a line command before the first line of that AWS or after the last line of that AWS. Line commands can have numeric or string operands. ■ A numeric operand is entered with the command in the sequence number field. It indicates the number of times an operation is to occur (for example, D3, in the following example deletes lines 3400 through 3600). ■ A string operand is entered in the data portion of the line containing the command. It must always be delimited. When the command is executed, the original data are restored. (INCL, in the following example displays every occurrence of the string DIVISION, from line 3700 through the end of that AWS.) Placement of Line Command Operands

7

8 > > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... ...... ============================= T O P ================= D3 4== RECORD CONTAINS 133 CHARACTERS ==35== LABEL RECORDS ARE OMITTED ==36== DATA RECORD IS INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE. INCL== /DIVISION/TORY-REPORT-LINE. ==38== =5 CARRIAGE-CONTROL PIC X.

When using a string operand, the line command can be placed anywhere within the sequence number field.

Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components 2-3

2.1 Command Types

When using a numeric operand, the following evaluation hierarchy is performed: ■ If all or part of the sequence number field following the command is deleted, the command is interpreted as entered. (See lines 200 and 300 in the following example.) ■ If the sequence number field following the command is not deleted, the position of the cursor affects command interpretation. – If the cursor is in the sequence number field, all numeric values up to the cursor are treated as part of the command. (See lines 500 and 600 in the following example.) – If the cursor is in the first displayed position within the data portion of the line, all numeric values following the command within the sequence number field are treated as part of the command. (See lines 800 and 900 in the following example.) – If the cursor is in any other position within the data portion of the line, only those numeric values that differ from those originally displayed in the sequence number field are treated as part of the command. (See lines 1100 and 1200 in the following example.) The first two examples shown below indicate how the deletion of all or part of the sequence number field following a line command eliminates the concern about cursor positioning. The remaining examples show how the cursor position can affect command interpretation. Using Line Commands With Numeric Operands

7

> ...... ===1== D2_ ==D3 = ===4== D5=5== D5=6== ===7== ===8D9 ==D9== ==1=== =D11== D212==

2-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... ============================= T O P ================= _

Cmd is D2; 2 lines deleted Cmd is D3; 3 lines deleted

_ _

Cmd is D5; 5 lines deleted (cursor after Cmd is D5; 5= lines deleted (cursor one forward from cmd) Cmd is D9; 9 lines deleted Cmd is D9; 9== lines deleted _ Cmd is D; 1 line deleted _ Cmd is D2; 1 line deleted

8

2.2 Command Conventions

2.2 Command Conventions This section describes the characters that can be used in CA-Roscoe commands. It also discusses how to: ■ Use the special CA-Roscoe reserved characters. ■ Use CA-Roscoe reserved words. ■ Specify a string operand with a command. The characters that may be used in CA-Roscoe commands fall into the categories shown in the following table. Type

Characters Included

Alphabetic

Uppercase and lowercase character plus the national currency symbols. (See Chapter 3, “Controlling Character Recognition.”)

Numeric

0-9

Special

All characters appearing on a standard terminal keyboard, except the alphabetic and numeric characters and the comma, asterisk and space.

Binary

All EBCDIC bit combinations that cannot be entered from a standard keyboard.

Separator

Space. A space is used to separate a command from its first operand and to separate operands from each other.

Reserved

Double comma (,,), asterisk (*), minus sign (-) and the plus sign (+). (See the next section, 2.2.1, “Using Reserved Characters.”)

2.2.1 Using Reserved Characters This section describes the special functions provided by the reserved characters ,, (double comma), * (asterisk), - (minus sign) and + (plus sign).

2.2.1.1 Using the Double Comma (,,) The double comma can be used in a command to represent the last line of the active AWS, library member, attached data set object or attached job output file. For example, to display line 500 through the end of the active AWS, you would enter: ATTACH 5== ,,

Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components 2-5

2.2 Command Conventions

To copy lines 800 through the end of the library member INVLIST to the bottom of the active AWS, you would enter: COPY INVLIST 8== ,, B

2.2.1.2 Using the Asterisk (*) The asterisk can be used to indicate: ■ The name of the last fetched, saved or updated library member. For example, to update the contents of the last fetched member, you would enter: UPDATE Q ■ The line at which the pointer is currently positioned in an AWS, library member or attached job output file. For example, to display the contents of the active AWS beginning with the line at which the pointer is currently positioned, enter: ATTACH Q ,, ■ The last display of attached data when used with the keywords AWS, JOB or LIB. For example, if you have been viewing job output, you can reattach the active AWS and begin the display with the last displayed screen by entering: ATTACH AWS Q ■ Command deferral. Any primary command, Monitor command, or RPF program that follows an asterisk is not executed until the asterisk is deleted. For example, assume you want to copy lines 500 through 800 to a specific location within the active AWS, but you do not know the line number of that location. By preceding the command with an asterisk, as in: Q COPY 5== 8== you can type the line numbers you know and then scroll through the active AWS to determine the destination line number. The command preceded by the asterisk and any subsequent commands will not be executed until you remove the asterisk.

2.2.1.3 Using the Minus Sign (-) Use the minus sign to reexecute the last executed primary command, Monitor command or RPF program. For example, if you have just issued the command DISPLAY ROS+ to see the status of all jobs whose names begin with ROS, enter: to reexecute the same command.

2-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

2.2 Command Conventions

2.2.1.4 Using the Plus Sign (+) Use the plus sign to redisplay one or more previously executed primary commands, Monitor commands, or RPF program names. For example, assume the last command you executed was: ATTACH DSN ROSCOE.TEST(SOURCE1) To redisplay this command so that you can modify it, all you need enter is: + Optionally, you may include a number with the + to specify which previously executed command you want displayed. For additional information about using the plus sign, see the section, 2.5, “Displaying Previously Executed Commands” on page 2-13.

2.2.2 Using String Operands Many of the CA-Roscoe primary and line commands have string operands. The notation conventions show this operand as: charstr

Any sequence of printable entities specified in character format, or

string

Any sequence of entities specified in either character format or its hexadecimal representation.

If the syntax of a command shows the operand as either /charstr/ or /string/, it must be bound by a special character that delimits the operand.

Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components 2-7

2.2 Command Conventions

2.2.2.1 String Delimiters The special character used to delimit the operand and the special character used as the command delimiter cannot be used within the string. For consistency, the CA-Roscoe documentation uses the slash (/) as a string delimiter. Other valid characters include: | '%' ¬ & ( ) _ + = ! ¢ : ' " ' } { ? < > .

2-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

vertical bar percent sign logical not - if not used as the default tab character ampersand - if not used as the default command delimiter left parentheses right parentheses underscore dash or minus sign plus sign equal sign exclamation point cent sign colon ' semi-colon quotation mark apostrophe right brace left brace question mark less than sign greater than sign period

2.3 Command Execution Hierarchy

2.3 Command Execution Hierarchy When the ENTER key is pressed, the Execution Area is examined first. ■ If line commands have not been entered, all changes made to the data displayed in the Execution Area are recorded. ■ If line commands have been entered, they are validated. If any error is encountered, execution halts until the error is corrected, no changes made to the displayed data are recorded and no line or primary commands are executed. If the line commands are all valid, changes made to the displayed data are recorded and the line commands are executed. The contents of the Command Area is then examined. As each word is encountered, it is evaluated according to the hierarchy shown in the following example. Primary Command Evaluation Hierarchy

7

8 --<-- DOES THE 'WORD' MATCH A PRIMARY COMMAND OR COMMAND ->-| NO ABBREVIATION? YES | | | |-<-- DOES THE 'WORD' MATCH THE FIRST THREE CHARACTERS -->-| | NO OF A MONITOR COMMAND NAME? YES | | | |-<-- DOES THE 'WORD' MATCH THE NAME OF A MEMBER IN THE -->-| | NO USER'S LIBRARY? YES | | | |-<-- DOES THE 'WORD' MATCH THE NAME OF A MEMBER IN THE -->-| | NO SITE/USER EXECUTION LIBRARY? YES | | | ß ß DISPLAY EXECUTE ERROR MESSAGE

U

V

Note: If you press a PF/PA key instead of the ENTER key, the PF/PA key is evaluated before any other action is taken. See Chapter 11, “Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys” for additional information.

Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components 2-9

2.4 Correcting Invalid/Incomplete Commands

2.4 Correcting Invalid/Incomplete Commands This section describes how to handle erroneous line commands and primary commands. Notice that the following example contains an invalid line command (like INCX) and an incomplete primary command (like FETCH with no member name). Invalid/Incomplete Commands

7

FETCH & ATTACH

8

> > >

AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... ...... ============================= T O P ================= ===1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. ===2== PROGRAM-ID. INVLIST. DD=3== DD=4== INCX /WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH/

2.4.1.1 Handling Erroneous Line Commands Line commands are evaluated before primary commands. Also, all line commands are evaluated before any is executed. If one or more errors are found, a message is displayed in the data portion of the affected line(s) and halts processing. No changes to the data are applied; no line commands are executed; no primary commands are executed. The following example illustrates the type of message displayed when an invalid command is encountered. Invalid Line Command Message

7

FETCH & ATTACH

8

> > >

AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... ...... ============================= T O P ================= ===1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. ===2== PROGRAM-ID. INVLIST. DD=3== DD=4== INCX <<< ATX!1 INVALID COMMAND >>> -

To correct a line command, you can: 1. Overtype it with a valid command. (In the previous figure, you could overtype INCX with INCL.) When the ENTER key is pressed, any changes made to the displayed data are recorded and the line commands are executed.

2-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

2.4 Correcting Invalid/Incomplete Commands

2. Blank out the sequence number field using the DELETE key, the ERASE EOF key or the space bar. When the ENTER key is pressed, the line containing the error is restored, changes made to the displayed data are recorded and any other line commands are executed. 3. Use the RESET line command. RESET causes all outstanding line commands (both valid and invalid) and all changes made to the currently displayed data to be ignored.

2.4.1.2 Handling Erroneous Primary Commands After evaluating and executing any line commands that may have been entered, each primary command is evaluated before it is executed. If no errors are found, the commands are executed in the order in which they are encountered. If an invalid or incomplete command is found, the command containing the error and any subsequent commands are not executed. As illustrated in the following example a message is displayed and the cursor is positioned to the beginning of the command in error. (Valid commands preceding the command in error are executed, and are no longer displayed.) Sample Incomplete Primary Command

7

8

FETCH & ATTACH > CMD13 INSUFFICIENT NUMBER OF OPERANDS SPECIFIED > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... ...... ============================= T O P ================= ===1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. ===2== PROGRAM-ID. INVLIST. ===3== ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

You can now correct that command. You can also add, delete or change any command that is displayed. You can even insert commands ahead of the corrected command. When you press the ENTER key, the commands are executed.

2.4.1.3 Handling Invalid PF/PA Key Assignment If a PF/PA key assignment is invalid, the commands comprising the assignment, plus any others entered in the Command Area, are displayed. For example, if PF1 is assigned: SET DISPLAY XXX that command is displayed when you press PF1. (A message explaining the error is displayed on the Response Line.)

Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components 2-11

2.4 Correcting Invalid/Incomplete Commands

To continue execution, you can correct the displayed command and press the ENTER key. (You should correct the PF key assignment as soon as possible.) Note that if the length of the unexecuted commands exceeds the length of a line in the Command Area and the Command Area is comprised of: ■ One Line: unexecuted commands that do not fit on that line are truncated. ■ Two or Three Lines: unexecuted commands that do not fit on the first line are displayed on the second and subsequent lines.

2.4.1.4 Handling Confirmation Messages/Information Displays Some CA-Roscoe commands write confirmation messages (like SUBMIT) or display information (like ATTACH). When one of these commands is encountered in a series of commands, execution halts when that command is executed. To execute any remaining commands, press the ENTER key again.

2-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

2.5 Displaying Previously Executed Commands

2.5 Displaying Previously Executed Commands You can display a list of the most recently executed commands by issuing the command: STATUS COMMAND For example, assume that you have just executed the following series of commands: IMPORT DSN=ROSCOE.TEST(SAMPLE1) RENUMBER 1= 1= SAVE WIDGET EDIT /AAA/BBB/ UPDATE Q The following example illustrates the display that might be produced if you now entered the command STATUS COMMAND. STATUS COMMAND: Sample Display

7

8

_ > > ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. COMMAND BUFFER IS 256 BYTES AND CONTAINS 8 COMMANDS 1 STATUS COMMAND 2 UPDATE Q 3 EDIT /AAA/BBB/ 4 SAVE WIDGET 5 RENUMBER 1= 1= 6 IMPORT DSN=ROSCOE.TEST(SAMPLE1) 7 rpf-program-name 8 EXEC pfx.rpf-program-name

U

V

The executed commands are stored in a command buffer. (The size of the buffer is defined by site management.) When the contents of the buffer are displayed, it begins with the most recently executed command (like STATUS COMMAND), and includes all of the commands that are currently stored within the buffer area. This list of commands is useful when, for example, you want to redisplay or reexecute a previously executed command. To redisplay: ■ The last executed primary command, Monitor command, or RPF program: Use the plus sign (+), as in:

Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components 2-13

2.5 Displaying Previously Executed Commands

+

You then have the option of modifying or reexecuting the command by entering the minus sign (-). (See 2.2.1, “Using Reserved Characters” on page 2-5 for additional information.) For example, if the last executed command was SUBMIT ABC, you can use the plus sign to redisplay the command, modify it and then press the ENTER key to submit another job. ■ A series of commands: repeatedly execute the + to scroll back through the previous commands. ■ A specific command: Specify a value with the +, where the value is the relative number of the previously executed command. If you do not remember the position of the command in a command series, enter STATUS COMMAND to display a list of the most recently executed commands. Using the series of commands shown in the previous figure, you can redisplay the IMPORT command by entering: +6 Optionally, you can display a maximum of three previously executed commands, as in: +6,3

2-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

2.6 Eliminating Duplicate Commands

|

2.6 Eliminating Duplicate Commands

| | | |

Optionally, you can indicate to CA-Roscoe to save or not save the command in the command recall buffer if the command is equal to the previous command. This option called "DUPCR" can be set as a system wide variable and defaults that duplicate commands will always be saved.

|

Users can designate that duplicate commands not be saved by entering:

|

SET DUPCR NO

|

To save duplicate commands, enter:

|

SET DUPCR YES

Chapter 2. Commands and Command Components 2-15

2-16 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition This chapter describes how to: ■ Change the language character set you are using. ■ Control uppercase/lowercase character recognition and treatment. ■ Control the translation of non-displayable characters.

Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition 3-1

3.1 Defining the Language Character Set

3.1 Defining the Language Character Set As distributed, it is assumed that you will be entering, editing and displaying data that conforms to the U.S. English character set. (U.S. English characters include uppercase A through Z, lowercase a through z, plus the symbols @, # and $.) If the terminals at your site support a different language character set, your site management will have established that language character set as the default. If your site management has designated that multiple character sets may be used, you will be told which ones are supported. To change from one character set to another, you can use either: ■ The SET CHARSET command, or ■ The modifiable displays provided by the STATUS SESSION and STATUS AWS commands.

3-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

3.2 Controlling Character Recognition and Treatment

3.2 Controlling Character Recognition and Treatment You can use the SET MODE command or the modifiable screen provided by the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS command to define how CA-Roscoe is to recognize and translate: ■ Data that you enter or edit in an AWS. ■ Character strings specified with commands such as EDIT, FIRST, INCL, and so on.

3.2.1 Entering and Editing Data To control character translation, you can set the mode to: BASIC

All alphabetic data that you enter or edit will be translated to uppercase characters. This is normally the default when you sign on.

XTENDED

All alphabetic data that you enter or edit will be retained exactly as you entered it (it can contain a combination of uppercase and lowercase characters).

STANDARD

Resets the translation mode to your company's default.

Data that is in an AWS may be retranslated using a variety of primary or line commands. See Chapter 19, “AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS” for additional information.

3.2.2 Specifying Character Strings With Commands The current translation mode setting also affects how characters strings specified with CA-Roscoe commands are treated. For example, if you enter the command: first division and the current setting is: ■ BASIC - the string is treated as though it was entered in all uppercase characters (the search is for the first occurrence of the string DIVISION). ■ XTENDED - the string is not translated (the search is for the string division).

Chapter 3. Controlling Character Recognition 3-3

3.3 Controlling Non-Displayable Character Translation

3.3 Controlling Non-Displayable Character Translation You can also use the SET MODE command to define how CA-Roscoe is to translate non-displayable characters. By default, non-displayable characters are translated to blanks when data on the same line is typed or changed. To control this translation, you can set the mode to: NOPRESERVE

Non-displayable characters will be translated to blanks when other data on the same line is typed. This is the default when you sign on.

PRESERVE

Non-displayable characters will not be translated to blanks when other data on the same line is typed.

3-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries This chapter describes how you can change column boundaries for: ■ The execution of a single command, or ■ The remainder of your terminal session. When you alter the boundaries for your session, you can use: – The modifiable displays provided by the STATUS DISPLAY command and STATUS AWS commands, or – The SET BOUNDS primary command, or – The BOUNDS line command, when an AWS is attached. By default, the operation of primary and line commands that edit, locate or shift data extends the full width of the line. Thus, if you enter: FIRST PROCEDURE the full width of every line is searched until either: 1) the string is found, or 2) the end of the data or the search limit is reached.

Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries 4-1

4.1 Setting Temporary Boundaries

4.1 Setting Temporary Boundaries You can change the default boundaries for the execution of a single primary command. To do so, specify the appropriate column numbers with the command. For example, FIRST 2= 3= FILLER displays the first occurrence of FILLER within columns 20 through 30 of the currently attached data. After the command is executed, the previously established or default boundaries are reestablished. Note: Once a character string has been specified with the commands EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT and PREV, the string is remembered until you change it. For example, if you issued the command: FIRST FILLER and you now want to find the next occurrence of the same string within columns 50 through 70, all you need enter is: NEXT 5= 7= The display will begin with the next line containing FILLER within columns 50 and 70 and the previously established or default boundaries are reestablished.

4-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

4.2 Setting Session Boundaries

4.2 Setting Session Boundaries To change column boundaries for your terminal session, you can use: ■ The modifiable display produced by the STATUS DISPLAY command, ■ The SET BOUNDS command or ■ The BOUNDS line command (when an AWS is attached). Once set, they will remain in effect until you change them or end your session.

4.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS Both STATUS DISPLAY and STATUS AWS provide modifiable screens which can be used to change column boundaries.

4.2.1.1 When to Use STATUS DISPLAY The modifiable screen provided by STATUS DISPLAY contains the display formats used when the active AWS, a data set object, job output file or library member is attached. To change a column boundary, position the cursor to the appropriate LEFT BOUNDS or RIGHT BOUNDS field. Then, overtype the displayed value with the appropriate column number. For example, suppose the boundary settings for the active AWS are 10 and 72. To changes these values to 1 and 80, respectively, type 1 in the LEFT BOUNDS field, and then position the cursor to the RIGHT BOUNDS field and type 80 there. (When STATUS DISPLAY is issued, the cursor is automatically placed in the LEFT BOUNDS field for AWS.) The next time you attach the contents of the active AWS, your column boundaries will be set to 1 and 80.

4.2.1.2 When to Use STATUS AWS When you are working with multiple AWSs, use the STATUS AWS command to display information about the active, and all existing, AWSs that you are using. In addition to the current display format information, this modifiable display provides information about all attributes associated with the AWSs. See Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information” for details.

Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries 4-3

4.2 Setting Session Boundaries

4.2.2 Using the SET BOUNDS Command To change column boundaries: ■ For the currently attached data: Enter the SET BOUNDS command with the appropriate left and right column boundary values, as in: SET BOUNDS 5= 8= In this example, the action of subsequent commands that edit, locate and shift data affect only the contents of columns 50 through 80. ■ For a particular type of attached data: Include the AWS, DSN, JOB, or LIB keyword(s) with the SET BOUNDS commands. In the following example, the first SET BOUNDS command changes the boundaries for data in the active AWS or an attached library member; the second command changes the boundaries for an attached data set object: SET BOUNDS AWS LIB 1 8= SET BOUNDS DSN 2== 25= To reset column boundaries: ■ For the currently attached data, enter: SET BOUNDS or SET BOUNDS OFF ■ For data that is not currently attached, you must include the appropriate keyword, as in: SET BOUNDS LIB OFF To set or reset the column boundaries for all forms of attached data, use the ALL keyword with the command, as in: SET BOUNDS ALL 9= 12= or SET BOUNDS ALL OFF To illustrate the use of temporary and session boundaries, assume you have attached an AWS and are currently editing its contents. If you enter the commands: SET BOUNDS 1= 5= & EDIT /ABC/XYZ/ FILL 1 6 /XXXXXX/ & FIRST AAA then SET BOUNDS sets the boundaries to columns 10 through 50. EDIT changes every occurrence of ABC within those columns to XYZ. FILL temporarily overrides the boundaries so that the string XXXXXX can be placed in columns 1 through 6. Finally, FIRST uses the session boundaries (columns 10 through 50) to locate the first occurrence of the string AAA.

4-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

4.2 Setting Session Boundaries

4.2.3 Using the BOUNDS Line Command When setting column boundaries for the active AWS, you can use the BOUNDS line command. To do this, ■ Type BOUNDS in the sequence number field of a line. ■ Then place the special characters < and > in the data portion of the same line at the positions where the boundaries are to be set. The following example shows how you would set the boundaries to columns 9 and 43, respectively. BOUNDS Line Command: Setting Column Boundaries

7

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= BOUNDS ID ===2== PROGRAM-ID.

8

INVLIST.

BOUNDS Line Command: Resulting Column Boundaries

7

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4..>.+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= ===1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. ===2== PROGRAM-ID. INVLIST. ===3== ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

8

When positioning the characters < and >: ■ If the desired location contains data, overtype the character with the appropriate special character. The character will be redisplayed when the command is executed. ■ If no data appear in the appropriate location (the character is to be placed on a blank line or after the last character of a line containing data), use the space bar to position to the appropriate location. (The data in the Execution Area is evaluated prior to the execution of any line command and null spaces are deleted.) The Scale Line in the previous example reflects the designated column boundary locations (the < and > are displayed in the appropriate positions on the Scale Line). When the display is invoked by SET DISPLAY NUMX, the Scale Line always reflects the column boundaries, whether they are set by the SET BOUNDS primary command or the BOUNDS line command.

Chapter 4. Defining Column Boundaries 4-5

4-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format This chapter describes how you can change: ■ The display margins either temporarily or for the terminal session. ■ The sequence number display. ■ The format in which the data are displayed (for example, character format only, or character and its hexadecimal representation).

Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format 5-1

5.1 General Comments About Modifying the Display Format

5.1 General Comments About Modifying the Display Format You can use the SET DISPLAY command or the modifiable screen provided by the STATUS DISPLAY command to perform any of these changes. (When working with one or more AWSs, you can also use the modifiable display provided by the STATUS AWS command.) When using the SET DISPLAY command, you can include one or more changes with the command. For example, you could enter: SET DISPLAY 1= 5= SET DISPLAY NUMX SET DISPLAY CHAR

(to change display margins) (to change sequence number display) (to change data format display)

or SET DISPLAY 1= 5= NUMX CHAR Subsequent sections describe how to change each specific display format component.

5-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

5.2 Defining Display Margins

5.2 Defining Display Margins By default, the display margins begin with column one and extend the width of the terminal screen. You can change these display margins: 1) temporarily, or 2) for the remainder of your session. When changing the display margins: ■ The margin values must be between 1 and the maximum line length (for example, 255 for an AWS, library member or job output; the LRECL length for a data set object). ■ The value of the right margin must be equal to or greater than the value of the left margin. The resulting display begins with the right margin and continues until the left margin or the maximum width of the screen is filled.

5.2.1 Setting Temporary Margins You can temporarily change the display margins by: 1. Pressing the PF key to which the SCROLL RIGHT or SCROLL LEFT function is assigned, or 2. Replacing either or both of the values in the COLS field on the System Information Line, where the first value identifies the left margin and the second field identifies the right margin. When you specify a new margin setting, leading zeros are not required; if they are omitted, eliminate the old value so that the field contains only your new margin setting. These margins apply only to what is currently attached and remain in effect until the attachment is changed. For example, if an AWS is currently attached and you press the PF key to which SCROLL RIGHT is assigned, the new display margins will: ■ Remain in effect while the current AWS contents is displayed. ■ Revert to the previous setting when you: – Delete or replace the contents of this AWS. The margins revert to the previously established margins.

Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format 5-3

5.2 Defining Display Margins

– Attach a data set object, job or library member. The margins revert to the: 1) previous setting if you are reattaching, or 2) default setting if the designated data was not previously attached. Note: Operands of the search-related commands (such as FIRST or INCL), allow you to designate the screen positioning that is to occur when a match is found. Depending on the positioning requested through the command, your display margins may change when one of these commands is executed.

5.2.2 Setting Session Margins You can change the display margins for the remainder of your session by issuing the SET DISPLAY command or changing the modifiable screen provided by the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS command.

5.2.2.1 Using the STATUS DISPLAY and STATUS AWS Display Display margins can be changed using the modifiable screen provided by the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS command.

5.2.2.2 When to Use STATUS DISPLAY The modifiable screen provided by STATUS DISPLAY contains the display formats used when the active AWS, a data set object, job output file or library member is attached. To change a display margin, position the cursor to the appropriate SET DISPLAY LEFT or SET DISPLAY RIGHT field. Then, overtype the displayed value with the appropriate column number. For example, assume the display margins for the active AWS are 10 and 50. To change these values to 1 and 72, respectively, type 1 in the SET DISPLAY LEFT field and type 1; then position the cursor to the SET DISPLAY RIGHT field and type 72. When you reattach the active AWS, your display margins will be set to 1 and 72.

5.2.2.3 When to Use STATUS AWS When you are working with multiple AWSs, use the STATUS AWS command display information about the active, and all existing, AWSs that you are using. In addition to the current display format information, this modifiable display provides information about all attributes associated with the AWSs. See Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information” for details.

5-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

5.2 Defining Display Margins

5.2.3 Using the SET DISPLAY Command The SET DISPLAY command can be used to: ■ Change both the left and right margins: Specify two numeric values with the command, as in: SET DISPLAY 1= 5= ■ Change only the left display margin: Specify a single numeric value, as in: SET DISPLAY 1= The display will begin with column ten and extend the width of the terminal screen. ■ Change only the right display margin: Specify a numeric value prefixed with a comma: SET DISPLAY ,9= The display will end with column 90 and show as much of the preceding data as will fit within the width of the line. ■ Reset the display margins to begin with the column 1: SET DISPLAY All of the preceding examples affect the data that is currently displayed. To set display margins for data that is not currently displayed, include the keyword ALL or any combination of the keywords AWS, DSN, JOB or LIB. For example, to set all display margins to 50 through 80, you would enter: SET DISPLAY ALL 5= 8= If you then specified, SET DISPLAY AWS LIB 7 72 the display margins in effect when you attach the active AWS or a library member will be set to columns 7 through 72; while the display margins for job output and data set objects will remain set at columns 50 through 80.

Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format 5-5

5.3 Defining Sequence Number Display

5.3 Defining Sequence Number Display You can control the display of sequence numbers using: ■ The modifiable screen provided by the STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS command. ■ The SET DISPLAY command. In all cases, specify the keywords NUM, NUMX, NONUM and NUM2, with: NUM

Each line begins with a six digit protected sequence number field that is followed by data.

NUMX

Each line begins with a six digit unprotected sequence number field that is followed by data. NUMX must be in effect if you want to use line commands to edit the contents of the active AWS.

NONUM

Each line contains only data; no sequence numbers are displayed.

NUM2

Two lines are displayed for each data line. The first line contains the six digit protected sequence number field; the second line contains only data.

Notes: ■ If you include the FLIP operand when you assign SET DISPLAY to a PF key, you can bounce the display between sequence number display settings. For example, if you assign PF2 the value: LET PF2 = 'SET DISPLAY FLIP NONUM NUMX' The display format will change every time you press PF2. ■ You can use ALL or any combination of the keywords AWS, DSN, JOB and LIB to qualify the scope of the SET DISPLAY command. For example, to enable the use of line commands when editing the active AWS and to prohibit the display of sequence numbers with all other forms of attached data, you would enter: SET DISPLAY AWS NUMX DSN JOB LIB NONUM Since the display margins and data display operands are not included with these commands, those that are currently in effect will remain unchanged.

5-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

5.4 Defining Data Display

5.4 Defining Data Display By default, data are displayed in its character format. If the data contain non-printable characters, they are not displayed. You can change the data display format to have the data displayed in both its character format and its hexadecimal representation by: ■ Changing the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY or STATUS AWS screen by overtyping the appropriate field with either CHAR or HEX. ■ Specifying the HEX or CHAR operand with the SET DISPLAY command. The following example illustrates the display before issuing the SET DISPLAY HEX command. Character Display

7

SET DISPLAY HEX_ > > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 > <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5. ...... ============================= T O P =============== ===1== HOWARD THOMAS W ===2== SMITHSON SALLY S ===3== WALTERS JOHN =============================== B O T T O M ==============

8

The following example illustrates the display that results after issuing the command SET DISPLAY HEX. (SET DISPLAY CHAR returns the data to character format.) Character and Hex Display

7

> > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 > <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5. ...... ============================= T O P =============== ===1== HOWARD THOMAS W 4CDECDC4444444ECDDCE4444E4! =866194=======386412====6=1 --------------------------------------------------===2== SMITHSOM SALLY S 4EDCECEDD44444ECDDE44444E4! =24938265=====21338=====2=2 --------------------------------------------------===3== WALTERS JOHN 4ECDECDE444444DDCD44444444! =6133592======1685======!=1 ---------------------------------------------------

8

Chapter 5. Defining the Display Format 5-7

5.4 Defining Data Display

The highlighted areas in the previous example indicate the hexadecimal representation of the data shown in the upper screen. Notice that columns 27 and 29 contain data that is not displayable or modifiable in its character format. When data are displayed in HEX format, the resulting data are: ■ Modifiable when displaying the contents of the active AWS. You can modify: – Printable characters on the character line. (Non-printable characters are shown as blanks, which are not modifiable.) To ensure your changes are properly applied, no character translation occurs when SET DISPLAY HEX is in effect. This means that even if you have specified SET MODE BASIC, lowercase characters will not be translated to uppercase characters. – Hexadecimal representation on the two vertical hexadecimal lines. These lines are always modifiable. Since there can be no confusion about the hexadecimal representation of a character, lowercase characters are translated to uppercase when SET MODE BASIC is in effect. ■

Not modifiable when a library member, job output file or data set object is displayed.

Notes: ■ If you include the FLIP operand when you assign SET DISPLAY to a PF key, you can bounce the display between its character and hexadecimal formats. For example, if you assign PF1 the value: LET PF1 = 'SET DISPLAY FLIP CHAR' The display format will change every time you press PF1. ■ As with the other forms of SET DISPLAY, you can use the ALL, AWS, DSN, JOB and LIB keywords to qualify the scope of the command. These operands are useful when you want to designate the data display format for data that is not currently attached.

5-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information This chapter describes how you can: ■ ■ ■ ■

Display Display Display Display

and change screen display and column boundary settings. and change session attributes. site-specified system attributes. the current time and date.

At any time during your session, you can display information about the attributes that are currently in effect. For example, to display the current column search boundaries and display margins, you would enter: STATUS DISPLAY You can change most of the session attributes using either modifiable displays or primary commands. (The section, 6.5, “Synopsis of Session Attributes” on page 6-15 contains a list of the primary commands, associated STATUS displays and a brief description of the attributes affected.) Changing these attributes allows you to customize your session to meet your own unique needs. If you find that you always want certain attributes to be in effect, you can include the appropriate primary commands in a sign-on program. (A sign-on program is executed every time you sign on to CA-Roscoe or split the screen. See Chapter 10, “Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe” for additional information.) Note: For information about displaying and changing AWS attributes, see Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information.”

Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information 6-1

6.1 Displaying/Changing Display and Boundary Settings

6.1 Displaying/Changing Display and Boundary Settings To see information about the display formats and column boundaries that are currently in effect, enter the command: STATUS DISPLAY This display is modifiable. To produce a non-modifiable display, include the LIST operand with the command, as in: STATUS DISPLAY LIST The following example illustrates the type of information provided by STATUS DISPLAY. STATUS DISPLAY Command: Sample Display

7

> > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===79 A >....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6 ROSCOE BOUNDS/DISPLAY STATUS

AWS: LIB: JOB: DSN: MODE

BOUNDS LEFT RIGHT 1 8= 1 8= 1 255 1 32767

SET DISPLAY LEFT RIGHT 1 72 1 72 1 72 1 72

===> BASIC

CURRENT DISPLAY LEFT RIGHT 1 72 1 72 1 72 1 72

CURSOR

NUMX NUM NUM NUM

CHAR CHAR CHAR CHAR

8

CJUST CJUST CJUST CJUST

===> INIT

U

V

Note: STATUS DISPLAY provides information about the active AWS. When working with one or more AWSs, use the STATUS AWS command to display and change the display formats and column boundaries or all existing AWSs. See Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information” on page 17-1 for additional information. See Chapter 5, “Defining the Display Format” for information.

6-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

6.1 Displaying/Changing Display and Boundary Settings

BOUNDS

Contains: Current or default left and right column boundary settings to be used by any command that locates, edits or shifts data. Change: Overtype field BOUNDS LEFT or RIGHT with appropriate column number; use SET BOUNDS command. (If an AWS is attached, the STATUS AWS command or BOUNDS line command may be used.) See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for information.

SET DISPLAY Contains: Left and right display margins established by default, the last executed SET DISPLAY command, or the last change to this display. Change: Overtype SET DISPLAY LEFT or RIGHT with appropriate column number(s); use SET DISPLAY command. (If an AWS is attached, the STATUS AWS command can be used.) CURRENT DISPLAY Contains: Left and right display margins temporarily set by the last command locating data outside of the SET DISPLAY boundaries or by the values typed in the COLS field. Change: This field is not modifiable. num

Contains: Current or default sequence number display setting. Change: Overtype field with NUM, NUMX, NUM2 or NONUM; use SET DISPLAY command. (If an AWS is attached, the STATUS AWS command can be used.)

char

Contains: Current or default data display mode. Change: Overtype field with CHAR or HEX; use SET DISPLAY command. (If an AWS is attached, the STATUS AWS command can be used.)

cjust

Contains: Current or default screen positioning to occur as a result of executing a FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL, or EXCL primary command. Change: Overtype field with CENTERED, LOCKED, JUSTIFIED or CJUSTIFIED; use SET SEARCH command. (If an AWS is attached, the STATUS AWS command can be used.)

MODE

Contains: Current or default character translation mode. Change: Overtype field with BASIC, XTENDED or STANDARD; use SET MODE command. (If an AWS is attached, the STATUS AWS command can be used.)

CURSOR

Contains: Current or default location at which the cursor is positioned after a command is executed. Change: Overtype field with HOME, INIT or DATA; use SET CURSOR command.

Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information 6-3

6.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes

6.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes To display information about your terminal session, enter the command: STATUS SESSION To begin the display with the line containing a specific attribute, include the first one to four characters of the field name. For example, to begin the display with the line containing DATE FMT, you could enter: STATUS STATUS STATUS STATUS

SESSION SESSION SESSION SESSION

D or DA or DAT or DATE

You can reposition the display by: ■ Using PF keys to scroll the display forward or backward. ■ Placing the cursor at the line containing the desired field and pressing the PF key assigned to forward or backward scrolling. (To do this, the SCRL field on the System Information Line must be set to CSR.) The resulting display begins with the line at which the cursor was positioned. Finally, you can produce a non-modifiable display by including the LIST operand with the command, as in: STATUS SESSION LIST Unless noted otherwise, an attribute shown in the modifiable display can be changed using the appropriate SET command or by overtyping the field. (Note that some of the attributes have site-defined default and maximum values. To display these values, use the STATUS SYSTEM command.)

6-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

6.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes

The following example illustrates the type of information provided by the STATUS SESSION command at a 43-line terminal. STATUS SESSION Command Display

| | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |

7 > APPLID(A=4IROS3)

USER(PH,DORDA=2) L PENDING > AWS(PH.DUPCR) SCRL CSR COLS ====1 ===79 PAU(PH.RAMB) A3 >....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.. ROSCOE SESSION STATUS AUTOFF AUTOINSERT CHAR SET CMD LINE CURREC DELIMITER DSNCNT DSNRECALL EDITCHNG EXECPFX

==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==>

24= ON 1 OFF US ENGLISH 3 1 N/A & 1===== NONE OFF DFLT

LANGUAGE MASTER MAXREC MONTRAP PFKDELIM RPSNOTIFY SEARCH SEND SPLIT STMTCNT TLOCK

==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==>

ENGLISH NONE NONE ON / OFF NODBCS ALL CSR 4=96 3= OFF

U ATTACH

ATTACH AUTOINDENT AWS TRANS CHAR TRANS COPYDEST DATE FMT DSNCMLSTL DSNEMPTY DUPCR ESCAPE HELPPFX JOBCNT

==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==>

8

PAUSE OFF N B (NONE) AMERICAN SHORT ERROR OFF YES .. DFLT DFLT 1====

MONLEVEL ==> ERROR MSGLEVEL ==> INFO RPSDEST ==> USPRNCPK SAVE ATTR ==> SHARED SEA MODE ==> NOMIX SIGNON ==> PH.SIGX STATS ==> ON SUBMIT ==> 8= INC SEQ LOGOFF WRITECNT ==> 5=

V Contains: Current or default setting designating whether execution is to pause after an ATTACH command is executed. Change: Overtype field with PAUSE or NOPAUSE; use SET ATTACH command.

AUTOFF

Contains: Two fields, where the first field shows the current number of minutes of inactivity that is allowed before the terminal is automatically signed off, and the second field shows the status of the automatic sign-off facility. Change: Overtype the first field with a numeric value not exceeding your site maximum and the second field with ON or OFF; use SET AUTOFF command. (STATUS SYSTEM shows the default and maximum values.)

Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information 6-5

6.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes

AUTOINDENT

Contains: Current or default setting indicating whether the cursor is to be automatically positioned under the first character of the preceding data line when lines are inserted through the INPUT primary command, the I or IB line command or the PF key to which the INPUT function is assigned. Change: Overtype the field with ON or OFF; use SET AUTOINDENT command.

AUTOINSERT

Contains: Current or default setting indicating the number of data entry lines to be inserted when all data entry lines inserted by the I or IB line command have been filled. Change: When inactive, overtype first field with numeric value indicating the number of lines to be inserted. When active, overtype first field with numeric value or OFF.

| | | |

AWS TRANS

| |

Contains: Current or default setting of the AWS translate parameter which determines whether non-displayable characters are to be translated to blanks when other data on the same line is entered or changed. Change: Overtype fields with N, or P; use SET MODE PRESERVE.

CHAR SET

Contains: Language character code representing the data that the user can enter and display at the terminal. Change: Overtype field with a language code defined at your site; use SET CHARSET command. (If an AWS is attached, the STATUS AWS command can be used.)

| |

CHAR TRANS

| |

Contains: Current or default setting of the character set translate options. Change: Overtype field with B(asic), X(tended) or S(tandard); use SET MODE B/X command.

CMD LINE

Contains: Two fields showing the current or default number of lines comprising the Command Area in: 1) the current presentation area, and 2) each presentation area when the screen is next split. Change: Overtype field(s) with a numeric value between 1 and 3; use SET CMDLINES command.

COPYDEST

Contains: Name of the AWS that is to receive data copied through :C or (NONE) if no AWS has been designated. Change: Overtype field with the name of an existing AWS; use the SET COPYDEST command.

CURREC

6-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Contains: Total number of lines that you have saved in the library, or N/A if you have no library line limit (for example, MAXREC is NONE).

6.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes

Change: This field is not modifiable. DATE FMT

Contains: Two fields, where the first field shows the current or default format used when dates are displayed at the terminal, and the second field shows whether the year will be displayed as two or four digits. Change: Overtype the first field with AMERICAN, EUROPEAN or INTERNATIONAL, and the second field with SHORT or LONG; use SET DATEFORM command. (STATUS SYSTEM shows the default values).

DELIMITER

Contains: Current or default special character used to separate (for example, delimit) commands when multiple commands are typed in the Command Area. Change: Overtype field with any special character or OFF; use SET command.

DSNCMLST

Contains: Current or default setting designating the type of messages that are to be directed to the member ZZZZZCMP following COMPRESS requests. Change: Overtype field with INFO or ERROR; use SET DSNCMLST.

DSNCNT

Contains: Current or default number of lines to be searched within an attached data set object. Change: Overtype field with MAX or a numeric value indicating the number of lines to be searched; use SET DSNCNT command. (STATUS SYSTEM shows the default and maximum values.)

DSNEMPTY

Contains: Current or default setting designating whether the Data Set Facility is to attempt to read data sets whose DSCB indicates that they are empty. Change: Overtype field with ON or OFF; use SET DSNEMPTY command.

DSNRECALL

Contains: Current or default setting designating the action to be taken when an operation is to be performed on data sets migrated by the IBM program product DFHSM. Change: Overtype field with WAIT, NOWAIT or NONE; use SET DSNRECALL command.

| |

DUPCR

| |

Contains: Current or default setting of the retain duplicate command option. Change: Overtype field with three character field "YES" or "NO "; use the SET DUPCR command.

EDITCHNG

Contains: Current or default setting indicating whether the sequence number field of lines affected by an edit operation is to contain a change indicator.

Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information 6-7

6.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes

Change: Overtype field with ON or OFF; use SET EDITCHNG command. ESCAPE

Contains: Current or default escape character string used to exit an application executing under ETSO. Change: Overtype field with a one- to three-character string; use SET ESCAPE command.

EXECPFX

Contains: Current or default RPF execution library setting(s). Change: Overtype field(s) with a prefix, DFLT or NONE; use SET EXECPFX command.

HELPPFX

Contains: Current or default HELP library setting(s). Change: Overtype field(s) with a prefix, DFLT or NONE; use SET HELPPFX command.

JOBCNT

Contains: Current or default number of lines to be searched within an attached job output. Change: Overtype field with MAX or a numeric value not exceeding your site-defined maximum; use SET JOBCNT command. (STATUS SYSTEM shows the default and maximum values.)

LANGUAGE

Contains: Language used for displayed messages and HELP screens. Change: This field is not modifiable.

MASTER

Contains: Current or default status of CA-Librarian -INC statement expansion. It shows NONE if this facility is not active and no master file is in effect, or ON or OFF and master file name if this facility is active. Change: Overtype first field with ON or OFF and second field with name of CA-Librarian master file (the name may be changed but not deleted); use SET MASTER command.

MAXREC

Contains: Maximum number of lines you may save in the library, or NONE if there is no limit. Change: This field is not modifiable.

MONLEVEL

Contains: Current or default setting designating whether Monitor command informational messages are to be displayed. Change: Overtype field with INFO or ERROR; use SET MONLEVEL command.

MONTRAP

Contains: Current or default setting designating whether Monitor command error messages and prompts are to be displayed. Change: Overtype field with ON or OFF; use SET MONTRAP command.

6-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

6.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes

MSGLEVEL

Contains: Current or default setting designating whether primary command informational messages are to be displayed. Change: Overtype field with INFO or ERROR; use SET MSGLEVEL command.

PFKDELIM

Contains: Default or current special character used to separate (for example, delimit) commands when multiple commands are assigned to a PF key. Change: Overtype field with any special character; use SET PFKDELIM command.

RPSDEST

Contains: Current or default printing location that is to be used when the PRINT command is issued, or NO DFLT

if no default location is assigned to this terminal, or

NOT ACT

if RPS is not currently active, or

NOT AUTH

if this terminal is not authorized to use RPS, or

NOT AVAL

if information cannot be obtained due to site or RPS restrictions.

Change: Overtype field with any system or 328x-type printer location; use SET RPSDEST command. (Use the DEST operand of the PRINT command to change the printing location for a single execution of the command.) RPSNOTIFY

Contains: Default or current setting designating whether messages are to be displayed when PRINT requests are printed. Change: Overtype field with ON or OFF; use SET RPSNOTIFY command.

SAVE ATTR

Contains: Current or default access attribute setting used when you create (for example, SAVE) a library member. Change: Overtype field with SHARED or RESTRICTED; use SET SAVEATTR command.

SEARCH

Contains: Current or default setting designating the DBCS format status. Change: Overtype field with DBCS or NODBCS; use SET SEARCH command.

| | |

SEA MODE

Contains: Current or default setting of the search mode. Change: Overtype field with 5-character "MIX " or "NOMIX"; use SET MODE MIX/NOMIX command.

Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information 6-9

6.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes

SEND

Contains: Current or default setting controlling the display of received SEND messages. Change: Overtype field with ALL, OPER or NONE; use SET SEND command.

SIGNON

Contains: Current user sign-on RPF. Change: Overtype field with the correct RPF name.

SPLIT

Contains: Current or default split screen setting. Change: Overtype field with CSR, FULL, or PART; use SET SPLIT command.

STATS

Contains: Current or default setting indicating whether SPF-type directory information is to be added/updated to the PDS directory entry for a member. Change: Overtype field with ON, ASIS or OFF; use SET STATS command.

STMTCNT

Contains: Current or default RPF program loop limit (the number of RPF statements that can be executed without an intervening read/write operation). Change: Overtype field with MAX, RESET or a numeric value not exceeding 32760; use SET STMTCNT command. (STATUS SYSTEM shows the default and maximum values.)

SUBMIT

Contains: Three fields showing the current or default setting indicating the: 1) width of the data to be submitted, 2) expansion of embedded +INC statements, and 3) inclusion of sequence numbers. Change: Overtype the first field with CARD, PRT, WIDE or a numeric value between 8 and 254, the second field with INCLUDE or NOINCLUDE, and the third field with SEQ or NOSEQ; use SET SUBMIT command.

6-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

6.2 Displaying/Changing Session Attributes

TLOCK

Contains: Three fields showing: 1) number of minutes of inactivity allowed before the Terminal Lock screen is displayed, 2) current or default status of the automatic terminal lock facility, and 3) whether OFF may be entered from the Terminal Lock screen. Change: Overtype the first field with a numeric value not exceeding your site-defined maximum, the second field with ON or OFF, and the third field with LOGOFF or NOLOG; use SET TLOCK command. The NOW operand may only be used with SET TLOCK. (STATUS SYSTEM shows the default and maximum values.)

WRITECNT

Contains: Current or default RPF program terminal write limit (the number of terminal writes that can be executed without an intervening read). Change: Overtype field with numeric value not exceeding 32760; use SET WRITECNT command.

Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information 6-11

6.3 Display Site-Defined Attribute Values

6.3 Display Site-Defined Attribute Values To produce a non-modifiable display containing site-defined default and maximum values for specific commands, enter the command: STATUS SYSTEM The following example illustrates the resulting display. STATUS SYSTEM Command: Sample Display

7

8

_ > > ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. ROSCOE SYSTEM STATUS AUTOFF AUTOFF DEFAULT AUTOFF MAXIMUM

===> ON ===> 9= ===> 24=

AUTTLOCK ===> OFF AUTTLOCK DEFAULT ===> 5 AUTTLOCK MAXIMUM ===> 144=

JOBCNT DEFAULT JOBCNT MAXIMUM

===> 999999 ===> 999999

DSNCNT DEFAULT DSNCNT MAXIMUM

DATE FORMAT

===> AMERICAN

SHORT

STMTCNT DEFAULT STMTCNT MAXIMUM

===> 4=96 ===> 3276=

RCSESCPF RCSESCCH

===> 1===== ===> 999999

===> PF12 ===> :

U

V

AUTOFF

Status of the automatic sign-off facility.

AUTOFF DEFAULT

Site-defined default time period before the terminal is signed off.

AUTOFF MAXIMUM

Maximum value that can be specified with the SET AUTOFF command.

AUTTLOCK

Status of automatic terminal lock facility.

AUTTLOCK DEFAULT

Site-defined default time period before the Terminal Lock screen is displayed.

AUTTLOCK MAXIMUM

Maximum value that can be specified with the SET TLOCK command.

6-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

6.3 Display Site-Defined Attribute Values

DATE FORMAT

Two position field showing: 1. Format for dates displayed at the terminal, and 2. Code indicating the number of digits used to represent the year.

DSNCNT DEFAULT

Site-defined number of lines to be searched within a data set object if no value is specified with a search-related command.

DSNCNT MAXIMUM

Maximum value that can be specified with the SET DSNCNT command.

JOBCNT DEFAULT

Site-defined number of lines to be searched within a job if no value is specified with a search-related command.

JOBCNT MAXIMUM

Maximum value that can be specified with the SET JOBCNT command.

RCSESCCH

Site-defined special character used to prefix a one-character command that is to be used to direct input to RCS.

RCSESCPF

Site-defined PF key that is to be used to indicate direct input to RCS.

STMTCNT DEFAULT

Site-defined default number of RPF statements that can be executed without an intervening read/write operation.

STMTCNT MAXIMUM

The maximum value that can be specified with the SET STMTCNT command.

Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information 6-13

6.4 Display Time and Date

6.4 Display Time and Date At any time during your session you can issue the TIME command. The following example shows the command itself, and the next example illustrates the information that is provided by this command. TIME Command

7 TIME

8

> > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ============================= T O P ============= =====1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION

TIME Command: Sample Display

7

> > ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.. =9/=6/88 15.3=.27 - ELAPSED =1:29:4= - CPU .34=

8

The information written to the terminal includes: ■ ■ ■ ■

The The The The

current date, current time, elapsed time of your session, and amount of CPU time for for your session.

After viewing this information, you can reattach the data you were working with, or issue any other CA-Roscoe command.

6-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

6.5 Synopsis of Session Attributes

6.5 Synopsis of Session Attributes This table identifies: 1) the primary commands you can use to change your session attributes, 2) the form of the STATUS command that produces the appropriate modifiable display, and 3) a brief description of each attribute involved. Command

Status Command

Attribute Affected

SET

SESSION

Special character used as command delimiter.

SET ATTACH

SESSION

Pausing of command execution after an ATTACH command is executed.

SET AUTOFF

SESSION

Automatic sign-off facility control.

SET AUTOINDENT

SESSION

Position of cursor when lines are inserted through the INPUT command, I or IB line command, or the PF key assigned to the INPUT function.

SET AUTOINSERT

SESSION

Number of lines to be inserted when lines inserted by I or IB line command are filled.

SET AWSDSPLY

AWS

Data protection and highlighting attributes for active AWS.

SET BOUNDS

DISPLAY and AWS

Default column boundaries to be used with commands that edit, locate and shift data.

SET CHARSET

SESSION and AWS

Language character set representing data user can enter and display.

SET CMDLINES

SESSION

Number of lines comprising the Command Area of the screen.

SET COPYDEST

SESSION

Name of the AWS that is to receive data copied through :C.

SET CURSOR

DISPLAY

Location at which the cursor is positioned after a command executes.

SET DATEFORM

SESSION

Format of dates displayed at the terminal.

SET DISPLAY

DISPLAY and AWS

Display format including: 1) display margins, 2) sequence number display and 3) form in which data are to be displayed.

Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information 6-15

6.5 Synopsis of Session Attributes

| | |

Command

Status Command

Attribute Affected

SET DSNCMLST

SESSION

Type of messages to be directed to the library member ZZZZZCMP when a COMPRESS request is executed.

SET DSNCNT

SESSION

Default number of lines to be searched within a data set object.

SET DSNEMPTY

SESSION

Data Set Facility attempts to read data sets whose DSCB indicate they are empty.

SET DSNRECALL

SESSION

Action to be taken when an operation is to be performed on data sets migrated by IBM DFHSM.

SET DUPCR

SESSION

To determine if duplicate commands are to be saved in the command recall buffer.

SET EDITCHNG

SESSION

Lines affected by an edit operation are to be identified.

SET EOF

AWS

Extent of deletion to occur when the ERASE EOF key is pressed.

SET ESCAPE

SESSION

Escape sequence used to exit an application executing under ETSO.

SET EXECPFX

SESSION

RPF Execution Libraries.

SET FILL

AWS

Trailing character to be used with lines in active AWS.

SET JOBCNT

SESSION

Default number of lines to be searched within job output file.

SET MASTER

SESSION

Expansion of embedded CA-Librarian -INC statements in submitted jobs.

SET MODE

DISPLAY and AWS

Character translation mode.

SET MONLEVEL

SESSION

Monitor command information message display.

SET MONTRAP

SESSION

Error message and prompts display issued by Monitor commands within an RPF program.

SET MSGLEVEL

SESSION

Primary command informational message display.

6-16 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

6.5 Synopsis of Session Attributes

Command

Status Command

Attribute Affected

SET PFKDELIM

SESSION

Special character used to delimit commands assigned to a PF/PA key.

SET RPSDEST

SESSION

Location at which data identified through the PRINT command is to print.

SET RPSNOTIFY

SESSION

Display of notification messages when a PRINT request completes.

SET SAVEATTR

SESSION

Default access attribute used when creating a library member.

SET SCROLL

N/A

SCRL field setting.

SET SEARCH

DISPLAY and AWS

Screen positioning when FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL or EXCL are executed. Data in DBCS format.

SET SEND

SESSION

Display of received SEND message.

SET STATS

SESSION

SPF-type directory information to be added/updated.

SET STMTCNT

SESSION

RPF program loop limit.

SET SUBMIT

SESSION

Characteristics of submitted data, including inclusion of sequence numbers, expansion of +INC statements, and width of data.

SET SYSID

N/A

Display of CA-Roscoe ID.

SET TLOCK

SESSION

Automatic Terminal Lock facility.

SET USERID

N/A

Display of user ID.

SET WRITECNT

SESSION

RPF program terminal write limit.

Chapter 6. Displaying Session Attributes/Information 6-17

6-18 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 7. Printing Data This chapter describes how you can print data at a system or 328x (or compatible) printer. The descriptions cover how to: ■ Identify the data you want to print. It can be all or part of: – The currently displayed screen. – The active AWS. – One or more library members or the Library Selection List. Also see Chapter 34, “Library: Performing Library Management Tasks” for information about printing data through the Library Facility Print Function panel or the Selection List. – The currently attached job output file. Also see Chapter 30, “Jobs: Viewing Job Output” for information about using the modifiable STATUS JOB display to print job output. – The currently attached data set object. Also see Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” for information about printing data through the Data Set Facility Print Function panel or a Selection List. ■ Qualify the data that you want printed (for example, printing multiple copies or printing only selected lines or columns of the data). ■ Control printers and printing locations. This includes: – Displaying information about available printers and printing locations. – Directing your data to print at an alternate location (like a different system or 328x-type printer). ■ Control and monitor the data after it has been scheduled for printing.

Chapter 7. Printing Data 7-1

7.1 Identifying Data to be Printed

7.1 Identifying Data to be Printed As illustrated, you can print data from a variety of different sources. Basic Command

Description

PRINT

Prints the entire contents of the active AWS. The AWS need not be attached. (The AWS keyword is optional.)

PRINT mem(s)

Prints a maximum of 12 unattached library members. (To print a member that does not belong to you, include the owner's prefix.)

PRINT LIB

Prints all of the currently attached library member or Selection List.

PRINT DSN

Prints all of the currently attached data set object.

PRINT JOB

Prints all of the currently attached job output file.

PRINT SCREEN

Prints all of the currently displayed screen.

Data from any of the sources identified in the previous figure can be combined as long as the total number does not exceed 12. To illustrate, the following example shows how you can combine data from eight different sources. This example also uses the INSEP operand to cause the data from each source to begin on a new page: PRINT MEM1 DSN AWS 1= 4= AWS 9= 1== JOB LIB AAA.MEM2 SCR INSEP 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 You can also print a copy of the current screen display when an RPF program or other application (like ETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in control of the terminal. Assuming that the CA defaults are in effect, you can do this by entering: :P in any unprotected field and pressing PF12. (The cursor must immediately follow the command :P.) If the CA defaults are not in effect, the STATUS SYSTEM display will identify the site-defined: ■ Escape character: The field RSCESCCH identifies the character to use. The default is a colon (:). ■ PF key: The field RCSESCPF identifies the PF key to use. The default is PF12.

7-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

7.2 Qualifying the Data to be Printed

7.2 Qualifying the Data to be Printed This section describes many of the PRINT command operands that you can use to control how your data are printed. For a detailed description of all the operands, see the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide.

7.2.1 Controlling Sequence Numbers Use the NUM or NONUM operands of the PRINT command to designate whether the CA-Roscoe-generated sequence numbers are to be printed. For example, to print the contents of the active AWS and have sequence numbers included in columns 1 through 6, you would enter: PRINT NUM If you do not specify either of these operands when printing: ■ The contents of the active AWS, the current AWS sequence number attribute controls whether sequence numbers are included. ■ An unattached library member, the member's sequence number attribute controls whether sequence numbers are included. ■ An attached data set object, job output file or library member/Selection List, the current display format governs whether sequence numbers are included (for example, if SET DISPLAY NUM is in effect, sequence numbers are included). ■ Screen display, no sequence numbers are included.

7.2.2 Formatting the Printed Data You can use the CAPS, TYPE and FORMAT operands to format the data to be printed. CAPS Operand: CAPS causes alphabetic characters in the data to be printed in uppercase characters. For example: PRINT INVLIST CAPS prints any alphabetic characters in the library member named INVLIST in uppercase. (The data itself is not changed.)

Chapter 7. Printing Data 7-3

7.2 Qualifying the Data to be Printed

TYPE Operand: TYPE can be used to designate which printer control characters are to be recognized, where: TYPE ANS

Recognizes ANSI control characters.

TYPE DEF

Recognizes CA-Roscoe formatting pseudo-commands. (This is the default.)

TYPE MCC

Recognizes machine control characters.

When TYPE DEF is in effect, you can use: ■ CA-Roscoe formatting pseudo-commands with data that is in the active AWS. These commands, which must begin in column 1, include: .SK v or :SK v .TOP or :TOP

To include v number of blank li output. To force a new page.

■ The TM and BM operands to change the site-defined top and bottom margins, respectively. For example, if you want to begin printing six lines from the top of the page (for example, have five blank lines precede the data) and stop printing nine lines from the bottom, you would enter: PRINT TYPE DEF TM 5 BM 9 Notes: – Use the PRINT DEVICE command to determine the default and current top and bottom margins. – The left and right margins are determined by the placement of the data. In the following screen, for example, the data extends from columns 5 through 53.

7-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

7.2 Qualifying the Data to be Printed

PRINT Command: Using Formatting Pseudo-Commands

7

8

PRINT TYPE DEF_ > > AWS(PRI.INVLIST1) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 > <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5... ================================ T O P ============== ===1== This data illustrates the use of the formatting ===2== pseudo-commands. ===3== :p. ===4== The preceding .SK 2 command causes two blank ===5== lines to be inserted in the printed output. ===6== :TOP ===7== The :TOP command causes a page EJECT to occur. ===8== ===9== The pseudo-commands must begin in the first posi==1=== tion of a line and be the only data on that line.

FORMAT Operand: FORMAT can be used to specify the desired data format, where: FORMAT DUMP

Each line is formatted with offsets, hexadecimal data and EBCDIC data to the right of the line.

FORMAT CHEX

Each line is formatted with offsets and hexadecimal data to the right of the line.

FORMAT VHEX

Each line is formatted in character data with hexadecimal data shown vertically below.

Chapter 7. Printing Data 7-5

7.2 Qualifying the Data to be Printed

7.2.3 Naming and Referencing Print Requests When you execute the PRINT command, the data are scheduled for printing and an information message is displayed. The message contains: RPS1=

REQUEST tag, number SCHEDULED FOR LOCATION id

where: tag number id

Optional name that you can assign to the print request. Print request number assigned by CA-Roscoe. Location at which the request is scheduled for printing.

Note: A print request is any data that you direct to a system or 328x-type printer.

7.2.3.1 Naming Print Requests You can assign a name (referred to as a tag) to a print request. If included, the tag must be one- to eight- characters in length, begin with an alphabetic character, and be bound by apostrophes, as in: PRINT 'MASTER' DSN Here, the name MASTER is assigned to the print request that prints the contents of the currently attached data set object.

7.2.3.2 Referencing Print Requests To reference a scheduled print request (that is, to hold a request), you must include either the CA-Roscoe-assigned request number or the user-assigned tag name with the appropriate command. See 7.4, “Controlling and Monitoring Print Requests” on page 7-13 for additional information.

7.2.4 Printing Multiple Copies You can use the COPY operand of the PRINT command to specify how many copies of the request are to be printed. (If the operand is omitted, one copy is printed.) For example, to print four copies of the member named INVLIST, enter: PRINT INVLIST COPY 4

7-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

7.2 Qualifying the Data to be Printed

7.2.5 Printing Selected Lines/Columns You can limit a print request to include only the data appearing within a selected range of lines or columns.

7.2.5.1 Limiting Lines ■ To print a range of lines within the active AWS, include the appropriate starting and ending line numbers with the command, as in: PRINT 1== 5== ■ To print a range of lines within an attached data set object, job output file or library member, specify the appropriate line numbers after identifying the data to be printed, as in: PRINT JOB 1== 5== ■ When printing data from multiple sources, identify the data to be printed and the appropriate line numbers, as in: PRINT INVLIST 6== 1=== AWS 12== 23== DSN 1== 5== ■ To print any display that does not include line numbers (like the current screen display or a Data Set Facility Selection List), assume that the data are numbered from one by one. Thus, to print the first ten lines of the current screen display, PRINT SCREEN 1 1=

7.2.5.2 Limiting Columns You can also limit a print request to include only the data appearing within specific columns. ■ If the display includes a Scale Line (like the active AWS, a library member, attached job output file or data set object), use the Scale Line values to determine the appropriate column numbers. For example, if you enter: PRINT JOB COLS 1= 3= only the data appearing within column 10 through 30 will be included in the print request.

Chapter 7. Printing Data 7-7

7.2 Qualifying the Data to be Printed

■ If the display does not include a Scale Line (like the current screen display), the left-most displayed position is assumed to be column one. Thus, if you enter: PRINT SCREEN COLS 1 1= only the data appearing in the first ten positions on the screen will be included in the print request.

7.2.6 Requesting Completion Notification Site management has the option of allowing you to receive a message at your terminal when your print request has printed. If your site is using this facility, you can override your site default for: ■ A specific request using the NOTIFY or NONOTIFY operand. For example, if your site default prohibits notification messages, you can use the NOTIFY operand to override this setting for a specific request, as in: PRINT INVLIST NOTIFY ■ For your terminal session using the modifiable STATUS SESSION display or the SET RPSNOTIFY command. In the following example, SET RPSNOTIFY ON will display notification messages when the first two requests are printed. The NONOTIFY operand will prohibit the message when the third request is printed. SET RPSNOTIFY ON PRINT PRINT INVLIST PRINT NONOTIFY

7-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

7.2 Qualifying the Data to be Printed

7.2.7 Using a System Printer In addition to the facilities described thus far, you can use the following PRINT command operands when directing data to a system printer: ■ CLASS Operand: CLASS can be used to designate which print class is to be used, as in: PRINT JOB CLASS A If you do not specify a print class, your site-defined default is used. (You can use the PRINT DEVICE command to display information about the printer and the print classes assigned to it. PRINT DEVICE is described in 7.3.3, “Obtaining Information About Printers” on page 7-12.) ■ BURST Operand: If the printer supports the burster-trimmer-stacker option, you can use this operand to have the output burst into separate sheets. ■ FCB Operand: FCB can be used to specify the Forms Control Buffer to be used when producing the output, as in: PRINT JOB FCB B6==

Chapter 7. Printing Data 7-9

7.3 Controlling Printing Locations

7.3 Controlling Printing Locations Printing locations are defined by your site management, and consist of one or more 328x-type printers or a system printer. Your management can associate multiple printing locations with each terminal. When you issue the PRINT command, your data are directed to the default printing location associated with your terminal.

7.3.1 Changing a Printing Location The majority of time, you will want to print your data at the default printing location associated with your terminal. There may be occasions, however, when you want to print data at a different location (like at a system printer location if your default is a 328x-type printer location or at another 328x-type printer location). You can change your printing location for a single request or for the remainder of your terminal session.

7.3.1.1 Changing for a Single Request To specify an alternate location for a single request, use the DEST operand with the PRINT command. For example, to print the contents of the active AWS at the location identified as PR05, you would enter: PRINT DEST PR=5

7.3.1.2 Changing for the Session Use the SET RPSDEST command to alter the default printing location for the duration of your terminal session (or until you execute another SET RPSDEST command). For example, to change the default printing location to PR12, you would enter: SET RPSDEST PR12 2

7-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

7.3 Controlling Printing Locations

7.3.2 Displaying Printing Location Information You can get information about your site-defined printing locations. ■ To display a list of all printing locations associated with your terminal, enter: PRINT LOCATION The first displayed location is the default location assigned to your terminal. The current printing location (which is either the default or an alternate you assigned) is preceded by an asterisk. ■ To display information about your default printing location, enter: PRINT LOCATION Q The resulting display provides information about the location to which your print requests are normally directed. The information shows, for example, the maximum number of lines and copies you can print at that location. When you issue the command: STATUS SESSION the field RPSDEST contains the name of your current (or default) printing location. ■ To display information about a specific location, enter the command followed by the name of that location. For example, if you entered: PRINT LOCATION PR17 Information associated with the printing location identified as PR17 is displayed.

Chapter 7. Printing Data 7-11

7.3 Controlling Printing Locations

7.3.3 Obtaining Information About Printers To list the printers defined to CA-Roscoe, enter: PRINT DEVICE To display information about a specific printer, enter: PRINT DEVICE printer-name where printer-name is the name your site has assigned to that printer. The display includes such information as the: ■ Current and default top and bottom margins. ■ Current and default page length and width. Note: If you need to use a non-standard size paper (like the paper width and/or length differs from the default), include the PW and PL operands with the PRINT command. For example, if you are using paper that allows only 50 print lines where each line can contain a maximum of 40 characters, you would enter: PRINT PL 5= PW 4=

7-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

7.4 Controlling and Monitoring Print Requests

7.4 Controlling and Monitoring Print Requests This section describes a variety of ways you can control data that is scheduled for printing.

7.4.1 Cancelling Request(s) If, after scheduling a request, you decide that you do not want the request printed, you can terminate it through the PRINT CANCEL command. For example, to cancel a request that has been assigned the number 598, you would enter: PRINT CANCEL 598 You can use the tag name in place of the request number, as in: PRINT CANCEL MASTER To terminate all of your own outstanding requests, enter: PRINT CANCEL ALL

7.4.2 Displaying Print Request Status Whether or not you use the notification facility (described in the section Requesting Completion Notification), you can monitor the progress of your print requests using the PRINT STATUS command. To check the status of all of your outstanding print requests, you can enter either: PRINT STATUS or PRINT STATUS ALL To check the status of a particular request, you must include the tag or print request number of the desired request. For example, to check the status of a print request whose tag name is MASTER, enter: PRINT STATUS MASTER To check the status of the print request assigned the number 278, enter: PRINT STATUS 278

Chapter 7. Printing Data 7-13

7.4 Controlling and Monitoring Print Requests

7.4.3 Holding/Releasing Request(s) You can use the PRINT HOLD command to hold any of your outstanding print request(s). To hold a request, specify its assigned request number or tag name. For example, to hold the request assigned the tag name of MASTER, you would enter: PRINT HOLD MASTER To hold all of your outstanding print requests, you would enter: PRINT HOLD ALL Having held one or more requests, you can release them using the PRINT RELEASE command, as in: PRINT RELEASE MASTER or PRINT RELEASE 598 or PRINT RELEASE ALL You can use PRINT HOLD and PRINT RELEASE to rearrange the priorities of your own print requests. The steps you follow are: 1. Hold all of your outstanding requests at the appropriate location. 2. Release the print request you want printed first, then release your remaining print requests.

7.4.4 Rerouting Request(s) As long as a print request is outstanding (for example, it has not started to print), you can change the location at which it is to be printed. For example, to reroute the request named ABC from location PRT01 to PRT12, you would enter: PRINT ROUTE DEST PRT=1 TO PRT12 'ABC' This example assumes that the terminal's default printing location is PRT01 and that ABC was implicitly scheduled to print at that location. If you reroute a held request, the request is automatically released.

7-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format This chapter describes the basic format of the screen displayed during a CA-Roscoe session. It also discusses how you can: ■ Split the screen, (allowing two concurrent CA-Roscoe subsessions). ■ Lock the screen by invoking the Terminal Lock Facility.

Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format 8-1

8.1 Screen Format Description

8.1 Screen Format Description As illustrated in the following example the CA-Roscoe screen is segmented into a Command Area
1, System Control Area
2, and Execution Area
3. ROSCOE Screen Format

7

8

_


1

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72
2 > <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. ===1== ===2== ===3== ===4== ===5== ===6== ===7== ===8== ===9== ==1=== ==11== ==12== ==13== ==14== ==15== ==16==

U

================================ T O P ====================== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. PROGRAM-ID. INVLIST. ENVIRONMENT DIVISION. CONFIGURATION SECTION. SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81. OBJECT-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81.


3

INPUT-OUTPUT SECTION. FILE-CONTROL. SELECT INVENTORY-FILE ASSIGN TO UT-S-SYSIN. SELECT INVENTORY-REPORT ASSIGN TO UT-S-SYSPRINT.

V

Note: This screen and all others shown in this manual are representations of the actual screens. The screen widths are modified to allow them to fit within the margins of this manual. This results in an abbreviated System Information and Scale Line.

8-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

8.1 Screen Format Description

8.1.1 The Command Area By default, the Command Area comprises the first three lines of the screen. You can change the number of lines by specifying a value between 1 and 3 with the SET CMDLINES command. This area is where you enter all primary commands, Monitor commands and RPF program names. You can enter one or more commands or program names per line. (See Chapter 2, “Commands and Command Components” for additional information about entering commands in this area.)

8.1.2 The System Control Area The System Control Area consists of the following three lines: 1. Response Line This protected line is used to display informational and error messages. The right side of this line is also used to identify what may be pending (for example, data that is attached but not currently displayed). The PENDING message is preceded by one or more of the following codes: D

Data Set Facility is pending.

E

Application executing under ETSO is suspended.

J

Job output is pending.

L

Library Facility is pending.

Sv

Full-screen split has occurred. v will be 1 or 2 indicating which full-screen split is pending.

T

Etso Subtask is active.

2. System Information Line The System Information Line is used to display information about the currently displayed data. (The line is blank when data are not being displayed.) This line consists of: The Name Field This protected field identifies the data currently displayed. The information is presented in one of the following formats: AWS() or AWS(pfx.mem) The contents of an AWS is displayed. The data is modified. If it is unnamed (the data has not been FETCHed from the library or SAVEd in it), only bounding parentheses are shown. If the data are named, the prefixed member name is placed between the parentheses.

Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format 8-3

8.1 Screen Format Description

DSN() dsn

A data set object is displayed. The data are not modifiable; portions of selection lists and function panels are modifiable. The fully qualified name of the data set object is shown on the line below this keyword.

HLP(..HELP..)

A HELP member is displayed. It is not modifiable.

JOB(name, no) Job output is displayed. The data are not modifiable. The job name and number are bound by parentheses following the keyword. LIB(pfx.mem)

Library facility data are displayed. The displayed member is not modifiable; portions of the selection list and function panels are modifiable. When a member is displayed, its prefixed name, bound by parentheses, follows the keyword.

STA(name, no) Information about the currently attached job output is displayed. Portions of the display are modifiable. The right side of the display might also contain: A

An AWS is attached. Its name is bound by < and >.

PGM(pfx.mem) An RPF program is executing. PGM is followed by the prefixed name of the library member containing the executing program. PAU(pfx.mem)

An RPF program is executing and is in a pause state. PAU is followed by the prefixed name of the library member containing the executing program.

The SCRL Field This modifiable field contains the value used by the PF keys that are assigned scrolling functions. You can change this value at any time by issuing the SET SCROLL command, or by positioning the cursor to the start of this field and entering one of the values shown in the following table. Permanent Value

Scroll Direction

Action Taken When Key Pressed

FULL

Forward/Backward

Scroll one line less than the number of lines in the Execution Area.

Left/Right

Scroll the width of the screen.

Forward/Backward

Scroll the number of lines in the Execution Area.

Left/Right

Scroll the width of the screen.

Forward/Backward

Scroll one-half the number of lines in the Execution Area.

Left/Right

Scroll the width of the screen.

FRAM or Page

HALF

8-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

8.1 Screen Format Description

Permanent Value

Scroll Direction

Action Taken When Key Pressed

CSR

Forward/Backward

Scroll to begin or end the display with the line containing the cursor.

Left/Right

Scroll to begin or end the display with the column containing the cursor.

Forward/Backward

Scroll the specified number of lines (v may be 1 through 9999.)

Left/Right

Scroll the width of the screen.

v

Note that the display is unchanged if you attempt to scroll: ■ Forward or backward, and there are not a sufficient number of lines to begin or end the display with the designated line. ■ Left or right, and there are not a sufficient number of characters in the appropriate direction to begin or end the line with the designated column. The following chart shows the temporary values that you can type in the SCRL field. Temporary Value

Scroll Direction

Action Taken When Key Pressed

MAX

Forward/Backward

Scroll the display to the first or last line of the data.

Left/Right

Scroll the display to the first or last column of the data.

Forward/Backward, Left/Right

Execute the function assigned to the designated PF key.

PFv

The previous SCRL field value is restored after MAX or PFn is executed.

Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format 8-5

8.1 Screen Format Description

The COLS Field This modifiable field contains numbers representing the left and right display margins. By default, the values are set to the maximum width permitted by the display format and type of terminal being used. To change the margins, you can: 1) use the SET DISPLAY command, or 2) position the cursor to the appropriate field and overtype the current value with the new. Note: Leading zeros are not required. If omitted, eliminate the old value so that the field contains only the new margin value.) For additional information, see Chapter 5, “Defining the Display Format.” 3. The Scale Line The last line in the System Control Area is reserved for the Scale Line. This protected line reflects the current display margins. For example, if the left display margin is 7, the displayed data begins with column 7. The Scale Line also begins with 7 and is aligned over the first displayed position. When appropriate, special characters are placed on the Scale Line. They are: <>

Indicating the current left and right search boundaries.

¬

Indicating tab positions. The default tab character is ¬. If a different character is being used, that character will appear on the Scale Line.

*

Indicating the location of both a search boundary and tab position.

8.1.3 The Execution Area The remaining lines on the screen are used to enter, edit and display data. These lines are referred to as the Execution Area. The actual number and length of the displayed lines depends on the type of terminal being used. When an AWS is attached, line commands can be used to enter and modify the displayed data. (For additional information about using line commands, see Chapter 2, “Commands and Command Components.”)

8-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

8.2 Splitting the Screen

8.2 Splitting the Screen You can divide the physical terminal screen into two logical presentation areas by performing a: ■ Partial-screen split - both presentation areas are displayed, or ■ Full-screen split - the active presentation area fills the screen. When the screen is split, each presentation area represents a single CA-Roscoe subsession. Each subsession is allocated its own AWS and can be used to perform any command or function handled through the single display format. These subsessions allow you to have two simultaneous independent CA-Roscoe sessions. (If there is a site sign-on program or if you have a sign-on program, these programs are executed each time you split the screen.) When you split the physical screen into two logical presentation areas, each screen contains: ■ A Command Area, consisting of one to three lines. (Use the SET CMDLINES command to specify the number of lines comprising this area.) ■ A System Control Area, containing a Response Line, System Information Line and Scale Line. ■ An Execution Area, containing the maximum number of lines allowed as determined by the type of split screen you invoked. The minimum size of a presentation area is 11 lines. The maximum size is determined by the type of screen split being requested.

8.2.1 Invoking a Full-Screen Split To request a full-screen split (as illustrated in the following example) position the cursor to the last line of the current screen and press PF1 or PF13. The screen is split and the new presentation area fills the entire screen. An Sv PENDING message identifies the other presentation area that can be recalled at any time. Note: PF1 or PF13 are the CA-Roscoe default PF key settings to split the screen.

Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format 8-7

8.2 Splitting the Screen

Full-Screen Split - Before

7

8 > > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 > <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. ...... ================================= T O P ====================== ===1== AAAAA ...... ============================== B O T T O M ===================

Full Screen Split -- After

7-

8

> S1 PENDING > >....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7

To cause a full-screen split when a partial-screen split is currently in effect, move the cursor to the last line of the appropriate presentation area and press PF1 or PF13. That presentation expands to to fill the terminal screen. Alternate Full-Screen Split If an RPF program or another application (like ETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in control of the terminal, you can request a full-screen split by entering: :S in any unprotected field of the screen and pressing PF12. (The cursor must immediately follow the command.) Note that the colon and PF key assignment are the CA-Roscoe defaults. Use the STATUS SYSTEM command to determine if your site management has changed these defaults.

8-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

8.2 Splitting the Screen

8.2.2 Invoking a Partial-Screen Split When a partial-screen split is invoked, both presentation areas are displayed. As illustrated in the following example, they are separated by a protected, highlighted line containing asterisks. The cursor is placed in the Command Area of the lower screen. Continuing the previous example, if you want to: ■ divide the screen equally: Position the cursor within the first or last 11 lines of the physical screen or to the middle line of the screen and press PF1 or PF13. (If you position the cursor to the last line, a full-screen split is invoked when you press the PF key.) Partial-Screen Split

7

> > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 > <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ...... ================================= T O P ======================= ===1== AAAAA ...... ============================== B O T T O M ====================

) _

)

)

)

)

)

)

)

)

)

)

)

)

)

)

)

8

)

> > >....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7

U

V If the physical screen contains an even number of lines, the upper presentation area will contain one more line than the lower presentation area.

■ divide the screen unequally: Position the cursor to any line other than those used to perform an equal- or full-screen split and press PF1 or PF13. (For example, if you position the cursor to the thirteenth line of a 43-line terminal screen and press PF1 or PF13, the upper screen will contain 12 lines, the separator will be on the thirteenth line and the lower presentation area will use the remaining lines.

Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format 8-9

8.2 Splitting the Screen

8.2.3 Resplitting Screens With one exception, you can change the size of the presentation areas after the initial split by resplitting the screen. (The exception is that resplitting is not valid when a :S or :W was used to create the current display.) To resplit, press PF1 or PF13 after moving the cursor to: ■ The last line of a presentation area to cause a full-screen split. ■ Within the first or last 11 lines of a presentation area to cause an equal partial-screen split. ■ Any other line to cause an unequal partial-screen split. Note that you cannot change the screen size if an RPF program executing in either presentation area contains the command SET SCREEN NOMODIFY.

8.2.4 Swapping Active Screens Only one presentation area is active at a time. The active area is the one containing the cursor. When you press the ENTER key or a PF/PA key, terminal input is read from the active presentation area. Commands or PF/PA key functions are executed in only the active area. Any data or commands that you have typed in the inactive presentation area remain displayed. No action is taken in the inactive screen. When a partial-screen split is in effect, use the cursor positioning keys to move the cursor from one area to the other, the new presentation area becomes active; the old presentation area is inactive. ■ If the newly activated presentation area is less than three-fourths the size of the deactivated presentation area, the sizes of the two areas are interchanged. ■ If the cursor is positioned to the line separating the two areas, both presentation areas are considered inactive. You can activate one presentation area while deactivating the other by pressing PF2 or PF14, the CA-Roscoe default PF-key assignments for swapping. This bounces the cursor from the active presentation area to the inactive area. Thus, activating the new area. When a full-screen split is in effect, pressing PF2 or PF14 causes the logical screens to be bounced, where the new screen contains the cursor and is, thus, the active screen.

8-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

8.2 Splitting the Screen

Alternate Full-Screen Swap When a full-screen split is in effect and an RPF program or another application (like ETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in control of the terminal, you can swap the logical screens by entering: :W in any unprotected field of the screen and pressing PF12. (The cursor must immediately follow the command.) Note that the colon and PF key assignment are the CA-Roscoe defaults. Use the STATUS SYSTEM command to determine if your site management has changed these defaults.

8.2.5 Terminating Split Screens To terminate full- or partial-split screens, press PF3 or PF15, the CA-Roscoe default PF-key assignments for END. The presentation area: ■ Containing the cursor is terminated. ■ Not containing the cursor becomes the active presentation area and expands to fill the screen. You can end your CA-Roscoe session while the screens are split by entering OFF or OFFON in either presentation area. If, when you terminate split screens or sign-off CA-Roscoe, there is data in an AWS with a RECOVERABLE attribute, it is saved in a library member named SAVAWSnn, where nn is a unique identifier. Alternate Full-Screen Split Termination If a full-screen split is in effect and an RPF program or another application (like ETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in control of the terminal, you can terminate split screen processing by entering: :E in any unprotected field of the screen and pressing PF12. (The cursor must immediately follow the command.) Note that the colon and PF key assignment are the CA-Roscoe defaults. Use the STATUS SYSTEM command to determine if your site management has changed these defaults.

Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format 8-11

8.3 Changing the Screen Size

8.3 Changing the Screen Size Depending on how 3270-type terminals are defined at your site, you may be able to change the size of the physical or logical CA-Roscoe screen by issuing the SCREEN command. For example, SCREEN FLIP allows you to bounce between the terminal's primary and alternate screen sizes. Additional operands of this command permit you to switch to a specific size, as in: SCREEN 2 which changes the screen size to 24 rows by 80 columns. See the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide for additional information about using this command.

8-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

8.4 Locking the Screen

8.4 Locking the Screen There may be times when you need to leave your terminal for a few minutes and do not want to sign off or allow anyone to access your session. At these times, you can use the SET TLOCK command to activate the Terminal Lock Facility. For example, if you enter: SET TLOCK NOW the terminal lock screen (as illustrated in the following example) is displayed. Terminal Lock Screen

7

> ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7. ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| ||||| TLO=1 TERMINAL LOCKED |||||||| ||||| |||||||| ||||| KEY your-key DATE =9/19/94 |||||||| ||||| TERMID terminal-id TIME 14.35.5= |||||||| ||||| APPLID application-id VERSION 6.= |||||||| ||||| |||||||| ||||| To continue enter password => |||||||| ||||| To terminate enter 'OFF' => |||||||| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| ||||||||| ||||| ||||| || ||| ||||| ||||| |||||||| || |||| || ||||| ||||||||| |||||| || ||||| |||||||||| |||CA-| || |||| || ||||| ||||||||| |||||| || ||||| ||||||||||| |||||| |||| || ||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| |||||||| ||||| ||| |||| || ||||||||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| ||||||||||||| |||| ||| ||| || ||||||||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| |||||||||||||| ||| ||| ||| ||| ||| || ||||| ||||||||| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

U

8

V

When this screen is displayed, you must enter either your CA-Roscoe password (to resume your session) or the OFF command (to terminate your session). Note: The Terminal Lock Facility is not available if you have no CA-Roscoe password, are using a typewriter device, or are accessing CA-Roscoe through a terminal defined to CICS. There are two other ways the Terminal Lock Screen can be displayed. 1. When an RPF program or another application (like ETSO or CA-EMAIL+) is in control of the terminal, you can force the Terminal Lock screen by: ■ Checking the STATUS SYSTEM display to verify the site-defined escape character prefix (identified by the RCSESCCH field) and PF key (identified by the RCSESCPF field).

Chapter 8. Selecting a Screen Format 8-13

8.4 Locking the Screen

■ Assuming the defaults are in effect, entering in any unprotected field of the display: :L and pressing PF12. (The cursor must immediately follow the command :L.) 2. Site management can force the terminal to be locked if there is no activity for a site-specified period of time. (If the CA-Roscoe Automatic Signoff Facility is in use when the Terminal Lock screen is displayed, you will be signed off CA-Roscoe if there is no terminal activity within the site-specified time period.) To display or change the site-defined time periods, issue the commands: STATUS SYSTEM

To display the site-defined default and maximum inactivity periods. If your site management is not using the facility, it is noted on this display. (The AUTTLOCK values provide information about the Terminal Lock Facility; the AUTOFF values provide information about the Automatic Signoff Facility.)

STATUS SESSION

To display and alter the current settings, where the TLOCK field is for the Terminal Lock Facility and the AUTOFF field is for the Automatic Signoff Facility.

In addition to causing the Terminal Lock screen to be displayed, you can use the SET TLOCK command to: 1) activate the Terminal Lock Facility, if it is inactive and 2) change the site-defined inactivity period. See the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide for additional information about the SET TLOCK command.

8-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages You can use the SEND command or the BulletinBoard System to direct a message containing one or more lines to any other CA-Roscoe user.

Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages 9-1

9.1 Receiving Messages

9.1 Receiving Messages By default, SEND-related messages are displayed on the Response Line of your terminal. You can use the SET SEND command to control whether these messages are to be displayed. For example, if you enter: SET SEND OPER only messages sent by the operator are displayed. (Regardless of the setting, the messages are always added to your library member ZZZZZMSG.) To permit messages created by the SEND command to be displayed, you would enter: SET SEND ALL If you are signed on and receiving messages when someone sends you a message and it is a: ■ One-Line Message: The message is displayed on the Response Line the next time you press the ENTER key or a PF key. As shown in the following example, the message text is preceded by the sender's prefix. SEND Command: Receiving a One-Line Message

7

8 > pfx RECEIVED YOUR REPORT. THANKS, JOHN > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... ...... ============================= T O P ================= ===1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.

9-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

9.1 Receiving Messages

■ Multi-Line Message: The following example illustrates the format of the message you will receive the next time you press the ENTER key or a PF key. SEND Command: Receiving Multi-Line Message Notification

7

> MSG FROM USERID IN MEMBER: ABC.Z1!61525 COMMITTEE REPORT > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... ...... ============================= T O P ================= ===1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.

8

The message contains variable information: key

Sender's sign-on key (USERID in the above example)

zmddhhmm

Name of the member in your library that contains the message. This unique name consists of the character z, the month (in hexadecimal), the day, the hour and the minute the member was created. In the previous figure the member Z1061525 was created on January 6 at 3:25 PM. A member created on October 15 at 9:15 AM would be named ZA150915 (where the second character, A, represents the month October in hexadecimal).

string

Optional note that the sender included with the SEND command (for example, COMMITTEE REPORT).

Whether or not you are signed on or receiving messages, an entry is always added to the top of the your library member ZZZZZMSG. Each entry consists of two lines, where the first line indicates the date, time and sender's name. The second line contains either: 1) the one-line message or 2) the name of the library member that was created to hold the multi-line message.

Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages 9-3

9.2 Transmitting Messages

9.2 Transmitting Messages You can direct: 1) a one-line message to the Response Line of another CA-Roscoe user's terminal, or 2) a multi-line message to a special library member in another user's library.

9.2.1 Using the SEND Command To send a message using the SEND command, you must: 1. Identify the Recipient: You can use either the sign-on key or prefix of the user to whom you want to send the message. For example, to send a message to the user whose sign-on key is JONES, you would enter: SEND KEY=JONES ... If JONES' prefix is JNS, you could send the message by entering: SEND PFX=JNS ... 2. Specify the Message: If the message is brief (no longer than 64 characters in length), you can include it with the SEND command itself, as in: SEND KEY=JONES 'RECEIVED YOUR REPORT. THANKS, JOHN' The message must be delimited by a special character not found in the message. If you want to send a multi-line message, you can place the text in either the active AWS or a library member. Then, when you issue the SEND command, you must identify the location of the message, as in: SEND AWS KEY=JONES In this example, the keyword AWS identifies the location of the message. When you send a multi-line message, you can optionally include a note with the command, as in: SEND MYREPORT KEY=JONES /COMMITTEE REPORT/ In this case, the contents of the member named MYREPORT is sent to the recipient identified as JONES. The message displayed on the recipient's Response Line will include the note COMMITTEE REPORT.

9-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

9.2 Transmitting Messages

3. Qualify the Message: There may be occasions when you want to control the transmission or display of your message. For example, ■ If you want your message transmitted only if the recipient is currently signed on and accepting messages, you can include the NOW operand with the command, as in: SEND KEY=JONES 'MUST SEE YOU IMMEDIATELY' NOW If the recipient is not signed on or is not receiving messages, you will receive a message stating that your message was not transmitted. ■ If you want to send a confidential message to another user and not have it displayed on the user's Response Line, you can include the NODSPLY operands, as in: SEND KEY=JONES 'THE PASSWORD IS ABLE' NODSPLY In this case, the message is written directly to the recipient's library member ZZZZZMSG.

9.2.2 Using the BulletinBoard System (BBS) To send a one-line message to another CA-Roscoe user using the BulletinBoard System, invoke the ZMsg Mode (PF12) from any BBS screen. This mode allows you to send messages to other CA-Roscoe users and still remain in your BulletinBoard session. These messages are like any other CA-Roscoe one-line SEND messages. Note: See BBS - BulletinBoard System on page 35-1 for more information about using the ZMsg mode. On the ZMsg screen, fill in the fields with the appropriate information. Enter the CA-Roscoe prefix or the key of the user you are sending the message to. If the key or prefix does not exist, you will receive an error message on the Error/Status line. Enter the message text in the Message field. To send the message, press ENTER. The message will be sent, and your message field will be immediately updated to include this information. The Status line on the top of the screen tells you that the message was sent, and to what prefix.

Chapter 9. Sending/Receiving Messages 9-5

9-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 10. Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe This chapter describes how you can: ■ Sign on to CA-Roscoe. ■ Customize your sign-on process by: – Creating, changing and/or deleting your password. – Creating, changing and/or deleting your sign-on program. ■ Sign off CA-Roscoe either explicitly or automatically.

Chapter 10. Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe 10-1

10.1 Signing On

10.1 Signing On In addition to describing the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen, this section provides information about how to bypass the sign-on screen when signing on from VTAM terminals or accessing CA-Roscoe from CICS terminals, a TSO session or another CA-Roscoe.

10.1.1 Using the CA-Roscoe Sign-on Screen When the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is displayed at a 3270-type terminal, the current date and time are shown on the right side of the screen. The version of CA-Roscoe being executed is displayed in the lower right-hand corner of the screen. The following example illustrates the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen that is displayed at 3270-type terminals.

7

8 >APPLID(A=4IROS3) > ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7 |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| |||| ||||||| |||| ||||||| |||| KEY _ DATE =9/19/92 ||||||| |||| PASSWORD TIME 14.35.49 ||||||| |||| GROUP CODE TERMID A=1IX=17 ||||||| |||| NEW PASSWORD > ||||||| |||| > (Repeat for verification) ||||||| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| |||||||| ||||| ||||| ||| ||| ||||| ||||| ||||||| || |||| || ||||| ||||||||| |||||| || ||||| |||||||||| ||CA-| || |||| || ||||| ||||||||| |||||| || ||||| ||||||||||| ||||| |||| || ||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| |||||||| |||| ||| |||| || ||||||||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| ||||Ver 6.=|| ||| ||| ||| || ||||||||||| ||| |||||| || ||||| ||||Glvl 94=4| || ||| ||| ||| ||| || ||||| ||||||||| |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||| |||| COPYRIGHT (C) 1994 COMPUTER ASSOCIATES INTERNATIONAL, INC. |||||| ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||

U

V

To sign on to CA-Roscoe, complete the following fields: KEY

(Required.) Enter the sign-on key assigned to you by site management. The cursor is positioned to this field when the sign-on screen is displayed.

PASSWORD

(May be required.) Enter your password if you have been assigned one. A password protects you against unauthorized access. Thus, for security reasons, your password is not displayed when you enter it.

10-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

10.1 Signing On

GROUP CODE

(Optional.) Enter the appropriate information. This field provides a way for you to enter additional security information requested by your site management. Data entered in this field is not displayed.

NEW PASSWORD

(Optional.) Enter a new password, if appropriate. To verify that you have spelled your password correctly, reenter it on the next line. See 10.2.1, “Changing/Creating a Password” on page 10-8 for additional information.

After completing the appropriate fields, press the ENTER key to have the information transmitted to CA-Roscoe. As soon as you are signed on: ■ The system sign-on message is displayed, if established by your site management. ■ The system sign-on program is executed, if established by your site management. ■ Your sign-on program is executed, if you have created one.

10.1.2 Accessing CA-Roscoe from VTAM Terminals If the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is not displayed, you must enter a VTAM application ID to establish contact with CA-Roscoe. Your site management will tell you what application ID to use. If the ID is, for example, ROSCOE, you can display the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen by entering: ROSCOE and pressing the ENTER key. You can now sign on as described earlier. You can bypass the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen by entering sign-on information with the VTAM application ID. To do this, you would use the format:

──applid──signonkey──┬─────────────────────────────┬────────── └─/password─┬─────────────┬─/─┘ └─/group-code─┘

Examples: If your sign-on key is SMITH and you have no password or group code, you would enter: ROSCOE SMITH If you sign-on key is SMITH and your password is MYPASS, you would enter: ROSCOE SMITH/MYPASS If any of the sign-on information is incorrect, the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is displayed and all sign-on information must be reentered.

Chapter 10. Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe 10-3

10.1 Signing On

10.1.3 Accessing CA-Roscoe Through XTPM XTPM (External Teleprocessing Monitor) is a component of CA-Roscoe that allows users to access CA-Roscoe from terminals defined to CICS/VS, TSO, or another CA-Roscoe.

10.1.3.1 CA-Roscoe From CA-Roscoe You can sign on to one CA-Roscoe from another CA-Roscoe at any time using the ETSO CALL command in the form:

──CALL──prog──┬────────────────────┬──┬────────────┬────────── └─signonkey/password─┘ └─ROSID=code─┘

where prog is the name of a CA-Roscoe XTPM Interface module. Note: The target CA-Roscoe must be the same release as the host CA-Roscoe (the one from which you are invoking sign-on.) You cannot sign on to a CA-Roscoe of another release level. For example, if your sign-on key is MYSIGNON and your password is MINE, you might enter: CALL ROSXROS 'MYSIGNON/MINE' Refer to Appendix B of the CA-Roscoe Installation Guide for detailed instructions on installing the CA-Roscoe XTPM Interface module. Notes: ■ If you do not enter your sign-on key and password, either: – The information is provided by your site security system and, thus, the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is bypassed, or – The CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is displayed. ■ There is an optional user group code: – If specified explicitly, will be passed to the target CA-Roscoe. – If specified implicitly with an asterisk (*), the user group code from your current CA-Roscoe session will be passed to the target CA-Roscoe. – If your site security system is providing the sign-on information, the user group code from your current CA-Roscoe session will be passed to the target CA-Roscoe. ■ ROSID= allows you to designate which CA-Roscoe you want to sign on to. You may omit ROSID= if: – Your site is executing a single CA-Roscoe, or

10-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

10.1 Signing On

– You have no preference as to which CA-Roscoe you are signed on to when your site is executing multiple CA-Roscoe systems. If your site is executing multiple CA-Roscoe systems, it is possible to bounce between the host and target systems. For example, assume that: ■ You are currently executing on a host CA-Roscoe identified as ROS1. The RCS escape character is a semi-colon (;) and the RCS escape PF key is PF12 (as identified by the RCSESCCH and RCSESCPF field of the STATUS SYSTEM display). ■ You want to begin a session on a target CA-Roscoe identified as ROSA. Its RCS escape character is the colon (:) and its RCS escape PF key is PF12. First, create a full-screen split. In the new screen, enter the CALL command with the appropriate program name and identify the target CA-Roscoe, as in:

──CALL──prog──┬──────────────────────┬──ROSID=ROSA──────────── └─signonkey──/password─┘

You are now signed on to the CA-Roscoe identified as ROSA. To bounce back to the ROS1, your host CA-Roscoe, enter: '; (Host CA-Roscoe RCS Escape Character)' ;W and press PF12, where the ; is defined as the host CA-Roscoe RCS escape character. When you are returned to ROS1, the ETSO application is viewed as suspended. You can execute CA-Roscoe commands, RPF programs, and so on. You can swap back to the target CA-Roscoe at any time to continue your session on ROSA. Since the target CA-Roscoe has a different RCS escape character, it is possible to request a full-screen split on that CA-Roscoe. This gives you four CA-Roscoe screens, two on the host and two on the target. It is also possible for you to access yet another CA-Roscoe from the target. When you end your target CA-Roscoe session you are returned to your host CA-Roscoe session. As can be seen by the preceding example, it is possible for you to access multiple CA-Roscoes from a single terminal.

Chapter 10. Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe 10-5

10.1 Signing On

10.1.3.2 CA-Roscoe From CICS Terminals From a terminal defined to CICS/VS, you can sign on to CA-Roscoe through: 1) a menu-driven or formatted site-defined screen, or 2) by entering a site-defined transaction ID. When using a transaction ID, the sign-on format is:

──transid──┬──────────────────────────┬──┬────────────┬─────── └─signonkey─┬───────────┬──┘ └─ROSID=code─┘ └─/password─┘

For example, if the CA-Roscoe transaction ID is ROSC, your sign-on key is MYSIGNON and your password is MINE, you might enter: ROSC MYSIGNON/MINE Notes: ■ See the CA-Roscoe Installation Guide for complete information about setting up CICS interface modules and TRANSID resources. ■ If you do not enter your sign-on key and password, either: – The information is provided by your site security system and, thus, the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is bypassed, or – The CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is displayed. ■ ROSID= allows you to designate which CA-Roscoe you want to sign on to. You can omit ROSID= if: – Your site is executing a single CA-Roscoe, or – You have no preference as to which CA-Roscoe you are signed on to when your site is executing multiple CA-Roscoe systems. When you end your CA-Roscoe session, you are returned to CICS.

10-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

10.1 Signing On

10.1.3.3 CA-Roscoe From TSO From the TSO READY prompt or from ISPF/PDF Option 6, you can access CA-Roscoe using the sign-on format:

──cpid──┬──────────────────────────┬──┬──────────────────┬──── └─signonkey─┬───────────┬──┘ └─ROSID=─┬──────┬──┘ └─/password─┘ └─code─┘

where cpid is the name of a site-defined TSO Command Processor. For example, if the TSO Command Processor for CA-Roscoe is ROSF, your sign-on key is MYSIGNON and your password is MINE, you might enter: ROSF MYSIGNON/MINE Notes: ■ If you do not enter your sign-on key and password, either: – The information is provided by your site security system and, thus, the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is bypassed, or – The CA-Roscoe sign-on screen is displayed. ■ ROSID= allows you to designate which CA-Roscoe you want to sign on to. You may omit ROSID= if: – Your site is executing a single CA-Roscoe, or – You have no preference as to which CA-Roscoe you are signed on to when your site is executing multiple CA-Roscoe systems. When you end your CA-Roscoe session, you are returned to TSO. WARNING: The TSO restriction on the use of PA1 is applicable during your CA-Roscoe session. If you should press the PA1 key, it is ignored.

Chapter 10. Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe 10-7

10.2 Customizing Sign On

10.2 Customizing Sign On This section describes how you can create, change or delete your CA-Roscoe password and sign-on program. Note that your site management may restrict your ability to perform some or all of these actions.

10.2.1 Changing/Creating a Password Your site management has the option of: ■ Requiring you to maintain a password. (This is to protect you against unauthorized access.) ■ Controlling whether you can change or delete your password. ■ Requiring you to change your password on a periodic basis. If your site permits you to control your password, you have two different methods for creating, changed and deleting it. Method 1 - When Signing On You can use the NEW PASSWORD fields on the CA-Roscoe sign-on screen to: ■ Create a Password. Enter your password in the NEW PASSWORD field. To verify that the password is spelled correctly, reenter it on the next line. The password must be one to ten characters in length and cannot contain a slash (/) as one of its characters. ■ Change a Password. Enter your current password in the PASSWORD field. Then enter your new password in the NEW PASSWORD field (and on the following line for verification). The next time you sign on to CA-Roscoe, your new password will be in effect. ■ Eliminate a Password. Enter spaces in the NEW PASSWORD field and on the following line. Method 2 - During a Session Note: Your site management may prohibit the use of the PASSWORD primary command. If the use of PASSWORD is not restricted, you can use it at any time during your terminal session.

10-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

10.2 Customizing Sign On

You can use the PASSWORD command to: ■ Create a Password. Enter the command PASSWORD and a one- to ten-character password that does not contain a slash (/). For example, to establish E637 as your password, you would enter: PASSWORD E637 ■ Change a Password. Enter the PASSWORD command followed by the new password. Your new password will be in effect the next time you sign on. ■ Eliminate a Password. Enter the command PASSWORD with no operand, as in: PASSWORD

Chapter 10. Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe 10-9

10.2 Customizing Sign On

10.2.2 Creating a Sign-on Program Note: Site management has the option of designating whether you may create, change or delete a sign-on program. A sign-on program consists of one or more CA-Roscoe commands that are saved as a library member. If you have a sign-on program, it is executed every time you sign on to CA-Roscoe and every time you split the screen. A sign-on program is useful when, for example, you want certain CA-Roscoe session attributes to always be in effect. Rather than entering the commands establishing each attribute every time you sign on to CA-Roscoe, you can include the commands in a library member and then have the commands in that member automatically executed for you. (See Chapter 6, “Displaying Session Attributes/Information” for additional information.) The following example contains a sample sign-on program. In addition to using some of the commands that set session attributes, it also changes the functions assigned to some of the PF keys. Sample Sign-on Program

7

SAVE MYSIGN_

8

> > AWS( ) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 > <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....6....+ ...... ================================ T O P ===================== ===1== <<MYSIGN>> ===2== SET MODE XTENDED : Set character translation ===3== SET DISPLAY ALL 1 72 NUM : Set display format ===4== SET DISPLAY AWS 7 8= NUMX : Set AWS display format ===5== TAB $ : Set tab character ===6== TAB 16 2= 42 : Set tab positions ===7== SET ; : Set command delimiter ===8== : PF key assignments follow ===9== LET AWS.PF13 = '+FETCH +C1+/ATTACH' ==1=== LET JOB.PF13 = '+ATTACH JOB +C1+' ==11== LET DSN.PF13 = '+ATTACH DSN +C1+' ==12== LET LIB.PF13 = '+ATTACH +C1+' ==13== LET PF14 = '+DETACH +C1+' ==14== LET PF15 = '+SCROLL +C1+ +C2+ +C3+' ============================= B O T T O M ==================

U

V

When creating a library member that is to be your sign-on program: ■ Only one command may appear per line in the member. ■ The first line in the member should contain the library member name. If you do include the name, it must be bound by angle brackets (<< and >>). (Notice line 100 in the previous figure contains <<MYSIGN>>, where MYSIGN is the name of the member.)

10-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

10.2 Customizing Sign On

■ Comments may be included in the program. A comment is indicated by a colon (:) that is preceded and followed by at least one space. Any words following the colon are treated as comments and ignored. (Notice the use of comments in the sample sign-on program in the previous figure.) To establish or change the member containing your sign-on program, enter the command SIGNON followed by the appropriate library member name. For example: SIGNON MYSIGN establishes the library member named MYSIGN as your sign-on program. Once established, the library member remains your sign-on program until you specify another one or eliminate the existing one. To eliminate a sign-on program, enter the SIGNON command with no operand, as in: SIGNON Eliminating a sign-on program does not delete the library member. It simply prevents the commands comprising that member from being executed each time you sign on to CA-Roscoe.

Chapter 10. Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe 10-11

10.3 Signing Off

10.3 Signing Off You can explicitly terminate your session at any time. You or your site may also use the CA-Roscoe automatic sign-off facility to terminate a session that has been inactive for a specified period of time. If any existing AWS with a RECOVERABLE attribute contains data when you sign off (or are automatically signed off), the contents of each AWS is saved as a library member named SAVAWSnn, where nn is a unique ID.

10.3.1 Automatic Signoff Sites have the option of using the CA-Roscoe automatic sign-off facility. When this facility is activated, you are automatically signed off if your terminal is inactive for a site-specified time period. Most sites set the time period so that few of their users are affected. To change the site-defined inactivity period: ■ Use the SET AUTOFF primary command, or ■ Change the modifiable STATUS SESSION display. The time that you specify may not exceed your site-defined maximum. (Use the STATUS SYSTEM command to display the site-defined default and maximum inactivity time periods.) If your site is not using this facility, it will be noted on the STATUS SYSTEM display. You then have the option of activating and deactivating the facility using the SET AUTOFF command.

10-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

10.3 Signing Off

10.3.2 Explicit Signoff You have two ways to explicitly terminate your session. ■ To sign off CA-Roscoe, enter: OFF If you are at a VTAM site, you can use operands of this command to terminate a session and begin another session, bypassing the VTAM logon screen and CA-Roscoe sign-on screen. (The CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide, Reference Summary Guide and HELP facility described the operands that can be used with OFF.) ■ To sign off CA-Roscoe and cause the sign-on prompt screen to be displayed, enter: OFFON If you are using multiple CA-Roscoe sign-on keys, you can use the OFFON command to simultaneously sign off under one key and sign on under another. For example, suppose you are using the two sign-on keys JONES and BROWN. If you are currently signed on under JONES, you can terminate your session and start a new session under BROWN by entering: OFFON BROWN

Chapter 10. Signing On and Off CA-Roscoe 10-13

10-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys This chapter describes: ■ The default PF/PA key assignments distributed with CA-Roscoe. ■ How to use the default assignments, especially when supplying variable information, ■ The processing hierarchy used to determine the PF/PA key assignment to be used and then performing that assignment. ■ How to change your PF/PA key assignments.

Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys 11-1

11.1 The Default PF/PA Key Assignments

11.1 The Default PF/PA Key Assignments The following chart shows the PF and PA key assignments provided with CA-Roscoe. You will notice that each key can have a maximum of four unique assignments. Note: This manual assumes you are using the distributed default PF and PA key assignments. Your site has the option of using these assignments or changing them. You also have the option of changing the PF key assignments. KEYS

AWS

DSN

JOB

LIB

PA1

Ignore Changes

same

same

same

PA2

HELP PFKEYS ROSCOE

same

same

same

PF1

SPLIT

same

same

same

PF2

SWAP

same

same

same

PF3

END

same

same

same

PF4

ATTACH DSN C1

SELECT C1

ATTACH JOB * FILE C1

EXEC PFK4

PF5

ATTACH JOB C1 C2 C3

EXEC PFK5

ATTACH JOB * C1 C2 C3

EXEC PFK5

PF6

Reexecute

same

same

same

PF7

SCROLL BACK C1 C2

same

same

same

PF8

SCROLL FORWARD C1 C2

same

same

same

PF9

GO

same

same

same

PF10

SCROLL LEFT C1

same

same

same

PF11

SCROLL RIGHT C1

same

same

same

PF12

INPUT

same

same

same

PF13

EXEC PFK13

same

same

same

PF14

EXEC PFK14

same

same

same

PF15

EXEC PFK15

same

same

same

PF16

EXEC PFK16

same

same

same

11-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

11.1 The Default PF/PA Key Assignments

KEYS

AWS

DSN

JOB

LIB

PF17

EXEC PFK17

same

same

same

PF18

Reexecute

same

same

same

PF19

SCROLL BACK C1 C2

same

same

same

PF20

SCROLL FORWARD C1 C2

same

same

same

PF21

GO

same

same

same

PF22

SCROLL LEFT C1

same

same

same

PF23

SCROLL RIGHT C1

same

same

same

PF24

INPUT

same

same

same

Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys 11-3

11.2 Using PF/PA Keys

11.2 Using PF/PA Keys A PF or PA key can have a maximum of four unique assignments. The assignment it performs depends on the type of data currently attached. As illustrated in the preceding chart a key may perform a different assignment depending on whether an AWS, a data set, job output file or library member is attached.

11.2.1 Types of Assignments: A PF or PA key assignment may be either fixed or variable. ■ Fixed Assignments: A fixed assignment is complete unto itself. It needs no additional information to perform its assigned function. For example, PF1 is assigned the fixed function: SPLIT When you press this key, your physical CA-Roscoe screen is split into two logical screens. If PF1 were assigned the function: SCROLL FORWARD 1= LINES your display would be repositioned ten lines forward every time you pressed this key. ■ Variable Assignments: A variable assignment lets you supply variable information. Depending on the particular assignment, this information may either be optional or required. Assume that PF8 is assigned the function: SCROLL FORWARD C1 C2 where C1 and C2 are Command Line variables. When this PF key is pressed, the lines comprising the Command Area are read and any information found there is assigned sequentially to the variables in the assignment. For example, if you typed: 5 LINES in the Command Area and then pressed PF8, the key is treated as though the fixed assignment: SCROLL FORWARD 5 LINES

11-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

11.2 Using PF/PA Keys

This assignment also illustrates that you can supply: – No Variable Input: If no information is found in the Command Area and the assignment is valid without further qualification, the function is performed (for example, SCROLL FORWARD is a valid assignment and, thus, is performed). If it is not, a message is issued. – An Insufficient Amount of Information: If an insufficient amount of information is found in the Command Area, the available information is sequentially assigned to the variables and the assignment is checked to see if it is valid. If it is, the function is performed and any unused variables are ignored. For example, if the Command Area contains: MAX when PF8 is pressed, the key is treated as though it had the assignment: SCROLL FORWARD MAX Since this is a valid assignment, it is performed. The unused variable (C2) is ignored. When using PF/PA keys with variable assignments, you can: ■ Terminate Variable Input: You can use the command delimiter to end variable input. For example, suppose you want to scroll to the bottom of the active AWS and renumber its contents. You can do this by typing: MAX & RENUMBER in the Command Area where the ampersand (&) is the command delimiter. The assignment is treated as: SCROLL FORWARD MAX since the command delimiter terminates variable input. Thus, RENUMBER is recognized as a command and is not treated as the value of the variable C2. ■ Include Spaces in a Variable: To include a space with a value, bound the value with delimiters. For example, assume that PF8 is assigned the function: SCROLL FORWARD C1 and you want to reposition the display by five lines. You can do this by typing: '5 LINES' in the Command Area and pressing PF8. For the assignment, 5 LINES is treated as a single value; when the assignment is performed, it is treated as SCROLL FORWARD 5 LINES. ■ Enter Variables and Other Commands/Data:

Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys 11-5

11.2 Using PF/PA Keys

When a PF/PA key with a variable assignment is pressed, the entire Command Area is read to build a valid PF/PA key assignment. Thus, all of the information needed by a PF/PA key must appear on the same line and precede any other command or data. When an assignment includes variables, the combined length of the assignment after the variables have been replaced by values plus any additional commands/data found in the Command Area must not exceed 255 characters in length.

11-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

11.3 Reviewing Processing Hierarchy

11.3 Reviewing Processing Hierarchy Two actions are taken when you press a PA or PF key, where: 1. The assignment to be used is determined. ■ If you are currently using a Monitor command that has subcommands (like DISPLAY) and there are special site assignments for that Monitor, the appropriate site-defined function is selected. If there are no site-defined assignments, the user-defined function is selected. ■ If you are not using such a Monitor command, the key is checked to see if there is a user-defined function. If there is, that function is selected. If there is not, the site-assigned function is selected. 2. The assignment is performed. ■ If a PA key is pressed, the selected assignment is performed. ■ If a PF key is pressed, the Command Area is read for input, if needed, and for any additional commands that may be entered there. The commands in the assignment (plus those entered from the terminal) are then executed. The assignment (and associated commands) are executed until: ■ It is successfully completed. ■ The first command that causes an implicit or explicit pause (like DISPLAY with MORE or ATTACH). Any unexecuted commands are displayed in the Command Area of the screen. To resume execution of those commands, press the ENTER key. Note: If the pause was caused by an RPF program containing a panel, the panel overrides the display of unexecuted commands (the unexecuted commands are lost). ■ An error is encountered. Any unexecuted commands are displayed. To resume execution, correct, change or delete the command in error and press the ENTER key. (See Chapter 2, “Commands and Command Components” for additional information about correcting invalid/incomplete commands.

Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys 11-7

11.3 Reviewing Processing Hierarchy

11.4 Changing Assignments Caution PA KEY Warning When a PA key is pressed, 3270 hardware limitations prevent CA-Roscoe from knowing: 1) any of the changes made to the screen, and 2) the current position of the cursor when split screens are in effect. It is strongly recommended that you do not change the default PA key assignments. If you do change the defaults, only commands can be assigned to PA keys (no functions may be assigned). Exercise care when assigning commands, especially if you frequently split screens. Examples: ■ If UPDATE * is assigned to a PA key that is pressed, the command is issued but changes made to the screen are not applied to the library member (or to that AWS). ■ If you assign DETACH JOB to a PA key and then split the screen to attach two jobs, the wrong job may be detached when you press the PA key. (The last known cursor position is used (for example, where the cursor was placed for the last terminal write). CA-Roscoe does not know if you moved the cursor to a different screen.)

You have the option of changing any of the PF/PA key assignments provided by your site. New assignments: ■ Can be established at any time during a terminal session. ■ Remain in effect until you sign off or change them. If you decide that you always want certain assignments to be in effect, you can add the commands establishing those assignments to your signon program. Then, each time you sign on, the commands are executed and the PF/PA functions are automatically reassigned for you.

11-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

11.4 Changing Assignments

11.4.1 Syntax The syntax to assign a function to a PF or PA key is:

──LET──┬────────┬──┬─PAv─┬──=──'string'─────────────────────── └─scope.─┘ └─PFv─┘

scope

Qualifies the operational range of this key. If omitted, the operation applies to all forms of attached data. If specified, it must be one of the following: AWS.

Designates that the operation affects only the active AWS.

DSN.

Designates that the operation affects only the attached data set object.

JOB.

Designates that the operation affects only the attached job output.

LIB.

Designates that the operation affects only the attached library member.

PAv

PA key whose assignment is to be changed, where v is a value between 1 and 10.

PFv

PF key whose assignment is to be changed, where v is a value between 1 and 24.

'string'

Function to be performed. It must be delimited by apostrophes. It may contain Command Line and/or RPF variables and, after the variables have been replaced by their values, must not exceed 255 characters in length. (See the next section for additional information about assigning functions.)

Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys 11-9

11.4 Changing Assignments

11.4.2 Assigning Commands/Keyword Functions This section describes: ■ assignment limitations, and ■ assignment techniques.

11.4.2.1 Assignment Limitations: PA Keys

You can assign one or more commands or one of the designated keyword functions of a PA key.

PF Keys

You can assign one or more commands or any keyword function to a PF key. When assigning commands and keyword functions, you may include multiple commands but only one function.

The keyword functions are described in the next section.

11.4.2.2 Assignment Techniques: ■ Assigning a Single Fixed Value: The value to be assigned must be delimited by apostrophes ('), as in: LET PF16 = 'SPLIT' The function assigned to PF16 will be performed whenever the key is pressed. You can qualify the assignment so that it applies to a specific form of attached data. To do this, include the appropriate qualifier (like AWS, DSN, JOB or LIB) with the PF key designation, as in: LET AWS.PF16 = 'SET DISPLAY AWS FLIP NUMX' Now, when you press PF16, the type of data currently attached is determined. If it is: – The active AWS: you will bounce the display between an unprotected sequence number field and no sequence number field. – Any other form of attached data: the screen will be split.

11-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

11.4 Changing Assignments

■ Assigning Multiple Values: When multiple commands are assigned to a PF/PA key, the commands must be separated by a slash (/). For example, if you assigned: LET JOB.PF8 = 'SET DISPLAY JOB NONUM/SET MODE BASIC/SET ;' and then press this key when job output is attached, the display will exclude sequence numbers, the character translation mode will be basic and the semicolon (;) will be the command delimiter. Note: The slash (/) is the default separator character. You can change this character using the SET PFKDELIM command or through the modifiable STATUS SESSION display. ■ Assigning Commands With String Operands: Commands that have string operands fall into one of two categories, 1) those requiring that the string always be delimited, and 2) those requiring that the string be delimited only if it could be confused for a keyword operand of that command. When assigning commands with string operands, it is a good practice to delimit the string. Note that the delimiter may be any special character except an apostrophe, the PF/PA key assignment delimiter or the command delimiter. In the following example, the logical not sign (¬) is used to delimit the string JOB. (If the delimiters where omitted, JOB would be treated as a keyword operand of the FIRST command.) LET PF8 = 'SET DISPLAY NONUM/FIRST ¬JOB¬' ■ Assigning RPF Programs: You can assign a RPF program name to a PF or PA key, as illustrated by: LET PF9 = 'EXEC AAA.WIDGET' or LET PF9 = 'AAA.WIDGET' or LET PF9 = 'WIDGET' If the RPF program name matches the name of a primary or Monitor command, use either the EXEC command or slash (/) to cause explicit program invocation. (If the program is in an Execution Library, the slash must be used.) The following assignment shows how you can renumber the active AWS and explicitly execute a program named FETCH when you press PF10: LET PF1= = 'RENUMBER//FETCH' Remember that the slashes in this example are serving two purposes. The first slash separates the commands; the second slash explicitly invokes RPF program execution. ■ Assigning Variable Values: You can include Command Line and RPF variables in a PF key assignment. RPF variables can be included in a PA key assignment. – Defining Variables:

Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys 11-11

11.4 Changing Assignments

When variables are used within an assignment, the assignment must begin with a special character (a plus sign in these examples) that is also used to delimit the variable portion of the assignment, as in: LET PF4 = '+FETCH +C1+/ATTACH' or LET PF5 = '+RENUMBER/SAVE +C1+' If you omit the special character, the variable is not recognized. (In both cases, C1 is assumed to be a library member name, not a Command Line variable.) Caution IMPORTANT: When variables are used in an assignment, the length of the assignment, after all variable substitution has been performed, plus any other commands/data specified in the Command Area may not exceed 255 characters. – Using Command Line Variables You can assign a maximum of eight Command Line variables (named C1 through C8) to any PF key. Command Line variables cannot be assigned to PA keys. If you use Command Line variables in an assignment, you must provide variable information in the Command Area of the screen. For example, assume the following assignment is in effect: LET PF4 = '+FETCH +C1+/ATTACH' When PF4 is pressed, the Command Area is read for the needed variable information. If WIDGET appears in the Command Area, the assignment is treated as though the following commands were entered: FETCH WIDGET & ATTACH When you include multiple Command Line variables in an assignment, each one must be delimited by the same special character, as in: LET AWS.PF4 ='+ATTACH +C1+ +C2+ +C3+ +C4+' So, when PF4 is pressed, the values found in the Command Area are assigned sequentially to the variables. A value need not be supplied for all of the variables in an assignment. If the supplied values form a valid command, the remaining variables are ignored. For example, assume that the preceding definition is in effect and the Command Area contains: JOB Q This assignment is treated as though the command ATTACH JOB * was entered. Since this is a valid command, the variables C3 and C4 are ignored and the command is executed. The same principles apply when using any of the predefined keyword functions instead of, or with, commands. For example, assume the following definition is in effect: LET PF12 = '+SCROLL +C1+ C2+ +C3+'

11-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

11.4 Changing Assignments

With this definition, you may enter any of the following: FORWARD BACKWARD HALF FORWARD 5 LINES ■ RPF Variables Any RPF system or storage variable can be included in a PF or PA key definition. When you use a storage variable (like L1 or P12), it must be assigned a value before you press the associated PF key. For example, assume the following definition is in effect: LET AWS.PF5 = '+FETCH +L1+' If L1 contains no value or a value that is inappropriate for the assignment, an error message is displayed.

11.4.3 Assigning Keyword Functions This section describes the keywords that you can use to designate: 1. The location to which the display is to be scrolled, or 2. An action that is to be performed. When assigning these keywords, they must always be delimited, as in: LET AWS.PF1 = 'SCROLL BACK'

11.4.3.1 Scroll Function Assignments The following functions can be used to position the display. Unless noted otherwise: ■ These functions can only be assigned to PF keys, and ■ Any changes made to the current frame are applied. Note: A frame is equivalent to the number of lines in the Execution Area. (Page is a synonym for frame.) POSITION BOTTOM

The display is positioned so that it ends with the last displayable line.

POSITION TOP

The display is positioned so that it begins with the first displayable line.

SCROLL BACK

The display is positioned backward based on the value specified in the SCRL field of the System Information Line. If the number of remaining lines is less than the SCRL field value, the action is identical to POSITION TOP.

SCROLL BACK Csr

The display is positioned so that the line at which the cursor is positioned is the last displayed line. If the number of preceding lines is less than the size of the Execution Area, the display is unchanged.

Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys 11-13

11.4 Changing Assignments

SCROLL BACK [v] FRames or SCROLL BACK [v] Pages The display is positioned backward one or v frames. If less than vframes precede the current frame, the action is identical to POSITION TOP. SCROLL BACK Full

The display is positioned backward one line less than the total number of lines in the current frame (the first line of the new display is the last line of the old). If less than a full frame of lines precede the current frame, the action is identical to POSITION TOP.

SCROLL BACK Half

The display is positioned back one-half frame. If less than a half frame of lines precede the current frame, the action is identical to POSITION TOP.

SCROLL BACK [v] [Lines] The display is positioned backward one or v lines. If less than vlines precede the current frame, the action is identical to POSITION TOP. SCROLL BACK Max

Display positioning is identical to POSITION TOP.

SCROLL FORWARD

The display is positioned forward based on the value specified in the SCRL field of the System Information Line. If the number of remaining lines is less than the SCRL field value, the action is identical to POSITION BOTTOM.

SCROLL FORWARD Csr The display is positioned forward so that the line at which the cursor is positioned is the first displayed line. SCROLL FORWARD [v] FRames or SCROLL FORWARD [v] Pages The display is positioned forward one or v frames. If less than vframes remain, the action is identical to POSITION BOTTOM. SCROLL FORWARD Full The display is positioned forward one line less than the total number of lines in the current frame (the last line of the new display is the first line of the old). If less than a full frame of lines remain, the action is identical to POSITION BOTTOM. SCROLL FORWARD Half The display is positioned forward one-half frame. If less than a half frame of lines remain, the action is identical to POSITION BOTTOM. SCROLL FORWARD [v] [Lines] The display is positioned forward one or v lines. If less than v lines remain, the action is identical to POSITION BOTTOM. SCROLL FORWARD Max Display positioning is identical to POSITION BOTTOM.

11-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

11.4 Changing Assignments

SCROLL LEFT

The extent of the left shift is determined by subtracting the left margin value from the right margin value, as specified in the COLS field of the System Information Line. This value is then subtracted from the left margin and the display is repositioned.

SCROLL LEFT v

The display is shifted left that number of positions. (It cannot be shifted beyond column 1.) The value must be positive and greater than 0. If zero is specified, no shifting occurs.

SCROLL LEFT MAX

The display is shifted left to begin with the first position of the line.

SCROLL RIGHT

The extent of the right shift is determined by subtracting the left margin value from the right margin value, as specified in the COLS field of the System Information Line. This value is then added to the right margin and the frame is repositioned.

SCROLL RIGHT v

The display is shifted right that number of positions. (It cannot be shifted beyond the rightmost margin for the type of data being displayed; for example, 255 for an AWS.) The value must be positive and greater than 0. If zero is specified, no shifting occurs.

SCROLL RIGHT MAX

The display is shifted right to end with the last position of the line (for example, 255 when an AWS is attached; LRECL value when a data set is attached).

11.4.3.2 Special Purpose Function Assignments The following functions control split-screen processing. They can only be assigned to PF keys. END

Split-screen processing is terminated; the two logical screens are returned to a single physical screen.

SPLIT

Split-screen processing is invoked; the physical screen is divided into two logical screens.

SWAP

Active and inactive split screens are interchanged; the cursor is moved from one logical screen to the other.

Chapter 11. Using/Customizing PF/PA Keys 11-15

11.4 Changing Assignments

The following functions can be assigned to a PF or PA key: INPUT

As a PA key assignment, changes made to the current frame are ignored. Blank lines are inserted before the first line displayed in the current screen. Caution: After entering data, press a PF key or the ENTER key. If a PA key is pressed, all inserted lines will be lost. As a PF key assignment, changes made to the current frame are applied. If the cursor is in the Execution Area, blank lines are inserted after the line at which the cursor is positioned. If the cursor is not in the Execution Area, blank lines are inserted before the first line displayed in the current screen.

REPEAT

Changes made to the current frame are ignored. The attached data remains attached. As a PF key assignment, commands found in the Command Area are executed. As a PA key assignment, commands found in the Command Area are ignored if this function is assigned to a PA key.

The remaining functions can only be assigned to PF keys: +

The last executed command is redisplayed.

-

The last executed command is reexecuted.

ENTER

The display is positioned based on the function assigned to the ENTER key. Normally, the display retains its position.

QUIT

Changes made to the current frame are ignored; attached data are detached. Commands entered in the Command Area are executed.

Note: : See Chapter 2, “Commands and Command Components” for information about + and -.

11-16 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids This chapter describes the user documentation and online tools that are provided with CA-Roscoe.

Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids 12-1

12.1 The CA-Roscoe Documentation

12.1 The CA-Roscoe Documentation In addition to this manual, each CA-Roscoe user should have access to: ■ CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide for a detailed description of all CA-Roscoe commands. ■ CA-Roscoe Getting Started Guide for an introduction to CA-Roscoe oriented to: 1) non-programmers, and 2) individuals familiar with IBM TSO ISPF/PDF. ■ CA-Roscoe RPF Language Guide for a description of the ROSCOE Programming Facility (RPF). Finally, each user should have a copy of the CA-Roscoe Reference Summary and, optionally, a copy of the RPF Reference Summary.

12-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

12.2 The HELP Facility

12.2 The HELP Facility The online HELP facility is a quick and easy way to get information about CA-Roscoe commands and facilities. For example, to display information about the SAVE command, enter: HELP SAVE The following example illustrates part of the information that is displayed.

Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids 12-3

12.2 The HELP Facility

HELP Command: Sample Display

7

8

_ > > HLP(...HELP...) SCROLL FULL DISPLAY ==1 =79 >....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6 SAVE Function: Places contents of active AWS into library as a member. Syntax:

SAVE mem < p > < 'string' > < NOSEQ/SEQ <s>/COBOL > < SHARED/EXECONLY/RESTRICTED > mem

Name to be assigned to member being created. Must comply with naming conventions and not currently exist in user's library.

p

First line of AWS to be saved.

. . .

U

V

As with all HELP displays, the information presented includes: Function

A one-sentence description of the command or facility.

Syntax

The syntax of the command.

Level

List of HELP members that provide additional and/or related information about the command or facility.

The following figure identifies the PF keys that are used to position within and between HELP displays. Display

PF Keys

Action

If there is more information available than fits on the current screen

PF7/PF19

Scrolls to start of display.

PF8/PF20

Scrolls forward.

PF10/PF22

Scrolls to prior level.

PF11/PF23

Scrolls to next level.

If the display indicates that level information is available

12-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

12.2 The HELP Facility

To obtain information about the HELP facility itself, enter the command: HELP Other HELP displays that you may want to review are: HELP MESSAGE x

Displays a description of the designated messages (like HELP MESSAGE CMD01).

HELP PFKEYS

Displays information about: 1) PF/PA key assignments, 2) how to use the default assignments, and 3) how to change the assignments.

HELP NEW

Displays information about the current release of CA-Roscoe.

Chapter 12. Using the Training Aids 12-5

12.3 The Online Tutorial

12.3 The Online Tutorial The Tutorial provides a way for you to learn more about CA-Roscoe. It simulates an actual CA-Roscoe terminal session and introduces the most frequently used CA-Roscoe commands and facilities. The Tutorial presents you with a menu of 12 independent learning modules. You can complete the modules in order, use only certain modules, or vary the order in which you complete the modules. To obtain more information about the Tutorial, enter: HELP TUTORIAL The resulting HELP display explains how to invoke the Tutorial at your company.

12-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Part II. The AWS (Creating and Manipulating Data) Chapter 13. AWS: Introducing the AWS 13.1 Attaching an AWS to the Terminal . . 13.2 Attaching an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . 13.3 Bringing Data Into an AWS . . . . . . 13.4 Changing AWS Names/Attributes . . . 13.5 Creating an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . 13.6 Detaching an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . 13.7 Discarding an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . 13.8 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . 13.8.1 Positioning via the Internal Pointer 13.8.2 Positioning to Specific Lines . . . 13.9 Reattaching the Current AWS . . . . . 13.10 Selecting an AWS . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS 14.1 Adding Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.1.1 Inserting a String Within a Line . . . . . . . 14.1.2 Prefixing or Suffixing a Line . . . . . . . . . 14.2 Reordering AWS Records . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3 Editing Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . 14.3.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4 Editing Character Strings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . 14.4.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 14.4.3 Tracking Edited Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS 15.1 Copying Data Within the Active AWS . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.1.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2 Copying Data to an AWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.1 Alternate Form of Screen Copy . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.2 Copying All or a Range of Lines . . . . . . . . . . . 15.2.3 Copying Based on a Character String . . . . . . . . 15.3 Copying Data Between Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.1 Copying All or a Range of Lines . . . . . . . . . . . 15.3.2 Copying Based on a Character String . . . . . . . . Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS 16.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 16.1.1 Deleting by Line Number . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

13-1 13-2 13-3 13-4 13-5 13-6 13-8 13-9 13-10 13-10 13-11 13-13 13-14 14-1 14-2 14-2 14-2 14-3 14-4 14-4 14-5 14-6 14-6 14-7 14-8 15-1 15-2 15-2 15-3 15-8 15-9 15-10 15-10 15-12 15-13 15-13 16-1 16-2 16-2

16.1.2 Deleting by Presence/Absence of a String 16.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3 Using 3270 Hardware Facilities . . . . . . . 16.3.1 Using the ERASE EOF Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16.3.2 Using the DELETE Key

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information

. . . . . . . .

Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS 18.1 Entering Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.3 Using a Mask . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.4 Using a PF Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.1.5 Using the Command Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2 Formatting Inserted Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.1 Using Automatic Indentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18.2.2 Using the Software Tab Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS 19.1 Centering Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . 19.1.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2 Controlling Capitalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.2.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . 19.2.2 Using a Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3 Reformatting Text Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.3.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . 19.3.2 Using a Line Command . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4 Shifting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.4.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . 19.4.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 19.5 Splitting and Joining Text Lines . . . . . . . . . . 19.5.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . 19.5.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS 20.1 Finding Specific Occurrences of a String . . . . 20.1.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . 20.1.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 20.2 Including/Excluding Lines Containing a String . 20.2.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . 20.2.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 20.3.1 Translating the Search String . . . . . . . . 20.3.2 Delimiting the Search String . . . . . . . . 20.3.3 Qualifying the Search String . . . . . . . . 20.3.4 Specifying the String in Hexadecimal . . . . . . . . 20.3.5 Positioning the Resulting Display

CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

16-3 16-4 16-6 16-6 16-7 17-1 18-1 18-2 18-2 18-8 18-11 18-13 18-14 18-15 18-15 18-16 19-1 19-2 19-2 19-3 19-5 19-5 19-6 19-7 19-7 19-8 19-10 19-10 19-11 19-13 19-13 19-17 20-1 20-2 20-3 20-5 20-6 20-6 20-8 20-10 20-10 20-10 20-10 20-11 20-13

Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS . . . . . . . . . . 21.1 Using a Primary Command 21.2 Using Line Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS . . . . . . . . . . 22.1.1 Renumbering Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1.2 Display Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1.3 Include Sequence Numbers in the Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1.4 Set AWS Sequence Number Attribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22.1.5 Including CA-Roscoe Sequence Numbers With PRINT/SUBMIT Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member 23.1 Creating a Library Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1.1 A CA-Roscoe library member name MUST: . . . . . 23.1.2 Member Name Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23.1.3 Assigning a Description and/or Attributes . . . . . . . 23.2 Updating a Member . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

21-1 21-2 21-3 22-1 22-1 22-2 22-2 22-3 22-3 23-1 23-2 23-2 23-3 23-4 23-5

CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 13.

AWS: Introducing the AWS When you sign on to CA-Roscoe, an AWS (or Active Work Space) is automatically allocated for your use. If you split the screen, a second AWS is automatically allocated for that subsession (a split screen appears). These AWSs are named ROSn, where n is a unique identifier. (The name of the AWS that you are currently working with is shown at the right side of the System Information Line.) All data entry and editing that you do during your CA-Roscoe session is done in one of these temporary work areas. Note: See Chapter 8, “Selecting a Screen Format” on page 8-1 for information about the CA-Roscoe split screen facility. You can place data in an AWS by entering it from the terminal or copying it from the CA-Roscoe library, an attached job output file or an OS data set. After editing the data, you can store it as a member in the CA-Roscoe library, print a copy of it at a 328x-type or system printer, submit it to the operating system, write it to a data set or delete it. The data in an AWS is stored in the form of variable length records not exceeding 255 characters in length. (Each line in an AWS is considered to be a record.) These records are kept in order by six-digit sequence numbers that are created and maintained externally from your data. The maximum number of records that you can have in an AWS is set by your site management. Any data remaining in an AWS when you sign off is automatically saved for you if the AWS has a RECOVERABLE attribute. The data is saved in the CA-Roscoe library as a member. One member is created for each recoverable AWS that you are using. The members are named SAVAWSnn, where nn is a unique identifier. These members are also created in the event of a network shutdown or system failure. The next time you sign back on to CA-Roscoe, you can use these members to restore your AWS(s).

Chapter 13.

AWS: Introducing the AWS 13-1

13.1 Attaching an AWS to the Terminal

13.1 Attaching an AWS to the Terminal The rest of this chapter describes how you can: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Attach the currently active or a specific AWS. Bring data from a variety of sources into the AWS. Change the name and/or attributes of any existing AWS. Create one or more AWSs. Detach the active AWS. Discard (remove) an existing AWS. Position the display within the active AWS. Reattach the active AWS. Select an existing AWS for display.

13-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

13.2 Attaching an AWS

13.2 Attaching an AWS The ATTACH command is used to bind an existing AWS to the terminal so that all or part of its contents can be displayed and modified. To view the entire contents of the currently active AWS, enter: ATTACH To view the entire contents of a specific AWS and make it the active AWS, you might enter: ATTACH AWS SAMPLE where SAMPLE is the name assigned to an existing AWS. When working with the currently active AWS, you can use ATTACH to: ■ Limit the display to a particular range of lines. For example, to view only lines 200 through 800 of the currently active AWS, you would enter: ATTACH 2== 8== ■ Begin the display with the first occurrence of a particular character string. For example, assume that the active AWS contains a COBOL program and you want to begin the display with the line containing PROCEDURE DIVISION. To do this, enter: ATTACH 'PROCEDURE DIVISION' The display begins with the first line in the active AWS that contains the specified string. (Note that the string specified with ATTACH must be enclosed by a special character that is not found within the string itself.)

Chapter 13.

AWS: Introducing the AWS 13-3

13.3 Bringing Data Into an AWS

13.3 Bringing Data Into an AWS You can place data into an AWS by: ■ Entering data directly from the terminal - using the commands described in Chapter 18, “AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS” on page 18-1. ■ Copying data into the AWS - using the commands described in Chapter 15, “AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS” on page 15-1, you can copy data from: – – – – –

Another AWS. The current screen display. A library member. An attached data set object. An attached job output file.

Also refer to Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” on page 27-1 and Chapter 34, “Library: Performing Library Management Tasks” on page 34-1 for additional commands that can be used to place data within an AWS.

13-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

13.4 Changing AWS Names/Attributes

13.4 Changing AWS Names/Attributes You can change the name or attribute(s) of any existing AWS using the commands: ■ RENAME - to change the name of an existing AWS, as in: RENAME AWS SAMPLE TEST which renames the AWS named SAMPLE to TEST. ■ ALTER AWS - to change the attributes of an existing AWS, as in: ALTER AWS TEST SPLIT ALTERAWS which discards the AWS named TEST when the screen in which the CREATE command was entered is terminated. (Attributes that are not included with the ALTER command remain unchanged. See 13.5, “Creating an AWS” on page 13-6 for additional information about AWS attributes. You can also use the modifiable display provided by the STATUS AWS command to rename or change AWS attributes. See Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information” on page 17-1 for details.

Chapter 13.

AWS: Introducing the AWS 13-5

13.5 Creating an AWS

13.5 Creating an AWS When you sign on to CA-Roscoe, you automatically have two AWSs assigned to you for your session. (Their names are ROSn, where n is a unique identifier.) You can use the CREATE command to name and define the attributes of one or more additional AWSs. The maximum number of additional AWSs that you can work with is set by site management. To create an AWS, you might enter: CREATE AWS SAMPLE where SAMPLE is the name assigned to this AWS. You can use almost any one- to eight-character name that conforms to CA-Roscoe member naming conventions. (The restricted names are FLIP, NEXT, PREV, ROSn, SYSn and TMPn (where n is a numeric value); B, F, N, P, T, and R are also restricted.) Since no attributes are defined with the CREATE command in the preceding example, the default values are used. The attributes that you can assign to an AWS (and their default values) are: ■ RECOVERABLE or NONRECOVERABLE These define whether the contents of the AWS is to be backed up on disk and recovered in the event of a session or system failure. The default is RECOVERABLE. ■ SESSION, SPLIT, RPF or LEVEL: These define the retention period for the AWS, where: SESSION

Discards the AWS when you end your session. (Default)

SPLIT

Discards the AWS when the screen in which the AWS was created is terminated.

RPF

Discards the AWS when the RPF application containing the CREATE command terminates (In this case, application refers to the initiating RPF program and all of its subordinate RPF programs.)

LEVEL

Discards the AWS when the RPF program containing the CREATE command terminates.

■ ACTIVE or INACTIVE These define whether the AWS is to become the active AWS for the screen containing the command. The default is ACTIVE.

13-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

13.5 Creating an AWS

■ IMPLICIT or EXPLICIT These define how the AWS is to be identified when a SELECT command is issued. The default is IMPLICIT. (See 13.10, “Selecting an AWS” on page 13-14 for additional information.) ■ NEW, REUSE or RETAIN These define the type of AWS being created, where: NEW REUSE RETAIN

Indicates this is a new AWS. (Default) Reuses an existing AWS after deleting its contents. Reuses an existing AWS while retaining its contents.

The attributes described thus far relate only to an AWS that you create. Once created, each AWS has its own attributes that affect how data are displayed and/or handled. To display all of the attributes associated with each existing AWS, use the command: STATUS AWS Also see Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information” on page 17-1 for a description of all AWS attributes.

Chapter 13.

AWS: Introducing the AWS 13-7

13.6 Detaching an AWS

13.6 Detaching an AWS The currently active AWS remains attached to the terminal until you: ■ CREATE another AWS with an ACTIVE attribute. ■ ATTACH or SELECT another existing AWS. ■ Execute a command (like ATTACH LIB) that causes output to the Execution Area. ■ Execute the DETACH command, explicitly releasing the AWS. ■ Execute the DISCARD command, explicitly removing the current AWS. ■ Press the CLEAR key.

13-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

13.7 Discarding an AWS

13.7 Discarding an AWS You can remove a specific AWS by: ■ Explicitly identifying the AWS via the DISCARD command, as in: DISCARD AWS TEST where the AWS named TEST is removed and its contents deleted. ■ Implicitly removing it when activating another AWS, as in: SELECT SAMPLE DISCARD where the current AWS is discarded when the AWS named SAMPLE is activated. You can also use the modifiable display provided by the STATUS AWS command to discard one or more AWSs. (See Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information” on page 17-1 for details.) Finally, the retention attribute associated with an AWS also controls when that AWS will be discarded. For example, if you create an AWS with the retention attribute of SPLIT, that AWS will be discarded when the split screen in which the CREATE command was executed is terminated. (See 13.5, “Creating an AWS” on page 13-6 for additional information.)

Chapter 13.

AWS: Introducing the AWS 13-9

13.8 Positioning the Display

13.8 Positioning the Display This section describes how you can position the display of the currently active AWS: ■ Based on the position of an internal pointer. ■ To a specific line by using primary and line commands.

13.8.1 Positioning via the Internal Pointer CA-Roscoe maintains internal pointers that are positioned to a line based on the execution of a command. While pointer positioning occurs with all forms of attached data, it is most frequently used when manipulating the contents of an AWS. For example, if you enter the command DELETE 500, the AWS pointer is positioned to the line following the deleted line. You can then reference that line by replacing a command's line number operand with an asterisk (*). To illustrate how you might use pointer positioning, assume that you enter the commands: DELETE 6== 9== COPY Q 21== ATTACH Q,, The resulting display will begin with line 2101 because: ■ Lines 600 through 900 are deleted. The AWS pointer is positioned to the line following the last deleted line (the line following 900). ■ The line at which the pointer is currently positioned is then copied after line 2100. The pointer is reset to the last copied line (the new line 2101). ■ The AWS contents are then redisplayed, beginning with the line at which the pointer is currently positioned. This example assumes that all three commands appear in the Command Area when the ENTER key is pressed. The results would be different if the active AWS is attached and the commands are entered one at a time, where: ■ Lines 600 through 900 are deleted. The AWS pointer is positioned to the line following the last deleted line. The data are then redisplayed. The redisplay of attached data causes the pointer to be positioned to the first displayed line. ■ The line at which the pointer is currently positioned (the first line of the active AWS) is then copied after line 2100. The data are again redisplayed. Again, the AWS pointer is positioned to the first displayed line. ■ The AWS contents are then explicitly redisplayed. The display begins with the first line of the active AWS.

13-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

13.8 Positioning the Display

When using the asterisk (*) to reference the current pointer position, you can qualify it with a positive or negative value, as in: *-5

References the line that is five lines after the current pointer position.

*+5

References the line that is five lines before the current pointer position.

For additional information, see the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide. When applicable, the command descriptions include the position of the pointer after the command is executed.

13.8.2 Positioning to Specific Lines This section describes how you can position the display to a specific line. Also see Chapter 20, “AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS” on page 20-1 for information about positioning the display to begin with a line that contains a specific character string.

13.8.2.1 Using Primary Commands If the AWS that you are viewing exceeds the number of lines in your terminal screen, you can reposition the display by: ■ Pressing any of the scrolling PF keys. ■ Using the POINT command with the LINE operand. For example, to reposition the display to begin with line 2500, you would enter: POINT AWS LINE 25== To position to the first or last line of the display, you would enter: POINT AWS LINE T or POINT AWS LINE B When browsing the STATUS AWS display, entering an * (asterisk) in the first unprotected field for a specific entry repositions the display to begin with that entry.

Chapter 13.

AWS: Introducing the AWS 13-11

13.8 Positioning the Display

13.8.2.2 Using Line Commands The line commands shown in the following figure can be used to reposition the displayed data. Simply enter the appropriate line command in the sequence number field of the display. COMMAND ACTION AFTER COMMAND EXECUTED v

Display begins with line v (display begins with line 500 if that value is typed in the sequence number field of any line).

*

Display begins with the line that contained the *. Can be qualified with: +v

Display begins v number of lines after the line that contained the command.

-v

Display begins v number of lines before the line that contained the command.

+P [v]

Display scrolled forward one or v number of pages, where a page equals the number of lines in the Execution Area.

-P [v]

Display scrolled backward one or v number of pages.

T+

Display begins with the first line of the active AWS. Can be qualified with: v

B-

Display contains the last line of the active AWS. Can be qualified with: v

13-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Display begins v number of lines after the first line of the active AWS.

Display begins v number of lines before the last line of the active AWS.

13.9 Reattaching the Current AWS

13.9 Reattaching the Current AWS At any time during your terminal session, you can attach another AWS, a data set object, job output, or a library member/selection list. After browsing that data, you can return to the AWS. For example, the following screens show how you can ATTACH a library member, displays it so you can browse it, and from there you can reATTACH the data you have been viewing.

7

8

ATTACH INVLIST > > AWS(XYZ.SAMPLE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 LINE ==1 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+.. ...... ============================== T O P ======================== =====1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. =====2 PROGRAM-ID. SAMPLE. =====3 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

7

8 ATTACH AWS ) > > LIB(XYZ.INVREPT) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+.. ============================== T O P ======================== ===1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. ===2== PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT. ===3== ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

7

> > AWS(XYZ.SAMPLE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 LINE ==1 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+.. ============================== T O P ======================== =====1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. =====2 PROGRAM-ID. SAMPLE. =====3 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

8

When you reATTACH the AWS, the display begins with the first line of the prior display. To reattach at a different location within the same data, you can: ■ Use the AWS operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands to begin the display with the line containing a specific string, as in: FIRST AWS /DD/ ■ Use the AWS operand with the INCL or EXCL command to begin the display with a list of lines containing (or not containing) a specific string, as in: INCL AWS /DD/ ■ Use the AWS operand of the POINT command to begin the display with a specific line, as in: POINT AWS LINE 72==

Chapter 13.

AWS: Introducing the AWS 13-13

13.10 Selecting an AWS

13.10 Selecting an AWS You can use the SELECT command to activate and display an existing AWS. The AWS can be activated by: ■ Name. For example, to activate the AWS named SAMPLE, you would enter: SELECT SAMPLE Note: If the AWS was created with an EXPLICIT attribute, you can only activate it by explicitly specifying its name with the SELECT command. ■ Relative position, if it was created with the IMPLICIT attribute. For example, to display the next or prior AWS, enter: SELECT AWS NEXT or SELECT AWS PREV To bounce the display between the currently active AWS and the the previously active AWS, enter: SELECT AWS FLIP Additional operands of the SELECT command allow you to: ■ Discard the AWS you are currently viewing when you activate a different AWS, as in: SELECT AWS SAMPLE DISCARD where the AWS you are currently viewing is discarded, and the AWS named SAMPLE is activated. ■ Retain the attributes associated with the current AWS when you activate a different AWS, as in: SELECT AWS SAMPLE NOATTR where the AWS named SAMPLE is activated and its attributes are overridden by the attributes of the AWS that had been current. ■ Designate which internal pointer is to be used when an AWS is activated. One pointer is used by the SELECT command; the other pointer marks a line affected by the execution of a command. By default, the SELECT-related pointer is used. To override this pointer, you would enter: SELECT SAMPLE NOPOINT where the resulting display begins with the line at which the command-related pointer is positioned.

13-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS This chapter describes how you can: ■ Add a character string to one or more lines using the FILL, PREFIX, and SUFFIX primary commands. ■ Reorder specific records of an AWS. ■ Edit one or more characters within one or more lines using the XLATE primary command or the XL, XLB, or XLT line commands. ■ Edit character strings within one or more lines using the EDIT primary command or an E, EB, EE, or ET line command. (You can also trace lines affected by an edit operation.) Note: At most sites, data that you add or change in an AWS is automatically translated to its corresponding uppercase characters (the word division is translated to DIVISION). You can control how the data that you change is to be treated. See Chapter 3, “Controlling Character Recognition” for additional information.

Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS 14-1

14.1 Adding Character Strings

14.1 Adding Character Strings You can add a character string at the beginning (using the PREFIX command), anywhere within (using the FILL command) or at the end (using the SUFFIX command) of one or more lines within the active AWS.

14.1.1 Inserting a String Within a Line The FILL command can be used to insert a character string into specific columns of one or more lines comprising the active AWS. To limit the operation to specific columns, include the appropriate column numbers before the string, as in: FILL 73 79 'INVLIST' where columns 73 through 79 of every line in the active AWS will contain the string INVLIST. If column numbers are omitted, the column boundaries currently in effect are used. Thus, if the current column boundaries are 1 through 80 and you enter: FILL 'QQQ' columns 1 through 80 of every line in the active AWS will contain ***. (If the column range is greater than the string, the string is repeated.) Note: Column boundaries specified with the command effect only the execution of the command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information. To limit the operation to specific lines, specify the appropriate line numbers after the string, as in: FILL 73 79 'INVLIST' 1== 12==

14.1.2 Prefixing or Suffixing a Line When using the PREFIX or SUFFIX command, the default is to prefix or suffix every line within the active AWS with the designated string, as in: PREFIX 'TESTONLY' Both PREFIX and SUFFIX allow you to limit their operation to a specific range of lines by including the appropriate line numbers after the string, as in: SUFFIX 'SAMPLE' 3== 9== Neither operation is performed if the result would cause a line to exceed 255 characters.

14-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

14.2 Reordering AWS Records

14.2 Reordering AWS Records This section describes how you can use the ORDER (AWS) command to reorder the contents of an AWS. Use the ORDER command to invoke the CA-Roscoe internal sort routine. Reorder specific records of the AWS in descending order, as in: ORDER AWS COL 1 7 DES If more than one AWS is active, specify the name of the AWS to be reordered, as in: ORDER AWS TMP2 COL 1 7 DES You can reorder multiple groups of AWS records. Specify the columns to be reordered, and the sorting order (ASCending or DEScending). If no order is specified, the data will be sorted in ASCending order. You must use the word 'AND' (or its character equivalent) to separate the sorting boundaries, as in: ORDER AWS COL 1 7 DES AND COL 17 24 Note: The word 'AND' can also be represented by the '&' (ampersand) or '@' (the at sign). If sites or users set the '&' as a command delimiter, it will override the sort syntax and function as a delimiter. To use '&' within the ORDER command, the command delimiter must be set to another character. See 6.5, “Synopsis of Session Attributes” on page 6-15 for information on changing the command delimiter. A maximum of six order criteria are permitted. When sorting multiple column groups, the sort is done in order of the columns specified. So, in the example above, columns 1 through 7 are reordered, and then columns 17 through 24 are sorted with respect to the first sort.

Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS 14-3

14.3 Editing Characters

14.3 Editing Characters This section describes how you can use primary or line commands to change one or more characters. Note: If you want to change a string of characters, see 14.4, “Editing Character Strings” on page 14-6.

14.3.1 Using a Primary Command Use the XLATE command to replace one character with another, as in: XLATE /A/B/ where every occurrence of the character A is replaced with the character B. Multiple characters can be specified as search and replacement characters, as in: XLATE /A1Q/B9 / where every occurrence of the character A is replaced with a B, every 1 is replaced with a 9, and every * is replaced with a space. Note: The search and replacement characters must be delimited by a special character that is not one of the search or replace characters. You can limit an operation to specific columns and/or lines. Specify the columns to be searched before the character(s). Specify the line numbers to be searched after the character(s), as in: XLATE 2= 75 /-/ / 1== 92== where only the data within columns 20 through 75 of lines 100 through 9200 are to be affected. Note: Column boundaries specified with the command effect only the execution of that command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information.

14-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

14.3 Editing Characters

14.3.2 Using Line Commands The line commands used to perform character replacement are: XLB

Replaces the search character(s) with the replacement character(s) on every line beginning with the line on which it is entered and continuing through the last line in the active AWS.

XLT

Replaces the search character(s) with the replacement character(s) on every line beginning with the first line of the active AWS and continuing through the line on which the command is entered.

XL [v]

Replaces the search character(s) with the replacement character(s) beginning with the line on which it is entered and continuing for v number of lines. If no number is specified, only the line containing the command is changed.

Enter the appropriate command in the sequence number field. Then enter the search and replacement character(s) in the data portion of the same line. As illustrated in the following screen, the strings must be delimited.

7

8 > > AWS(AAA.DATEFILE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.... ==61== ORDER NO. DATE REQUESTED DATE DELIVERED XLB2== '/'- ' ==63== A12984-XX =9/14/91 12/15/91 ==64== A23563-XX =1/=4/92 =2/=1/92 ==65== A45887-XX =6/2=/92 =9/19/92

The following screen shows the result of the edit.

7

8 > > AWS(AAA.DATEFILE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.... ==61== ORDER NO. DATE REQUESTED DATE DELIVERED ==62== ==63== A12984-XX =9-14-91 12-15-91 ==64== A23563-XX =1-=4-92 =2-=1-92 ==65== A45887-XX =6-2=-92 =9-19-92

Once search and replacement characters are specified, they are remembered until you change them. This allows you to selectively change specific occurrences of a character.

Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS 14-5

14.4 Editing Character Strings

14.4 Editing Character Strings You can change a character string within the active AWS using primary or line commands. Note: If you want to change one or more single characters, see section 14.3, “Editing Characters” on page 14-4.

14.4.1 Using a Primary Command Use the EDIT command to replace one character string with another string. The first string specified with the command is the original (or search) string. The second string is the replacement string. For example, to replace every occurrence of the string INVENTORY-BALANCE with the string INVENTORY-AMOUNT, you would enter: EDIT /INVENTORY-BALANCE/INVENTORY-AMOUNT/ The character strings must be delimited by a special character not found within either of the strings. You can limit an edit operation to specific columns and/or lines. Specify the columns to be searched before the character strings. Specify the line numbers to be searched after the strings. For example: EDIT 2= 75 /INVENTORY-BALANCE/INVENTORY-AMOUNT/ 1== 92== causes the command to affect only the data within columns 20 through 75 of lines 100 through 9200. Note: Column boundaries specified with the command affect only the execution of that command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information. By default, the search is for any string of characters that match the edit string. To avoid possible confusion, you can qualify the string with the keyword WORD, BEGIN, PREFIX, EMBED, SUFFIX, or END. (See Chapter 20, “AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS” for additional information about these qualifiers.) For example, if you enter: EDIT /THE/AN/ WORD the search is for every occurrence of THE that is preceded and followed by a non-alphanumeric character. If you omitted the qualifier, words such as OTHER and THERE would match the search string and would be changed.

14-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

14.4 Editing Character Strings

In addition to replacing a character string, you can also use EDIT to: ■ Delete a character string from one or more lines. By defining a null replacement string, every occurrence of the search string will be deleted. For example, to delete every occurrence of the string INVENTORY-BALANCE from the active AWS, you would specify: EDIT /INVENTORY-BALANCE// Lines containing the string are not deleted; only the string is deleted from those lines. ■ Replace the entire contents of one or more lines. Defining a null search string, the contents of every line will be overlaid with the replacement string. For example, to replace the current contents of lines 1800 through 2000 with the string FILLER, you would enter: EDIT //FILLER/ 18== 2===

14.4.2 Using Line Commands The edit line commands are: EB

Replaces the search string with the replacement string on every line beginning with the line on which it is entered and continuing through the last line in the active AWS.

ET

Replaces the search string with the replacement string on every line beginning with the first line of the active AWS and continuing through the line on which the command is entered.

EE

Replaces the search string with the replacement string on every line within the block of lines. (An EE must appear in the sequence number field of the first and last line of the range.)

E [v]

Replaces the search string with the replacement string beginning with the line on which the string is entered and continuing for v number of lines. If no number is specified, only the line containing the command is changed.

Enter the appropriate command in the sequence number field. Then enter the search and replacement character strings in the data portion of the same line. The strings must be delimited.

Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS 14-7

14.4 Editing Character Strings

7

8 > > AWS(AAA.DATEFILE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+6....+.... ...... ============================= T O P ======================= EB 1== /PART-NUMBER-MSTR/PART-NUMBER-OUT/_ ===2== PROGRAM-ID. INVLIST. ===3== ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

Once edit strings are specified, they are remembered until you change them by entering another edit line command. This allows you to selectively change specific occurrences of a string. For example, assume you only want to change certain occurrences of the string THIS to THAT. Once you have specified the string, you can scroll through the active AWS, entering the appropriate edit line command where needed.

14.4.3 Tracking Edited Lines You can keep track of lines changed by an edit operation using the SET EDITCHNG command or the modifiable STATUS SESSION display. Using the primary command to illustrate, you can activate the tracking facility by entering: SET EDITCHNG ON When the facility is active, any subsequent EDIT primary command or E, EB, or ET line command causes a change indicator to appear in the sequence number field of affected lines. The indicator remains in the sequence number field until you: ■ Replace the contents of the active AWS, ■ Issue the RESET line command or SET EDITCHNG RESET command, or ■ Enter the SET EDITCHNG OFF command, or deactivate the facility via the STATUS SESSION display. The following examples illustrate how you might use this facility. Notice that the search string is qualified as a prefix; thus line 6700 is not affected.

14-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

14.4 Editing Character Strings

7 SET EDITCHNG ON

8

EDIT /IN-/INPUT-/ PREFIX > > AWS(AAA.DATEFILE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+6....+.... ==61== WORKING-STORAGE SECTION. ==62== =1 HOLDING-AREA. ==63== =2 IN-NAME PIC X(6) 'ROSCOE'. ==64== =2 IN-ADDR PIC X(9) 'PRINCETON'. ==65== =2 IN-STATE PIC X(2) VALUE 'NJ'. ==66== =1 WORK-AREA. ==67== =2 DATE-IN-PROCESS PIC X(8) 'XX/XX/XX'.

7

8 > > AWS(AAA.DATEFILE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > <..1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+6....+....7... ==61== WORKING-STORAGE SECTION. ==62== =1 HOLDING-AREA. ==CHG> =2 INPUT-NAME PIC X(6) 'ROSCOE'. ==CHG> =2 INPUT-ADDR PIC X(9) 'PRINCETON'. ==CHG> =2 INPUT-STATE PIC X(2) VALUE 'NJ'. ==66== =1 WORK-AREA. ==67== =2 DATE-IN-PROCESS PIC X(8) 'XX/XX/XX'.

The change indicators placed in the sequence number field are modifiable. This means you can overtype any indicator with a line command. After the command is executed, the indicator is redisplayed. If you want to track another edit operation, you can remove the change indicators by issuing the RESET line command or: SET EDITCHNG RESET To deactivate the facility, either modify the STATUS SESSION display, or issue the command: SET EDITCHNG OFF

Chapter 14. AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS 14-9

14.4 Editing Character Strings

When the facility is deactivated, the change indicators remain displayed. To remove these indicators, either: ■ Deactivate the facility by issuing: SET EDITCHNG OFF RESET

or

■ Issue the RESET line command after the facility is deactivated. If you want to see a non-modifiable display of lines affected by the execution of the EDIT primary command, specify the TRACE command prior to EDIT, as in: TRACE EDIT 'FILLER'FILLER' NOTRACE TRACE causes all affected lines to be displayed. While this facility is active, each time you execute the EDIT command, a list of affected lines is displayed. The NOTRACE command deactivates this facility.

14-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS This chapter describes how you can copy data: ■ From one location to another within the active AWS using the COPY primary command, copy line commands, or repeat line commands. ■ Into an AWS from another AWS, a screen display, library member, attached data set object or attached job output file using the COPY, COPYS and COPYX primary commands. ■ From one split screen to the active AWS in the other split screen using the XCOPY, XCOPYS and XCOPYX primary commands. All copy operations are nondestructive (the lines being copied are not deleted from their original location).

Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS 15-1

15.1 Copying Data Within the Active AWS

15.1 Copying Data Within the Active AWS This section explains how you can use primary or line commands to copy data from one location to another within the active AWS.

15.1.1 Using a Primary Command When copying data, you must identify the line(s) to be copied and the destination of the operation. The destination can be specified as: v * T B or ,,

15-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Number of the line at, or after, which the data are to be placed. After the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned. Before the first line of the active AWS. After the last line of the active AWS.

15.1 Copying Data Within the Active AWS

15.1.1.1 To copy a single line: Enter the COPY command followed by the number of the line to be copied and the destination line number, as in: COPY 295= 36== In this example, the contents of line 2950 is to be copied at or after line 3600. (If the destination line number exists, the data are inserted after it. If the line number does not exist, the data are placed at that line number.)

15.1.1.2 To copy a range of lines: Enter the COPY command with the number of the first and last line to be copied plus the destination. For example, to copy lines 2500 through 2700 to the top of the active AWS, you would enter: COPY 25== 27== T

15.1.1.3 To duplicate the copied lines at the destination: Use the Nv operand to duplicate lines, where v is the number of times the data are to be repeated. For example, to copy lines 700 through 900 at, or after, line 2500 and have those lines repeated three times, you would enter: COPY 7== 9== 25== N3

15.1.2 Using Line Commands You can use the: ■ Copy line commands to duplicate one or more lines to another location within the active AWS. ■ Repeat line commands to repeat one or more lines immediately after themselves.

15.1.2.1 Copy Line Commands As with the primary commands, you must indicate the line(s) to be copied and the destination of that operation. (The destination line commands are shown in the following table.) ■ To copy a single line: Type C in the sequence number field of the line to be copied. (Also include a destination line command in the sequence number field of the appropriate line.)

Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS 15-3

15.1 Copying Data Within the Active AWS

■ To copy a block of lines: Type CC in the sequence number field of the first and last lines to be copied. (Also include a destination line command in the appropriate sequence number field.) Note: The lines involved in the operation need not appear on the same screen. You can scroll the display forward or backward while the command is pending (waiting for a matching copy or destination line command). ■ To copy a range of lines: In addition to the appropriate destination line command, type one of the following line commands in the appropriate sequence number field: Cv

To copy v number of lines (for example, entering C5 causes the line containing the command plus the next four lines to be copied).

CB

To copy all lines from the line containing the command through the last line of the active AWS.

CT

To copy all lines from the first line in the active AWS through the line containing the command.

■ To copy repeatedly: Type CR (for a single line copy) or CCR (on the first and last lines, for a block copy) in the appropriate sequence number field. Then, type a destination line command on the appropriate target sequence number field. The destination line command that you use will either cause the CR or CCR command(s) to remain displayed, allowing you to copy the same line(s) to multiple locations, or remove the commands. (You can also use the RESET line command to remove a pending CR or CCR command.) The following table shows all of the destination line commands for Copy. Command

Type

Meaning

A [v]

Destination Only

After this line, insert one or v number of copies.

B [v]

Before this line, insert one or v number of copies.

BB [v]

After the last line in the active AWS insert one or v number of copies.

TT [v]

Before the first line in the active AWS, insert one or v number of copies.

O [v] OD [v]

15-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Overlay At Destination

Overlay one or v number of lines with copied data. Overlay one or v number of lines with copied data and remove pending CR or CCR line command.

15.1 Copying Data Within the Active AWS

Command

Type

Meaning

OO

Overlay block of lines, where OO is entered on the first and last line of the block of lines to be overlaid.

OB

Overlay all lines from the line containing the command through the end of the active AWS with the copied data.

OT

Overlay all lines from the first AWS line through the line containing the command with the copied data.

AD [v]

Destination And Remove Pending CR

After this line, insert one or v number of copies.

BD [v]

CCR Line Command

Before this line, insert one or v number of copies.

BBD [v]

After the last line in the active AWS, insert one or v number of copies.

TTD [v]

Before the first line in the active AWS, insert one or v number of copies.

Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS 15-5

15.1 Copying Data Within the Active AWS

15.1.2.2 Using Overlay Destination Line Commands The following example illustrates how you can use overlay destination line commands. Only the blank characters in the target lines are overlaid with corresponding data from the source lines. AWS: Copy Line Commands Using Overlay

7

8

> > >

AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ C =8== SAMPLE PIC X( ). O2 9== PART-DESCRIPTION-IN ==1=== INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN

7

8

> > >

AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ===8== SAMPLE PIC X( ). ===9== PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X( ). ==1=== INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC X( ).

The number of lines to be overlaid must be equal to or greater than the number of lines being copied. For example, the upper screen in the previous example shows that one line is to be copied (800) and that two lines are to be overlaid with that data (900 and 1000). The lower screen shows the result, where PIC X( ) has overlaid the corresponding blank positions in the designated lines. (SAMPLE has been ignored since its corresponding positions contain data.)

15-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

15.1 Copying Data Within the Active AWS

15.1.2.3 Repeat Line Commands To copy one line immediately after itself, enter the R line command in the appropriate sequence number field. To repeat one line multiple times, use Rv where v is the number of times the line is to be repeated. To repeat a block of lines, enter the RR line command in the sequence number field of the first and last line to be repeated. The following example illustrates the result of entering R4 on line 3200. (Notice that the sequence numbers of the repeated lines are incremented by 1, so as to have minimal impact on preexisting sequence numbers.) AWS: Repeat Line Command Example

7

8

> > >

AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ==3=== PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26). ==31== INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC S9(5). R4 2== FILLER PIC X(3=). ==33== FD INVENTORY-REPORT

7

8

> > >

AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ==3=== PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26). ==31== INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC S9(5). ==32== FILLER PIC X(3=). ==32=1 FILLER PIC X(3=). ==32=2 FILLER PIC X(3=). ==32=3 FILLER PIC X(3=). ==32=4 FILLER PIC X(3=). ==33== FD INVENTORY-REPORT

Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS 15-7

15.2 Copying Data to an AWS

15.2 Copying Data to an AWS You can use the COPY, COPYS and COPYX commands to bring data from the current screen display, another AWS, a library member, an attached data set object or an attached job output file into an AWS. When using these commands, you must designate the source of the data being copied and its destination within the active AWS. Optionally, you can direct the data to an AWS other than the currently active one.

──┬─COPY──┬──source ...──AWS-destination──┬─────────┬───────── ├─COPYS─┤ └─TP name─┘ └─COPYX─┘

The source operands that identify the data to be copied are: AWS name

From the designated existing AWS.

DSN

From the attached data set object. (Also see Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” for information about other ways you can copy a data set object into the active AWS.)

JOB

From the attached job output file.

LIB

From the attached library member or Selection List. (Also see Chapter 34, “Library: Performing Library Management Tasks” for information about other ways you can copy library data into the active AWS.)

mem

Name of the library member to be copied.

SCREEN

From the current screen display.

The destination of the copy operation within the active AWS or designated AWS must be specified as: v

Number of the line at, or after, which the data are to be inserted in the AWS.

*

After the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned.

T

Before the first line of the AWS.

B or ,,

After the last line of the AWS.

R

Replace the contents of the AWS.

15-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

15.2 Copying Data to an AWS

By default, the commands COPY, COPYS and COPYX bring data into the active AWS. You can designate a different existing AWS by using the TO name operand. Thus, COPY DSN T copies the currently attached data set object to the currently active AWS, while: COPY AWS SAMPLE1 B TO SAMPLE2 copies the entire contents of the AWS named SAMPLE1 to the bottom of the AWS named SAMPLE2.

15.2.1 Alternate Form of Screen Copy Assuming the CA defaults are in effect, you can also copy the screen when an RPF program or another application (like ETSO or CA-eMAIL+) is in control of the terminal by entering: :C in any unprotected field and pressing PF12. (The cursor must immediately follow the command :C.) If the CA defaults are not in effect, the STATUS SYSTEM display identifies the: ■ Escape character: The field RCSESCCH identifies the character to use. The default is a colon (:). ■ PF key: The field RCSESCPF identifies the PF key to use. The default is PF12. The screen is copied to the AWS identified by the SET COPYDEST command. Note: An AWS destination must be in effect for this type of copy operation to work successfully.

Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS 15-9

15.2 Copying Data to an AWS

15.2.2 Copying All or a Range of Lines You can use the COPY command to: ■ Copy all lines: Enter the COPY command, the keyword indicating the source of the data and the destination. For example, to copy the currently displayed screen after line 900 of the active AWS, enter: COPY SCREEN 9== If line 900 does not exist, the data are copied at that line number. ■ Copy a range of lines: Enter COPY, the appropriate source keyword, the number of the first and last line to be copied, and the destination, as in: COPY DSN 12== 25== B TO SAMPLE where lines 1200 through 2500 from the currently attached data set object are to be copied to the bottom of the AWS named SAMPLE.

15.2.3 Copying Based on a Character String You can use the command: ■ COPYS to copy line(s) from the source that contain a particular string into the active or designated AWS, as in: COPYS JOB /ADDRESS/ 12== where every line from the attached job output file containing the string ADDRESS is copied to, or immediately after line 1200 in the active AWS. (A source keyword, the appropriate string and a destination are required.) ■ COPYX to copy line(s) from the source that do not contain a particular string to the active or a designated AWS, as in: COPYX DSN /FILLER/ B TO TEST1 where every line from the attached data set object not containing the string FILL is copied to the bottom of the AWS named TEST1.

15-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

15.2 Copying Data to an AWS

Both COPYS and COPYX allow you to specify a range of lines to be searched for a string. To do this, include the appropriate line numbers after the string. For example, to copy every line between 1 and 300 that contain the string NAME from the library member UPLIST into the active AWS at, or immediately after, line 1200, you would enter: COPYS UPLIST /NAME/ 1 3== 12== By default, the entire line of the source data are searched for the specified string. You can limit the search operation to a specific range of columns. To limit the search operation when copying from: ■ A library member, attached data set object or attached job output file: – Use the SET BOUNDS primary command or BOUNDS line command to change the column boundaries associated with the source data. (See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information. – Specify a column range with the command, using the values shown on the Scale Line. For example, to copy every line containing the string FILLER within columns 10 through 50 of the attached job output file to the bottom of the active AWS, you would enter: COPYS JOB 1= 5= /FILLER/ B ■ The displayed screen or a Selection List: Assume that the left-most displayed position is column one and include the appropriate numbers, as in: COPYX SCR 1 3= /QQQ/ R where every line from the current screen not containing *** in the first thirty positions of the line is copied to the active AWS and replaces its contents.

Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS 15-11

15.3 Copying Data Between Screens

15.3 Copying Data Between Screens When you are working with split screens, you can use the XCOPY, XCOPYS and XCOPYX commands to copy data from one split screen to the other. The data are placed in the active AWS of the screen that contains the command. As with the other copy operands, this is a nondestructive operation (the lines being copied are not deleted from the source destination).

──┬─XCOPY──┬──┬────────────┬──AWS-destination───────────────── ├─XCOPYS─┤ └─source ...─┘ └─XCOPYX─┘

The source operands allow you to designate the data that is to be copied. The operands are: DSN

From the data set object attached in the other screen. (Also see Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” for information about other ways you can copy a data set object into the active AWS.)

JOB

From the job output file attached in the other screen.

LIB

From the library member or Selection List attached in the other screen. (See Chapter 34, “Library: Performing Library Management Tasks” for information about other ways you can copy library data into the active AWS.)

mem

Name of the library member to be copied.

If no source is specified, the default is the active AWS. The destination of the copy operation within the active AWS can be specified as: v

Number of the line at, or after, which the data are to be inserted in the active AWS.

*

After the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned.

T

Before the first line of the active AWS.

B or ,,

After the last line of the active AWS.

R

Replace the contents of the active AWS.

15-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

15.3 Copying Data Between Screens

15.3.1 Copying All or a Range of Lines You can copy all or part of the data from the other split screen into the AWS of the screen containing the command. ■ To copy all lines: Enter the XCOPY command, the optional keyword indicating the source of the data, and the destination, as in: XCOPY DSN 9== where the entire contents of the data set object attached in the other split screen is copied to, or immediately after, line 900 of the screen containing the command. ■ To copy a range of lines: Enter XCOPY, the appropriate optional source keyword, the number of the first and last line to be copied, and the destination, as in: XCOPY 1== 12== B Since no source keyword is specified in this example, lines 100 through 1200 from the active AWS in the other split screen are copied after the last line of the active AWS in the screen containing the command.

15.3.2 Copying Based on a Character String You can use the command: ■ XCOPYS to copy lines containing a particular character string from the other split screen into the AWS of the screen containing the command. ■ XCOPYX to copy lines not containing a particular character string from the other split screen into the AWS of the screen containing the command. You can use these commands to copy all or selected lines. ■ To copy all lines containing the string RECORD-NUMBER in the job output file attached in the other screen to the top of the active AWS in the screen containing the command: XCOPYS JOB /RECORD-NUMBER/ T

Chapter 15. AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS 15-13

15.3 Copying Data Between Screens

■ To copy every line between 1 and 300 that contains the string NAME from the data set object attached in the other split screen to, or immediately after, line 1200 of the active AWS in the screen containing the command: XCOPYS DSN /NAME/ 1 3== 12== By default, the entire line in the source data are searched for the specified string. When copying from: ■ A library member, attached data set object or attached job output file. You can limit the search operation to specific columns by: – Using the SET BOUNDS primary command or BOUNDS line command to change the column boundaries associated with the source data. (See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information. – Specifying a column range with the command, using the values shown on the Scale Line, as in: XCOPYS JOB 1= 5= /FILLER/ B where every line containing the string FILLER in columns 10 through 50 of the job attached in the other screen is copied to the bottom of the active AWS in the screen containing the command. ■ The displayed screen or a Selection List: You can limit the search to a specific column by assuming that the left-most displayed position is column one and include the appropriate numbers, as in: XCOPYS SCR 1 3= /QQQ/ R where every line from other screen containing *** in the first thirty positions of the line is copied to the active AWS of the screen containing the command and replaces its contents. Column numbers and line numbers can be specified together, as in: XCOPYS JOB 1= 5= /FILLER/ 12== 25== R where only columns 10 through 50 of lines 1200 through 2500 of the attached job are searched for the string FILLER. All matching lines are copied to the active AWS, replacing its prior contents.

15-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS This chapter describes how you can delete data from the active AWS using: ■ The DELETE primary command to delete one or more lines. ■ The DELETES and DELETEX primary commands to delete lines containing (or not containing) a specific string. ■ The delete line commands. ■ 3270 hardware facilities (for example, ERASE EOF and DELETE keys).

Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS 16-1

16.1 Using Primary Commands

16.1 Using Primary Commands You can use primary commands to delete one or more lines from the active or a specific AWS. The deletion can be by line number(s) or by the presence or absence of a specific character string.

16.1.1 Deleting by Line Number You can use the DELETE command to delete all or part of the contents of an AWS: ■ To delete the entire contents of the active AWS, enter: DELETE ■ To delete one line from a specific AWS, include the appropriate line number and the AWS name, as in: DELETE AWS SAMPLE 25== where line 2500 is to be deleted from the AWS named SAMPLE. ■ To delete a range of lines, include the first and last line numbers in the range. For example, to delete lines 1600 through 3500 from the active AWS, enter: DELETE 16== 35== When deleting a range of lines, you can indicate the last line of the end of the AWS by specifying two consecutive commas (,,). For example, to delete every line beginning with line 1600 through the end of the AWS named SAMPLE, enter: DELETE AWS SAMPLE 16== ,,

16-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

16.1 Using Primary Commands

16.1.2 Deleting by Presence/Absence of a String Use the DELETES and DELETEX commands to delete lines from the active or a specific AWS based on the occurrence of a specific character string. (Use the EDIT primary or line commands to delete a string without deleting the line.) ■ Use DELETES to delete lines that contain a particular string. For example, to delete all lines from the active AWS that contain the string PART-NUMBER-OUT, you would enter: DELETES 'PART-NUMBER-OUT' ■ Use DELETEX to perform the opposite function - to delete lines not containing a specified string. For example, to delete all lines from the AWS named SAMPLE that do not contain the string NEW-RECORD, you would enter: DELETEX AWS SAMPLE 'NEW-RECORD' By default, every line in the AWS is searched for the specified string. With both DELETES and DELETEX, you can limit the number of lines searched. For example, to delete all lines from the active AWS containing the string XYZ within lines 1 through 400, enter the line numbers after the string: DELETES 'XYZ' 1 4== Also by default, the area within the current (or default) column boundaries is searched for the string. To limit the columns involved, enter the number of the starting and ending columns searched. For example, to delete only those lines that do not contain INVENTORY-BALANCE in columns 1 through 50 of the active AWS, enter the column numbers before the string: DELETEX 1 5= 'INVENTORY-BALANCE' You can combine the operands to limit the search to a specific column range within specific lines, as in: DELETEX AWS SAMPLE 1 5== 'NEW RECORD' 1== 12== where every line within the AWS named SAMPLE not containing NEW RECORD in columns 1 through 500 of lines 100 through 1200 is deleted.

Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS 16-3

16.2 Using Line Commands

16.2 Using Line Commands You can use line commands to delete: ■ A single line: Enter a D in the sequence number field of each line to be deleted. ■ A block of lines: Enter DD in the sequence number field of the first and last lines of the block. When deleting a block of lines, the entire range need not appear on one screen. The display can be scrolled forward and backward while a DD command is pending (while waiting for a matching DD command to be entered). ■ A range of lines: In the sequence number field of the appropriate line, enter: Dv

To delete v number of lines (for example, D5 deletes the line containing the command and the next four lines).

DB

To delete all lines from the line containing the command through the last line of the active AWS.

DT

To delete all lines from the first line through the line containing the command.

■ One or more lines based on the presence or absence of a string: When using the commands shown in the following table, enter the command in the sequence number field and the string in the data portion of the same line. Once the string has been specified, it is remembered for any subsequent delete line command.

16-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

16.2 Using Line Commands

LINE COMMAND

MEANING

DS [v] [/string/]

Deletes line (or lines within v number of lines) containing string.

DSB [/string/]

Deletes all lines containing string from this line to end of active AWS.

DST [/string/]

Deletes all lines containing string from first line through this line.

DU [/string/]

Deletes all lines from this line until first line containing string.

DX [v] [/string/]

Deletes line (or lines within v number of lines) not containing string.

DXB [/string/]

Deletes all lines not containing string from this line to end of active AWS.

DXT [/string/]

Deletes all lines not containing string from first line through this line.

Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS 16-5

16.3 Using 3270 Hardware Facilities

16.3 Using 3270 Hardware Facilities CA-Roscoe supports the delete facilities available at 3270-type terminals as explained in the following subsections.

16.3.1 Using the ERASE EOF Key The current setting of the SET EOF and SET FILL commands determines the extent of deletion that is to occur when you use the ERASE EOF key to delete a line, where with: SET EOF DELETE1

If SET FILL BLANK is in effect and the left display margin is column one, the entire line is deleted. If the left display margin is other than column one, data beyond the right display margin is not deleted. If SET FILL NULL is in effect, the cursor is in column one and the left display margin is column one, the entire line is deleted. If the cursor is positioned to any other column (regardless of the left display margin), data beyond the right display margin is not deleted.

SET EOF DELETE

If SET FILL BLANK is in effect, the entire line is deleted if all of the data within the current display margins is erased. If SET FILL NULL is in effect, the entire line is deleted if the cursor is in the first displayed position (not necessarily column one). If the cursor is placed anywhere else, the contents of the line is deleted from the cursor position to the end of the display.

SET EOF ERASE

If the cursor is in the first displayed position of the line (not necessarily column one) when ERASE EOF is pressed, all of the displayed line is deleted (the line itself remains). (Data to the right or left of the current display margins is not deleted.) If the cursor is in any other position, the data from the cursor location to the right display margin is deleted.

16-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

16.3 Using 3270 Hardware Facilities

16.3.2 Using the DELETE Key The DELETE key deletes data one character at a time. To do so, position the cursor to the first character to be deleted and press the DELETE key. The character is deleted and the displayed data are shifted one position to the left. Any data existing beyond the right display margins is unaffected by this delete and shift operation.

Chapter 16. AWS: Deleting Data From an AWS 16-7

16-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information To display information about the active AWS plus all of the AWSs that are currently in use, enter the command: STATUS AWS Portions of the resulting display are modifiable. To produce a non-modifiable display, include the LIST operand, as in: STATUS AWS LIST The following example illustrates the type of information displayed. Note that if the bottom marker (== END OF LIST ==) is not displayed, the number of AWSs exceeds the screen size. Use PF keys to scroll the display. STATUS AWS Command: Sample Display

7

> > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===79 A+ >....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7.... ROSCOE AWS STATUS TOTAL SESSION\SPLIT RECOVERABLE MAX: 6 CURR: 2 MAX: 2 CURR: 2 M

8

NAME STATUS ROS MEMBER CHG LINES INCR LAST CURRENT ACT ASSOCIATED DATASET NAME VOLUME UNIT - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - ROS1 (NONE) CHG 24 1== 24== 24== (NONE) - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - MYAWS ABC.MYMEM 1137 1== 1137 1 TEST.SOURCE(MYSOURCE) MUROS1 338= ======================= END OF LIST =======================

U

V

Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information 17-1

Use the modifiable display to perform one or more of the following functions by typing the appropriate code in the first field of the display. A AT

Attach AWS. Alter AWS attributes. (Overtype the appropriate field(s) in the display with the new attribute value(s).) Delete contents of AWS. Discard AWS and delete its contents. Select AWS. (The AWS is activated but not displayed.) Rename AWS. (Type the new AWS name in the STATUS field.) Terminate display. Position Selection List to begin with the designated AWS.

D DS S R X *

When appropriate, the second shaded area (the STATUS field) will indicate the result of the operation after it is performed. The amount of available information exceeds the width of 80-character screens. The information is, therefore, divided into alternate displays. You can change the display to view different information by entering: SELECT ALT [v] where v is the number of the display to be viewed next. If you omit the number, you will proceed sequentially through the different displays. (The ALT field in the following figures contains the number of the alternate display in which each field appears.) The first two lines in the Execution Area remain constant as you scroll the display, and contain the fields: TOTAL

Made up of two fields of information: 1. CURRENT: Number of AWSs currently in effect for the user session. 2. MAX: Number of AWSs that can be created for the user session.

SESSION\SPLIT

Made up of two fields of information: 1. CURRENT: Number of AWSs with the SESSION or SPLIT attributes that are active for the user session. 2. MAX: Number of AWSs that can be created with the SESSION or SPLIT attributes.

RECOVERABLE

Made up of two fields of information: 1. CURRENT: Number of recoverable AWSs in effect. 2. MAX: Number of recoverable AWSs that can be created.

Note: See 13.5, “Creating an AWS” on page 13-6 for more information.

17-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

The remaining fields are described in the following table. Note that the modifiable fields include information about how their values can be changed. Field Name

Description

ALT

NAME

Name of the AWS.

ALL

ROS MEMBER

Name of the last FETCHed, SAVEd or UPDATEd library member or (NONE).

1

CHG

Changed data indicator shown if data in AWS is new or does not match the member identified by last FETCH, COPY replace, SAVE or UPDATE.

1

LINES

Number of lines in the AWS or 0 if the AWS is empty.

1

INCR

Current line number increment or 100 if the AWS is empty.

1

Change: Use the RENUMBER command. LAST

Number of the last line in the AWS or blank if the AWS is empty.

1

CURRENT

Number of the line at which the pointer is positioned or blank if AWS is empty.

1

ACT

Number of the split screen (1 or 2) in which the AWS is active. If blank, the AWS is available for use but not active.

ASSOCIATED DATASET NAME

Fully-qualified name of the data set COPYed or IMPORTed into the AWS or (NONE).

1

VOLUME

Serial number of the volume containing the COPYed or IMPORTed data set or blank.

1

UNIT

Unit name associated with the device on which the data set resides or blank.

1

L-BOUNDS-R

Current or default left and right column boundary settings used by any command that locates, edits, or shifts data.

2

Change: Use the AT function code and overtype the appropriate field with the new column boundaries; use the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen, SET BOUNDS command or BOUNDS line command.

Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information 17-3

Field Name

Description

L-SET DIS-R

Left and right display margins established by default, the last executed SET DISPLAY command or the last change made to either the STATUS DISPLAY or this screen.

ALT 2

Change: Use the AT function code and overtype the appropriate field with the new left or right display margin; use the SET DISPLAY command or the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen. L-CUR DIS-R

Left and right display margins temporarily set by the: 1) last command that located data outside of the established display margins, or 2) value types in the COLS field.

2

NUMBR

Current or default sequence number display setting.

2

Change: Use the AT function code and overtype the field with NUM, NUMX, NUM2 or NONUM; use the SET DISPLAY command or the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen. DISP

Current or default data display mode.

2

Change: Use the AT function code and overtype the field with CHAR or HEX; use the SET DISPLAY command or the modifiable screen STATUS DISPLAY screen. POSTN

Current or default screen positioning to occur as a result of executing a FIRST, NEXT, LAST, PREV, INCL or EXCL primary command.

2

Change: Use the AT function code and overtype the field with CJUST, JUST, CENT or LOCK; use the SET SEARCH command or the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen. FILL

Current or default trailing character to be used in the AWS. Change: Use the AT function code and overtype the field with BLANK or NULL; use the SET FILL command.

17-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

2

Field Name

Description

MODE

Current or default character translation mode.

ALT 2

Change: Use the AT function code and overtype field with BASIC, XTENDED or standard; use SET MODE command or modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen. TAB SETTINGS

Current or default tab character followed by the tab positions currently in effect.

2

Change: Use the AT function code and overtype the: 1. First field with the special character to be used as the tab character; use TAB command. 2. Remaining fields with one to eight column numbers; use TAB command. CHARACTER SET

Language character set code representing the data that you can enter and display at the terminal.

3

Change: Use the AT function code and overtype the field with a language code defined at your site; use SET CHARSET command or modifiable STATUS SESSION screen. RECOVERY

Current or default setting indicating whether the contents of this AWS is to be recovered in the event of a session or system termination.

3

Change: Use the AT function code and overtype the field with REC or NREC; use ALTER AWS command. DISCARD

Current or default setting indicating when this AWS is to be discarded.

3

Change: Use the AT function code and overtype the field with SESSION, SPLIT, RPF or LEVEL; use ALTER AWS command. SELECT

Current or default setting indicating how this AWS can be referenced by the SELECT command.

3

Change: Use the AT function code and overtype the field with IMPLICIT or EXPLICIT; use ALTER AWS command.

Chapter 17. AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information 17-5

Field Name

Description

EOF

Current or default extent of deletion that is to occur when the ERASE EOF key is pressed.

ALT 3

Change: Use the AT function code and overtype the field with ERASE, DELETE or DELETE1; use SET EOF command. DSPLY

Current or default data protection and highlighting attribute.

3

Change: Use the AT function code and overtype the field with U, UH, S or SH; use SET AWSDSPLY. SEQUENCE

Current or default AWS sequence number attribute. Change: Use the AT function code and overtype the field with NOSEQ, COBOL or two numeric values where the first is starting value and the second is the length of the field (for example, 73 8); use SEQ or NOSEQ command. (This attribute is also changed by the execution of a CHAIN, FETCH, MERGE or SAVE command.)

17-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

3

Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS This chapter describes the different facilities that you can use to enter data into the active AWS. It also describes how you can manually or automatically format the data while entering it.

Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS 18-1

18.1 Entering Data

18.1 Entering Data This section describes how you can: ■ ■ ■ ■

Use primary and line commands to enter data into the active AWS. Define and use a mask to insert data into the active AWS. Use a PF key to open the AWS for data entry. Add, delete or replace data from the Command Area.

Note: At most sites, data that you enter into the active AWS is automatically translated to its corresponding uppercase characters (for example, if you enter division, it is translated to DIVISION). You can control how the data that you enter is to be recognized and treated. See Chapter 3, “Controlling Character Recognition” for additional information.

18.1.1 Using Primary Commands This section describes how you can enter data into an AWS that is either empty or contains one or more lines by using: ■ INPUT - To open the Execution Area. ■ INPUT TEXTENTR - To open the Execution Area for power typing.

18-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

18.1 Entering Data

18.1.1.1 Opening the Execution Area To add data to an empty active AWS, enter the command: INPUT As illustrated in the following example, the screen is opened to accept input, the current (or default) increment is used for line number sequencing and the cursor is placed at the to first line of the Execution Area, ready for data entry. AWS: INPUT Command Adding Data to Empty AWS

7

> > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... ...... ============================= T O P ================= ===1== _ ===2== ===3== ===4== ===5== ===6== ===7== ===8== ===9== ==1=== ==11== ==12== ==13== ==14== ==15== ========================== B O T T O M ==============

U

8

V

If you fill all lines in the Execution Area and still have more data to enter, press the ENTER key. The data you have entered is recorded in the active AWS and a new screen is displayed. The first line in the Execution Area of the new screen will contain the last line of data that you entered. To indicate that you have completed data entry, either: 1. Press the ENTER key or any PF key having a scroll function, or 2. Move the cursor to the Command Area and enter a command. Either of these actions causes the screen to close. Any data that had not been recorded in the active AWS is now recorded, all unused lines are deleted from the Execution Area, and the beginning and end of the data in that AWS is noted with TOP and BOTTOM markers.

Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS 18-3

18.1 Entering Data

You can also use the INPUT command to: ■ Insert data between existing lines. Enter INPUT and the number of the line after which data are to be inserted, as in: INPUT 38== The following example illustrates the resulting screen. Notice that line 3800 is the first line in the Execution Area. The next existing line, 3900, is displayed as the last line and is unnumbered to allow for multiple screens of data entry. The intervening lines are available for data entry. To avoid renumbering the existing contents, these inserted lines are incremented by one. If the designated line number (for example, 3800) does not exist, the insertion begins at that line number. The first AWS line with a number less than the specified line number is shown as the top line in the Execution Area. AWS: INPUT Command Inserting Data Between Two Lines

7

> > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... ==38== =5 CARRIAGE-CONTROL PIC X. ==38=1 _ ==38=2 ==38=3 ==38=4 ...... =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).

18-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

8

18.1 Entering Data

■ Insert data before the first line of the active AWS. Enter the command as: INPUT T The resulting display contains the Execution Area opened for data entry. (The inserted lines are numbered from 1 and incremented by 1.) The first line of this AWS is shown as the last line of the Execution Area. ■ Add data to the end of the active AWS. Enter the command as: INPUT or INPUT B The resulting display shows the last line of this AWS as the first line in the Execution Area which is opened to accept input. The current line number increment is used for sequence numbering. If the next generated sequence number will exceed 999999, CA-Roscoe stops accepting input. While this condition rarely occurs, issuing the RENUMBER command with a lower starting sequence number and increment value usually resolves the problem. In all cases, the cursor is automatically positioned to the first line in the Execution Area, ready for data entry. If you fill the Execution Area, press the ENTER key to continue entering data. The entered data are recorded in the active AWS and a new screen is displayed. The first line in the Execution Area of the new screen contains the last line of data that you entered. (If the data you inserted generates sequence numbers that overflow into existing AWS sequence numbers, the contents is renumbered by 1 until the overflow condition is rectified.) To terminate data entry, you can: 1) press the ENTER key, or 2) move the cursor to the Command Area and enter a command. Either of these actions causes the screen to close. All unused lines are deleted from the Execution Area, any data that has not been recorded in the active AWS is then recorded, and the beginning and end of the data in this AWS is noted with TOP and BOTTOM markers.

Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS 18-5

18.1 Entering Data

18.1.1.2 Using Power Typing Techniques When you use the TEXTENTR operand of the INPUT command, the format of the Execution Area is different than when this operand is not used. With INPUT TEXTENTR: ■ The sequence number field is protected and invisible and the right margin is ignored. This allows you to enter data in a wrap mode. This means that if you reach the right margin while entering data, the cursor automatically skips over the invisible sequence number field, allowing continuous data entry. (Without TEXTENTR, the right margin marks the end of a word. If you reach the margin in the middle of a word, the cursor is positioned to the next line. The characters appearing at the end of the previous line are treated as one word. The characters at the beginning of the new line are treated as another word.) ■ The current column boundaries are recognized when the data are formatted after you press the ENTER key. As illustrated in the following example, this allows you to establish a left and right margin for your data and then use the entire screen to enter that data. Any formatting that you do when entering the data are also remembered. For example, to begin a new paragraph, move the cursor to the next line and enter one or more spaces, then move the cursor to the next line and resume typing. The blank line separating the paragraphs is remembered when your data are formatted.

18-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

18.1 Entering Data

AWS: INPUT With TEXTENTR Operand

7

7

7

7

SET BOUNDS 1! 5! & INPUT TEXTENTR > > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ========================== T O P ================ ===1== THIS IS A SAMPLE. ...... ======================= B O T T O M =============

> > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+ ===1== THIS IS A SAMPLE. _

> > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+ ===1== THIS IS A SAMPLE. This sample shows how you can enter data in a wra p mode and have it formatted for you when you dep

> > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+ ...... ========================== T O P ================ ===1== THIS IS A SAMPLE. ===2== This sample shows how you can enter data ===2=1 in a wrap mode and have it formatted for

8

8

8

8

Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS 18-7

18.1 Entering Data

18.1.2 Using Line Commands You can use line commands: I or IB TE

To insert one or more empty lines in the active AWS for data entry. To allow for power typing techniques.

18.1.2.1 Opening the Execution Area You can use the I and IB line commands to insert one or more empty lines in the active AWS. Use: I IB

To insert one or more lines after the line containing the command. To insert one or more lines before the line containing the command.

To insert one line, enter I or IB in the appropriate sequence number field. To insert multiple lines, enter Iv or IBv in the appropriate sequence number field, where v is the number of lines to be inserted. You can request any number of blank lines to be inserted. If you request more than can be displayed, the resulting screen contains the maximum number of displayable lines. The following example illustrates how you would insert one line after line 1900 and three lines before line 2300. Inserting Lines Using I and IB Line Commands

7

7

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ I=19== =5 FILLER PIC X(7). ==2=== =5 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26). ==21== =5 INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC S9(5). ==22== =5 FILLER PIC X(3=). IB33== PROCEDURE DIVISION.

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ==19== =5 FILLER PIC X(7). ...... _ ==2=== =5 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26). ==21== =5 INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC S9(5). ==22== =5 FILLER PIC X(3=). ...... ...... ...... ==23== PROCEDURE DIVISION

8

8

When you press the ENTER key after entering your data, the Execution Area is examined. If there are any unused lines, they are removed. Lines containing data are retained and assigned line numbers incremented by one.

18-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

18.1 Entering Data

18.1.2.2 Using SET AUTOINSERT You can use the SET AUTOINSERT command to activate an automatic line insertion facility. When this facility is active, one or more data entry lines are inserted after you have used all of the lines provided by an I or IB line command. (If the facility is not active, the insert operation terminates.) The following examples show how to activate the facility with a default line insertion value of 1. Once activated, new lines are provided as long as you continue to enter data. AWS: Automatic Data Entry Line Insertion

7

SET AUTOINSERT ON_

8

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ I=19== =5 FILLER PIC X(7). ==2=== =5 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26). ==21== =5 INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC S9(5).

7

7

7

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ==19== =5 FILLER PIC X(7). ...... _ ==2=== =5 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26).

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ==19== =5 FILLER PIC X(7). ==19=1 =5 filler pic X(1=)._ ==2=== =5 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26).

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ==19== =5 FILLER PIC X(7). ==19=1 =5 FILLER PIC X(1=). ...... _

8

8

8

Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS 18-9

18.1 Entering Data

18.1.2.3 Using Power Typing Techniques As with the TEXTENTR operand of the INPUT command, the TE line command causes: ■ The sequence number field to be protected and invisible and the right margin to be ignored. This allows you to enter data in a wrap mode. This means that if you reach the right margin while entering data, the cursor automatically skips over the invisible sequence number field, allowing continuous data entry. ■ The current column boundaries are recognized when the data are formatted after you press the ENTER key.

7

7

7

> > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+ ...... ========================== T O P ================ TE=1== THIS IS A SAMPLE. ...... ======================= B O T T O M =============

> > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+ ...... ========================== T O P ================ ===1== THIS IS A SAMPLE. _

> > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+ ...... ========================== T O P ================ ===1== THIS IS A SAMPLE. This sample shows how you can enter data in a wra p mode and have it formatted for you when you dep

7 AWS:

TE Line Command

> > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...<....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....>....+ ...... ========================== T O P ================ ===1== THIS IS A SAMPLE. ===2== This sample shows how you can enter data ===2=1 in a wrap mode and have it formatted for

18-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

8

8

8

8

18.1 Entering Data

18.1.3 Using a Mask The MASK line command allows you to define a character string mask that can be inserted anywhere in the active AWS using the IM line command.

18.1.3.1 Defining a Mask To define a mask, ■ Enter the command MASK in the sequence number field of any line in the active AWS. ■ Then, enter the mask in the data portion of the same line. The mask must be the only data on the line. Ensure that this is the case by overlaying any other data on the line with spaces, or by using the DELETE or ERASE EOF keys to delete the remaining data. ■ Finally, press the ENTER key to establish the mask. After the MASK command has been executed, the original contents of the line are redisplayed. Once the mask is defined, it remains in effect until you: 1) replace it with a new mask definition, or 2) eliminate it. To eliminate a mask, enter the command MASK in the sequence number field of any line in the active AWS and press the ENTER key.

18.1.3.2 Inserting a Mask You can insert your data mask in the active AWS by using the: ■ IM (Insert Mask) line command. To insert one copy of the mask, position the cursor to the sequence number field of the line after which you want the line inserted. Type IM in the sequence number field and press the ENTER key. A new line containing the mask is inserted immediately after the line that contained the IM command. To insert multiple copies of the mask, include the appropriate numeric value with the command, as illustrated in the following figure. The first screen in the following examples shows the mask being defined on line 3200. (Notice that only the mask appears on that line. The original contents are restored when the command is executed.) The second screen shows how multiple copies of the mask can be inserted. The third screen shows the resulting display.

Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS 18-11

18.1 Entering Data

AWS: MASK and IM Line Commands to Define and Insert a Mask

7

7

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ==3=== =5 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26). ==31== =5 INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC S9(5). MASK!! !5 FILLER PIC X(3!). ==33== =1 INVENTORY-REPORT.

8

8

> > >

AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ IM2=== =5 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26). ==31== =5 INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC S9(5). ==32== =5 PART-NUMBER-OUT PIC X(6). ==33== =1 INVENTORY-REPORT.

7

8

> > >

AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ==3=== =5 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26). ==3==1 =5 FILLER PIC X(3=). ==3==2 =5 FILLER PIX X(3=). ==31== =5 INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC S9(5).

■ OM (Overlay Mask) line command. To overlay one line, position the cursor to the sequence number field of the appropriate line. Type OM and press the ENTER key. The mask will overlay the corresponding blank characters in this line. (Only blank characters are overlaid. If the line contains alphanumeric characters within the area defined by the mask, those characters are not overlaid.) To overlay multiple lines with the mask, include a numeric value with the command. For example, if you enter OM3 on line 3400, the mask will overlay the corresponding blank characters on line 3400 and the next two lines. You can also use the OMT and OMB commands to overlay multiple lines. OMT overlays all of the lines from the first line of the active AWS through the line containing the command. OMB overlays all of the lines from the line containing the command through the end of this AWS.

18-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

18.1 Entering Data

The following example illustrates how you can overlay lines with a mask. (It is assumed the mask defined in the previous figure is still in effect.) AWS: Overlay Line Commands to Insert a Mask

7

8

> > >

AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ==33== =1 INVENTORY-REPORT. OM3 == =5 FILLER ==35== =5 OUT-MONTH ==36==

7

8

> > >

AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ==33== =1 INVENTORY-REPORT. ==34== =5 FILLER PIC X(3=). ==35== =5 OUT-MONTH PIC X(3=). ==36== =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).

18.1.4 Using a PF Key As distributed, PF12 and PF24 are assigned the INPUT function. If your site is using this assignment, you can use either key to insert data into the active AWS. To do so, ■ Position the cursor to the line after which the insertion is to be made. ■ Press the appropriate PF key. The screen is opened for data entry immediately after the line at which the cursor was positioned. Note that the column position of the cursor has no affect on this operation. To insert data at the top or bottom of the active AWS, position the cursor before the first line, or after the last line, of that AWS and again press the appropriate PF key.

Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS 18-13

18.1 Entering Data

18.1.5 Using the Command Area If you only want to insert a few lines of data, you may find it convenient to add the data from the Command Area. To do this: 1. Type the line number in the form =number, where number is the sequence number to be assigned to the inserted line. 2. Leave at least one space, then type the data to be associated with that sequence number. 3. Press the ENTER key. If the number you specify already exists within the active AWS, your line replaces the existing line. If it does not, your line is added to the active AWS. Using the following examples to illustrate, when the ENTER key is pressed, the previous contents of line 3100 are replaced with the information appearing in the Command Area, while line 3101 is added to this AWS. AWS: Inserting Data From Command Area

7

=31== =31=1

=5 =5

PART-NUMBER PART-TOTAL-IN

PIC X(9). PIC X(3).

8

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ==3=== =5 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26). ==31== =5 INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC S9(5). ==32== =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).

7

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ==3=== =5 PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X(26). ==31== =5 PART-NUMBER PIC X(9). ==31=1 =5 PART-TOTAL-IN PIC X(3). ==32== =5 FILLER PIC X(3=).

8

All of the lines comprising the Command Area can be used to enter data in this manner. You can also use the command delimiter to enter more than one line of data per Command Area line.

18-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

18.2 Formatting Inserted Data

18.2 Formatting Inserted Data This section describes how you can format the data in the active AWS using: ■ An automatic indentation facility when you are inserting data via the I or IB line command. ■ A software tab facility with data that is being entered into the active AWS or already within the active AWS.

18.2.1 Using Automatic Indentation You can activate the automatic indentation facility by issuing the command: SET AUTOINDENT ON When this facility is active, the cursor is automatically positioned under the first data character when you insert data using the INPUT primary command, I or IB line command or a PF key to which the INPUT function is assigned. The following example illustrates how the cursor is positioned when you use the I line command. AWS: Using SET AUTOINDENT Command

7

7

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===8= > <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+... ...... ============================= T O P ============ I==1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. ===2== ENVIRONMENT DIVISION. ===3== CONFIGURATION SECTION.

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===8= > <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+... ...... ============================= T O P ============ ===1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. ...... _ ===2== ENVIRONMENT DIVISION. ===3== CONFIGURATION SECTION.

8

8

Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS 18-15

18.2 Formatting Inserted Data

18.2.2 Using the Software Tab Facility The software tab facility allows you to define one to eight tab positions within a line and then position data to those positions.

18.2.2.1 Setting Tabs and Defining a Tab Character To define tab positions, use the TAB command. You can define a maximum of eight different tab positions. For example: TAB 12 16 2= 32 sets tab positions at columns 12, 16, 20 and 32. The default tab character (the special character you include with your data) is the logical not sign (¬). To change this character, use the TAB command again. For example, to establish the percent sign (%) as the tab character, you would enter: TAB % As illustrated in the following example, the tab character and tab positions must be defined in separate executions of the TAB command. When tab positions are in effect, the tab character is used to indicate those positions on the Scale Line. AWS: Using TAB Command

7

7

TAB % TAB 12 16 2! 32 > > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===8= > <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+... ...... ============================= T O P ============ ===1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===8= > <...+....1.%..+%...%....+....3.%: ...... ============================= T O P ============ !!!1!! IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.

18-16 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

8

8

18.2 Formatting Inserted Data

18.2.2.2 Using Tabs When the tab character and tab positions are set, you can format your data by including the tab character with your data. You can do this when you are: ■ Initially entering data in the active AWS, or ■ Formatting data that is already in the active AWS. To shift the contents of a line to the appropriate location, enter one or more tab characters. As illustrated in the following example, entering one tab positions the data following it to the next defined tab position (for example, entering a single tab character at the beginning of line 3800 shifts the line to begin in column 12). To skip one or more tab positions (as illustrated in line 3400), enter contiguous tab characters (that is, not separated by spaces). AWS: Formatting Data With the Software Tab

7

7

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1.%..+%...2....+....3....+....%....+....5....+.. ==33== FD INVENTORY-REPORT ==34== %%RECORD CONTAINS 133 CHARACTERS ==35== %%LABEL RECORDS ARE OMITTED ==36== %%DATA RECORD IS INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE. ==37== =1 INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE. ==38== %=5 CARRIAGE-CONTROL%PIC X. ==39== %=5 FILLER%PIC X(9). ==4=== %=5 PART-NUMBER-OUT%PIC X(1=).

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1.%..+%...2....+....3....+....%....+....5....+.. ==33== FD INVENTORY-REPORT ==34== RECORD CONTAINS 133 CHARACTERS ==35== LABEL RECORDS ARE OMITTED ==36== DATA RECORD IS INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE. ==37== =1 INVENTORY-REPORT-LINE. ==38== =5 CARRIAGE-CONTROL PIC X. ==39== =5 FILLER PIC X(9). ==4=== =5 PART-NUMBER-OUT PIC X(1=).

8

8

Note: The tab character will be treated as a data character if either of the following conditions occur: ■ The data includes the tab character but no tab positions have been defined. ■ The data includes more tab characters than the number of defined tab positions (for example, four tab positions are defined and the data includes five tab characters.)

Chapter 18. AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS 18-17

18-18 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS The commands described in this chapter can be used to format data or text that is in the active AWS. These commands allow you to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Center text lines. Control the capitalization of alphabetic characters within the data. Reformat text lines. Shift one or more lines to the left or right. Split and join text lines.

Note that the software tab facility (described in Chapter 18, “AWS: Entering and Formatting Data in an AWS”) can also be used to position data within the active AWS.

Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS 19-1

19.1 Centering Text

19.1 Centering Text You can center text on a line using either the TXTCENT primary command or the TC line command.

19.1.1 Using a Primary Command You can use the TXTCENT command to center the text on one or more lines. By default, the text is centered between the default or current left and right column boundaries. For example, if the default column boundaries are in effect and you enter: TXTCENT 1== The contents of line 100 will be centered between 1 and 80. You can override the default or current column boundaries by including the BOUNDS operand with the command. The following example shows how you can center the text on multiple lines between columns 9 and 45. AWS: TXTCENT Command to Center Multiple Lines

7

TXTCENT 2!! 5!! BOUNDS 9 45 > > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= ===1== Q-----------------------------------------------===2== Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED ===3== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. RATES ===4== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER AND ===5== Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED. ===6== Q------------------------------------------------

7> > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= ===1== Q-----------------------------------------------===2== Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED ===3== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. RATES ===4== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER AND ===5== Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED. ===6== Q------------------------------------------------

19-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

8

8

19.1 Centering Text

19.1.2 Using Line Commands You can use line commands to center the text on one or more lines. The text is centered between the default or current left and right column boundaries. ■ To center a single line: Enter TC in the sequence number field of the appropriate line. ■ To center a block of lines: Enter TCC in the sequence number fields of the first and last lines to be centered. ■ To center a range of lines: – Enter TCv in the sequence number field of the first line to be centered, where v represents the number of lines to be centered (for example, TC5). – Enter TCB or TCT in the appropriate sequence number field. With TCB, every line from the line containing the command through the end of the active AWS will be centered. With TCT, every line from the first line of the active AWS through the line containing the command will be centered. The text is centered between the default or current column boundaries. To change the column boundaries, use the SET BOUNDS primary command or the BOUNDS in line command. In the following example, the BOUNDS line command is used to change the column boundaries. The TCC line commands then center the text in the designated block of lines between the boundaries. AWS: TCC Line Command to Center Multiple Lines

7

> > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= BOUNDS Q-<----------------------------------->---------TCC2== Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED ===3== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. RATES ===4== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER AND TCC5== Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED. ===6== Q------------------------------------------------

8

Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS 19-3

19.1 Centering Text

The following example shows the results of these commands. AWS: TCC Line Command Results

7

> > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....>....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= ===1== Q-----------------------------------------------===2== Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED ===3== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. RATES ===4== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER AND ===5== Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED. ===6== Q-----------------------------------------------===7== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.

19-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

8

19.2 Controlling Capitalization

19.2 Controlling Capitalization At most sites, data that you enter or edit in an AWS is automatically translated to its corresponding uppercase characters (for example, if you enter the word division, it is translated to DIVISION). You can control how data that you enter and edit is to be recognized and treated. See Chapter 3, “Controlling Character Recognition” for additional information. There may be occasions when you want to retranslate one or more lines within the active AWS. While you can do this by changing the current translation mode setting and then modifying the appropriate lines, you can also use the primary and line commands shown in the following table. Action

Primary

Command Line

Translate uppercase characters to their corresponding lowercase characters.

LOWCASE

LC, LCC, LCB, LCT

Translate lowercase characters to their corresponding uppercase characters.

UPCASE

UC, UCC, UCB, UCT

None of these commands, however, are text sensitive. When dealing with lines containing text, you should use the TXTLCASE primary command or TLC line command to control capitalization.

19.2.1 Using a Primary Command You can use the TXTLCASE command to lowercase the characters in one or more lines while ensuring that the first word of each sentence begins with a capital letter. For example, to lowercase the characters within the current or default column boundaries of line 100 through 500, you would enter: TXTLCASE 1== 5== You can use the optional BOUNDS operand to override the default or current column boundaries. For example, to lowercase the characters between columns 9 and 45 of lines 700 through 1200, you would enter: TXTLCASE 7== 12== BOUNDS 9 45

Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS 19-5

19.2 Controlling Capitalization

19.2.2 Using a Line Command You can use the TLC command to control the capitalization of the lines comprising a paragraph. It lowercases the characters encountered while ensuring that the first letter of each sentence is in uppercase. To use this command, enter TLC in the sequence number field of the appropriate line. When the ENTER key is pressed, all of the characters on the line containing the command through the end of the current paragraph are translated to their corresponding lowercase characters. The end of a paragraph is indicated by: ■ A blank line, ■ A change in indentation, or ■ The end of the active AWS. Note that only the characters found within the default or current column boundaries are translated. To change the column boundaries, you can use the SET BOUNDS primary command or the BOUNDS line command.

19-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

19.3 Reformatting Text Lines

19.3 Reformatting Text Lines At any point, the TXTFLOW primary command or TF line command can be used to reformat the text within the active AWS.

19.3.1 Using a Primary Command You can use the TXTFLOW command to reformat the text appearing on one or more lines of the active AWS. For example, to reformat the text comprising lines 2 through 7, you would enter: TXTFLOW 2 7 The resulting display will show the reformatting text comprising those lines. Each reformatted line will: ■ Begin at the default or current left column boundary. (In these examples, that is column 9.) EXCEPTION: If the text within the designated lines begins inside the left column boundary, the reformatted lines will begin at the column which contained the left-most character comprising those lines. For example, if the left column boundary is set to 9 and all of the text lines begin in column 15, the reformatted lines will begin in column 15. ■ End at the default or current right column boundary or right display margin, whichever is less. For example, assume that the terminal screen displays a line 72 characters in length. If the right column boundary is set at: – Column 50 - The reformatted text will stop at column 50. – Column 80 - The reformatted text will stop at column 72. You can override the right column boundary for the execution of a command by specifying the COLS operand. In the following example, lines 2 through 7 will be reformatted and the reformatted lines will not extend beyond column 30.

Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS 19-7

19.3 Reformatting Text Lines

AWS: TXTFLOW Command to Reformat Text Lines

7

7

TXTFLOW 2 7 COLS 3= > > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= =====1 Q-----------------------------------------------=====2 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED =====3 Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. SHIPPING RATES =====5 Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OR ORDER AND =====7 Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED =====9 Q------------------------------------------------

> > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= =====1 Q-----------------------------------------------=====2 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN =====3 Q ESTIMATED SHIPPING =====4 Q COST REPORT. SHIPPING =====5 Q RATES DEPEND ON WEIGHT =====6 OF ORDER AND DISTRICT =====7 TO WHICH ORDER =====8 SHIPPED. =====9 Q-----------------------------------------------====1= IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.

8

8

19.3.2 Using a Line Command You can use the TF line command to reformat the paragraph you are working with. A paragraph extends from the line containing the command to: ■ The first blank line, ■ A change in indentation, or ■ The end of the active AWS.

19-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

19.3 Reformatting Text Lines

AWS: TF Line Command to Reformat Text Lines

7

7

> > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....> ...... ============================= T O P ============= TF=1== Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED ===2== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. SHIPPING RATES ===3== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OR ORDER AND ===4== Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.

> > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....> ...... ============================= T O P ============= =====1 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED SHIPPING COST =====2 Q REPORT. SHIPPING RATES DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF =====3 Q ORDER AND DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.

8

8

As illustrated in the previous example, reformatted lines: ■ Begin at the default or current left column boundary. (See page 19-7 about the TXTFLOW primary command for an exception to this rule.) ■ End at the default or current right column boundary or right display margin, whichever is less. By specifying a numeric value with the command, you can override the right column boundary. The following example illustrates how you would reformat the lines within a paragraph so that the text does not extend beyond column 35. AWS: TF Line Command to Reformat Text Line

7

7

> > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....> ...... ============================= T O P ============= TF35=1 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED SHIPPING COST =====2 Q REPORT. SHIPPING RATES DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF =====3 Q ORDER AND DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.

> > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....> ...... ============================= T O P ============= =====1 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN =====2 Q ESTIMATED SHIPPING COST =====3 Q REPORT. SHIPPING RATES =====4 DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER =====5 AND DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER =====6 SHIPPED.

8

8

Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS 19-9

19.4 Shifting Data

19.4 Shifting Data You can shift all or part of the contents of one or more lines to the left or right using either primary or line commands.

19.4.1 Using Primary Commands You can use the RSHIFT and LSHIFT command to move the contents of one or more lines in the active AWS to the right or left, respectively. For example, to shift the entire contents of the active AWS five positions to the right, you would enter: RSHIFT 5 To limit the operation to specific lines, you can include the appropriate line numbers with the command, as in: LSHIFT 2 1== 5== where only the contents of lines 100 through 500 are shifted two positions to the left. By default, the data within the default (or current) column boundaries is shifted. You can use the SET BOUNDS command to change the column boundaries for your session. To change the boundaries for a single execution of the command, use the BOUNDS operand, as in: RSHIFT 5 BOUNDS 8 2= where only the data within columns 8 through 20 are shifted five positions to the right. Note: SET BOUNDS is described in Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries.” If you shift the contents of a line beyond right or left column boundary, the data are lost. This may be useful if you want to clear a field. For example, if you enter: LSHIFT 7 RSHIFT 7 the first seven positions within the default (or current) column boundary of each active AWS line is blank-filled.

19-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

19.4 Shifting Data

To prevent data from being lost by such an operation, include the TEXTSTOP operand with the command. For example, if you enter: LSHIFT 3= TEXTSTOP every line in the active AWS is shifted 30 positions to the left. However, if any line contains data that would be shifted beyond the left margin, the operation is stopped for that line when the left margin is reached.

19.4.2 Using Line Commands The following table lists the line commands you can use to shift the contents of one or more lines to the left or right. As with the primary commands, you can shift one or more lines to the left or right, where: ■ Using the commands beginning with ( or ), the line is shifted the designated number of positions, regardless of the current column boundary setting (that is, data may be lost). ■ Using the commands beginning with < or >, the line is shifted the designated number of positions or until the appropriate column boundary is reached (that is, data are not lost). To change the column boundaries that are currently in effect, you can use the SET BOUNDS primary command or BOUNDS line command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information. Shift Line

Shift Until Data

Meaning

) [v]

> [v]

Shift right 1 or v spaces.

)) [v]

>> [v]

Shift block of lines right 1 or v spaces. Enter on first and last line of block.

)B [v]

>B [v]

Shift right 1 or v spaces from line containing command through end of active AWS.

)T [v]

>T [v]

Shift right 1 or v spaces from first line through line containing command.

( [v]

< [v]

Shift left 1 or v spaces.

(( [v]

<< [v]

Shift block of lines left 1 or v spaces. Enter << on first and last line of block.

(B [v]


Shift left 1 or v spaces from line containing command through end of active AWS.

(T [v]


Shifts left 1 or v spaces from first line through line containing command.

Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS 19-11

19.4 Shifting Data

The following example illustrates how you can use these line commands to format data. The upper screen contains the unformatted data and appropriate line commands; the lower screen shows the correctly formatted data (how the data will look after the line commands are executed). Using Line Commands to Shift Data

7

7

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 > <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5. ...... ================================ T O P ============ >4=1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. <4=2== PROGRAM-ID. INVLIST. >>43== ENVIRONMENT DIVISION. >>=4== CONFIGURATION SECTION. ===5== SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-37=. ===6== OBJECT-COMPUTER. IBM-37=.

> > > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5. ...... ================================ T O P ============ ===1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. ===2== PROGRAM-ID. INVLIST. ===3== ENVIRONMENT DIVISION. ===4== CONFIGURATION SECTION. ===5== SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-37=. ===6== OBJECT-COMPUTER. IBM-37=.

19-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

8

8

19.5 Splitting and Joining Text Lines

19.5 Splitting and Joining Text Lines You can split one line into two or join two lines together using either primary or line commands.

19.5.1 Using Primary Commands 19.5.1.1 Splitting Lines You can split one line into two using the TXTSPLIT primary or TS line command. You can use the TXTSPLIT command to split a line at a specific location. The following example shows line 300 being split at column 31 (top screen). Everything from that position to the right column boundary is moved to the next line. The text will begin at the left column boundary of that line. In this case, it means that the word RATES is moved to line 301 and begins in position 9, which is the current left boundary (bottom screen). AWS: TXTSPLIT Command to Split One Line

7

8

TXTSPLIT 3!! COLS 31 > > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= ===1== Q-----------------------------------------------===2== Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED ===3== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. RATES ===4== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER AND ===5== Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED. ===6== Q------------------------------------------------

7

> > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= ===1== Q-----------------------------------------------===2== Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED ===3== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. ===3=1 RATES ===4== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER AND ===5== Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED. ===6== Q-----------------------------------------------===7== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.

8

Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS 19-13

19.5 Splitting and Joining Text Lines

A variation of the example shown in the previous figure uses the CURSOR operand. For example, you could have split the line by positioning the cursor to column 31 on line 300 and entering: TXTSPLIT Q CURSOR TXTSPLIT This form of TXTSPLIT is especially useful when it is assigned to a PF key. Then, you only need to position the cursor to the appropriate column within the appropriate line and press the PF key. The following example shows how you can use TXTSPLIT to split multiple lines. In this case, lines 400 and 500 are split at column 27. Everything from that position through column 45 is moved to the appropriate next line, beginning in column 12. TXTSPLIT Command to Split Multiple Lines

7

7

TXTSPLIT 4!! 5!! COLS 27 BOUNDS 12 45 > > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= ===1== Q-----------------------------------------------===2== Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED ===3== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. ===3=1 RATES ===4== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER AND ===5== Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED. ===6== Q------------------------------------------------

> > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= =====1 Q-----------------------------------------------=====2 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED =====3 Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. =====4 RATES =====5 Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT =====6 OF ORDER AND =====7 Q DISTRICT TO WHICH =====8 ORDER SHIPPED. =====9 Q-----------------------------------------------====1= IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.

19-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

8

8

19.5 Splitting and Joining Text Lines

19.5.1.2 Joining Lines You can use the TXTJOIN command to rejoin two lines. In the following example, the modified contents of line 4 are being rejoined to line 3. Since no column number is specified, the contents of line 4 will begin one space after the current last word on line 3. AWS: TXTJOIN Command to Rejoin Two Lines

7

8

TXTJOIN 3 > > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= =====1 Q-----------------------------------------------=====2 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED =====3 Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. =====4 SHIPPING RATES =====5 Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT =====6 OR ORDER AND =====7 Q DISTRICT TO WHICH =====8 ORDER SHIPPED. =====9 Q------------------------------------------------

7

> > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= =====1 Q-----------------------------------------------=====2 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED =====3 Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. SHIPPING RATES =====5 Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT =====6 Q OR ORDER AND =====7 Q DISTRICT TO WHICH =====8 Q ORDER SHIPPED. =====9 Q-----------------------------------------------====1= IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.

8

Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS 19-15

19.5 Splitting and Joining Text Lines

The following example shows how you can rejoin multiple lines (lines 5 through 8, in this case). The example also shows how you can have the joined lines begin in a specific location. When a column number is specified with the command, the joined text begins one space after the designated column (in the example, the joined text will begin one space after column 26). AWS: TXTJOIN Command to Rejoin Multiple Lines

7

TXTJOIN 5 8 COLS 26

8

> > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= =====1 Q-----------------------------------------------=====2 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED =====3 Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. SHIPPING RATES =====5 Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT =====6 Q OR ORDER AND =====7 Q DISTRICT TO WHICH =====8 Q ORDER SHIPPED. =====9 Q------------------------------------------------

7> > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > .<.1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= =====1 Q-----------------------------------------------=====2 Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED =====3 Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. SHIPPING RATES =====5 Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OR ORDER AND =====7 Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED. =====9 Q-----------------------------------------------====1= IDENTIFICATION DIVISION.

19-16 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

8

19.5 Splitting and Joining Text Lines

19.5.2 Using Line Commands 19.5.2.1 Splitting Lines To split a text line into two lines: 1. Type the TS line command in the sequence number field of the appropriate line, and 2. Position the cursor to the desired location within the data portion of that line. You can also insert lines for data entry when you split a line. In the following example, TS2 is typed in the sequence number field of line 200 and the cursor is positioned to column 31. When the ENTER key is pressed, everything from the cursor position to the right column boundary is moved to begin at the left column boundary of the new next line. Since a numeric value was specified with the command, the appropriate number of data entry lines will be inserted between the split. AWS: TS Line Command to Split a Line

7

> > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= ===1== Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED TS22== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. RATES ===3== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER AND ===4== Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.

7>

8

8

> AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= ===1== Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED ===2== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. ...... ...... ===2=1 RATES ===3== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OF ORDER AND ===4== Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.

If anything is typed on the inserted lines (like text or a space), the lines are retained when the next operation is performed. If nothing is entered, the lines are removed.

Chapter 19. AWS: Formatting Data Within an AWS 19-17

19.5 Splitting and Joining Text Lines

19.5.2.2 Joining Lines You can use the TJ line command to rejoin two lines. When this command is executed, the joined line begins one space after the last word on the preceding line. The following example shows how you can rejoin the modified contents of line 201 to line 200. Since nothing was entered on the inserted lines, they are removed when the operation is performed. AWS: TJ Line Command to Join Two Lines

7

> > AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= ===1== Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED TJ=2== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. ...... ...... ===2=1 SHIPPING RATES ===3== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OR ORDER AND ===4== Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.

7>

8

8

> AWS(AAA.SHIPRATE) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ..<1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= ===1== Q THIS PROGRAM PRINTS AN ESTIMATED ===2== Q SHIPPING COST REPORT. SHIPPING RATES ===3== Q DEPEND ON WEIGHT OR ORDER AND ===4== Q DISTRICT TO WHICH ORDER SHIPPED.

To have the joined line begin in a specific location, include a numeric value with the command, where the value represents the column after which the text from the following line is to be placed. For example, entering TJ35 causes the following line to begin one space after column 35 of the line containing the command.

19-18 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS This chapter describes how you can: ■ Display specific occurrences of a character string using the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV primary and line commands. ■ Display all lines containing (or not containing) a specific character string using the INCL and EXCL primary or line command. (This display is modifiable. To produce a non-modifiable display, use the SEARCH or OMIT command.) ■ Customize the operation by: 1) qualifying the search string, and 2) designating the resulting screen positioning. While the examples in this chapter show strings that are in character format, you can also locate and display data that is in hexadecimal representation. See 20.3, “Customizing the Operation” on page 20-10 for details.

Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS 20-1

20.1 Finding Specific Occurrences of a String

20.1 Finding Specific Occurrences of a String In addition to the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV primary and line commands, you can use the ATTACH command to position data to the first line containing a specific character string. For example, you might want to copy a library member into the active AWS and then begin the resulting display with the first line containing a specific string, as in: FETCH INVLIST ATTACH /DATA/ The resulting display begins with the first line containing the string DATA.

20-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

20.1 Finding Specific Occurrences of a String

20.1.1 Using Primary Commands You can use the following commands to locate and display specific occurrences of a string: FIRST NEXT LAST PREV

Locates Locates Locates Locates

and and and and

displays displays displays displays

first occurrence of a string. the next occurrence of a string. the last occurrence of a string. the previous occurrence of a string.

For example, to locate and position the display to the first line containing the string TEST-DATA, enter: FIRST TEST-DATA To locate and display the next occurrence of the same string, all you need enter is: NEXT Once specified, the string is remembered until you specify a different one. It is, therefore, used with any subsequent EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV primary or line command that does not include a string. (The string specified with the ATTACH command is also remembered and used with any subsequent EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV primary or line command that does not include a string.) By default, the entire AWS is searched for the string (every column of every line). You can limit the extent of the operation to specific columns or lines. For example, to locate the last occurrence of TEST-DATA and to limit the search to columns 10 through 50, you would enter: LAST 1= 5= TEST-DATA where the column numbers are specified before the string. To limit the search to a specific number of lines, specific the appropriate value after the string. For example, to search the previous 200 lines for the first occurrence of TEST-DATA, enter: PREV TEST-DATA 2==

Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS 20-3

20.1 Finding Specific Occurrences of a String

Note: Column boundaries specified with the command affect only the execution of that command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for information about changing boundaries for the terminal session. Finally, you can combine a column range and line limit within a command, as in: FIRST 1= 5= TEST-DATA 2==

20-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

20.1 Finding Specific Occurrences of a String

20.1.2 Using Line Commands You can use line commands to locate specific occurrences of a string. The line commands are FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV. To locate a string, enter the appropriate line command in the sequence number field and the delimited search string in the data portion of the same line. The following example shows how to find the last occurrence of the string PRINT-FILE. AWS: LAST Line Command

7

U

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... ...... ============================= T O P ================= LAST /PRINT-FILE/TEST-DATA ASSIGN TO S-SYSIN. ==37== SELECT PRINT-FILE ASSIGN TO S-SYSPRINT. ==38== DATA DIVISION. ==39== FILE SECTION. ==4=== FD TEST-DATA ==41== LABEL RECORDS ARE OMITTED ==42== DATA RECORD IS TEST-RECORD. ==43== =1 TEST RECORD PIC X(8=). ==44== FD PRINT-FILE ==45== LABEL RECORDS ARE OMITTED

8

V

If the string was specified with a previously executed ATTACH, EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV primary or line command, you need not respecify it. Once a character string is specified, it is remembered and available for use until you change it. By default, the entire line is searched. To limit the search to specific columns, you can use the modifiable STATUS DISPLAY screen, the SET BOUNDS primary command or the BOUNDS line command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information.

Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS 20-5

20.2 Including/Excluding Lines Containing a String

20.2 Including/Excluding Lines Containing a String You can locate all lines containing a specific string by using the INCL primary or line command. The resulting display is modifiable. To produce a non-modifiable display, use the SEARCH primary command. To locate all lines not containing a specific string, use the EXCL primary or line command. Again, the resulting display is modifiable. To produce a non-modifiable display, use the OMIT primary command.

20.2.1 Using Primary Commands 20.2.1.1 INCL and EXCL The INCL and EXCL primary commands display all lines including or excluding a specific character string. For example, to display all lines that do not contain the string TEST-DATA, specify: EXCL TEST-DATA To then display all of the lines that contain the same string, all you need enter is: INCL When you do not specify a string, the string specified with the previous ATTACH, EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV primary or line command is assumed. To limit the search to specific columns or numbers of lines, specify the column numbers before the string and the number of lines after the string. For example, EXCL 12 4= DATA 4== limits the search for DATA to columns 12 through 40 of the next 400 lines. Note: Column boundaries specified with the command affect only the execution of that command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for information about changing boundaries for the remainder of the terminal session. The following example illustrates the type of display resulting from the execution of an INCL or EXCL command.

20-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

20.2 Including/Excluding Lines Containing a String

AWS: INCL Command Display

7

> AWS!7: LINES 3!!! THRU BOTTOM SEARCHED WITH 5 MATCHES > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... ...... ======================= INCL/EXCL DISPLAY =========== ==36== SELECT TEST-DATA ASSIGN TO S-SYSIN. ==4=== FD TEST-DATA =143== OPEN INPUT TEST-DATA. =147== READ TEST-DATA INTO HOLDING-AREA. =2=7== CLOSE TEST-DATA.

8

If the number of lines containing (or not containing) the string exceeds the size of your terminal screen, you can: 1. Press one of the PF keys to which a scroll function is assigned. The direction of the scan depends on the value of the PF key that is pressed, or 2. Enter the INCL or EXCL line command, with no operand, in the sequence number field of a line and press ENTER. The scan begins with that line and continues towards the end of the data. To see the data that follows a particular line, you can: ■ Type an asterisk (*) in the sequence number field of that line. ■ Type the line number in the sequence number field of any line. ■ Alter the sequence number field of the line (for example, by deleting a leading zero). After pressing the ENTER key, the resulting display begins with the designated line. Note: While the INCL/EXCL display shows only the appropriate lines within the active AWS, all of the lines may be affected by the action of a primary or line command. If, for example, you delete a range of lines (using either a primary or line command), all of the displayed and non-displayed lines within that range are deleted.

20.2.1.2 SEARCH and OMIT Use the SEARCH command to produce a non-modifiable display of all occurrences of a specific string within the active AWS. Use the OMIT command to produce a non-modifiable display of all lines not containing a specific string. When using these commands, the string must be delimited, as in: SEARCH 'INVENTORY-BALANCE'

Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS 20-7

20.2 Including/Excluding Lines Containing a String

As illustrated in the following example, the resulting display contains the number and contents of each line containing the string. AWS: SEARCH Command Display

7

_

8

> > > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6 ==31== =5 INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC S9(5). ==46== =5 INVENTORY-BALANCE-OUT PIC ZZ,ZZ9. ==75== MOVE INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN ==76== TO INVENTORY-BALANCE-OUT.

With both commands, you can limit the operation to: 1) a specific range of columns and 2) a specific range of lines. For example, OMIT 2= 5= 'PIC' 15= 9== displays all lines that do not contain the string PIC in columns 20 through 50 of lines 150 through 900.

20.2.2 Using Line Commands The INCL and EXCL line commands are similar to the INCL and EXCL primary commands. To use the line commands, enter the appropriate command in the sequence number field of the first line to be searched. Then, enter the character string (bound by delimiters) in the data portion of the same line. The following example shows the display that might result after executing an INCL line command.

20-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

20.2 Including/Excluding Lines Containing a String

AWS: Using INCL Line Command

7

7

> > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.... ...... ============================= T O P ============ INCL /WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH./ ===2== PROGRAM-ID. INVLIST. ===3== ENVIRONMENT DIVISION. ===4== CONFIGURATION SECTION. ===5== SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81.

> AWS!7: LINES 51!! THRU BOTTOM SEARCHED WITH 3 MATCHES > AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.... ...... ======================= INCL/EXCL DISPLAY ====== ==51== =5 WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH PIC X(3). ==69== MOVE 'NO ' TO WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH. ==82== AT END MOVE 'NO ' TO WS-END-OF-FILE-SWITCH.

8

8

If INCL or EXCL retrieve more lines than can be displayed on the screen at one time, you can reposition the display by: 1. Entering the INCL or EXCL line command, with no operand, in the sequence number field of a line and pressing ENTER. The scan begins with that line and continues towards the end of the data, or 2. Pressing one of the PF keys to which a scroll function is assigned. The direction of the scan depends on the value of the PF key that is pressed. To see the data that follows a particular line, you can: ■ Type an asterisk (*) in the sequence number field of that line. ■ Type the line number in the sequence number field of any line. ■ Alter the sequence number field of the line (by deleting a leading zero). After pressing the ENTER key, the resulting display begins with the designated line. Note: While the INCL/EXCL display shows only the appropriate lines within the active AWS, all of the lines may be affected by the action of a primary or line command. If, for example, you delete a range of lines (using either a primary or line command), all of the displayed and non-displayed lines within that range are deleted.

Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS 20-9

20.3 Customizing the Operation

20.3 Customizing the Operation This section describes how you can qualify the search operation.

20.3.1 Translating the Search String The current setting of the SET MODE command determines how the character string specified with the command is to be treated. If SET MODE BASIC is in effect and you enter the string division, it is treated as though you entered it in uppercase (DIVISION). If SET MODE XTENDED is in effect, the string is not translated to uppercase. See Chapter 3, “Controlling Character Recognition” for additional information.

20.3.2 Delimiting the Search String In all of the examples using primary commands, the search string has not been delimited. With these primary commands, you only need to delimit the string when it: ■ Includes a space (FIRST /TEST DATA/), ■ Is a numeric (LAST /519/), or ■ Is the same as a keyword operand (or its abbreviation) of the (INCL /JOB/). When using a line command, the string must be delimited.

20.3.3 Qualifying the Search String By default, the search is for any string of characters that match the specified string. To limit the search operation, you can include one of the qualifier operands. These operands are WORD, PREFIX, BEGIN, EMBED, END and SUFFIX For example, assume the active AWS contains the line: 'THE OTHER BROTHER ATE THEIR APPLE DURING THE CONTEST' and you want to search for the string THE. Without qualification, the words THE, OTHER, BROTHER and THEIR match the search string. By including a qualifier, you can designate the type of string match that is to occur, as in: THE WORD

Qualifies THE as a word, only THE matches.

THE PREFIX

Qualifies THE as beginning a word, only THEIR matches.

20-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

20.3 Customizing the Operation

THE BEGIN

Qualifies THE as beginning or being a word - THE and THEIR match.

THE EMBED

Qualifies THE as contained within a word - OTHER and BROTHER match.

TEST END

Qualifies TEST as ending or being a word - only CONTEST matches.

TEST SUFFIX Qualifies TEST as ending a word - only CONTEST matches.

20.3.4 Specifying the String in Hexadecimal To designate the hexadecimal representation of a string, use the format: X'string' where the string is bound by apostrophes and contains an even number of characters, as in: FIRST X'C1' When using: ■ The primary commands FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL or EXCL, you do not need to delimit the hexadecimal string. When using the comparable line commands, as illustrated in the following example, the string must be bound by delimiters. ■ For primary commands SEARCH or OMIT, the string must be bound by delimiters. (Note that the resulting display is not modifiable and shows only the character format of matching lines.) The search string itself can be specified in either uppercase or lowercase characters. For the search operation, it is translated to uppercase. Thus, you will have the same result if you specify: FIRST X'C1' or first x'c1'

Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS 20-11

20.3 Customizing the Operation

AWS: Using a Hexadecimal String With a Line Command

7

> > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===78 > <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5... ...... ============================= T O P ================= LAST== /X'C1'/ THOMAS W 4CDECDC4444444ECDDCE4444E4=4=444444444444444444444444 =866194=======386412====6=1=3======================== ----------------------------------------------------===2== SMITHSOM SALLY S 4EDCECEDD44444ECDDE44444E4=4=444444444444444444444444 =24938265=====21338=====2=2=1======================== ----------------------------------------------------===3== WALTERS JOHN 4ECDECDE444444DDCD44444444=4=444444444444444444444444 =6133592======1685========1=3======================== -----------------------------------------------------

8

To locate a character string that could be interpreted as being in hexadecimal representation, either: ■ Use the LITERAL operand with the primary commands, as in: FIRST X'C1' LITERAL ■ Specify the string so that it does not conform to hexadecimal notation. This method can be used with both primary and line commands. For example, to find the character string X'C1' you might specify: /X'C1/ or /X'C1' / 2

20-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

20.3 Customizing the Operation

20.3.5 Positioning the Resulting Display By default, the first line containing (or not containing) the specified search string begins the resulting display. You can change this default for your session using the SET SEARCH command. By specifying a screen positioning operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST, PREV, INCL or EXCL primary command, you can also control how the resulting display is to be positioned. The screen positioning operands are: CJUSTIFIED

The display margins are to be altered if the entire matching string does not fall within the current margin. (This is the default positioning.)

JUSTIFIED

The display margins are always to be altered so that the first character of the string begins in the left-most position of the line.

CENTERED

The display margins are to be altered to center the matching string on the line. If centering would cause an invalid left margin (less than 1), the display is not altered.

LOCKED

The display margins are not to be altered even if the matching string occurs to the left or right of the current margins.

These operands are specified after the string, as in: FIRST /WIDGET/ JUSTIFIED If the string is not found, the display is repositioned to: 1) the end of the active AWS or given range if FIRST or NEXT are specified, or 2) the beginning of the active AWS or given range if LAST or PREV are specified.

Chapter 20. AWS: Locating Data Within an AWS 20-13

20-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS This chapter describes how you can use primary and line commands to move one or more lines within the active AWS. Note that a move operation (unlike a copy operation) is destructive (the lines being moved are deleted from their original location after being inserted in their new location).

Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS 21-1

21.1 Using a Primary Command

21.1 Using a Primary Command When moving data, you must identify the line(s) to be moved and the destination of the operation. ■ To move a single line: enter the MOVE command followed by the number of the line to be moved and the destination line number, as in: MOVE 295= 36== In this example, the contents of line 2950 is to be moved at or after line 3600. (If the destination line number exists, the data are inserted after it. If the line number does not exist, the data are placed at that line number.) ■ To move a range of lines: enter the MOVE command with the number of the first and last line to be moved plus the destination line number. For example, to move lines 2500 through 2700 at, or after, line 1500, you would enter: MOVE 25== 27== 15== In addition to a line number, the destination can also be indicated through the keyword operands: * T B or ,,

After the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned. Before the first line of the active AWS. After the last line of the active AWS.

For example, to move lines 1200 through 2800 to the bottom of the active AWS, you would enter: MOVE 12== 28== B

21-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

21.2 Using Line Commands

21.2 Using Line Commands As with the primary commands, you must indicate the line(s) to be moved and the destination of that operation. (The destination line commands are shown in the following table. ■ To move a single line: Type M in the sequence number field of the line to be moved. (Also include a destination line command in the sequence number field of the appropriate line.) ■ To copy a block of lines: Type MM in the sequence number field of the first and last lines to be moved. (Also include a destination line command in the appropriate sequence number field.) Note: The lines involved in the operation need not appear on the same screen. You can scroll the display forward or backward while the command is pending (for example, waiting for a matching move or destination line command). ■ To copy a range of lines: In addition to the appropriate destination line command, type one of the following line commands in the appropriate sequence number field: Mv

To move v number of lines (for example, entering M5 causes the line containing the command plus the next four lines to be moved).

MB

To move all lines from the line containing the command through the last line of the active AWS.

MT

To move all lines from the first line in the active AWS through the line containing the command.

Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS 21-3

21.2 Using Line Commands

Command

Type

Meaning

A

Destination Only

After this line.

B

Before this line.

BB

After the last line in this AWS.

TT

Before the first line in this AWS.

O [v]

Overlay At Destination

Overlay one or v number of lines.

OB

Overlay all lines from the line containing the command thru the end of this AWS.

OO

Overlay a block of lines where OO appears in the first and last line of the range of lines to be overlaid.

OT

Overlay all lines from the first AWS line through the line containing the command.

21-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

21.2 Using Line Commands

21.2.1.1 Using Overlay Destination Line Commands The following example illustrates how you can use overlay destination line commands. Notice that only the blank characters in the target lines are overlaid with corresponding data from the source lines. AWS: Move Line Commands Using Overlay Destination

7

8

> > >

AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ M =8== SAMPLE PIC X( ). O2 9== PART-DESCRIPTION-IN ==1=== INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN

7

8

> > >

AWS(PRI.INVLIST) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ===8== SAMPLE PIC X( ). ===9== PART-DESCRIPTION-IN PIC X( ). ==1=== INVENTORY-BALANCE-IN PIC X( ).

The number of lines to be overlaid must be equal to or greater than the number of lines being moved. For example, the upper screen in the previous figure shows that one line is to be moved (line 800) and that two lines are to be overlaid with that data (lines 900 and 1000). The lower screen in the previous figure shows the result, where PIC X( ) has overlaid the corresponding blank positions in the designated lines. (SAMPLE has been ignored since its corresponding positions contain data.)

Chapter 21. AWS: Moving Data Within an AWS 21-5

21-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS CA-Roscoe stores data in the form of variable length records not exceeding 255 characters in length. (There is one record for each line in an AWS). To keep these records in their proper order, a six-digit sequence number is assigned to each line. These sequence numbers are maintained by CA-Roscoe and are stored externally to the data records themselves. When you begin entering data in the active AWS, default sequence numbering begins with 100 and is incremented by 100. If you copy, move or insert lines within the existing data, the new lines are incremented by one (for example, if you insert three lines between lines 200 and 300, the new lines are numbered 201, 202 and 203). If you add lines to the end of the AWS, the current line number increment value is used. If you then delete any lines, a gap is left in the sequence numbers.

22.1.1 Renumbering Lines You can renumber the contents of the active AWS at any time during your session by issuing the RENUMBER command. For example, RENUMBER renumbers the entire contents of the AWS from 100 by 100. You can change the starting and increment values, as in: RENUMBER 5= 1= which renumbers the data in the active AWS from 50 by 10. You can also renumber a range of lines within the AWS. For example, RENUMBER FROM 9== TO 25=1 START 9== BY 1= renumbers only lines 900 through 2501, where the starting line number is 900 and the increment value is 10. Finally, you can also renumber data when you bring it into the AWS using the FETCH command. For example if you enter: FETCH INVLIST START 5= BY 5= the contents of the library member named INVLIST are placed in the active AWS and that data are then renumbered beginning with 50 and incremented by 50.

Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS 22-1

22.1.2 Display Sequence Numbers By default, the data are displayed with the CA-Roscoe-generated sequence numbers. You can use the SET DISPLAY command to define a display format that includes or excludes sequence numbers. See Chapter 5, “Defining the Display Format” for a detailed description of the SET DISPLAY command.

22.1.3 Include Sequence Numbers in the Data You can add the CA-Roscoe-generated sequence numbers to the data in the active AWS using either the RENUMBER or SEQ command. For example, entering: RENUMBER START 1== BY 5= IN 1 6 renumbers the AWS from 100 by 50 and places the new line numbers within columns 1 through 6 of the data. To place the current line numbers in the data (without renumbering), use the SEQ command, as in: SEQ IN 73 8 which places the current sequence numbers in the data beginning in column 73 and extending for eight positions. If you add sequence numbers to the AWS and data exists in the designated columns, the data are overlaid by the sequence numbers.

22-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

22.1.4 Set AWS Sequence Number Attribute The SEQ command can also be used to set the AWS sequence number attribute. This attribute designates whether the CA-Roscoe-generated sequence numbers are to be included when you PRINT, SAVE or SUBMIT data that is in the active AWS. For example, if you enter: SEQ COBOL the sequence number attribute is set so that line numbers will be placed in columns 1 through 6 when this AWS data are PRINTed or SUBMITted. (If data appears in the designated sequence number field, the number is omitted; data are not overlaid.) To prevent sequence numbers from being included, you can change the attribute by issuing the command: NOSEQ Once established, this attribute remains in effect until: 1) you specifically change it by issuing another SEQ/NOSEQ command, or 2) it is overridden by the sequence number attribute of a library member that is FETCHed or SAVEd.

22.1.5 Including CA-Roscoe Sequence Numbers With PRINT/SUBMIT The AWS sequence number attribute controls whether the CA-Roscoe generated sequence numbers are to be included when the data are printed or submitted. You can override the current attribute on a per execution basis. ■ When printing data, use the NUM or NONUM operand of the PRINT command to override the AWS sequence number attribute. See Chapter 7, “Printing Data” for details. ■ When submitting data, use the SET SUBMIT command to override the attribute if the attribute is SEQ. (If the attribute is NOSEQ, it cannot be overridden and no sequence numbers will be included.) See 28.1, “Check Syntax” on page 28-2 for details.

Chapter 22. AWS: Renumbering Data in the AWS 22-3

22-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member This chapter describes how you can: ■ Save the contents of the active AWS as a member in the CA-Roscoe library. ■ Replace an existing member with the contents of the active AWS. An AWS is a temporary work area. Data that is within the active AWS may be saved at any time as a member in the CA-Roscoe library. To modify that member, you must bring a copy of it back into the active AWS. Once there, you can use any of the primary or line commands to change the data. The contents of the library member remains intact until you specifically replace it.

Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member 23-1

23.1 Creating a Library Member

23.1 Creating a Library Member Use the SAVE command to create a library member and store the contents of the active AWS in that member. To do so, enter the command and the name you want to assign to the new member, as in: SAVE INVLIST where the entire contents of the active AWS is saved in a member named INVLIST. (The following figure lists the CA-Roscoe member naming conventions.)

23.1.1 A CA-Roscoe library member name MUST: 1. Be unique (it must not already exist in your library). 2. Begin with an alphabetic or national character. (When U.S. English is in effect, the national characters are #, $, and @.) The remainder of the name can be any combination of alphanumeric and/or national characters. 3. Be one to eight characters in length. If you do not want to save the entire AWS, you can include line numbers with the command. Only the data within the designated range of lines will be saved as the member. For example, if you enter: SAVE INVLIST 1== 12== only lines 100 through 1200 of the active AWS are saved in the member named INVLIST.

23-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

23.1 Creating a Library Member

23.1.2 Member Name Considerations The keyword operands (or operand abbreviations) of commands should not be used as library member names. While this restriction specifically includes the following keywords and their abbreviations: AWS DSN JOB LIB

A D J L

it applies to all keyword operands and their abbreviaions. For example, NOW is a keyword operand of the SEND command. If you name a library NOW and then attempt to send the contents of that member to another user by issuing SEND NOW, CA-Roscoe treats NOW as an operand, not as a member name. If you do use keyword operands as library member names, you must specify your prefix when referencing these members. For example, if your prefix is AAA, you would enter: ATTACH AAA.JOB COPY AAA.DSN SEND AAA.NOW It is also recommended that you do not use member names beginning with: ZZZZZ or SAVAWS. Members created with these characters can be deleted when the CA-Roscoe site administrator runs CA-Roscoe library maintenance.

Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member 23-3

23.1 Creating a Library Member

23.1.3 Assigning a Description and/or Attributes When you create a library member, you have the option of assigning: ■ a member description, ■ a sequence number attribute,and/or ■ an access attribute. For example, you could enter: SAVE INVLIST 'Inventory List Program' SEQ COBOL RESTRICTED The following table summarizes the various options you can specify. DESCRIPTION

One to 30 characters bound by a special character not found within the description itself. If omitted, the member has no description.

SEQUENCE NUMBER ATTRIBUTE

SEQ

Numbers to be included (beginning in column 73) when data submitted for background execution.

SEQ COBOL

Numbers to be included in columns 1 through 6.

SEQ s 1

Numbers to be included, starting in column s for length of 1.

NOSEQ

Numbers are not to be included.

If omitted, the default is the current attribute of the active AWS. ACCESS ATTRIBUTE

SHARED

Others allowed to access and/or execute your member.

EXECONLY

Others only allowed to execute your member. Meant for members containing RPF programs.

RESTRICTED

Others are not allowed to access or execute your member.

If omitted, the current default is used. (The distributed default is SHARED. Site management can set a different default. You can establish your own default through the SET SAVEATTR command.)

23-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

23.2 Updating a Member

23.2 Updating a Member You can update (replace) the entire contents of a library member with the contents of the active AWS at any time. To do so, issue the UPDATE command and the name of the member to be changed, as in: UPDATE INVLIST To update the contents of a member with specific lines from the active AWS, include the appropriate line numbers with the command, as in: UPDATE INVLIST 7== 49== In this example, the entire contents of the member INVLIST is replaced with lines 700 through 4900 of the active AWS. If you want to update the last member that you FETCHed, SAVEd or UPDATEd, you can use an asterisk (*) in place of a library member name, as in: FETCH INVLIST RENUMBER UPDATE Q At the same time you are updating the contents of a member, you can also change its description, sequence number attribute and/or access attribute, as in: UPDATE INVLIST 'New Inventory List' SHARED In this example, the member description and access attribute are changed; since no sequence number attribute is specified, that attribute is not changed. (See 23.1.3, “Assigning a Description and/or Attributes” on page 23-4 for additional information about member descriptions and attributes.)

Chapter 23. AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member 23-5

23.2 Updating a Member

23-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Part III. Data Sets (Browsing and Maintaining Data Sets) Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility 24.1.1 Using Wildcard Characters to Create a Catalog or VTOC Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.1.2 Using Wildcard Characters to Create a CA-Librarian, PDS or Volume Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.2 Using Data Set Facility Function Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.3 Using Data Set Facility Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.3.1 Entering Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24.3.2 Refreshing a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24-9 24-10 24-12 24-13 24-15

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25.1 Attaching a CA-Librarian Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.2 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.1.3 Selection List Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2 Attaching a Catalog Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2.2 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.2.3 Selection List Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.3 Attaching a Generation Data Group Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4 Attaching a PDS Member/CA-Librarian Module . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4.2 Using the Data Set Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.4.4 Attached Data Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5.2 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.5.3 Selection List Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.6 Attaching a Sequential Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.6.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.6.2 Using the Data Set Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.6.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.6.4 Attached Data Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.7 Attaching a Volume Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.7.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.7.2 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.7.3 Selection List Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25.8 Attaching a VTOC Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25-1 25-2 25-2 25-3 25-4 25-7 25-7 25-8 25-9 25-14 25-15 25-15 25-16 25-17 25-17 25-18 25-18 25-19 25-20 25-26 25-26 25-26 25-27 25-27 25-28 25-28 25-29 25-30 25-33

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

24-1 24-2 24-8

25.8.1 Using a Primary Command 25.8.2 Using the Data Set Facility 25.8.3 Selection List Description 25.9 Selecting the Display . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects 26.1 Detaching Data Set Objects . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences . . . . . . . 26.2.2 Including/Excluding List Containing a String 26.2.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . 26.3 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26.3.1 Positioning to Specific Lines . . . . . . . . 26.3.2 Positioning to Name Lines . . . . . . . . . 26.4 Reattaching a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27.1 Allocating a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.1.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.2 Cataloging a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3 Copying a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.3.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.4 Compressing a Partitioned Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.5 Define Alias . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.5.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.5.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.6 Define GDG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.6.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.6.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.7.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.7.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.7.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.7.4 Delete Confirmation Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.8 Inquiring About a Data Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.9 Inquiring About a Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.10 Printing a Data Set Object . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.10.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.10.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.10.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.11 Releasing Allocated Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.12 Renaming Data Sets/Members/Modules . . . . . . . . . . 27.12.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.12.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.12.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27.13 Uncataloging a Data Set

CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

25-33 25-34 25-35 25-38 26-1 26-2 26-3 26-3 26-4 26-5 26-8 26-8 26-8 26-10 27-1 27-2 27-2 27-3 27-11 27-13 27-13 27-16 27-20 27-21 27-22 27-23 27-23 27-25 27-25 27-25 27-28 27-29 27-29 27-33 27-33 27-36 27-40 27-44 27-44 27-46 27-51 27-52 27-53 27-53 27-54 27-57 27-58

27.14 Writing to a Data Set

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

27-59

CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility When working with OS data sets or CA-Librarian master files, you can use primary commands or the Data Set Facility to: ■ Directly access data that is in a: – Sequential data set. – Partitioned Data Set (PDS) member or CA-Librarian module. – Generation Data Group (GDG) data set. ■ Produce Selection Lists that contain information about: – All or selected volumes. – All or selected data sets on a specific volume (for example, the VTOC information). – All or selected entries on a VSAM, ICF or OS CVOL catalog. – All or selected members/modules on a PDS (like the PDS directory) or CA-Librarian master file (like the master file index). ■ Browse through the attached data or Selection List. While browsing, you can locate and note the occurrences of specific character strings. You can also browse other types of attached data (like an AWS) and then return to the data you were browsing. ■ Perform a variety of data management functions which include: – Copying all or part of a data set object into an AWS – Printing all or part of a data set object at a 328x-type printer or a system printer. Note: A data set object can be a sequential data set, PDS member or CA-Librarian module. In the form of a Selection List, it can also be a PDS directory, CA-Librarian index, list of catalog entries, volume table of contents or list of volumes. ■ Allocating, deleting, renaming, cataloging, and so on. You can perform all of these operations using the Data Set Facility or primary commands. Many can also be performed using Selection Lists that are provided through the Data Set Facility.

Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility 24-1

24.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility

24.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility You can attach the Data Set Facility menu (see “Data Set: Data Set Facility Menu” on page 24-3) by issuing the command: ATTACH DSN or ATTACH VOLUME If you enter either of these commands with no operand, the menu is displayed. You can include a function code and data set name with the DSN command. If you include a function code and that function has a panel associated with it, you can bypass the Data Set Facility menu and display the function panel. For example, if you enter: DSN AL TEST.NEW the Allocate Function Panel is displayed with TEST.NEW in the DATA SET field. If no panel is associated with the function, the Data Set Facility menu is displayed along with any information that you provided with the command. For example, if you enter: DSN CT TEST.NEW VOL STOR=1 the Data Set Facility menu will show CT in the FUNCTION field, TEST.NEW in the DATA SET field and STOR01 in the VOLUMES field. To perform this function, press the ENTER key. (The Data Set Facility menu will be redisplayed, allowing you to perform other functions.) If you are currently viewing a data set object, you can redisplay the menu by entering: SELECT MENU When the menu is displayed, you can use the command: SELECT ALT to bounce the display between the last available specific and generic data set name.

24-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

24.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility

Data Set: Data Set Facility Menu

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.... DATA SET FACILITY FUNCTION

==>

DATA SET VOLUMES UNIT NAMES VOLUME TYPES ARCHIVE LEVEL PGMR NAME MODULE TYPE DISPLAY FORMAT

==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==>

A AL AM C CM

-

PASSWORD MCD CODE LANGUAGE (Q,S,L,H) CONFIRM DELETE

ATTACH DSN ALLOCATE DSN SMS MANAGED ALLOC COPY DSN COMPRESS DSN

CT D DA DG I

-

CATALOG DSN DELETE DSN DEFINE ALIAS DEFINE GDG DATA SET INFO

U

==> ==> ==> ==> DSN: Y MEM: Y P R RL UC X

-

PRINT DSN RENAME DSN RELEASE SPACE UNCATALOG DSN TERMINATE DSF

V

The fields comprising this menu include: FUNCTION

Enter the appropriate code to perform the desired action. The codes and their related actions are shown at the bottom of the menu.

DATA SET

Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data set to be involved in the designated function. The name may be composed of one or more wildcard characters. (Wildcards are described later in this section.) If the name does not include wildcards, it may be qualified with: dsnmem

A one- to eight-character PDS member or CA-Librarian module to be attached. (This name may be composed of one or more wildcard characters.)

v

Relative generation number of the GDG data set to be attached, specified as 0 (most current), a minus number (like -1) or a positive number (like +1).

Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility 24-3

24.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility

VOLUMES

Enter a one- to six-character volume serial number. If DATA SET contains a specific data set name, one to six serial numbers can be specified. Only one volume can be specified if a generic data set name is specified. VOLUMES is required if the data set is not cataloged. Note: To display a VTOC Selection List, include the appropriate serial number and, optionally, a data set name containing wildcards. To display a Volume Selection List, the serial number must include one or more wildcards cards. If no volume ID is specified, then UNIT NAMES and/or VOLUME TYPES is required. Do not include a data set name.

UNIT NAMES

Enter a one- to eight-character unit name associated with a device type. It can be either an IBM-defined generic name (like 3350) or a site-defined esoteric name (like SYSDA). UNIT NAMES is required if the data set is not cataloged and resides on a mass storage device. It is also required by some functions (like CATALOG) if the specified volume(s) are not mounted. Note: To display a Volume Selection List, the unit type can be specified alone or with VOLUMES or VOLUME TYPES.

VOLUME TYPES

Enter any combination of the following: PRIVATE

Include private volumes. (Abbreviate as PRV.)

PUBLIC

Include public volumes. (Abbreviate as PUB.)

STORAGE

Include storage volumes. (Abbreviate as STG.)

Note: VOLUME TYPES is valid only when displaying a Volume Selection List. It can be used with VOLUMES and UNIT NAMES. If it is omitted, all types are included in the Selection List.

24-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

24.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility

ARCHIVE LEVEL

Enter the archive level of the CA-Librarian master file module to be involved in the operation. (The module must be in ARCHIE format.) If omitted, the most current level of the module is assumed. The level can be specified in one of the following forms: Lx

Absolute level number (between 0 and 65535) as reported on the CA-Librarian Update Report.

-y

Relative level number between 0 and 255. The current level is -0; -1 is one level older than the current.

yymmddhhmmss Date and time when the desired archive level was current. An even number of digits (starting from the right) can be omitted. They are assumed to have the highest values consistent with the values of the specified digits. PASSWORD

Enter one or two passwords (established by your site). If one password is specified, it is treated as the data set or CA-Librarian master file module password. If two passwords are specified, the first is treated as the data set password and the second is treated as the CA-Librarian password. If omitted and a password is required, access is denied.

PGMR NAME

Enter the one- to 15-character programmer name to be used when selecting modules for inclusion in a CA-Librarian Selection List. Only those modules marked as owned by the specified programmer are included in the Selection List. If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by the other fields) are included.

MCD CODE

Enter the Management code of the CA-Librarian master file. MCD is only required when the master file contains PROD2 modules.

Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility 24-5

24.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility

MODULE TYPE

Enter one of the following to designate the type of modules to be included in a CA-Librarian Selection List: PROD0

Includes only those modules with PROD0 security status.

PROD1

Includes only those modules with PROD1 security status.

PROD2

Includes only those modules with PROD2 security status.

TEST

Includes only those modules with TEST security status.

If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by other fields) are included. LANGUAGE

Enter the language code designating the programming language type of the modules that are to be included in a CA-Librarian Selection List. If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by other fields) are included.

DISPLAY FORMAT

Enter one of the following to designate the extent of information that is to be included in a Selection List: HIST

Only history records for the specified CA-Librarian master file module are to be displayed.

QUICK, SHORT, or LONG The amount of information to be included in the initial Selection List display. Note: HIST, QUICK, SHORT and LONG are mutually exclusive. (Abbreviate as H, Q, S and L respectively.) Whichever setting you select is remembered at sign off and is reinstated when you sign back on. Note: QUICK is ignored if you request a qualified CA-Librarian Selection List.

24-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

24.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility

CONFIRM DELETE

Designates whether delete operations are to be confirmed prior to execution. DSN

Specify YES or NO to control confirmation at the data set level. (Abbreviate as Y or N.)

MEM

Specify YES or NO to control confirmation at the member/module level. (Abbreviate as Y or N.)

With YES, a confirmation panel is displayed to allow verification that the designated item(s) are to be deleted. The settings in effect when you sign off are remembered and reinstated when you sign back on.

Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility 24-7

24.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility

24.1.1 Using Wildcard Characters to Create a Catalog or VTOC Selection List The following table identifies the wildcard characters that can be used with data set names. Character

Meaning and Examples

+

Any number of trailing characters within a level or any number of subsequent levels.

**

Example:

Possible Matches:

TEST1.ABC.+

TEST1.ABC.ALPHA TEST1.ABC.BETA.SOURCE

TEST2.ABC+

TEST2.ABC.ALPHA TEST2.ABCR.NEXT.LOAD

Any number of index levels (including none). TEST3.**

TEST3.AAA.SOURCE TEST3.BBB

TEST4.**.SOURCE *

TEST4.BBB.SOURCE TEST4.BBB.NEXT.SOURCE

Any single index level. TEST5.A.*

TEST5.A.BASE TEST5.A.SAMPLE

TEST6.*.SAMPLE

TEST6.A.SAMPLE TEST6.BBCCDD.SAMPLE

Any number of leading characters within a level. TEST7.*AB

TEST7.CAB TEST7.XYZAB

Any number of trailing characters within a level. TEST8.AB*

TEST8.ABC TEST8.ABXYZ

Any number of embedded characters within a level. TEST9.A*C.SOURCE

24-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

TEST9.AAC.SOURCE TEST9.ABEFGC.SOURCE

24.1 Attaching the Data Set Facility

24.1.2 Using Wildcard Characters to Create a CA-Librarian, PDS or Volume Selection While the examples of the wildcards in the following table use member/module names, these same wildcards can be used with a volume serial number. Character

Meaning and Exanples

?

Any single character.

*

Example:

Possible Matches:

TEST.SOURCE(RO?)

ROE ROS ROW

None, one or more characters. TEST.SOURCE(*JCL*) AJCL JCL JCLEND XJCLX

+

None, one or more trailing characters. TEST.SOURCE(RO+)

RO ROE ROSCOE

Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility 24-9

24.2 Using Data Set Facility Function Panels

24.2 Using Data Set Facility Function Panels You can use the Data Set Facility to perform a variety of functions. Each function is identified by a specific code. The codes, shown in in the following table, can be specified with the DSN command or through the Data Set Facility menu. Code

Function

Action

A

Attach a data set object.

Performed.

AL

Allocate a data set.

Panel displayed.

AM

Allocate an SMS-managed data set.

Panel displayed.

C

Copy a data set object.

Panel displayed.

CM

Compress a partitioned data set.

Performed.

CT

Catalog a data set.

Performed.

D

Delete a data set, member or module.

Panel displayed.

DA

Define an alias.

Panel displayed.

DG

Define a GDG.

Panel displayed.

I

Inquire about a data set or volume.

Performed.

P

Print a data set object.

Panel displayed.

R

Rename a data set, member or module.

Panel displayed.

RL

Release unused DASD space.

Performed.

UC

Uncatalog a data set.

Performed.

X

Terminate the Data Set Facility.

Performed.

The field ACTION in the previous figure indicates whether the function is performed directly or requires additional information. For example, the information you provide through the menu is sufficient to catalog a data set (function code CT) but insufficient to allocate a data set (function code AL). When additional information is needed, a function-related panel is displayed. When such a panel is displayed, you can move from it to another panel or to the menu by entering in the first panel field: =[code.code] ■ If you enter only the equal sign (=), you are returned to the menu. ■ If you specify =X, the Data Set Facility is terminated.

24-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

24.2 Using Data Set Facility Function Panels

■ If you specify any other code (like =AL), the appropriate function-related panel is displayed. If you include a subfunction code, the appropriate function-related panel is displayed and its OPTION field will contain the subfunction code. If the function-related panel is displayed while the screens are split, you can use PF keys to scroll the panel. Information about attaching a data set object is described in the next chapter. The remaining Data Set Facility functions are described in Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks.”

Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility 24-11

24.3 Using Data Set Facility Selection Lists

24.3 Using Data Set Facility Selection Lists You can use the Data Set Facility or a primary command to create and attach: ■ ■ ■ ■

A PDS directory or CA-Librarian master file index. The entries in a catalog. A volume table of contents (VTOC). Volume information.

The information is displayed as a Selection List in the Execution Area of the screen. This allows you to issue primary commands in the Command Area at any time during your session. The first line of each Selection List contains a top marker (==TOP==). If the bottom marker (==BOTTOM==) is not displayed, the number of entries in the list exceeds the screen size. You can use PF keys to scroll within the list. The amount of information available with each Selection List exceeds the width of 80-column screens. The information is, therefore, divided into alternate display formats. To view the different formats sequentially, enter the command: SELECT ALT To view a specific format, enter the number of that format with the command, as in: SELECT ALT 2 See Chapter 25, “Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal” for information about displaying each type of Selection List. The information includes a description of the fields comprising each list. The alternate display numbers shown with the description are for 80-column screens. Additional formats (containing variations of the information) are available at terminals supporting wider screen sizes.

24-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

24.3 Using Data Set Facility Selection Lists

24.3.1 Entering Function Codes You can use Selection Lists to perform a variety of functions. Each function is identified by a specific code. You can enter one or more codes per Selection List. As illustrated in “Data Set: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example” on page 24-14, the function codes are entered in the area shown at the left of the display. If you specify the same function code multiple times, they are processed sequentially. If you specify different function codes, the codes are processed sequentially within the following function hierarchy: X

Terminate Data Set Facility.

D

Delete data set, member or module.*

DX

Delete the members of a PDS without deleting the data set itself.*

UC

Uncatalog a data set.

R

Rename data set, member or module.*

DA

Define an alias for a: 1) PDS member or 2) non-VSAM data set or ICF/VSAM user catalog.

DG

Define a generation data group.

RL

Release unused DASD space.

CM

Compress a partitioned data set.

P

Print a data set, member or module.

CT

Catalog a data set.

I

Inquire about data set.*

G

Get attributes.

C

Copy a data set, member or module.

AL

Allocate a new data set.

AM

Allocate an SMS-managed data set.

H

Attach CA-Librarian module history.

A

Attach data set, member or module.*

Note: * This function cannot be performed through a Selection List if the data set is password protected. Use the Data Set Facility menu or appropriate primary command instead.

Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility 24-13

24.3 Using Data Set Facility Selection Lists

The following example illustrates how you can enter multiple functions codes on a Selection List. To qualify a function, specify information in the STATUS field. (See Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” for information about each of the functions you can perform through a Selection List.) Data Set: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== VOLSER UNIT DSNS DSCBS CONTG--CYL--AVAIL CONTG--TRK--AVAIL STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2 DATA SET NAME STATUS ORG RFM BLKSZ LRECL ABC.TEST.ASM A ABC.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 1 I ABC.TEST.OBJECT PO FB 8== ABC.TEST1.LOAD D BASE.TEST.TESTLOAD PO U 13=3= R DATA.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 1

U

V

The functions in “Data Set: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example” are processed in the following order: 1. The data set BASE.TEST.TESTLOAD will be deleted. (A delete confirmation panel may be displayed.) 2. A rename panel will then be automatically displayed so that you can change the name of DATA.TEST.LOAD. 3. An information panel for ABC.TEST.OBJECT is then presented and any remaining unexecuted functions are placed in a pending state. After viewing the information, you can: ■ Resume function code execution by entering the command SELECT NEXT. The next function (like attach ABC.TEST.LOAD) will be performed. ■ Terminate execution by entering SELECT PREV (to return to the Selection List) or SELECT MENU (to return to the Data Set Facility menu). In either case, any unexecuted functions are ignored. 4. Finally, the data set ABC.TEST.LOAD is displayed. Note that all function codes are evaluated before any one is executed. If an invalid or incomplete function is specified, the PG functions are placed in a pending state and a message is displayed. To resume execution, you must either: 1. Correct the invalid/incomplete function, or 2. Remove it by typing a space over it.

24-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

24.3 Using Data Set Facility Selection Lists

If multiple function codes are specified and one of them is X, all of the other function codes are ignored -- the Data Set Facility is immediately terminated.

24.3.2 Refreshing a Selection List After a function is performed, the STATUS field will contain the appropriate completion message. (If the Selection List was using the QUICK or SHORT display format option, information about the affected data set, member or module is also displayed.) The following example illustrates how the Selection List might appear after performing the actions noted in “Data Set: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example” on page 24-14. Data Set: Selection List Before REFRESHing

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== VOLSER UNIT DSNS DSCBS CONTG--CYL--AVAIL CONTG--TRK--AVAIL STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2 DATA SET NAME STATUS ORG RFM BLKSZ LRECL ABC.TEST.LOAD )ATTACH PO U 12288 1 ABC.TEST.OBJECT )INFO PO FB 8== ABC.TEST1.LOAD BASE.TEST.TESTLOAD )DELETE PO U 13=3= DATA.TEST.LOAD )RENAME PO U 12288 1 EDU.TEST.OBJECT

U

V

The more functions you perform through the same Selection List, the more completion messages and information will be displayed. At any point, you can redisplay the Selection List with the most current information (for example, the deleted entries removed and renamed entries shown with their new names). To do this, enter the command: REFRESH

Chapter 24. Data Sets: Introducing the Data Set Facility 24-15

24.3 Using Data Set Facility Selection Lists

If you include the QUICK, SHORT or LONG operand with the REFRESH command, you can designate the amount of information you want displayed. For example, to redisplay an updated version of the Selection List shown in the previous figure without any of the data set information, you would enter: REFRESH QUICK

24-16 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal This chapter describes how you can display: ■ Data directly. This includes a: – Sequential data set, – PDS member or CA-Librarian module, or – Specific generation of a Generation Data Group (GDG). ■ One of the following Selection Lists: – Volume Selection List containing information about all or specific volumes. – VTOC Selection List containing information about all or specific data sets on a volume. – Catalog Selection List containing all or specific catalog entries. – CA-Librarian Selection List containing all or specific index entries. – PDS Selection List containing all or specific directory entries.

To be attached, the data set must: ■ Reside on an online DASD volume or a mass storage volume capable of being staged. Tape volumes and offline DASD volumes can be accessed only if the requested data set has been migrated by the IBM Hierarchical Storage Manager (HSM) and HSM is currently active. ■ Not be under exclusive control by another executing task or allocated with DISP=OLD in the CA-Roscoe JCL. ■ Not use the track overflow feature. ■ Not have a variable spanned record format. ■ Not have its access prevented by site specifications made by the system programmer.

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-1

25.1 Attaching a CA-Librarian Selection List

25.1 Attaching a CA-Librarian Selection List You can use a primary command, the Data Set Facility menu or a Catalog or VTOC Selection List to display a Selection List containing a CA-Librarian master file index. Depending on the data set object you are currently viewing, you can also display a CA-Librarian Selection List by entering the command: SELECT DIR

25.1.1 Using a Primary Command Using the ATTACH DSN command, you can display a CA-Librarian Selection List by entering the command and the appropriate data set name, as in: ATTACH DSN LIBR.SOURCE If the data set is not cataloged or is password-protected, you must include the appropriate volume serial number and password, as in: ATTACH DSN LIBR.SOURCE VOL STOR!2 PSWD MYPASS You can also qualify the display to include only those entries that are associated with a specific programmer, module type or language code. For example, to attach a Selection List containing only the names of the modules associated with the programmer named JONES, you would enter: ATTACH DSN LIBR.TEST PGMR JONES Finally, you can use wildcard characters to create a Selection List containing only those modules that meet specific criteria. For example, if you enter: ATTACH DSN LIBR.SOURCE(RO+) the resulting Selection List will contain only those modules whose names begin with RO. (The following table identifies the wildcard characters that can be used with module names.)

25-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

25.1 Attaching a CA-Librarian Selection List

Character

Meaning and Examples

?

Any single character.

*

Example:

Possible Matches:

LIBR.SOURCE(RO?)

ROE ROS ROW

None, one or more characters. LIBR.SOURCE(*JCL*)

+

AJCL JCL JCLEND XJCLX

None, one or more trailing characters. LIBR.SOURCE(RO+)

RO ROE ROSCOE

25.1.2 Using the Data Set Facility To display a CA-Librarian Selection List from the Data Set Facility menu, enter the code A in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate name in the DATA SET field. The data set name can include a module name which contains one or more of the wildcard characters shown in the previous table. If the data set is not cataloged or is password protected, you must enter the appropriate information in the VOLUMES and/or PASSWORD fields, as illustrated in the following example. Data Set: Attaching CA-Librarian Selection List

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.... DATA SET FACILITY FUNCTION ===> A DATA SET VOLUMES UNIT NAMES ARCHIVE LEVEL

===> ===> ===> ===>

LIBR.NEWDATA STOR=1 PASSWORD

===> SECRET

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-3

25.1 Attaching a CA-Librarian Selection List

25.1.3 Selection List Description The following example illustrates the type of information displayed when you request information about the contents of a CA-Librarian master file. Data Set: CA-Librarian Selection List

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. =================================== T O P =================== DATA SET NAME VOLSER MEMS ORG RECFM BLKSZ LRECL TEST.LIBR.SOURCE STOR=1 24 PS F 4276 = MEMBER STATUS PSWD LAST-MODIFIED DESCRIPTION CREATED AMODULE 8212=1112338 FIRST MODULE 12/ BMODULE 8412=8==45=4 SECOND MODULE =8/ CMODULE 86=4=22=1218 THIRD MODULE =7/ DMODULE 85=5=1233==5 1=/

8

You can use this Selection List to perform one or more of the following functions: A C D G H P R X *

- Attach a module - Copy a module - Delete a module - Get module attributes - Attach module history - Print a module - Rename a module - Terminate Data Set Facility - Position Selection List

To perform one or more of these functions, type the appropriate code(s) in the first area shown in “Data Set: CA-Librarian Selection List.” With Copy, Print and Rename, you must provide additional information in the STATUS field. (See the appropriate section in Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” for details.) After performing the function, the STATUS field will indicate the result of each operation.

25.1.3.1 Selecting Alternate Displays The amount of information provided through the Selection List exceeds the width of 80-column screens. The information is, therefore, divided into alternate displays. You can change the display to view the different information by entering: SELECT ALT [v] where v is the number of the display to be viewed next. If you omit the number, you will proceed sequentially through all of the different displays.

25-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

25.1 Attaching a CA-Librarian Selection List

The ALT field in the following table contains the number of the alternate display in which each field appears on an 80-column screen. If you are using a terminal supporting a wider screen, additional displays (containing variations of the same information) are available.

25.1.3.2 Display Format The extent of information shown when the Selection List is initially displayed depends on whether you requested a QUICK, SHORT or LONG display format. The following table lists all of the information that can be provided and identifies the display format with which it is associated (Q for QUICK, S for SHORT and L for LONG). If the list is produced with the QUICK or SHORT display format, you can use the G (Get Attributes) code to fill-in the fields for one or more modules.

25.1.3.3 Field Descriptions The first two lines in the Execution Area (following the TOP marker) remain constant as you scroll through the list and provide the following information: DATA SET NAME

Name of the CA-Librarian master file about which information was requested.

VOLSER

Serial number of the volume on which the data set resides.

MEMS

Number of modules in the master file.

ORG

Data set organization.

RECFM

Record format.

BLKSZ

Block size of the file.

LRECL

Logical record length.

The remaining fields identify the modules comprising a CA-Librarian master file and include the information shown in the following table.

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-5

25.1 Attaching a CA-Librarian Selection List

Field Name

Description

ALT

Q

S

L

MODULE

Name of the module

ALL

*

*

*

PSWD

Non-displayed password

ALL

LAST-MODIFIED

Data and time (yymmddhhmmss) the module was last changed

ALL

*

*

DESCRIPTION

Description of the module contents, if available

1

*

*

CREATED

Date the module was created

1

*

*

PROGRAMMER

Name of the programmer associated with the module

2

*

*

LANG

Code identifying the language contents of the module

2

*

*

SSTAT

Security status of the module

2

*

*

BLKS

Number of blocks allocated to the module

2

*

*

RECS

Number of records in the module

2

*

*

25-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

25.2 Attaching a Catalog Selection List

25.2 Attaching a Catalog Selection List You can use a primary command or the Data Set Facility menu to display a Selection List containing the names of all entries on a VSAM catalog, ICF catalog or OS CVOL that begin with a specific qualifier. Depending on the current data set object, you can display a Catalog Selection List by entering the command: SELECT CAT SELECT CAT cannot be used if you are currently viewing a CA-Librarian or PDS Selection List for which a Catalog Selection List was not previously requested.

25.2.1 Using a Primary Command Use the wildcard characters shown in the following table to define the selection criteria that is to be used to determine which data sets are to be included in the Selection List. For example, if you specified a data set name as: ATTACH DSN TEST.AQB+ the resulting Selection List might include such entries as: TEST.ACB.BASE TEST.AXYZB.PREV.SOURCE Character

Meaning and Examples

+

Any number of trailing characters within a level or any number of subsequent levels.

**

Example:

Possible Matches:

TEST1.ABC.+

TEST1.ABC.ALPHA TEST1.ABC.BETA.SOURCE

TEST2.ABC+

TEST2.ABC.ALPHA TEST2.ABCR.NEXT.LOAD

Any number of index levels (including none). TEST3.**

TEST3.AAA.SOURCE TEST3.BBB

TEST4.**.SOURCE

TEST4.BBB.SOURCE TEST4.BBB.NEXT.SOURCE

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-7

25.2 Attaching a Catalog Selection List

Character

Meaning and Examples

*

Any single index level. TEST5.A.*

TEST5.A.BASE TEST5.A.SAMPLE

TEST6.*.SAMPLE

TEST6.A.SAMPLE TEST6.BBCCDD.SAMPLE

Any number of leading characters within a level. TEST7.*AB

TEST7.CAB TEST7.XYZAB

Any number of trailing characters within a level. TEST8.AB*

TEST8.ABC TEST8.ABXYZ

Any number of embedded characters within a level. TEST9.A*C.SOURCE

TEST9.AAC.SOURCE TEST9.ABEFGC.SOURCE

25.2.2 Using the Data Set Facility When using the Data Set Facility, type the code A in the FUNCTION field. As with the primary command, you can use the wildcard characters shown in the previous table with the name you specify in the DATA SET field, as shown in the following example. Data Set: Attaching a Catalog

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. DATA SET FACILITY FUNCTION

===> A

DATA SET VOLUMES

===> TEST.AQB.+ ===>

25-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

25.2 Attaching a Catalog Selection List

25.2.3 Selection List Description The following example illustrates the format of a Catalog Selection List. Data Set: Catalog Selection List

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. =================================== T O P =================== SEARCH ARGUMENT MATCHES CATALOG NAME TYPE TEST.Q.MACLIB 6 CATALOG.UMUROS1 ICF DATA SET NAME STATUS TYPE VOLUME DEVICE TEST.AA.MACLIB NONVSAM STOR=2 33 TEST.BA.MACLIB ALIAS TEST.CC.MACLIB SQ====1 ROOG=4 34 TEST.DDD.MACLIB NONVSAM STOR=2 33

8

You can use this Selection List to perform the following functions: A AL AM C CM CT D DA DG DX G I P R RL UC X *

Attach a data set Allocate a data set Allocate an SMS-managed data set Copy a data set Compress a PDS Catalog a data set Delete a data set Define an alias Define a GDG Delete members of PDS; keep the data set Get data set attributes Display data set information Print a data set Rename a data set Release space Uncatalog a data set Terminate Data Set Facility Position Selection List

To perform one or more of these functions, type the appropriate code(s) in the first area shown in the previous example. With Copy and Print, you must provide additional information in the STATUS field. (See the appropriate section in Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” on page 27-1 for details.) After performing the function, the STATUS field will indicate the result of each operation.

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-9

25.2 Attaching a Catalog Selection List

25.2.3.1 Selecting Alternate Displays The amount of information provided through the Selection List exceeds the width of 80-column screens. The information is, therefore, divided into alternate displays. You can change the display to view different information by entering: SELECT ALT [v] where v is the number of the display to be viewed next. If you omit the number, you will proceed sequentially through all of the different displays. The ALT field in the following table contains the number of the alternate display in which each field appears on an 80-column screen. If you are using a terminal supporting a wider screen, additional displays (containing variations of the same information) are available.

25.2.3.2 Display Format The extent of information shown when the Selection List is initially displayed depends on whether you requested a QUICK, SHORT or LONG display format. The following table lists all of the information that can be provided and identifies the display format with which it is associated (Q for QUICK, S for SHORT and L for LONG). If the list was produced with the QUICK or SHORT display format, you can use the G (Get Attributes) code to fill-in the fields for one or more partitioned data sets.

25-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

25.2 Attaching a Catalog Selection List

25.2.3.3 Field Descriptions The first two lines in the Execution Area (following the TOP marker) remain constant as you scroll through the list and show: SEARCH ARGUMENT Name of the data set you specified through the ATTACH DSN command or the Data Set Facility menu. MATCHES Number of data set names that matched the specified data set criteria. CATALOG NAME Name of the catalog(s) in which the data sets are cataloged. (This field contains *MULTIPLE CATALOGS* if the data sets in the List are cataloged in more than one catalog.) TYPE

The type of catalog(s) searched. The types are: CVOL ICF VSAM N/A

Control volume. Integrated catalog facility. VSAM user catalog. More than one catalog and they are different types.

The remaining fields identify the data sets comprising the catalog and include the information shown in below.

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-11

25.2 Attaching a Catalog Selection List

Field Name

Description

ALT

Q

S

L

DATA SET NAME

Name of data set matching the selection criteria

All

*

*

*

TYPE

Type of data set, shown as:

1

*

*

*

AIX

Alternate index

ALIAS

Alias name

CLUSTER

VSAM cluster

DATA

Data component

GDGBASE

GDG data set base

INDEX

Index component

MASTCAT Master Catalog NONVSAM Non-VSAM data set PAGESPC

Page space data set

PATH

Path

USERCAT

User catalog

VOLUME

VSAM volume data set

VOLUME

Serial number of volume on which the data set resides

1

*

*

DEVICE

Device type on which the data set resides

1

*

*

ORG

Data set organization

2

*

RFM

For non-VSAM data sets, block size

2

*

2

*

For VSAM data sets, record organization, shown as: ESDS, KSDS, LSDS or RRDS BLKSZ

For non-VSAM data sets, block size For VSAM data sets, maximum record length

25-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

25.2 Attaching a Catalog Selection List

Field Name

Description

ALT

Q

S

L

LRECL

For non-VSAM data sets, logical record length. For VSAM data sets, average record length

2

*

CREDT

Data set creation date

3

*

REFDT

Date last referenced

3

*

EXPDT

Data set expiration date

3

*

TRKS

Number of tracks allocated to the data set

4

*

IN-USE

Number of allocated tracks currently in use

4

*

%USED

Percentage of allocated tracks currently being used

4

*

EXT

Number of extents allocated to the data set

4

*

STORCLAS

SMS storage class

5

*

*

DATACLAS

SMS data class

5

*

*

MGMTCLAS

SMS management class

5

*

*

DTYP

SMS data type

5

*

*

Notes: ■ The STATUS field is not displayed when the CREDT, REFDT and EXTDT are displayed. ■ The fields STORCLAS, DATACLAS, MGMTCLAS, and DTYP are displayed only when the IBM DFSMS is installed at the site.

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-13

25.3 Attaching a Generation Data Group Data Set

25.3 Attaching a Generation Data Group Data Set If you are working with Generation Data Groups (GDGs), you can attach a specific generation by including the relative generation number with the data set name. For example, to attach the second most current version of the data set TEST.GENSET, you could enter the ATTACH DSN primary command as: ATTACH DSN TEST.GENSET(-1) or, use the Data Set Facility menu, as illustrated in the example below. Data Set: Attaching a GDG Data Set

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. DATA SET FACILITY FUNCTION

===> A

DATA SET VOLUMES

===> TEST.GENSET(-1) ===>

8

When GDG is attached, the data are presented in a format similar to the one shown in the following example. Data Set: Sample ATTACHed Data Display

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===78 LINE =====1 > TEST.GENSET(G===1V==) > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... ...... ============================= T O P ================= =====1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. =====2 PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT. =====3 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION. =====4 CONFIGURATION SECTION. =====5 SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81. =====6 OBJECT-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81.

The System Information Line begins with DSN(). Immediately below is the name of the attached data set. (As illustrated in preceding example, when a PDS member or CA-Librarian module is attached, its name is included with the data set name.) The right side of the System Information Line shows the number of the first line in the current display. This is to assist you in keeping track of where you are as you scroll forward and backward through the data. The attached data are delimited by a top (==TOP==) and bottom (==BOTTOM==) marker. You can position the display by using primary commands or one of the PF keys to which scrolling functions are assigned.

25-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

25.4 Attaching a PDS Member/CA-Librarian Module

25.4 Attaching a PDS Member/CA-Librarian Module You can attach a PDS member or CA-Librarian module using the ATTACH DSN command, the Data Set Facility menu or a PDS or CA-Librarian Selection List. When a CA-Librarian module is attached, you can bounce the display between the source code and module history records by entering: SELECT ALT

25.4.1 Using a Primary Command Using the ATTACH DSN command, specify the name of the member/module in parentheses following the data set name, as in: ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT) If the member/module is on a data set that is not cataloged, you must specify the serial number of the volume on which the data set resides, as in: ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT) VOL SHR=7 If you are working with CA-Librarian master files, you can qualify the information that is to be displayed. For example, you can specify which archive level of the module you want attached, as in: ATTACH DSN TEST.LIBR(MOD1) ARC -3 If you do not specify an archive level, the most current level of the module is attached. By default, the display begins with the first line in the member/module. You can use the LINE operand to begin the display with a specific line, as in: ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT) LINE 12==

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-15

25.4 Attaching a PDS Member/CA-Librarian Module

25.4.2 Using the Data Set Facility Menu To attach a PDS member or CA-Librarian module through the menu, specify the code A in the FUNCTION field and the member/module name in parentheses following the data set name in the DATA SET field. As illustrated in the following example, if the data set containing the member/module is not cataloged, you must also include the serial number of the volume on which the data set resides in the VOLUMES field. Data Set: Attaching a PDS Member through the Menu

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. DATA SET FACILITY FUNCTION

===> A

DATA SET VOLUMES

===> TEST.MASTER(INVREPT) ===> SHR=7

8

As with the primary command, you can qualify the information you want displayed. The following example illustrates how you can display the third archive level of the CA-Librarian module MOD1 on TEST.LIBR. Data Set: Attaching a CA-Librarian Module through the Menu

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. DATA SET FACILITY FUNCTION

===> A

DATA SET VOLUMES UNIT NAMES ARCHIVE LEVEL

===> TEST.LIBR(MOD1) ===> ===> ===> -3 PGMR NAME

8

===>

If you do not specify an archive level, the most current level of the module is attached.

25-16 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

25.4 Attaching a PDS Member/CA-Librarian Module

25.4.3 Using a Selection List While the format of CA-Librarian and PDS Selection Lists varies based on the information displayed, the way you use them to attach data are the same. The following example illustrates how you would attach the member INVREPT from a PDS Selection List. Data Set: Attaching a Member/Module through a Selection List

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. =================================== T O P =================== DATA SET NAME VOLSER MEMS ORG RECFM BLKSZ LRECL TEST.SOURCE STOR=1 4 PO FB 16== 8= MEMBER STATUS VV.MM CREATED LAST-MODIFIED SIZE INIT MOD INVIN =1.== =4/29/85 =4/29/85 14:41 36 36 = A INVREPT PAY52 TEST1 =1.== 11/=5/84 11/=5/84 11:42 2 2 =

8

25.4.4 Attached Data Description The following example illustrates the format of an attached PDS member or CA-Librarian module. Data Set: Sample ATTACHed Data Display

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===78 LINE =====1 > TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT) > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... ...... ============================= T O P ================= =====1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. =====2 PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT. =====3 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION. =====4 CONFIGURATION SECTION. =====5 SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81. =====6 OBJECT-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81.

8

The System Information Line begins with DSN(). Immediately below is the name of the attached data set and member/module name. The right side of the System Information Line shows the number of the first line in the current display. This is to assist you in keeping track of where you are as you scroll forward and backward through the data. The attached data are delimited by a top (==TOP==) and bottom (==BOTTOM==) marker. You can position the display by using primary commands or the PF keys to which scrolling functions are assigned.

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-17

25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List

25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List You can use a primary command, the Data Set Facility menu or a Catalog or VTOC Selection List to display a Selection List containing a PDS directory. Depending on the data set object you are currently viewing, you can also display a PDS Selection List by entering the command: SELECT DIR

25.5.1 Using a Primary Command Using the ATTACH DSN command, you can display a PDS Selection List by entering the command and the appropriate data set name, as in: ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE If the data set is not cataloged or is password-protected, you must include the appropriate volume serial number and password, as in: ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE VOL STOR=2 PSWD MYPASS You can also use wildcard characters to create a Selection List containing only those members that meet specific criteria. For example, if you enter: ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(RO+) the resulting Selection List will contain only those members whose names begin with RO. (The following table identifies the wildcard characters that can be used with member names.)

25-18 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List

Character

Meaning and Examples

?

Any single character.

*

Example:

Possible Matches:

TEST.SOURCE(RO?)

ROE ROS ROW

None, one or more characters. TEST.SOURCE(*JCL*) AJCL JCL JCLEND XJCLX

+

None, one or more trailing characters. TEST.SOURCE(RO+)

RO ROE ROSCOE

25.5.2 Using the Data Set Facility To display a PDS Selection List from the Data Set Facility menu, enter the code A in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate name in the DATA SET field. The data set name can include a member name which contains one or more of the wildcard characters shown in the previous table. If the data set is not cataloged or is password protected, you must enter the appropriate information in the VOLUMES and/or PASSWORD fields, as illustrated below. Data Set: Attaching PDS Selection List

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.... DATA SET FACILITY FUNCTION

===>

A

DATA SET VOLUMES UNIT NAMES ARCHIVE LEVEL

===> ===> ===> ===>

TEST.NEWDATA STOR=1 PASSWORD

8

===> SECRET

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-19

25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List

25.5.3 Selection List Description This section provides information about PDS Selection Lists for both load libraries and non-load libraries.

25.5.3.1 Load Library Selection List The following example illustrates the type of Selection List displayed when you request information about a data set that contains a load library. Data Set: Load Library Selection List

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. =================================== T O P =================== DATA SET NAME VOLSER MEMS ORG RECFM BLKSZ LRECL TEST.LOAD STOR=5 14 PO U 12288 12288 MEMBER STATUS --------------- ATTRIBUTES -------------DOIT1 RENT REUS DOIT2 RENT REUS DOIT3 RENT REUS REFR AM=31 RM DOIT4 RENT REUS REFR AC=1

8

You can use this Selection List to perform one or more of the following functions: A C D DA G P R X *

Attach a member Copy a member Delete a member Define an alias Get attributes Print a member Rename a member Terminate Data Set Facility Position Selection List

To perform one or more of these functions, type the appropriate code(s) in the first area shown in the previous example. With Copy, Print and Rename, you must provide additional information in the STATUS field. (See the appropriate section in Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” on page 27-1 for details.) After performing the function, the STATUS field will indicate the result of each operation.

25-20 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List

25.5.3.2 Selecting Alternate Displays The amount of information provided through the Selection List exceeds the width of 80-column screens. The information is, therefore, divided into alternate displays. You can change the display to view different information by entering: SELECT ALT [v] where v is the number of the display to be viewed next. If you omit the number, you will proceed sequentially through all of the different displays. The ALT field in the following table contains the number of the alternate display in which each field appears on an 80-column screen. If you are using a terminal supporting a wider screen, additional displays (containing variations of the same information) are available.

25.5.3.3 Display Format The display format setting (QUICK, SHORT or LONG) is ignored when a PDS Selection List is displayed. The Selection List contains all available information.

25.5.3.4 Field Descriptions The first two lines in the Execution Area (following the TOP marker) remain constant as you scroll through the directory. The information includes: DATA SET NAME Name of the data set about which information was requested. VOLSER

Serial number of the volume on which the first resides.

MEMS

Number of members comprising the data set.

ORG

Data set organization of the file.

RECFM

Record format of the file.

BLKSZ

Block size of the file.

LRECL

Logical record length of the file.

The remaining fields identify the members comprising the data set and include the information shown in the following table.

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-21

25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List

Field Name

Description

ALT

Q

S

L

MEMBER

Name of the load module or alias.

All

*

*

*

ATTRIBUTES

Attributes assigned to the load module by the linkage editor. The possible attributes and their meanings are:

1

*

*

*

RENT REUS REFR OVLY TEST

Reentrant Reusable Refreshable Overlay Format Test symbols present NEXC Not executable LOAD Only loadable SCTR Scatter Format AC=N Authorization Code AM=amode Addressing mode RM=rmode Residency mode SIZE

Number of bytes of storage needed to load the module.

2

*

*

*

EP

Offset from the beginning of the load module to the entry point.

2

*

*

*

TTR

Relative track address at which the load module or alias begins.

2

*

*

*

ALIAS-OF

Name of the load module which this name is an alias.

2

*

*

*

LASTMODIFIED

Date (mm/dd/yy) and time (hh:ss) the module was last link-edited. (Available only when site has applied a system/release dependent IBM user mod.)

2

*

*

*

SSI-DATA

System status information

2

*

*

*

25-22 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List

25.5.3.5 Non-Load Selection List The following example illustrates the type of Selection List displayed when you specify a data set which contains a source, macro, procedure or object library. Data Set: PDS Directory Selection List (Non-Load Library)

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. =================================== T O P =================== DATA SET NAME VOLSER MEMS ORG RECFM BLKSZ LRECL TEST.SOURCE STOR=1 12 PO FB 16== 8= MEMBER STATUS VV.MM CREATED LAST-MODIFIED SIZE INIT MOD INVIN =1.== =4/29/85 =4/29/85 14:41 36 36 INVREPT TEST1 =1.== 11/=5/84 11/=5/84 11:42 2 2 TEST2 =1.13 =1/=9/85 =1/23/85 16:28 5 4 WORK= WORK1 =1.=1 =2/2=/85 =5/1=/85 =7:38 51 51 WORK2 =1.== =2/2=/85 =2/2=/85 =8:45 41 41

8

You can use this Selection List to perform one or more of the following functions:

|

|

A C D DA E G P R SU X *

Attach a member Copy a member Delete a member Define an alias Edit a member Get attributes Print a member Rename a member Submit a member Terminate Data Set Facility Position Selection List

To perform one or more of these functions, type the appropriate code(s) in the first area shown in the previous example. With Copy, Print and Rename, you must provide additional information in the STATUS field. (See the appropriate section in Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” on page 27-1 for details.) After performing the function, the STATUS field will indicate the result of each operation.

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-23

25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List

25.5.3.6 Selecting Alternate Displays The amount of information provided through the Selection List exceeds the width of 80-column screens. The information is, therefore, divided into alternate displays. You can change the display to view different information by entering: SELECT ALT [v] where v is the number of the display to be viewed next. If you omit the number, you will proceed sequentially through all of the different displays. The ALT field in the following table contains the number of the alternate displays in which each field appears on an 80-column screen. If you are using a terminal supporting a wider screen, additional displays (containing variations of the same information) are available.

25.5.3.7 Display Format The display format setting (QUICK, SHORT or LONG) is ignored when a PDS Selection List is displayed. The Selection List contains all available information.

25.5.3.8 Field Descriptions The first two lines in the Execution Area (following the TOP marker) remain constant as you scroll through the directory and show: DATA SET NAME

Name of the data set about which information was requested.

VOLSER

Serial number of the volume on which the file resides.

MEMS

Number of members comprising the data set.

ORG

Data set organization of the file.

RECFM

Record format of the file.

BLKSZ

Block size of the file.

LRECL

Logical record length of the file.

The remaining fields identify the members comprising the data set and include the information shown in the following table.

25-24 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

25.5 Attaching a PDS Selection List

Field Name

Description

ALT

Q

S

L

MEMBER

Name of the member.

1/2

*

*

*

VV.MM

Version and modification number of the member, if available.

1/2

*

*

*

CREATED

Date (mm/dd/yy) the member was created, if available.

1/2

*

*

*

LASTMODIFIED

Date (mm/dd/yy) and time (hh:ss) the member was last changed, if available.

1/2

*

*

*

SIZE

Number of records currently in the member, if available.

1/2

*

*

*

INIT

Number of records in the member when it was created, if available.

1/2

*

*

*

TTR

Relative track address at which the member begins, if available.

1

*

*

*

MOD

Number of records in the member that have been modified, if available.

2

*

*

*

USER

CA-Roscoe key or TSO user ID of the individual that created the member or last changed it, if available.

1/2

*

*

*

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-25

25.6 Attaching a Sequential Data Set

25.6 Attaching a Sequential Data Set You can use the ATTACH DSN primary command, the Data Set Facility menu or a Catalog or VTOC Selection List to view a data set.

25.6.1 Using a Primary Command To browse the contents of a sequential data set, enter the ATTACH DSN command and the appropriate data set name, as in: ATTACH DSN TEST.MASTER If the data set is not cataloged, you must specify the serial number of the volume on which it resides. For example, if TEST.MASTER is not cataloged and resides on volume SHR07, you could attach it by entering: ATTACH DSN TEST.MASTER VOLUME SHR=7 By default, the display begins with the first line of the data set. You can use the LINE operand to begin the display with a specific line, as in: ATTACH DSN TEST.MASTER LINE 2==

25.6.2 Using the Data Set Facility Menu To attach data from the Data Set Facility menu, specify A in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate name in the DATA SET field. As illustrated in the following example if the data set is not cataloged, you must enter the serial number of the volume on which it resides in the VOLUMES field. Data Set: Attaching a Data Set Through the Menu

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1.===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. DATA SET FACILITY FUNCTION

===> A

DATA SET VOLUMES

===> TEST.MASTER ===> SHR=7

25-26 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

8

25.6 Attaching a Sequential Data Set

25.6.3 Using a Selection List To attach a data set through a Selection List, specify the A (for Attach) function code to the left of the data set name. Note: You cannot attach password-protected data sets from a Selection List. To do so, use the primary command or return to the Data Set Facility menu. The following example illustrates how you would attach the data set ABC.TEST.LOAD.

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1.===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. ==================================== T O P =================== VOLSER UNIT DSNS DSCBS CONTG--CYL--AVAIL CONTG--TRK--AVAIL STOR=1. 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2 DATA SET NAME STATUS ORG RFM BLKSZ LRECL ABC.TEST.ASM PO FB 8= 8= A ABC.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 12288 ABC.TEST.OBJECT PO FB 8== 8=

8

25.6.4 Attached Data Description When a sequential data set is attached, the data are presented in a format similar to the one shown in the following example. Data Set: Sample ATTACHed Data Display

7>

8

> DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===78 LINE =====1 > TEST.SOURCE > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... ...... ============================= T O P ================= =====1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. =====2 PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT. =====3 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION. =====4 CONFIGURATION SECTION. =====5 SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81. =====6 OBJECT-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81.

The System Information Line begins with DSN(). Immediately below is the name of the attached data set. The right side of the System Information Line shows the number of the first line in the current display. This is to assist you in keeping track of where you are as you scroll forward and backward through the data. The attached data are delimited by a top (==TOP==) and bottom (==BOTTOM==) marker. You can position the display by using primary commands or the PF keys to which scrolling functions are assigned.

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-27

25.7 Attaching a Volume Selection List

25.7 Attaching a Volume Selection List You can use a primary command or the Data Set Facility menu to display a Selection List containing information about all or selected volumes. If you are currently viewing a data set object, you can display a previously created Volume Selection List by entering the command: SELECT VOL

25.7.1 Using a Primary Command With the ATTACH VOLUME command, you can qualify the type of information you want included in the Selection List by: ■ Using wildcard characters shown in the following table as part of the volume serial number, as in: ATTACH VOL STOR+ The resulting Selection List contains only those volume serial numbers beginning with STOR. ■ Specifying a unit type, as in: ATTACH VOL UNIT 338= The resulting list contains only those volumes that reside on 3380s. ■ Indicating the type of volumes that are to be included, as in: ATTACH VOL TYPE PRIVATE The resulting display includes only those volumes defined as private. (The other valid volume types are PUBLIC and STORAGE. With no qualification, all types are included.) You can also combine these qualifiers within a single execution. For example, to produce a Selection List containing all volumes beginning with STOR that reside on 3380s and are defined as private or public, you would enter: ATTACH VOL STOR+ UNIT 338= TYPE PRIVATE PUBLIC

25-28 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

25.7 Attaching a Volume Selection List

Ccharacter

Meaning and Examples

?

Any single character.

*

Example:

Possible Matches:

??ROS1

ADROS1 MUROS1

None, one or more characters. MU*S*

MUAS MURDS1 MUROS1

+

None, one or more trailing characters. MUR+

MUR MUROS1

25.7.2 Using the Data Set Facility To display a Volume Selection List from the Data Set Facility menu, enter the code A in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate information in the VOLUMES, UNIT NAME, and VOLUME TYPES fields. The following example shows how you can use the wildcard characters shown in previous table to request information about all volumes beginning with STOR that reside on 3380s and are defined as private. Data Set: Attaching Volume Selection List

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. DATA SET FACILITY FUNCTION

===> A

DATA SET VOLUMES UNIT NAMES VOLUME TYPES

===> ===> STOR+ ===> 338= ===> PRIVATE

8

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-29

25.7 Attaching a Volume Selection List

25.7.3 Selection List Description The following example illustrates the format of a Volume Selection List. Data Set: Volume Selection List

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== VOLUME UNIT TYPE MATCHES STOR+ 338= ALL 2 VOLUME STATUS UNIT DEVTYPE INDEX SMS DEVSTAT VOLSTAT STOR=1 4=1 338= ACTIVE NO A PRIV/R STOR=2 4== 338= ACTIVE NO A PRIV/R

8

You can use this Selection List to perform one or more of the following functions: A C G I P X *

Attach volume's VTOC Copy VTOC of volume Get volume information Display volume information Print VTOC of volume Terminate Data Set Facility Position Selection List

To perform one or more of these functions, type the appropriate code in the first area shown in the previous example. With Copy and Print, you must provide additional information in the STATUS field. (See the appropriate section in Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” on page 27-1 for details.) After performing the function, the STATUS field will indicate the result of each operation.

25.7.3.1 Selecting Alternate Displays The amount of information provided through the Selection List exceeds the width of 80-column screens. The information is, therefore, divided into alternate displays. You can change the display to view different information by entering: SELECT ALT [v] where v is the number of the display to be viewed next. If you omit the number, you will proceed sequentially through all of the different displays. The ALT field in the following table contains the number of the alternate display in which each field appears on an 80-column screen. If you are using a terminal supporting a wider screen, additional displays (containing variations of the same information) are available.

25-30 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

25.7 Attaching a Volume Selection List

25.7.3.2 Display Format The extent of information shown when the Selection List is initially displayed depends on whether you requested a QUICK, SHORT or LONG display format. The following table lists all of the information that can be provided, and identifies the display format with which it is associated (Q for QUICK, S for SHORT and L for LONG). If the list was produced with the QUICK or SHORT display format, you can use the G (Get Information) code to fill-in the fields for one or more volumes.

25.7.3.3 Field Descriptions The first two lines in the Execution Area (following the TOP marker) remain constant as you scroll through the display and show: VOLUME

Search string (including wildcard characters) used to build the Selection List.

UNIT

Unit type used to build the Selection List.

TYPE

Device type used to build the Selection List, shown as ALL or PRIVATE, PUBLIC and/or STORAGE.

MATCHES Number of volume matching the selection criteria. The remaining fields identify the data sets on the volume and include the information shown below. Field Name

Description

ALT

Q

S

L

VOLUME

Volume serial number.

ALL

*

*

*

UNIT

Channel and unit address of device.

ALL

*

*

*

DEVTYPE

Physical device type.

1/2

*

*

*

INDEX

Code showing if device has indexed VTOC and, if one exists, its status.

1

*

*

SMS

SMS status of the device.

1

*

*

DEVSTAT

Device status when information requested.

1

*

*

*

VOLSTAT

Volume status when information requested.

1

*

*

*

CYL (CONTG)

Number of free contiguous cylinders in largest contiguous extent.

2

*

CYL (AVAIL)

Number of free cylinders.

2

*

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-31

25.7 Attaching a Volume Selection List

Field Name

Description

ALT

TRK (CONTG)

Number of free tracks in largest contiguous extent.

2

*

TRK (AVAIL)

Number of free tracks on device.

2

*

AV-XT

Number of extents not in use.

2

*

#DSNS

Number of data sets defined on device.

3

*

USED-XT

Number of extents allocated to the data set.

3

*

VTOC-TRKS

Size of device VTOC in tracks.

3

DSCBS (TOTAL)

Number of data set control blocks in VTOC.

3

*

DSCBS (FREE)

Number not in use.

3

*

%USED

Amount of space used in VTOC rounded to nearest integer.

3

*

TRKS (TOTAL)

Number of data tracks on device.

4

TRKS (USED)

Number of tracks in use.

4

*

%USED

Amount of space used on the device rounded to nearest integer.

4

*

MAXBLK

Largest valid block size for this device.

4

*

*

*

TRKSIZE

Physical size of device track.

4

*

*

*

TRK/CYL

Number of tracks per device cylinder.

4

*

*

*

25-32 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Q

S

*

*

L

*

*

25.8 Attaching a VTOC Selection List

25.8 Attaching a VTOC Selection List You can use a primary command or the Data Set Facility menu to display a Selection List containing the names and attributes of the data sets on a specific volume. If you are currently viewing a data set object, you can display a previously created VTOC Selection List by entering the command: SELECT VTOC

25.8.1 Using a Primary Command To obtain information for a specific volume, include the serial number of that volume with the ATTACH command, as in: ATTACH VOLUME STOR=1 Using the wildcard characters shown in the following table, you can qualify the displayed information. For example, to create a Selection List containing only those data sets starting with TEST and ending with SOURCE on STOR02, you would enter: ATTACH DSN TEST.QQ.SOURCE VOLUME STOR=2 Character

Meaning and Examples

+

Any number of trailing characters within a level or any number of subsequent levels.

**

Example:

Possible Matches:

TEST1.ABC.+

TEST1.ABC.ALPHA TEST1.ABC.BETA.SOURCE

TEST2.ABC+

TEST2.ABC.ALPHA TEST2.ABCR.NEXT.LOAD

Any number of index levels (including none). TEST3.**

TEST3.AAA.SOURCE TEST3.BBB

TEST4.**.SOURCE

TEST4.BBB.SOURCE TEST4.BBB.NEXT.SOURCE

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-33

25.8 Attaching a VTOC Selection List

Character

Meaning and Examples

*

Any single index level. TEST5.A.* TEST5.A.BASE TEST5.A.SAMPLE TEST6.*.SAMPLE TEST6.A.SAMPLE TEST6.BBCCDD.SAMPLE Any number of leading characters within a level. TEST7.*AB

TEST7.CAB TEST7.XYZAB

Any number of trailing characters within a level. TEST8.AB*

TEST8.ABC TEST8.ABXYZ

Any number of embedded characters within a level. TEST9.A*C.SOURCE TEST9.AAC.SOURCE TEST9.ABEFGC.SOURCE

25.8.2 Using the Data Set Facility To display a VTOC Selection List from the Data Set Facility menu, enter the code A in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate serial number in the VOLUMES field. Optionally, you can specify a data set name with wildcard characters to produce a qualified Selection List. The following example illustrates how you might request information about the data sets on STOR01. Data Set: Attaching a VTOC

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. DATA SET FACILITY FUNCTION

===> A

DATA SET VOLUMES

===> ===> STOR=1

25-34 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

8

25.8 Attaching a VTOC Selection List

25.8.3 Selection List Description The following example illustrates the format of a VTOC Selection List. Data Set: VTOC Selection List

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. ==================================== T O P =================== VOLSER UNIT DSNS DSCBS CONTG--CYL--AVAIL CONTG--TRK--AVAIL STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2 DATA SET NAME STATUS ORG RFM BLKSZ LRECL ABC.TEST.ASM PO FB 8= ABC.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 1 BASE.TEST.TESTLOAD PO U 13=3= DATA.TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 1

8

You can use this Selection List to perform one or more of the following functions: A AL AM C CM CT D DA DX G I P R RL UC X *

Attach a data set Allocate a new data set Allocate an SMS-managed data set Copy a data set Compress a PDS Catalog a data set Delete a data set Define an alias Delete member of PDS; keep the data set Get attributes Display data set information Print a data set Rename a data set Release space Uncatalog a data set Terminate Data Set Facility Position Selection List

To perform one or more of these functions, type the appropriate code in the first area shown in the previous example. With Copy, Print and Rename, you must provide additional information in the STATUS field. (See the appropriate section in Chapter 27, “Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks” on page 27-1 for details.) After performing the function, the STATUS field will indicate the result of each operation.

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-35

25.8 Attaching a VTOC Selection List

25.8.3.1 Selecting Alternate Displays The amount of information provided through the Selection List exceeds the width of 80-column screens. The information is, therefore, divided into alternate displays. You can change the display to view different information by entering: SELECT ALT [v] where v is the number of the display to be viewed next. If you omit the number, you will proceed sequentially through all of the different displays. The ALT field in the following table contains the number of the alternate display in which each field appears on an 80-column screen. If you are using a terminal supporting a wider screen, additional displays (containing variations of the same information) are available.

25.8.3.2 Display Format The extent of information shown when the Selection List is initially displayed depends on whether you requested a QUICK, SHORT or LONG display format. The following table lists all of the information that can be provided and identifies the display format with which it is associated (Q for QUICK, S for SHORT and L for LONG). If the list was produced with the QUICK or SHORT display format, you can use the G (Get Attributes) code to fill-in the fields for one or more partitioned data sets.

25.8.3.3 Field Descriptions The first two lines in the Execution Area (following the TOP marker) remain constant as you scroll through the display and show: VOLSER

Serial number of the volume.

UNIT

Unit address associated with the device on which the volume is mounted.

DSNS

Number of data sets on the volume.

DSCBS

Number of available DSCBs on the volume.

CYL

Total number of contiguous free (available) cylinders and the total number of free cylinders.

TRK

Total number of free (available) tracks and maximum number of contiguous free tracks.

MATCHES Number of data sets on the designated volume.

25-36 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

25.8 Attaching a VTOC Selection List

The remaining fields identify the data sets on the volume and include the information shown in the following table. Field Name

Description

ALT

Q

S

L

DATA SET NAME

Name of the data set.

ALL

*

*

*

ORG

Data set organization.

1

*

*

*

RFM

For non-VSAM data sets, record format. For VSAM data sets, record organization, shown as: ESDS, KSDS, LSDS or RRDS.

1

*

*

*

BLKSZ

For non-VSAM data sets, block size. For VSAM data sets, maximum record length.

1

*

*

*

LRECL

For non-VSAM data sets, logical record length. For VSAM data sets, average record length.

1

*

*

*

CREDT

Creation date.

2

*

*

*

REFDT

Date last referenced.

2

*

*

*

EXPDT

Expiration date.

2

*

*

*

TRKS

Number of tracks allocated to the data set.

3

*

IN-USE

Number of tracks currently in use.

3

*

%USED

Percentage of allocated tracks currently in use.

3

*

EXT

Number of extents allocated to the data set.

3

*

The STATUS field is not displayed when the fields CREDT, REFDT and EXTDT are displayed.

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-37

25.9 Selecting the Display

25.9 Selecting the Display You can use the SELECT command to reposition the display between or within a data set object. SELECT ALT

To position to the next sequential alternate display format. If the data set object has multiple formats, you can specify a number with the command to reposition the display that specific format, as in: SELECT ALT 3 Entering SELECT ALT with no number positions you to the next sequential format. If there is no alternate format, the display is unchanged.

SELECT CAT

To redisplay a previously displayed Catalog Selection List.

SELECT DIR

To display a PDS or CA-Librarian Selection List. Depending on the current display, it will be either: 1. The previously displayed PDS or CA-Librarian Selection List, or 2. The PDS or CA-Librarian Selection List associated with the member/module you are currently viewing.

SELECT MENU

To display the Data Set Facility menu.

SELECT NEXT

To perform the next function specified on the last displayed Selection List. For example, assume you indicate on a Catalog Selection List that you want to attach three different data sets. When you press the ENTER key, the first data set is attached. After browsing that data set, you can view the next one by entering SELECT NEXT.

SELECT PREV

To display the previous level in the data set processing hierarchy. For example, assume you attach a Catalog Selection List and from it attach a data set that results in a PDS Selection List and from this list you attached a specific member. If you enter SELECT PREV while viewing the member, the PDS Selection List is redisplayed. If you enter SELECT PREV again, the Catalog Selection List is redisplayed.

25-38 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

25.9 Selecting the Display

SELECT string

The resulting display depends on the string you specify. If the string contains: ■ A period (like TEST.ABC), it is treated as a data set name. If the data set appeared on a previously displayed Catalog or VTOC Selection List, the appropriate list is displayed. If it did not appear in any previous Selection List and a: 1. Catalog Selection List was previously displayed, the catalog is searched for the data set, or 2. VTOC Selection List was previously displayed, the VTOC is searched for the data set. ■ More than six characters, it is treated as a PDS member or CA-Librarian module name. If the member/module did not appear in a previous Selection List, the current PDS/CA-Librarian master file is searched for the designated member/module. ■ Six or less characters, the name is treated as: 1. A member/module if a PDS or CA-Librarian Selection List was previously displayed. 2. A volume serial number if a PDS or CA-Librarian Selection List was not previously displayed. The appropriate Selection List is then displayed.

SELECT VOL

To redisplay a previously displayed Volume Selection List.

SELECT VTOC

To display a VTOC Selection List. Depending on the current display, it will either be the previously displayed Selection List or the Selection List representing the contents of the volume on which the data set you are currently viewing resides.

Chapter 25. Data Sets: Attaching a Data Set Object at the Terminal 25-39

25-40 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects This chapter describes how you can: ■ Detach a data set object. ■ Locate specific occurrences of a string with the attached data set object. ■ Position the display to a specific line or to a line to which you have assigned a name. ■ Reattach a data set object after viewing other forms of attached data (like an AWS).

Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects 26-1

26.1 Detaching Data Set Objects

26.1 Detaching Data Set Objects You can explicitly detach the Data Set Facility by entering the command: DETACH DSN The Data Set Facility is also detached by entering the function code X on the menu, any function panel or any selection list. This function code is comparable to the DETACH DSN command. (If you enter X on a Selection List that includes other function codes, those functions will be ignored.) ATTACHing another data set object causes the current data set object to be implicitly detached. If you are detaching a sequential data set, PDS member or CA-Librarian module and you have assigned NOTE names, those names are deleted when the data are detached. If you execute a command that causes output to the Execution Area (like ATTACHing an AWS) or if you press the CLEAR key, the Data Set Facility is placed in a pending state and can be reattached at any time.

26-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

26.2 Locating Data

26.2 Locating Data This sections describes how you can use a variety of commands to scan a data set object for all or specific occurrences of a character string. While this description assumes you are locating strings that are in character format, you can also locate the hexadecimal representation of a string. See 26.2.3, “Customizing the Operation” on page 26-5 for details.

26.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences You can use the following commands to find and display specific occurrences of a string. FIRST NEXT LAST PREV

Locate Locate Locate Locate

the the the the

first occurrence of a string. next occurrence of a string. last occurrence of a string. previous occurrence of a string.

For example, if you enter: ATTACH DSN TEST.SOURCE(INVLIST) FIRST DIVISION The first occurrence of the string DIVISION in the member/module INVLIST will be the first line of the resulting display. To find the last occurrence of the same string, all you need enter is: LAST Once you have specified a search string, it is remembered and used with any subsequent EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV command that does not include a string. By default, the full line length is searched for your string. You can include column numbers with the command to qualify the search for a single operation. For example: NEXT 1= 3= SAMPLE examines columns 10 through 30 for the next occurrence of SAMPLE. After the command executes, the defaults are reestablished. To change the column boundaries for the remainder of your session, use the SET BOUNDS command. (See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information.) Also, by default, every line in the data set object is searched until it finds the string or reaches the site-defined maximum. You can limit the search to a specific number of lines by specifying the number after the string. For example, to find the last occurrence of SAMPLE within the last 200 lines of currently displayed data set object, you would enter:

Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects 26-3

26.2 Locating Data

LAST SAMPLE 2== After the command executes, the site-defined value is reestablished. If you want to continue searching 200 lines at a time, you can either: ■ Press PF6 or PF18 to reexecute the last command, or ■ Use the SET DSNCNT command to alter the line limit for the rest of your session or until you change it with another SET DSNCNT command. (See the description of SET DSNCNT in the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide.)

26.2.2 Including/Excluding List Containing a String You can use the INCL command to display every occurrence of a particular character string within a given number of lines. For example, to find every occurrence of the string TEST-DATA in the next 100 lines of the currently displayed data set object, you would enter: INCL TEST-DATA 1== If you do not specify a number, a site-defined maximum number of lines are searched. (You can use the SET DSNCNT command to establish your own search limits. See the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide for details.) You can also limit the search for the character string to particular columns. For example, if you want to display every line that does not contain the string TEST-DATA in columns 30 through 80, you would enter: EXCL 3= 8= TEST-DATA Note: Column boundaries specified with the command affect only the execution of that command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for information about changing boundaries for the terminal session. If the number of lines to be displayed exceeds the size of your terminal screen, press one of the PF keys to which a scrolling function is assigned. The INCL or EXCL operation will resume scanning for the previously specified string (like TEST-DATA). The direction of the scan depends on the value assigned to the PF key. (The search string is remembered for subsequent use; column number limits and line number limits apply only to the command with which they are specified.) If you determine that you want to see the data that follows a particular line, use: ■ The cursor positioning keys to move the cursor to the appropriate line and then press the ENTER key, or ■ The POINT command. For example, if an EXCL display includes line 150 and you want to display the lines following it, you would enter: POINT LINE 15= The resulting display will begin with line 150.

26-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

26.2 Locating Data

Doing either of these actions or entering any primary command terminates the INCL/EXCL operation. Note: When you create an INCL/EXCL display from a Selection List, you can enter any function code(s). If a function results in another display (like attaching an entry in the list), the INCL/EXCL operation is terminated.

26.2.3 Customizing the Operation This section describes how you can qualify a search operation.

26.2.3.1 Translating the Search String The current setting of the SET MODE command determines how the string specified with FIRST, NEXT, LAST, PREV, INCL or EXCL is to be treated. See Chapter 3, “Controlling Character Recognition” for additional information.

26.2.3.2 Delimiting the Search String In all of the examples used thus far, the search string has not been delimited. With these commands, you only need to delimit the string when it: ■ Includes a space (like FIRST /TEST DATA/), ■ Is a numeric (like NEXT /519/), or ■ Is the same as a keyword operand or operand abbreviation of the command (like INCL /JOB/).

Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects 26-5

26.2 Locating Data

26.2.3.3 Qualifying the Search String By default, the search is for any string of characters that match the search string. To limit the search operation, you can include the qualifier operands. These operands are WORD, PREFIX, BEGIN, EMBED, END and SUFFIX. For example, assume the attached data set object contains the line: 'THE OTHER BROTHER ATE THEIR APPLE DURING THE CONTEST' and you want to search for the string THE. Without qualification, the words THE, BROTHER and THEIR match the search string. By including a qualifier, you can designate the type of string match that is to occur, as in: THE WORD

Qualifies the string as a word; only THE matches.

THE PREFIX

Qualifies the string as beginning a word; only THEIR matches.

THE BEGIN

Qualifies the string as beginning or being a word; THE and THEIR match.

THE EMBED

Qualifies the string as contained within a word; OTHER and BROTHER match.

TEST END

Qualifies the string as ending or being a word; only CONTEST matches.

TEST SUFFIX Qualifies the string as ending a word; only CONTEST matches.

26.2.3.4 Specifying the Hexadecimal Representation of a String To designate the hexadecimal representation of a string, use the format: X'string' where the string is bound by apostrophes and contains an even number of characters, as in: FIRST X'C1' When using the primary commands FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL or EXCL, you do not need to delimit the hexadecimal string. To locate a character string that could be interpreted as being in hexadecimal representation, either: ■ Use the LITERAL operand with the FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL or EXCL primary commands, as in: FIRST X'C1' LITERAL ■ Specify the string so that it does not conform to hexadecimal notation. This method can be used with both primary and line commands. For example, to find the character string X'C1' you might specify: /X'C1/

26-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

or

/X'C1' /

26.2 Locating Data

26.2.3.5 Screen Positioning If a line containing (or not containing) the search string is found, it becomes the first displayed line of the resulting display. By specifying a screen positioning operand with the command, you can control how the display is positioned. The screen positioning operands are: CJUSTIFIED

The display margins are to be altered if the entire matching string does not fall within the current margin. (This is the default positioning.)

JUSTIFIED

The display margins are always to be altered so that the first character of the string begins in the left-most position of the line.

CENTERED

The display margins are to be altered to center the matching string on the line. If centering would cause an invalid left margin (for example, less than 1), the display is not altered.

LOCKED

The display margins are not to be altered even if the matching string occurs to the left or right of the current margins.

Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects 26-7

26.3 Positioning the Display

26.3 Positioning the Display This section describes how you can: ■ Reposition the currently attached data set object. ■ Assign names to specific lines within a sequential data set, PDS member or CA-Librarian module and then later reposition the display to those named locations.

26.3.1 Positioning to Specific Lines If the data set object that you are viewing exceeds the number of lines in your terminal screen, you can reposition the display by: ■ Pressing any of the scrolling PF keys. ■ Using the POINT command with the LINE operand. For example, to reposition the display to begin with line 2500, you would enter: POINT LINE 25== To position to the first or last line of the display, you would enter: POINT LINE T POINT LINE B

or

When browsing a Selection List, entering an * (asterisk) in the first unprotected field for a specific entry repositions the display to begin with that entry.

26.3.2 Positioning to Name Lines When you are browsing data (like a sequential data set, PDS member or CA-Librarian module), you can assign a one- to six-character name to the line containing the string; thus enabling you to return to that line later. For example, to assign the name LOC1 to the first displayed line, you would enter: NOTE LOC1 NOTE Q LOC1

or

The asterisk (*) is optional. If omitted or specified without qualification, it represents the first displayed line.

26-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

26.3 Positioning the Display

To assign a name to a line that is not the first displayed line, qualify the asterisk. For example, to assign the name LOC2 to the line that is five lines after the first displayed line, you would enter: NOTE Q+5 LOC2 Once you have assigned a name to a specific line, you can return to that line at any time by using the POINT command. To return to the line noted as LOC1, you would enter: POINT LOC1 If you issue the command: STATUS NOTES a list of all the names that you have assigned is displayed. If you determine that you no longer need to note a specific line, you can eliminate the NOTE name with the DROP command, as in: DROP LOC2 Any outstanding NOTE names are automatically deleted when you detach the data, attach another data set or go to a higher level (for example, if you display a PDS Selection List after viewing a member of that PDS).

Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects 26-9

26.4 Reattaching a Data Set Object

26.4 Reattaching a Data Set Object While you are working with a data set object, you can attach an AWS, a library member or a job, browse that data and then return to your data set object. The following example illustrates how you can ATTACH the active AWS, browse it and then reATTACH the data set object you have been viewing.

7

ATTACH_

8

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 LINE ==1 > TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT) > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================== T O P ============ =====1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. =====2 PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT. =====3 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

7

ATTACH DSN )

8

> D PENDING > AWS (PRI.INVREPT) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.... ...... ======================== T O P ================= ===1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. ===2== PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT. ===3== ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 LINE ==1 > TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT) > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+ ...... ============================= T O P ============= =====1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. =====2 PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT. =====3 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

26-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

8

26.4 Reattaching a Data Set Object

The center screen in previous example shows D PENDING. This note is provided to remind you that the Data Set Facility can be reattached at any time. When you reattach the Data Set Facility, the display begins with the first line of the previous display. To reattach at a different location within the same data set object, you can: ■ Use the LINE operand of ATTACH to specify the desired line number, as in: ATTACH DSN Q LINE 5== ■ Use the POINT command to begin the display with the line assigned a NOTE name, as in: POINT DSN NAME1 ■ Use the DSN operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands to begin the display with the line containing a specific string, as in: FIRST DSN /DD/ ■ Use the DSN operand with the INCL or EXCL command to begin the display with a list of lines containing (or not containing) a specific string, as in: INCL DSN /DD/

Chapter 26. Data Sets: Browsing Data Set Objects 26-11

26-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks This chapter describes how you can perform the following functions at any time during your terminal session: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Allocating a data set. Cataloging a data set. Compressing a partitioned data set. Copying a data set object into an AWS. Defining an alias for: 1. a non-VSAM data set or ICF/VSAM user catalog, or 2. member of a partitioned data set.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Defining a Generation Data Group. Deleting a data set, PDS member or CA-Librarian module. Inquiring about a specific data set or volume. Printing a data set object. Renaming a data set, PDS member or CA-Librarian module. Uncataloging a data set. Writing to a data set.

These functions can be performed using primary commands, the Data Set Facility menu or the appropriate Selection List.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-1

27.1 Allocating a Data Set

27.1 Allocating a Data Set You can use the ALLOCATE primary command or one of two Allocate Function Panels to allocate space for a data set. When allocating a data set, note that: ■ Data sets can be created only on DASD volumes that are mounted and online or on mass storage volumes that can be staged. ■ VSAM data sets can be allocated only on systems that have IBM DFSMS installed. At sites where DFSMS is not installed, use the IBM Access Method Services DEFINE command to create VSAM data sets.

27.1.1 Using a Primary Command You can issue the ALLOCATE DSN command at any time during a terminal session to allocate space for a data set, as in ALLOCATE DSN TEST.NEW VOLUME STOR=2 INCR TRK PRIMARY 16 SECONDARY 1= DIR 5 DSORG PO RECFM FB LRECL 8= BLKSIZE 352= Note: CA-Roscoe commands must be complete within a line (commands cannot be continued.). While the ALLOCATE command example violates this rule, it is provided to illustrate the type of information you can specify with the command. If the attributes, space requirements, or device location for your new data set are similar to those of an existing data set, you can use the LIKE operand to establish the existing data set as a model for the new one. For example: ALLOCATE DSN TEST.NEW VOLUME STOR=2 LIKE TEST.OLD uses the attributes, space parameters and device location of the existing data (TEST.LOAD) as the model in allocating the new data set (TEST.NEW). If DFSMS is installed at your site: ■ You can use DFSMS-related operands to further control the allocation of your data set. For example, to allocate a data set with the attributes contained in the DFSMS data class DATAF on one of the volumes referred to by the DFSMS storage class STCLMAIN, you might issue the command: ALLOCATE DSN TEST.SMSNEW DATACLAS DATAF STORCLAS STCLMAIN ...

27-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.1 Allocating a Data Set

■ You can also allocate certain types of VSAM data sets if the proper modeling information is established in the DFSMS data classes. For example, assume that the DFSMS data class CLUSTER contains the required information to allocate a more commonly used type of VSAM key-sequenced data set. You can allocate such a cluster with: ALLOCATE DSN VSAM.CLUSTER DATACLAS CLUSTER KEYOFF 64 ... Note that in this example, the KEYOFF operand is used to either override information in the data class definition or to provide information that is not present in it.

27.1.2 Using a Function Panel From the Data Set Facility menu, a Catalog or VTOC Selection List, or through the DSN command, you can display either: ■ The standard Allocate Function Panel by issuing the function code AL, or ■ The Allocate SMS Function Panel by issuing the function code AM. This panel, which is available only at sites where DFSMS is installed, can be used to allocate VSAM data sets or specify SMS class construct information. If the name you specify when requesting either panel is: ■ New, that name is shown in the DATA SET field. All other fields in the panel are set to blanks. ■ Existing, that name and all of its allocation information is displayed. You can then verify the data set name and add or change the appropriate information. When you press the ENTER key, the data set will be allocated using the values displayed. The following example assumes you entered the AL function code and that you want to allocate a new data set with the same attributes as an existing data set named TEST.OLD. Once the information is displayed, you can change the data set name and make any other necessary attribute changes. When you press the ENTER key, the allocation is performed.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-3

27.1 Allocating a Data Set

27.1.2.1 Allocate Function Panel The following example illustrates the panel displayed when you use the AL function code. Data Set: Allocating Through a Function Panel

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... ALLOCATE NEW DATA SET

8

DATA SET ===> TEST.OLD VOLUMES ===> STOR=2 UNIT NAMES ===> UNITS PRIMARY SECONDARY DIRECTORY

===> ===> ===> ===>

TRK 16 1= 6

DSORG RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE KEYLEN EXPDT CATALOG

===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

PO FB 8= 352= YES

(BLK, TRK, (NUMBER OF (NUMBER OF (VALID FOR

or CYL) ABOVE UNITS) ABOVE UNITS) PDS DATA SETS ONLY)

(MM/DD/YY) (Y,N)

U

V

The fields comprising this panel include: DATA SET

Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data set to be allocated. The name may be further qualified with: +v

VOLUMES

Relative generation number of GDG data set to be allocated, specified as a value between 1 and 255.

Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume on which the data set is to be allocated. One to six serial numbers can be specified. ■ If both VOLUMES and UNIT NAMES are specified and the volume is mounted, UNIT NAMES is ignored. If the volume is not mounted and the unit name refers to a mass storage device, an MSS mount is attempted. ■ If UNIT NAMES is specified and VOLUMES is omitted, only those volumes within the designated generic or esoteric group that have a Use attribute of STORAGE are eligible for allocation.

27-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.1 Allocating a Data Set

Use the DISPLAY DEVICES command to determine which volumes have a Use attribute. The Status field of the resulting display will contain STR if the volume's Use attribute is STORAGE. ■ If both VOLUMES and UNIT NAMES are omitted, an allocation to the unit name specified in the ETSO PSCB control block is attempted. If ETSO is not active, an allocation is attempted using the unit name SYSALLDA. UNIT NAMES

Enter the one- to eight-character unit name associated with the device type(s) on which the data set is to be allocated. It can be either an IBM-defined generic name (like 3350) or a site-defined esoteric name (like SYSDA).

UNITS

Enter the type of allocation units as BLK, CYL or TRK.

PRIMARY

Enter the number of units to be used for the primary allocation. If omitted, the default is 0. If 0 is specified and there is no secondary allocation, no space is allocated on the designated volume or unit, however a format-1 DSCB is created in the VTOC.

SECONDARY

Enter the number of units to be used for the secondary space allocation. If omitted, the default is 0.

DIRECTORY

Enter the number of PDS directory blocks for which space is to be reserved. Valid only when allocating a PDS (like DSORG=PO or DSORG=POU). If omitted, the default is 0.

DSORG

Enter the data set organization, specified as DA, DAU, PO, POU, PS or PSU. If omitted, the data set organization is undefined.

RECFM

Enter any valid data set record format. If omitted, the record format is undefined.

LRECL

Enter the data set logical record length as a value between 0 and 32760. If omitted, the default is 0.

BLKSIZE

Enter the data set block size as a value between 0 and 32760. If omitted, the default is 0. ■ If UNITS BLK is specified, BLKSIZE is required and the value may not exceed 65535.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-5

27.1 Allocating a Data Set

KEYLEN

Enter the data set key length as a value between 0 and 255. If omitted, the default is 0.

EXPDT

Enter the data set expiration date in the form consistent with the format displayed on the panel. (This format is established by the SET DATEFORM command.) If the year is specified with two digits, it is assumed to represent a year in the twentieth century. Years beyond 1999 can only be specified at sites with MVS/XA SP2.2.0 or higher. At such sites, the year must not exceed 2155. If omitted, the data set has no expiration date.

CATALOG

Designates whether the data set is to be cataloged by entering either: YES

Catalog the data set. If the data set cannot be cataloged (that is, it is already cataloged or you have insufficient access authority for the catalog), the command is rejected. Reexecute the command, specifying NO.

NO

Do not catalog the data set.

If omitted, the data set is cataloged.

27-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.1 Allocating a Data Set

27.1.2.2 Allocate SMS Function Panel The following example illustrates the panel displayed when you use the AM function code. Data Set: Allocating SMS Through a Function Panel

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... ALLOCATE NEW SMS-MANAGED DATA SET DATA SET MGMTCLAS STORCLAS VOLUMES UNITS PRIMARY SECONDARY DIRECTORY

==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==>

ROSCOE.CREATE.PDSE SMS (BLANK FOR SMS (BLANK FOR SMS==1 TRK (BLK, TRK, 1 (NUMBER OF 1 (NUMBER OF (VALID FOR

DATACLAS DSORG RECFM LRECL BLKSIZE

==> ==> ==> ==> ==>

PO FB 8= 8==

SECMODEL DSNTYPE

==> TEST.SMS.OLD1 ==> LIB

8

DEFAULT MANAGEMENT CLAS DEFAULT STORAGE CLASS) CYL, KB, OR MB) ABOVE UNITS) ABOVE UNITS) PDS DATA SETS ONLY)

(BLANK FOR DEFAULT DATA CLASS) RECORG ==> KEYLEN ==> KEYOFF ==> EXPDT ==> MM/DD/YYYY GENERIC ==>

U

V

The fields comprising this panel include: DATA SET

Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data set to be allocated. The name may be further qualified with: +v

Relative generation number of GDG data set to be allocated, specified as a value between 1 and 255.

MGMTCLAS

Enter the one- to eight- character DFSMS management class to be assigned to the data set.

STORCLAS

Enter the one- to eight-character DFSMS storage class to be assigned to the data set.

VOLUMES

Enter the one- to six-character serial number of volume on which the data set is to be allocated. One to six serial numbers can be specified. ■ If both VOLUMES and UNIT NAMES are specified and the volume is mounted, UNIT NAMES is ignored. If the volume is not mounted and the unit name refers to a mass storage device, an MSS mount is attempted.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-7

27.1 Allocating a Data Set

■ If UNIT NAMES is specified and VOLUMES is omitted, only those volumes within the designated generic or esoteric group that have a Use attribute of STORAGE are eligible for allocation. Use the DISPLAY DEVICES command to determine which volumes have a Use attribute. The Status field of the resulting display will contain STR if the volume's Use attribute is STORAGE. ■ If both VOLUMES and UNIT NAMES are omitted, an allocation to the unit name specified in the ETSO PSCB control block is attempted. If ETSO is not active, an allocation is attempted using the unit name SYSALLDA. UNITS

Enter the type of allocation units as BLK, CYL, TRK, KB or MB. With BLK, CYL and TRK, the primary and secondary quantities are to be used as specified. With KB, the primary and secondary quantities are to be multiplied by 1024. With MB, the primary and secondary quantities are to be multiplied by 1024576.

PRIMARY

Enter the number of units to be used for the primary allocation. If omitted, the default is 0. If 0 is specified and there is no secondary allocation, no space is allocated on the designated volume or unit, however a format-1 DSCB is created in the VTOC.

SECONDARY

Enter the number of units to be used for the secondary space allocation. If omitted, the default is 0.

DIRECTORY

Enter the number of PDS directory blocks for which space is to be reserved. Valid only when allocating a PDS (like DSORG=PO or DSORG=POU). If omitted, the default is 0.

DATACLAS

Enter the one- to eight-character DFSMS data class to be assigned to the data set.

27-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.1 Allocating a Data Set

DSORG

Enter the data set organization, specified as DA, DAU, PO, POU, PS or PSU. If omitted, the data set organization is undefined.

RECFM

Enter any valid data set record format. If omitted, the record format is undefined.

LRECL

Enter the data set logical record length as a value between 0 and 32760. If omitted, the default is 0.

BLKSIZE

Enter the data set block size as a value between 0 and 32760. If omitted, the default is 0. ■ BLKSIZE is required if UNITS BLK is specified, and the value cannot exceed 65535.

RECORG

Enter the VSAM data set record organization, specified as: ES KS LS RR

VSAM VSAM VSAM VSAM

entry-sequenced data set. key-sequenced data set. linear space data set. relative record data set.

If omitted, a non-VSAM data set is assumed. KEYLEN

Enter the data set key length as a value between 0 and 255. If omitted, the default is 0.

KEYOFF

Enter the VSAM key-sequenced data set key offset as a value between 0 and 32760. If omitted, the default is 0.

EXPDT

Enter the data set expiration date in the form consistent with the format displayed on the panel. (This format is established by the SET DATEFORM command.) If the year is specified with two digits, it is assumed to represent a year in the twentieth century. Years beyond 1999 can only be specified at sites with MVS/XA SP2.2.0 or higher. At such sites, the year must not exceed 2155. If omitted, the data set has no expiration date.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-9

27.1 Allocating a Data Set

SECMODEL

Enter the name of a RACF discrete or generic profile that is to be used in creating a discrete RACF profile for the data set.

DSNTYPE

Designate whether the data set to be allocated will be a PDSE by entering the value LIB When other data set types are defined (non-PDSE), this field is blank.

GENERIC

Designate whether the RACF profile identified in the SECMODEL field is a generic profile by entering either: Y N

The profile is generic. The profile is not generic.

If omitted, the profile is assumed to not be generic.

27-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.2 Cataloging a Data Set

27.2 Cataloging a Data Set You can catalog a data set using the CATALOG primary command. For example, to add a catalog entry for the data set TEST.NEW on STOR01, you would enter: CATALOG DSN TEST.NEW VOL STOR=1 You can also enter the CT function code, data set name and volume serial number on the Data Set Facility menu, as in the following example.

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. DATA SET FACILITY FUNCTION

===> CT

DATA SET VOLUMES UNIT NAMES

===> TEST.NEW ===> STOR=1 ===>

8

Or enter CT before the appropriate name on a VTOC Selection List, as in the following example. Data Set: Cataloging Through a Selection List

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== VOLSER UNIT DSNS DSCBS CONTG--CYL--AVAIL CONTG--TRK--AVAIL STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2 DATA SET NAME STATUS ORG RFM BLKSZ LRECL TEST.ASM PO FB 8= 8= TEST.LOAD PO U 12288 12288 CT TEST.NEW PO FB 8== 8=

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-11

27.2 Cataloging a Data Set

When using the CATALOG primary command or the Data Set Facility menu, you can catalog a data set that resides on a maximum of six volumes, as in: CATALOG DSN TEST.NEW VOL STOR=1 STOR=2 STOR=3 You cannot, however, catalog an SMS-managed data set using this facility. Note: If the first (or only) volume specified is available for inspection, CA-Roscoe verifies that the designated data set exists. If the data set does not exist, the request is rejected. No check is made for any other volumes specified. If the first (or only) volume specified is not available for inspection, no check is made for the data set's existence; the request is honored. (This permits catalog entries to be created for tape and DASD data sets residing on volumes that are only accessible from another system.)

27-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.3 Copying a Data Set Object

27.3 Copying a Data Set Object You can use primary commands, the Copy Function Panel (from the Data Set Facility menu) or a Selection List to copy all or part of a data set object into an AWS.

27.3.1 Using Primary Commands You can use a variety of primary commands to copy all or selected portions of a data set object into an AWS. One of these commands is COPY DSN, which allows you to copy all or selected lines of the currently attached data or Selection List into the active or a specific AWS. The following example illustrates how you can copy all of the attached data set object to the top of the active AWS. Data Set: Copying Attached Data

7

8

COPY DSN T_ > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===78 LINE =====1 > TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT) > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... ...... ============================= T O P ================= =====1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. =====2 PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT. =====3 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION. =====4 CONFIGURATION SECTION.

You must indicate the appropriate AWS destination by specifying one of the following: v T B * R

Copy at or after the line specified by v. Copy to the top of the AWS. Copy to the bottom of the AWS. Copy after the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned. Replace the contents of the AWS with the copied data.

Other primary commands allow you to copy: ■ Lines Containing/Not Containing a Specific String: COPYS copies line(s) containing a specified character string from a data set object into an AWS. COPYX copies line(s) not containing the specified character string from a data set object into an AWS. For example, to copy every line from the currently attached data set object that contains the string SAMPLE to the bottom of the active AWS, you would enter: COPYX DSN /SAMPLE/ B

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-13

27.3 Copying a Data Set Object

■ Between Split Screens: XCOPY copies all or part of a data set object from one split screen into the active AWS of the screen containing the command. XCOPYS and XCOPYX copy selected lines from the data set object attached in one split screen into the active AWS of the screen containing the command. All of these commands allow you to limit the number of lines to be copied, as in: COPYS DSN /DATE-FIELD/ 9== 18== 1== which copies every line containing the string DATE-FIELD within lines 900 through 1800 of the currently attached data set object at or after line 100 in the active AWS.

27.3.1.1 Copying a Selection List When a Selection List is displayed, you can: ■ Copy a specific range of lines. Treat the Selection List as though it is numbered from 1 by 1, as in: COPY DSN 1= 5= T ■ Exclude the header portion of the list. By default, the header lines are included in a copy operation. To exclude these lines, use the NOHDR operand, as in: COPY DSN T NOHDR ■ Include all available information. By default, only the information available through the current display format is included in the operation. To include all available information, use the FULL operand, as in: COPY DSN 1= 5= T FULL For additional information about using these commands, see Chapter 15, “AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS.”

27-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.3 Copying a Data Set Object

27.3.1.2 Copying Unattached Data The IMPORT command can be used to copy all or part of a specific data set into the active AWS or a designated library member, without accessing the data set first. (Note that when IMPORTing into the active AWS, the current AWS contents is overlaid by the IMPORTed data.) You can use IMPORT to: ■ Copy a sequential data set: enter IMPORT DSN= followed by the data set name, as in: IMPORT DSN=TEST.MASTER If the data set is not cataloged, use the VOL= operand to identify the serial number of the volume on which it resides, as in: IMPORT DSN=TEST.MASTER,VOL=SHAR=7 ■ Copy a PDS member or CA-Librarian module: specify the appropriate name in parentheses following the file name, as in: IMPORT DSN=TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT) ■ Copy selected lines to the active AWS or a library member: Use the RECORDS= operand to specify the range of lines that is to be copied, as in: IMPORT DSN=TEST.MASTER RECORDS=(1==,7==) To copy those same lines into a specific library member, use the TO= operand with the appropriate library member name, as in: IMPORT DSN=TEST.SOURCE(INVREPT) RECORDS=(1==,7==) TO=WORKCOPY ■ Copy a formatted PDS directory or CA-Librarian master file index into the active AWS: IMPORT DSN=TEST.LOAD(Q) IMPORT DSN=TEST.LOAD LIBRARIAN-I

: PDS or CA-LIBRARIAN. : CA-LIBRARIAN only.

■ Copy a particular archived version of a CA-Librarian master file module. Specify the ARC= operand, as in: IMPORT DSN=TEST.LIBRMSTR(INVREPT), ARC=-3 where the module archived three levels back is copied. (If ARC= is omitted, the most current version is copied.) ■ Copy history records for a module. Use the LIBRARIAN-H operand, as in: IMPORT DSN=TEST.LIBRMSTR(READSMR),LIBRARIAN-H

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-15

27.3 Copying a Data Set Object

27.3.2 Using a Function Panel The Copy Function Panel is displayed when you specify the C function code on the Data Set Facility menu or with the DSN command. The following example illustrates how you can use this panel to place one copy of lines 1200 through 2500 of the data set TEST.SOURCE after line 500 of the active AWS. Data Set: Copying Through the Menu

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... COPY DATA SET OPTION

===> C

DATA SET VOLUMES UNIT NAMES ARCHIVE LEVEL PGMR NAME MODULE TYPE 1ST LINE

===> TEST.SOURCE ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> 12==

AWS TARGET LIST HEADERS

===> 5== ===> YES

PASSWORD MCD CODE LANGUAGE LAST LINE

===> ===> ===> ===> 25==

AWS COPY COUNT ===> 1

M-DISPLAY MEMBER LIST C-COPY DATASET/INDEX S-COPY SINGLE MEMBER

U

V

The fields comprising this panel include: OPTION

27-16 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Enter the code that is appropriate for the action you want to perform. The codes are: C

Copy a sequential data set or PDS/CA-Librarian Selection List.

S

Copy a single member/module.

M

Display a Selection List of members/modules. (Use the PGMR NAME, MODULE TYPE and LANGUAGE fields to produce a qualified CA-Librarian Selection List.)

27.3 Copying a Data Set Object

DATA SETS

Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data set to be copied. The name may be further qualified with: dsnmem

One- to eight-character PDS member or CA-Librarian module name.

v

Relative generation number of the GDG data set to be copied, specified as 0 (most recent) or a minus number (as in -1).

VOLUMES

Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume on which the data set resides. One to six volumes can be specified. This field is required if the data set is not cataloged.

UNIT NAMES

Enter the one- to eight-character unit name associated with the device type(s) on which the data set resides. It may be either an IBM-defined generic name (like 3350) or a site-defined esoteric name (like SYSDA). This field is required if the data set is not cataloged and resides on a mass storage device.

ARCHIVE LEVEL

Enter the archive level of the CA-Librarian master file module to be copied. (The module must be in ARCHIE format.) If omitted, the most current level of the module is copied. Specify the level using one of the following forms: Lx

Absolute level number (between 0 and 65535) as reported on the CA-Librarian Update Report.

-y

Relative level number between 0 and 255. The current level is -0; -1 is one level older than the current.

yymmddhhmmss 0 Date and time the desired archive level was current. An even number of digits (starting from the right) can be omitted. They are assumed to have the highest values consistent with the values of specified digits.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-17

27.3 Copying a Data Set Object

PASSWORD

Enter one or two passwords (established by the site). If one password is specified, it is treated as the data set or CA-Librarian master file module password. If two passwords are specified, the first is treated as the data set password and the second is treated as the CA-Librarian password. If omitted and a password is required, access is denied.

PGMR NAME

Enter a one- to 15-character programmer name. Only those modules marked as owned by the specified program are included in the resulting CA-Librarian Selection List. If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by the other fields) are included.

MCD CODE

Enter the Management code of the CA-Librarian master file. MCD is only required when the master file contains PROD2 modules.

MODULE TYPE

Enter one of the following to designate the type of modules to be included in a CA-Librarian Selection List: PROD0 PROD1 PROD2 TEST

Includes Includes Includes Includes

modules modules modules modules

with with with with

PROD0 security status. PROD1 security status. PROD2 security status. TEST security status.

If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by other fields) are included. LANGUAGE

Enter the language code designating the programming language type of the modules that are to be included in a CA-Librarian Selection List. If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by other fields) are included.

1ST LINE

Enter the number of the first line to be copied. If omitted, the operation begins with the first line.

LAST LINE

Enter the number of the last line to be copied. If omitted, the operation ends with the last line.

27-18 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.3 Copying a Data Set Object

AWS TARGET

Enter the destination of the operation by specifying: v

Number of the line at or after which the data are to be copied within the active AWS.

*

After the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned.

T

Before the first line of the active AWS.

B

After the last line in the active AWS.

R

Replace the contents of active the AWS with the copied data.

If omitted, the default is R. AWS COPY COUNT

Enter the number of copies of the attached data that are to be placed in the AWS. If omitted, the default is 1.

LIST HEADERS

Enter YES or NO to designate whether Selection List header lines are to be included in the copy operation.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-19

27.3 Copying a Data Set Object

27.3.3 Using a Selection List If the Selection List is produced Through the Copy Function panel, the only operation you can perform is a copy. To do this, type a C before the name of each entry to be copied. If you do not specify a destination in the STATUS field, the data replaces the current contents of the active AWS. If any other form of Selection List is displayed, you can perform any of the functions that are valid with that Selection List. When performing a copy operation, type a C before the name of each entry in the list to be copied. Then, tab to the STATUS field and enter a destination code. The destination codes are: * v B R T

Copy after the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned. Copy at or after the line specified by v. Copy to the bottom of the active AWS. Replace the contents of the active AWS with the copied data. Copy to the top of the active AWS.

The following example illustrates how you can copy multiple data sets from a Selection List. Data Set: Copying Through a Selection List

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== VOLSER UNIT DSNS DSCBS CONTG--CYL--AVAIL CONTG--TRK--AVAIL STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2 DATA SET NAME STATUS ORG RFM BLKSZ LRECL C C C

TEST.NEW TEST.NEW1 TEST.NEW2

) T B

PO FB PO U PO FB

8= 12288 1 8==

Note: Password-protected data sets cannot be copied from a Selection List. Use the Copy Function panel or the COPY primary command.

27-20 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.4 Compressing a Partitioned Data Set

27.4 Compressing a Partitioned Data Set You can compress a partitioned data set using the COMPRESS command. If the PDS is not cataloged, include the serial number of the volume containing the PDS, as in: COMPRESS DSN TEST.SAMPLE VOL STOR=2 or, by entering the CM function code, data set name and volume containing it on the Data Set Facility menu, as in the following example. Data Set: Compressing Through the Menu

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. DATA SET FACILITY FUNCTION

===> CM

DATA SET VOLUMES UNIT NAMES

===> TEST.SAMPLE ===> ===>

or, by entering the CM code on a Catalog or VTOC Selection List, as in the following example. Data Set: Compressing Through a Selection List

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== VOLSER UNIT DSNS DSCBS CONTG--CYL--AVAIL CONTG--TRK--AVAIL STOR=2 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2 DATA SET NAME STATUS ORG RFM BLKSZ LRECL TEST.ALPHA TEST.BETA CM TEST.SAMPLE

PO FB PO U PO FB

8= 8= 122 88 12288 8== 8=

Your site management has the option of designating the utility program that is to perform the compression processing. (As distributed, the IBM utility IEBCOPY is used.) The designated data set must be eligible for compression processing by that utility program. (See the description of the COMPRESS command in the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide for a list of requirements.) When the data set is compressed, messages are directed to a library member named ZZZZZCMP. You can use the SET DSNCMLST command to designate the type of messages you want written to that member.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-21

27.5 Define Alias

27.5 Define Alias You can use a primary command or function panel to define an alias for a: ■ Non-VSAM data set, ICF user catalog or VSAM user catalog, where: – If an alias is being defined for a non-VSAM data set, the data set must be cataloged in an ICF or VSAM catalog accessible to CA-Roscoe. – The catalog entry created for the alias must be in the same catalog as the entry for the related non-VSAM data set, ICF user catalog or VSAM user catalog. Attempts to define an alias with a name that causes an entry to be created in a different catalog are rejected. ■ PDS member, where: – If the alias is being defined for a non-load module (or is an alias in a load module), the PDS directory record for the alias is created by copying all information from the related member's directory record and setting the alias flag in the new directory record. – If the related member is a load module, the related member's CESD (Composite External Symbol Directory) records are read to determine if the requested alias name is defined as a symbolic name in the load module. If it is not defined as a symbolic name, the PDS directory record for the alias is created by copying all information from the related member's directory record and setting the alias flag in the new directory record. If the requested alias name is defined as a symbolic name in the load module, the request is rejected if it is not one of the following types: Control Section Definition, Entry Label Reference, Common Control Section, Resolved External Reference, or Resolved Weak External Reference. Additionally, if the load module is in overlay format, the symbol must refer to a location in the root segment (like segment 1) of the load module. – If the requested alias name is an eligible symbolic name in the load module, the PDS directory record for the alias is created by first copying all information from the related member's directory record, then overlaying the following fields based on the information found in the ESD (External Symbol Dictionary) data for the symbol: Entry Point Offset, Addressing Mode, Overlay Control Information, and Scatter Load Information.

27-22 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.5 Define Alias

27.5.1 Using a Primary Command You can use the DEFINE ALIAS command to: ■ Assign an alias to a PDS member. For example, to assign the alias XYZ to the member ABCDEFGH on the cataloged partitioned data set TEST.ALPHA, you would enter: DEFINE ALIAS XYZ RELATE TEST.ALPHA(ABCDEFGH) ■ Assign a data set or catalog alias. For example, to establish TEST as the alias for the catalog named CATALOG.TEST, you would enter: DEFINE ALIAS TEST RELATE CATALOG.TEST

27.5.2 Using a Function Panel To display the Define Data Set Alias Function panel, specify the DA function code on the Data Set Facility menu, a Catalog Selection List, PDS Selection List or VTOC Selection List or with the DSN command. The following example illustrates how you might establish SAMPLE as the alias for the user catalog named CATALOG.TEST.

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. DEFINE DATA SET ALIAS DATA SET VOLUME UNIT NAME PASSWORD

===> ===> ===> ===>

CATALOG.TEST

ALIAS NAME

===>

SAMPLE

The fields comprising this panel include: DATA SET

Enter the: 1) fully qualified name of the PDS in which the alias is to be created plus the one- to eight-character name of the member for which the alias is to be created; or 2) name of the non-VSAM data set, ICF user catalog or VSAM user catalog for which the alias is to be created.

VOLUME

Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume on which the PDS resides. (VOLUME is required if the data set is not cataloged.)

UNIT NAME

Specify the one- to eight-character unit name associated with the device on which the PDS resides. ■ UNIT NAME is required if the data set resides on a mass storage volume and is not cataloged.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-23

27.5 Define Alias

PASSWORD

Enter the site-defined OS password for the PDS.

ALIAS

Enter either the: 1) one- to eight-character name of the alias to be created for the PDS member, or 2) one- to 44-character alias for the non-VSAM data set, ICF user catalog or VSAM user catalog.

27-24 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.6 Define GDG

27.6 Define GDG You can define a generation data base (for ICF and VSAM catalogs) or a generation data set index (for CVOL catalogs) using the DEFINE GDG command or the Define Generation Date Group Function panel. Notes: ■ The GDG must be cataloged in a catalog that is accessible to CA-Roscoe. ■ Both the primary command and the function panel allow you to specify a retention period. The retention period may be any date up to the 365th day of the year 2155 at sites with MVS/XA SP2.2.0 or higher. At other sites, the maximum retention period is the 365th day of the year 1999.

27.6.1 Using a Primary Command You can use the DEFINE GDG command to create a GDG. By including the LIKE operand, it can be modeled on the characteristics of an existing base or index. For example, assume you want to create a new GDG named TEST.GDG.NEW and model it on the existing GDG named TEST.GDG.OLD. The command you would enter might look like: DEFINE GDG TEST.GDG.NEW LIKE TEST.GDG.OLD If you omit LIKE, other operands of this command can be used to define all of the appropriate characteristics. These operands can also be used to override specific characteristics of the model you have specified through LIKE. For example, if you want to use all of the characteristics of TEST.GDG.OLD except for the number of generation data sets that may be associated with the new GDG, you might enter: DEFINE GDG TEST.GDG.NEW LIKE TEST.GDG.OLD LIMIT 1=

27.6.2 Using a Function Panel You can display the Define Generation Data Group Function panel by specifying the DG function code on the Data Set Facility menu or a Catalog Selection List or with the DSN command. If you specify the name of an existing GDG when you request the panel, the panel will contain that name and the characteristics associated with that GDG (as illustrated in the following example). You can then change the GDG name and make any other necessary changes. When you press the ENTER key, the GDG is defined.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-25

27.6 Define GDG

Data Set: Defining a GDG

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... DEFINE GENERATION DATA GROUP GDG NAME

===> TEST.GDG.OLD

LIMIT EMPTY SCRATCH OWNER FOR TO

===> 15 ===> NO ===> NO ===> ===> ===>

(1-255) (Y,N) (Y,N) (1-9999) (MM/DD/YYYY)

The fields comprising this panel include: GDG NAME

Enter the one- to 35-character name of the generation data group to be created.

LIMIT

Enter the maximum number of generation data sets that can be associated with the GDG. The value must be between 1 and 255.

EMPTY

Designates the action that is to be taken when the maximum number of generation data sets have been reached for the GDG and another generation data set is to be cataloged. The action can be specified as: YES

Uncatalogs all generation data sets.

NO

Uncatalogs only the oldest generation data set when the limit is reached. Note: The disposition of the data set's format-1 DSCB in the VTOC is controlled through SCRATCH.

27-26 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.6 Define GDG

SCRATCH

Designates whether the generation data set's format-1 DSCB in the VTOC is to be deleted when the data set is uncataloged (either implicitly through EMPTY or explicitly through a delete or uncatalog request). The action can be specified as: YES

Deletes the generation data set's format-1 DSCB from the VTOC when the data set is uncataloged. (This allows the space assigned to the data set to be made available to other users.)

NO

Prevents the data set's format-1 DSCB from being deleted, causing the space to remain allocated to the data set.

OWNER

Enter the one- to eight-character owner identifier that is to be placed in the GDG's catalog entry. OWNER is ignored if the GDG is to be cataloged in a CVOL catalog.

FOR

Enter the number of days for which the GDG is to be kept. It must be a value between 0 and 9999.

TO

Enter the date through which the GDG is to be kept. ■ FOR and TO are mutually exclusive. They are ignored if a GDG is to be cataloged in a CVOL. If an SMS-managed data set is to be created in an ICF catalog, FOR or TO can be overridden by the specifications in the data set's SMS management class. The date can resolve to any date up to the 365th day of the year 2155 at sites with MVS/XA SP2.2.0 or higher. At other sites, the maximum retention period is the 365th day of the year 1999.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-27

27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module

27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module You can use a primary command, the Delete Function Panel (from the Data Set Facility menu) and/or a Selection List to delete: ■ One or more PDS members or CA-Librarian modules. ■ All of the members comprising a partitioned data set while retaining the data set itself. ■ An entire data set or CA-Librarian master file. You can also delete the following types of VSAM objects: ALIAS, AIX, CLUSTER, GDGBASE, PAGESPACE and PATH. Notes: ■ When deleting a data set or member/module through the Delete Function Panel or a Selection List, you have the option of requesting that a Delete Confirmation panel be displayed. You can control this option using the ATTACH DSN command or the Data Set Facility menu. – When CONFIRM DELETE is in effect, a Delete Confirmation panel is displayed. This panel contains the name of each data set or member/module you marked for deletion. You must confirm this operation before it is performed. – When CONFIRM DELETE is not in effect, the designated data set(s) or member(s)/module(s) are deleted when you press the ENTER key. Note: CONFIRM DELETE is always in effect when you attempt to delete all of the members comprising a PDS. See 27.7.4, “Delete Confirmation Panels” on page 27-33 for additional information. ■ When deleting a data set, an uncatalog operation is: – Always performed for an SMS-managed data set. – Performed for a non-SMS-managed data set if the data set to be deleted is cataloged and the volumes on which it resides match those specified in the catalog. ■ When deleting from a Selection List, data sets, members, or modules having unconventional names (for example, member names containing lowercase and/or non-displayable characters,) will be deleted.

27-28 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module

27.7.1 Using a Primary Command You can use the DELETE DSN command to delete: ■ A data set or CA-Librarian master file, as in: DELETE DSN TEST.OLD The next example shows how you can delete a data set regardless of its expiration or retention date: DELETE DSN TEST.OLD1 PURGE where, if PURGE is omitted, the data set is deleted only if the expiration date has passed. ■ A PDS member or CA-Librarian module. For example, to delete the member/module MYMEMBER from the password-protected data set TEST.OLD2, enter: DELETE DSN TEST.OLD2(MYMEMBER) PSWD MYPASS If you omit the password, a message is displayed. You must specify the appropriate password to delete a data set or a member/module from that data set. ■ All of the members comprising a PDS while retaining the data set itself, as in: DELETE DSN TEST.OLD3(Q)

27.7.2 Using a Function Panel When you specify the D function code on the Data Set Facility menu or with the DSN command, the Delete Function panel is displayed. The following example illustrates how you can use this panel to delete a password-protected data set named TEST.OLD that has an expiration or retention date.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-29

27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module

Data Set: Deleting Through a Function Panel

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... DELETE DATA SET OPTION

===> D

DATA SET VOLUME(S) UNIT NAME(S) OVERRIDE RETPD PGMR NAME MODULE TYPE

===> TEST.OLD ===> ===> ===> YES ===> ===>

D M

PASSWORD ===> MYPASS MCD CODE ===> LANGUAGE ===>

- DELETE ENTIRE DATA SET - DISPLAY MEMBER LIST

S X

- DELETE SINGLE MEMBER - DELETE ALL MEMBERS

U

V

The fields comprising this panel include: OPTION

DATA SETS

27-30 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Enter the code that is appropriate for the action you want to perform. The codes are: D

Delete and uncatalog, if appropriate, the designated data set.

S

Delete the designated member/module.

X

Delete all of the members comprising the designated PDS. (The data set itself is not deleted.)

M

Display a Selection List of members/modules. (Use the field PGMR NAME, MODULE TYPE and LANGUAGE to produce a qualified CA-Librarian Selection List.)

Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data set to be deleted. The name can be further qualified with: dsnmem

One- to eight-character PDS member or CA-Librarian module name.

v

Relative generation number of the GDG data set to be deleted, specified as 0 (most recent) or a minus number (like -1).

27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module

DATA SETS (cont.) *

Deletes all members of the PDS; the data set itself is retained and a compress operation is performed.

VOLUMES

Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume on which the data set resides. One to six volumes can be specified. This field is required if the data set is not cataloged.

UNIT NAMES

Enter the one- to eight-character unit name associated with the device type(s) on which the data set resides. It can be either an IBM-defined generic name (like 3350) or a site-defined esoteric name (like SYSDA). This field is required if the data set is not cataloged and resides on a mass storage device.

ARCHIVE LEVEL Enter the archive level of the CA-Librarian master file module to be copied. (The module must be in ARCHIE format.) If omitted, the most current level of the module is copied. The level can be specified as: Lx

Absolute level number (between 0 and 65535) as reported on the CA-Librarian Update Report.

-y

Relative level number between 0 and 255. The current level is -0; -1 is one level older than the current.

yymmddhhmmss 0 Date and time when the desired archive level was current. An even number of digits (starting from the right) can be omitted. Omitted digits are assumed to have the highest values that are consistent with the values of those digits that are specified. OVERRIDE RETPD Designates whether the data set's retention or expiration date is to be overridden by entering either: YES

Delete data set, regardless of its retention or expiration date.

NO

Delete data set only if the retention or expiration date is passed.

Note: If omitted, the default is NO.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-31

27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module

PASSWORD

Enter one or two passwords (established by the site). If one password is specified, it is treated as the data set or CA-Librarian master file module password. If two passwords are specified, the first is treated as the data set password and the second is treated as the CA-Librarian password. If omitted and a password is required, access is denied.

MCD CODE

Enter the management code of the CA-Librarian master file. MCD is only required when the master file contains PROD2 modules.

The following fields only have meaning when you specify the M option to display a list of CA-Librarian module names. PGMR NAME

Enter the one- to 15-character programmer name to be used when selecting modules for inclusion in a CA-Librarian Selection List. Only those modules marked as owned by the specified programmer are included in the Selection List. If omitted, all modules are included.

MODULE TYPE

Enter the type of modules to be included in a CA-Librarian Selection List by specifying one of the following:

LANGUAGE

27-32 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

PROD0

Includes only those modules with PROD0 security status.

PROD1

Includes only those modules with PROD1 security status.

PROD2

Includes only those modules with PROD2 security status.

TEST

Includes only those modules with TEST security status.

Enter the CA-Librarian language code designating the programming language type of the modules that are to be included in a CA-Librarian Selection List.

27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module

27.7.3 Using a Selection List If the Selection List is produced through the Delete Function panel, the only operation you can perform is a delete. Do this by typing a D or DX before the name of each entry to be deleted. If a Catalog, CA-Librarian, PDS or VTOC Selection List is displayed, you can perform any of the functions that are valid with that Selection List. The following example illustrates how you can delete multiple data sets from a Selection List. Data Set: Deleting Through a Selection List

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. =================================== T O P =================== VOLSER UNIT DSNS DSCBS CONTG--CYL--AVAIL CONTG--TRK--AVAIL STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2 DATA SET NAME STATUS ORG RFM BLKSZ LRECL D D

TEST.NEW TEST.NEW1 TEST.NEW2

PO FB PO U PO FB

8= 8= 12288 12288 8== 8=

Note: You cannot delete a password protected data set through a Selection List. To delete such a data set, use the Data Set Facility menu or the DELETE DSN command.

27.7.4 Delete Confirmation Panels You can use the ATTACH DSN command or the Data Set Facility menu to designate whether delete confirmation is required at the data set or member/module level. (Note that a delete confirmation panel is always displayed when you attempt to delete the members comprising a PDS without deleting the data set itself.) When CONFIRM DELETE is in effect, a confirmation panel is displayed whenever you attempt to delete a data set or member/module via a function panel or Selection List. (A confirmation panel is not displayed when you use the DELETE DSN command.)

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-33

27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module

The following example illustrates the type of confirmation panel displayed when you attempt to delete a data set.

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... CONFIRM ==> ENTER (Y)ES TO CONFIRM DELETE DATASET NAME CREATED VOLSER TEST.NEW 12/19/85 STOR=1 TEST.NEXT 1=/3=/84 STOR=2 TEST.LAST 11/12/86 STOR=1

8

The following example illustrates the type of confirmation panel displayed when you attempt to delete the members comprising a PDS (without deleting the data set itself).

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... CONFIRM ==> ENTER (Y)ES TO CONFIRM DELETE OF PDS DIRECTO DSN: CREATED: VOLSER: MEMBERS:

TEST.PDS.SAMPLE 11/=1/88 STOR=2 1=

Finally, the following example illustrates the type of panel displayed when you attempt to delete one or more PDS members or CA-Librarian modules.

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... CONFIRM ==> ENTER (Y)ES TO CONFIRM DELETE TEST.CURRENT CREATED: =9/29/1986 VOLSER: STOR=1 MEMBER LAST MODIFIED BADJCL =4/=5/88 =9:12 WIDGET =7/2=/86 16:=4

27-34 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.7 Delete Data Set/Member/Module

To delete the entries, enter either YES or Y in the CONFIRM field. Entering any other value in this field terminates the operation. (You will be returned to the Delete Function panel or the previous Selection List. The STATUS field of that Selection List will contain *DENYDEL.) If you enter a primary command when a delete confirmation panel is displayed, the operation is either terminated or paused. If the command is: ■ Data set related (like SELECT MENU), the operation is terminated and the action is performed. ■ Not data set related (like ATTACH LIB), the operation is paused. The panel is redisplayed when the Data Set Facility is reattached, allowing you to complete the operation.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-35

27.8 Inquiring About a Data Set

27.8 Inquiring About a Data Set You can obtain detailed information about a data set that resides on one or more volumes by issuing the INFO command, as in: INFO DSN TEST.SAMPLE2.SOURCE or, specifying the I function code and data set name on the Data Set Facility menu, as in the following example.

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. DATA SET FACILITY FUNCTION

===> I

DATA SET VOLUMES

===> TEST.SAMPLE2.SOURCE ===>

8

or, specifying the I function code on a Catalog or VTOC Selection List, as in the following example: Data Set: Inquiring Through a Selection List

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. =================================== T O P =================== SEARCH ARGUMENT MATCHES CATALOG NAME TYPE TEST.Q.SOURCE 6 CATALOG.UMUROS1 ICF DATA SET NAME STATUS TYPE VOLUME DEVICE TEST.SAMPLE1.SOURCE NONVSAM STOR=1 338= I TEST.SAMPLE2.SOURCE NONVSAM STOR=1 338= TEST.SAMPLE3.SOURCE ALIAS ================================ B O T T O M ================

U

27-36 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

V

27.8 Inquiring About a Data Set

The following example illustrates the type of information displayed. This example assumes you are using a terminal that displays more than 24 lines. If you are using split screens or your terminal displays only 24 lines, or if the data set has more extents than fit within the screen, you may scroll to see the rest of the information.

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. DATA SET INFORMATION DATA SET ===> ROSCOE.CREATE.PDSE ENTRY TYPE ===> NONVSAM MGMTCLAS ===> SMS STORCLAS ===> SMS VOLUMES ===> SMS==1 DEVTYPE ===> 338= SEQ NO ===> DATACLAS ===> DSNTYPE ===> LIB ALLOCATED TRACKS USED TRACKS ALLOCATED EXTENTS USED EXTENTS ALLOCATED DIR BLKS USED DIR BLKS NUMBER OF MEMBERS UNITS 1ST EXTENT SECONDARY EXTENTS

===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

156 15= 5 5 25 22 127 TRK 1=8 12

8

DSORG ===> PO RECFM ===> FB LRECL ===> 8= BLKSIZE ===> 8== KEYLEN ===> = KEY OFF ===> SECURITY ===> NONE CREATED ===> 11/=4/85 ACCESSED ===> =3/2=/86 EXPIRATION ===>

EXTENT NO. 1ST TRACK (CCHH) LAST TRACK (CCHH) TRACKS ---------------------------------------------1 7425 (=1EF====) 7532 (=1F6===2) 1=8 2 12755 (=352===5) 12766 (=353===1) 12 3 12767 (=353===2) 12778 (=353===D) 12 4 12779 (=353===E) 1279= (=354===A) 12 5 12791 (=354===B) 128=2 (=355===7) 12 ================================= B O T T O M ==============

U

V

The information is divided into two parts. The first describes the data set itself; the second provides specific information about each extent. The data set information includes: DATA SET

Name of the data set about which information is desired.

ENTRY TYPE

Catalog entry type. (For cataloged data sets only.)

MGMTCLAS

SMS management class.

STORCLAS

SMS storage class.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-37

27.8 Inquiring About a Data Set

VOLUMES

Serial number of the volume(s) on which the data set resides. A maximum of six volumes can be shown.

DEVTYPE

Name of the unit on which the data set resides. A maximum of six units can be shown.

SEQ NO

Sequence number of the data set on tape volume.

DATACLAS

SMS data class.

DSNTYPE

SMS data set type. This field will be LIB when the data set is a PDSE, and will be blank when another data set type (non-PDSE) has been defined.

ALLOCATED TRACKS Total number of tracks allocated on the first (or only) volume. USED TRACKS

Number of tracks used on the first (or only) volume.

ALLOCATED EXTENTS Total number of extents allocated on the first (or only) volume. USED EXTENTS

Number of extents used on the first (or only) volume.

ALLOCATED DIR BLOCKS Number of directory blocks allocated. USED DIR BLOCKS

Number of directory blocks used.

NUMBER OF MEMBERS Number of members in the PDS or modules in a CA-Librarian master file. DSORG

Data set organization.

RECFM

Record format or record organization (if a VSAM data set).

LRECL

Logical record length or average record length (if a VSAM data set).

BLKSIZE

Block size or maximum record length (if a VSAM data set).

KEYLEN

Key length.

27-38 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.8 Inquiring About a Data Set

KEYOFF

Key offset.

SECURITY

Security status of the data set, shown as: nnnn

Name of the site security package (like RACF, ACF2, TOP SECRET).

PWWR

Password required for WRITE access.

PWRD

Password required for READ access.

UNITS

Allocation unit type, shown as: ABS, BLK, BYT, CYL, KB, MB or TRK.

1ST EXTENT

Number of allocation units in the first extent.

SECONDARY EXTENT Number of allocation units for each subsequent extent. CREATED

Creation date.

ACCESSED

Date last referenced (for example, data set opened).

EXPIRATION

Expiration date.

The information about the extents includes: EXTENT NO.

Extent number or SUL. SUL appears if the data set has standard user labels. When present, the fields ALLOCATED TRACKS, USED TRACKS, ALLOCATED EXTENTS and USED EXTENTS will not include the space allocated to the user label extent.

1ST TRACK (CCHH)

Starting CCHH address of the extent (in hexadecimal) and the relative number on the volume (in EBCDIC).

LAST TRACK CCHH) Ending CCHH address of the extent (in hexadecimal) and the relative number on the volume (in EBCDIC). TRACKS

Number of tracks allocated.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-39

27.9 Inquiring About a Volume

27.9 Inquiring About a Volume You can use the INFO command to obtain detailed information about a volume, as in: INFO VOL STOR=1 or, specifying the I function code and volume serial number on the Data Set Facility menu, as in the following example. Data Set: Inquiring About Volumes Through a Menu

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. DATA SET FACILITY FUNCTION

===> I

DATA SET VOLUMES

===> ===> STOR=1

Or specifying the I function code on a Volume Selection List, as in the following example.

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. =================================== T O P =================== VOLUME UNIT TYPE MATCHES STOR+ 338= PRIVATE 2 VOLUME STATUS UNIT DEVTYPE CONTG--CYL--AVAIL CONTG--TRK I STOR=1 4=1 338= 1 1 15 STOR=2 4== 338= 2 13 31 ================================ B O T T O M ================

U

V

The following example illustrates the type of information displayed. If you have split the screen so that all of the information is not displayed, you can scroll the display.

27-40 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.9 Inquiring About a Volume

Data Set: Volume Information Display

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. VOLUME INFORMATION VOLUME ==> STOR=1

ADDRESS ==> 4==

DEVICE STATUS VOLUME STATUS

=> A => PRIV

DEVTYPE ==> 338=

VTOC INDEX SMS CONTROL

=> ACTIV => NO

TOTAL TRACKS ON VOLUME => 2655= TOTAL TRAKS USED => 26239 PERCENT OF VOLUME USED => 96

MAXIMUM BLOCK SIZE => 3276= TRACK SIZE => 47968 TRACKS PER CYLINDER => 15

CONTIG. FREE CYLINDERS TOTAL FREE CYLINDERS CONTIG. FREE TRACKS TOTAL FREE TRACKS FREE EXTENTS

DATA SETS => VTOC TRACKS => TOTAL DSCBS => FREE DSCBS => PERCENT OF VTOC USED=>

=> => => => =>

8 49 127 1311 172

647 15 795 117 85

U

V

The volume information includes: VOLUME

Serial number of the device.

ADDRESS

Channel and unit address of the device.

DEVTYPE

Physical device type.

DEVICE STATUS

Status of the device at the time the information is requested, shown in the form: ──┬───┬──┬──────┬──┬────┬──────────────────── └─x─┘ └─-yyy─┘ └─-z─┘ where one or all of the following information may be displayed. x is shown as: A C F O S

= = = = =

Allocated. Console. Offline. Online. System Residence Volume.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-41

27.9 Inquiring About a Volume

yyy is shown as: BOX BSY MTP NRD PND PUL RAL SPD SYS

= = = = = = = = =

Hardware error. Busy. Mount pending. Not ready Offline pending. Unload pending. Restricted to allocation. Suspended due to ASM use. Allocated to system.

z is shown as: M P R VOLUME STATUS

= Multi-system assignment. = Reserve pending. = Reserved/shared/exclusive control.

Status of the volume at the time the information is requested, shown in the form: ttt/uuuuu where ttt is shown as: PRIV PUB STRG

= Volume mounted PRIVATE. = Volume mounted PUBLIC. = Volume mounted STORAGE.

uuuuu is shown as: RSDT RSERV REMOV

= Volume is resident. = Volume is reserved. = Volume is removable.

TOTAL TRACKS ON VOLUME Maximum number of data tracks on the device. TOTAL TRACKS USED Number of tracks in use on the device. PERCENT OF VOLUME USED Amount of space used on the device rounded to the nearest integer. CONTIG. FREE CYLINDERS Number of free cylinders in the largest contiguous extent. TOTAL FREE CYLINDERS Total number of free cylinders on the device.

27-42 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.9 Inquiring About a Volume

CONTIG. FREE TRACKS Number of free tracks in the largest contiguous extent. TOTAL FREE TRACKS Total number of free tracks on the device. FREE EXTENTS

Number of extents not in use.

VTOC INDEX

Code indicating whether the device has an indexed VTOC and the current status if one exists. The code is shown as:

SMS CONTROL

NONE

= Device has no indexed VTOC.

ACTIVE

= Device has an indexed VTOC that is in use.

DISABLED

= Device has an indexed VTOC that is inactive.

CREATED

= Device has an indexed VTOC that is never used.

SMS status of the device shown as: NO INIT YES

= Not SMS managed. = SMS managed in initial status. = Volume is managed by SMS.

MAXIMUM BLOCK SIZE Largest valid block size for this device. TRACK SIZE

Number of bytes per device track.

TRACKS PER CYLINDER Number of tracks per device cylinder. DATA SETS

Number of data sets defined on the device.

VTOC TRACKS

Size of the device VTOC in tracks.

TOTAL DSCBS

Maximum number of Data Set Control Blocks in the VTOC.

FREE DSCBS

Number of Data Set Control Blocks not used in the VTOC.

PERCENT OF VTOC USED Amount of space used in the VTOC rounded to the nearest integer.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-43

27.10 Printing a Data Set Object

27.10 Printing a Data Set Object You can use a primary command, the Print Function panel (from the Data Set Facility menu) or a Selection List to print all or part of a data set object at a 328x-type printer or system printer. When the data are scheduled for printing, a message is displayed. It contains the printing location, tag (if specified) and print request number assigned by CA-Roscoe. Once scheduled, all references to a specific print request must be by its tag or number.

27.10.1 Using a Primary Command You can use the PRINT DSN command to print all or part of the currently attached data set object. For example, to print the entire contents of the currently attached and displayed data, all you need enter is: PRINT DSN All of the operands of the PRINT command can be used when printing attached data. For example, to print only lines 5 through 25 of the currently attached data, you would enter: PRINT DSN 5 25 Note: See Chapter 7, “Printing Data” for additional information about the PRINT command, and how requests can be monitored and controlled.

27-44 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.10 Printing a Data Set Object

27.10.1.1 Printing a Selection List When a Selection List is displayed, you can: ■ Print a specific range of lines by treating the Selection List as though it is numbered from 1 by 1, as in: PRINT DSN 1= 5= ■ Exclude the header portion of the list. By default, the header lines are included in the operation. To exclude these lines, use the NOHDR operand, as in: PRINT DSN NOHDR ■ Include all available information. By default, only the information available through the current display format is printed. To include all available information, use the FULL operand, as in: PRINT DSN 1= 5= FULL

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-45

27.10 Printing a Data Set Object

27.10.2 Using a Function Panel The Print Function panel is displayed when you specify the P function code on the Data Set Facility menu or with the DSN command. The following example illustrates how you can use this panel to print a copy of TEST.SAMPLE.SOURCE. Data Set: Printing a Data Set Object

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6... PRINT DATA SET OPTION

===> P

DATA SET VOLUMES UNIT NAMES ARCHIVE LEVEL PGMR NAME MODULE TYPE 1ST LINE TAG NAME DEST PAGE WIDTH TYPE/FORMAT 1ST COL

===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

TEST.SAMPLE.SOURCE MUROS1 PASSWORD ===> MCD CODE ===> LANGUAGE ===> 1 LAST LINE ===> 999999 NOTIFY SEPARATOR ===> YES FORCEALIGN PR17 COPIES ===> 1 CLASS PAGE LEN ===> SEQ NUMBRS DEF TOP MARGIN ===> BOT MARGIN 1 LAST COL ===> 32767

M-DISPLAY MEMBER LIST

===> ===> NO ===> = ===> YES ===>

P-PRINT DATESET/INDEX S-PRINT SINGLE MEMBER

U

V

The fields comprising this panel include: OPTION

DATA SETS

27-46 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Enter the code that is appropriate for the action you want to perform. The codes are: P

Print a sequential data set, PDS/CA-Librarian Selection List.

S

Print a single member/module.

M

Display a Selection List of members/modules.

Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data set to be printed. The name can be further qualified with: dsnmem

One- to eight-character PDS member or CA-Librarian module name.

v

Relative generation number of the GDG data set to be printed, specified as 0 (most recent) or a minus number (as in -1).

27.10 Printing a Data Set Object

VOLUMES

Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume on which the data set resides. One to six volumes can be specified. This field is required if the data set is not cataloged.

UNIT NAMES

Enter the one- to eight-character unit name associated with the device type(s) on which the data set resides. It can be either an IBM-defined generic name (as in 3350) or a site-defined esoteric name (as in SYSDA). This field is required if the data set is not cataloged and resides on a mass storage device.

ARCHIVE LEVEL Enter the archive level of the CA-Librarian master file module to be printed. (The module must be in ARCHIE format.) If omitted, the most current level of the module is printed. The level can be specified as: Lx

Absolute level number (between 0 and 65535) as reported on the CA-Librarian Update Report.

-y

Relative level number between 0 and 255. The current level is -0; -1 is one level older than the current.

yymmddhhmmss Date and time when the desired archive level was current. An even number of digits (starting from the right) can be omitted. Omitted digits are assumed to have the highest values that are consistent with the values of those digits that are specified. PASSWORD

Enter one or two passwords (established by the site). If one password is specified, it is treated as the data set or CA-Librarian master file module password. If two passwords are specified, the first is treated as the data set password and the second is treated as the CA-Librarian password. If omitted and a password is required, access is denied.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-47

27.10 Printing a Data Set Object

PGMR NAME

MCD CODE

MODULE TYPE

Enter the one- to 15-character programmer name to be used when selecting modules for inclusion in a CA-Librarian Selection List. Only those modules marked as owned by the specified programmer are included in the Selection List. If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by the other fields) are included. Enter the Management code of the CA-Librarian master file. MCD is only required when the master file contains PROD2 modules. Enter one of the following to designate the type of modules to be included in a CA-Librarian Selection List: PROD0

Includes only those modules with PROD0 security status.

PROD1

Includes only those modules with PROD1 security status.

PROD2

Includes only those modules with PROD2 security status.

TEST

Includes only those modules with TEST security status.

If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by other fields) are included. LANGUAGE

Enter the language code designating the programming language type of the modules that are to be included in a CA-Librarian Selection List. If omitted, all appropriate modules (as qualified by other fields) are included.

You can use the following fields to customize the print operation. 1ST LINE

Enter the number of the line at which the print operation is to begin. If omitted, the first line is assumed.

LAST LINE

Enter the number of the last line to be included in the print operation. If omitted, the end of the data set object is assumed. While Selection Lists do not contain line numbers, treat them as though they are numbered from 1 by 1.

27-48 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.10 Printing a Data Set Object

NOTIFY

Designate whether you want an RPS notification message displayed when this data are printed by specifying either: YES NO

Display notification message. Do not display message.

If omitted, the site defined value is used. Site management has the option of prohibiting the use of NOTIFY. TAG NAME

Enter the name to be assigned to the print request. The name cannot exceed eight characters, must start with an alphabetic character and be bound by apostrophes (').

SEPARATOR

Designate whether separators are required by specifying either: YES NO

Separators are required. Separators are not required.

The default is site-defined. FORCEALIGN

Designate whether physical page alignment is required by specifying either: YES

Physical page alignment is to be forced (for example, there is to be a page eject for each separator and body page).

NO

Physical page alignment is not required.

If omitted, the site-defined value is used. DEST

Enter the name of the printing location where the request is to print. Use this operand to override the current printing location for this execution.

COPIES

Enter the number of copies of the request to be printed. The maximum number is a site-defined value between 1 and 255. The default is 1 copy.

CLASS

Enter the print class to be used at the location where the request is to be printed. (Site management will tell you which classes are valid for 328x-type printers and which are valid for system printers.)

PAGE WIDTH

Enter the width of the paper in printing columns as a numeric value between 0 and 255. The default is site-defined.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-49

27.10 Printing a Data Set Object

PAGE LEN

Enter the length of the paper in number of print lines as a numeric value between 0 and 99. On printers with the hardware capability to set page length, the number must be the same length as specified to the printer. The default is site-defined.

SEQ NUMBRS

Designate whether sequence number are to be printed by specifying either: YES

Designates that sequence numbers are to be printed.

NO

Designates that sequence numbers are not to be printed.

If omitted, the default is YES. TYPE/FORMAT

Designate the format of the output by specifying either: DEF

(Default.) A top and bottom margin may be set.

ANS

ANSI print control characters are recognized.

MCC

Machine printer control characters are recognized.

DUMP

Format each line with offsets, hexadecimal data and EBCDIC data to the right of the line.

CHEX

Format each line with offsets and hexadecimal data to the right of the line.

VHEX

Format each line in character data with hexadecimal data shown vertically below.

TOP MARGIN v

(Recognized only with TYPE DEF.) Enter the number of blank lines to be skipped from the top of the page before printing begins. v can be 0 through 99. The default is site-defined.

BOT MARGIN v

(Recognized only with TYPE DEF.) Enter the number of blank lines to be skipped at the bottom of the page. v can be 0 through 99. The default is site-defined.

27-50 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.10 Printing a Data Set Object

1ST COL

Number of the column at which the print operation is to start. The value must be between 1 and the maximum length of the line. If omitted, the default is 1.

LAST COL

Number of the column at which the print operation is to stop. The value must be greater than the starting column and not exceed the maximum line length. If omitted, the maximum line length is assumed. (The maximum line length of data set objects is 32,767.)

27.10.3 Using a Selection List If the Selection List is produced through the Print Function panel, you can only perform a print operation. If a Catalog, CA-Librarian, PDS, Volume or VTOC Selection List is displayed, you can perform any of the functions that are valid with that Selection List. To print one or more entries, type a P before the name of each entry. By default, the request will print at the printing location assigned for the terminal you are using. To print at a different location, tab to the STATUS field and enter the appropriate destination name. The following example illustrates how you can print multiple entries from a Selection List. Printing Through a Selection List

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== VOLSER UNIT DSNS DSCBS CONTG--CYL--AVAIL CONTG--TRK--AVAIL STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2 DATA SET NAME STATUS ORG RFM BLKSZ LRECL P P

TEST.NEW TEST.NEW1 TEST.NEW2

PR99

PO FB PO U PO FB

8= 12288 1 8==

In the preceding example, the data set TEST.NEW will print at the terminal's default printing location. The data set TEST.NEW2 will print at the location identified (in the STATUS field) as PR99.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-51

27.11 Releasing Allocated Space

27.11 Releasing Allocated Space You can release DASD space allocated to one of your data sets using the RELEASE primary command, as in: RELEASE DSN ABC.TEST.ASM or, by entering the RL function code and data set name on the Data Set Facility menu, as in the following example.

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. DATA SET SELECTION MENU FUNCTION

===> RL

DATA SET VOLUMES

===> ABC.TEST.ASM ===>

8

or, by entering the RL function code on a Catalog or VTOC Selection List, as in the following example. Data Set: Release Space Through a Selection List

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== VOLSER UNIT DSNS DSCBS CONTG--CYL--AVAIL CONTG--TRK--AVAIL STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2 DATA SET NAME STATUS ORG RFM BLKSZ LRECL RL ABC.TEST.ASM ABC.TEST.LOAD ABC.TEST.OBJECT

27-52 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

PO FB PO U PO FB

8= 8= 12288 12288 8== 8=

27.12 Renaming Data Sets/Members/Modules

27.12 Renaming Data Sets/Members/Modules You can use a primary command, the Data Set Facility menu or a Selection List to rename a: ■ Data set (sequential or PDS) or CA-Librarian master file. ■ PDS member or CA-Librarian module. You can also rename the following types of VSAM objects: AIX, CLUSTER, DATA, INDEX, PAGESPACE and PATH. Notes: ■ The volumes on which the data set resides must be mounted and online. ■ A recatalog operation is: – Always performed for an SMS-managed data set. – Performed for a non-SMS-managed data set if the data set to be renamed is cataloged and the volumes on which the rename is performed match those specified in the catalog.

27.12.1 Using a Primary Command Use the RENAME command to change the name of a: ■ Data set or CA-Librarian master file, as in: RENAME DSN TEST.OLD NEWNAME TEST.NEW ■ PDS member or CA-Librarian module, as in: RENAME DSN TEST.OLD1(MEMOLD) NEWNAME MEMNEW If the designated data set is password-protected, you must include the password with the command, as in RENAME DSN TEST.OLDNAME NEWNAME TEST.NEWNAME PSWD MYPSS If the password is omitted, a message will be displayed.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-53

27.12 Renaming Data Sets/Members/Modules

27.12.2 Using a Function Panel If you specify an R function code on the Data Set Facility menu or with the DSN command, the Rename Function panel is displayed. The following example illustrates how you might use this panel to rename a member of a password-protected data set. Data Set: Renaming Through the Menu

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... RENAME DATA SET OPTION

===> S

DATA SET VOLUME(S) UNIT NAME(S) PASSWORD PGMR NAME MODULE TYPE

===> TEST.OLD1(MEMOLD) ===> ===> ===> MYPASS ===> MCD CODE ===> ===> LANGUAGE ===>

NEW DATA SET

===> MEMNEW

M R

- DISPLAY MEMBER LIST - RENAME ENTIRE DATA SET

S

- RENAME SINGLE MEMBER

U

V

The fields comprising this panel include: OPTION

DATA SET

Enter the code that is appropriate to perform the desired action. The codes are: R

Rename a data set.

S

Rename a single member/module.

M

Display a Selection List of members/modules. (Use the field PGMR NAME, MODULE TYPE and LANGUAGE to produce a qualified CA-Librarian Selection List.)

Enter the one- to 44-character fully qualified name of the data set to be renamed. The name may be qualified with: dsnmem

27-54 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

One- to eight-character PDS member or CA-Librarian module name.

27.12 Renaming Data Sets/Members/Modules

DATA SET (cont.) v

Relative generation number of the GDG data set to be renamed, specified as 0 (most current) or a minus number (like -1).

VOLUMES

Enter the one- to six-character serial number of the volume on which the data set resides. One to six volumes can be specified. VOLUMES is required if the data set is not cataloged.

UNIT NAMES

Enter the one- to eight-character unit name associated with the device type(s) on which the data set is to be allocated. It can be either an IBM-defined generic name (like 3350) or a site-defined esoteric name (like SYSDA) This field is required if the data set is not cataloged and resides on a mass storage volume.

ARCHIVE LEVEL Enter the archive level of the CA-Librarian master file module to be renamed. (The module must be in ARCHIE format.) If omitted, the most current level of the module is renamed. The level can be specified as: Lx

Absolute level number (between 0 and 65535) as reported on the CA-Librarian Update Report.

-y

Relative level number between 0 and 255. The current level is -0; -1 is one level older than the current.

yymmddhhmmss Date and time when the desired archive level was current. An even number of digits (starting from the right) can be omitted. Omitted digits are assumed to have the highest values that are consistent with the values of those digits that are specified. PASSWORD

Enter one or two passwords (established by the site). If one password is specified, it is treated as the data set or CA-Librarian master file module password. If two passwords are specified, the first is treated as the data set password and the second is treated as the CA-Librarian password. If omitted and a password is required, access is denied.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-55

27.12 Renaming Data Sets/Members/Modules

MCD CODE

Enter the management code of the CA-Librarian master file. MCD is only required when the master file contains PROD2 modules.

The next three fields only have meaning when you specify the M option to display a list of member/module names. PGMR NAME

Enter the one- to 15-character programmer name to be used when selecting modules for inclusion in a CA-Librarian Selection List. Only those modules marked as owned by the specified programmer are included in the Selection List. If omitted, all modules are included.

MODULE TYPE Enter the type of modules to be included in a CA-Librarian Selection List by specifying one of the following:

LANGUAGE

PROD0

Includes only those modules with PROD0 security status.

PROD1

Includes only those modules with PROD1 security status.

PROD2

Includes only those modules with PROD2 security status.

TEST

Includes only those modules with TEST security status.

Enter the CA-Librarian language code designating the programming language type of the modules that are to be included in a CA-Librarian Selection List.

NEW DATA SET Enter the new data set or member/module name specified as either:

27-56 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

dsn

One- to 44-character fully qualified new name for the data set.

dsnmem

One- to eight-characer new member/module name.

+v

Relative generation number to be assigned to GDG (Generation Data Group) data set, specified as a value between 1 and 255.

27.12 Renaming Data Sets/Members/Modules

27.12.3 Using a Selection List If the Selection List is produced through the Rename Function panel, the only operation you can perform is a rename. If a Catalog, CA-Librarian, PDS or VTOC Selection List is displayed, you can perform any of the functions that are valid with that Selection List.

27.12.3.1 Renaming Members/Modules As illustrated in the following example to rename one or more members/modules use the R function code and type the member name in the STATUS field. (When the Selection List is redisplayed, the STATUS field will contain *RENAMED, confirming that the operation performed successfully.)

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== DATA SET NAME VOLSER MEMS ORG RECFM BLKSZ LRECL TEST.OLD1 STOR=1 3 PO U 12288 12288 MEMBER STATUS --------------- ATTRIBUTES -------------R

JUNK1 JUNK2 R JUNK3

NEW1 NEW2

RENT REUS RENT REUS REFR RENT REUS REFR

8

AM=31 AC=1

27.12.3.2 Renaming Data Sets To rename one or more data sets, use the R function code. Since the STATUS field is not large enough to hold a 44-character data set name, all of the data sets that you marked will be presented to you through a subordinate panel (such as the one illustrated in the following example). To rename a data set, overtype the second occurrence of the old name with the new name.

7

> > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... ENTER NEW DATASET NAME ON LINE FOLLOWING OLD DATA SET NAME DATASET NAME CREATED VOLSER TEST.OLD 12/11/84 STOR=2 TEST.NEW TEST.OLD1 1=/3=/86 STOR=1 TEST.NEW1 TEST.OLD2 11/15/85 STOR=1 TEST.NEW2

8

You cannot rename a password-protected data set from a Selection List. To rename a data set, use the Data Set Facility menu or the RENAME DSN command.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-57

27.13 Uncataloging a Data Set

27.13 Uncataloging a Data Set You can uncatalog non-VSAM data sets or one of the following types of VSAM objects: ALIAS and GDGBASE. To do this, you can issue the UNCATLG primary command, as in: UNCATLG DSN TEST.NEW or, specify the UC function code and data set name on the Data Set Facility menu, as shown in the following example.

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. DATA SET FACILITY FUNCTION

===> UC

DATA SET VOLUMES UNIT NAMES

===> TEST.NEW ===> ===>

You can also specify the UC code on a VTOC Selection List, as in the following example. Data Set: Uncataloging Through a Selection List

7

8 > > DSN() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== VOLSER UNIT DSNS DSCBS CONTG--CYL--AVAIL CONTG--TRK--AVAIL STOR=1 673 288 1=17 2 2 116 2 DATA SET NAME STATUS ORG RFM BLKSZ LRECL ABC.TEST.ASM ABC.TEST.LOAD UC ABC.TEST.NEW

27-58 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

PO FB PO U PO FB

8= 8= 12288 12288 8== 8=

27.14 Writing to a Data Set

27.14 Writing to a Data Set You can update the contents of a data set using: ■ the EXPORT command, or ■ the EDSN command and related commands. Using EXPORT: Use the EXPORT command to write data to an existing data set. If the data are in: ■ The active AWS, you need only specify the name of the data set that is to receive the data, as in: EXPORT DSN=TEST.STAT where the contents of the active AWS will replace the data in the sequential data set named TEST.STAT. The following example displays the type of confirmation message you would receive after issuing this command, assuming that SET MSGLEVEL INFO is in effect.

7

8 > > >....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6 EXP6= 25= RECORDS WRITTEN TO DATA SET TEST.STAT ON VOLUME STOR=3 EXP69 SUCCESSFUL EXECUTION OF EXPORT

■ A Library Member, use the INPUT= operand to name the desired member, as in: EXPORT DSN=TEST.STAT INPUT=INDATA where the contents of TEST.STAT are replaced by the contents of the member INDATA.

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-59

27.14 Writing to a Data Set

■ The active AWS and one or more library members, use the INPUT= operand and the *, as in: EXPORT DSN=TEST.STAT INPUT=INDATA/Q/ABC.MORE The asterisk (*) indicates where contents from the active AWS are to be placed in the input. A maximum of ten different input sources can be specified and can be any combination of the AWS contents and library members. Note that if any of the members belong to another user, that individual's prefix must be specified. Other operands of the EXPORT command allow you to: ■ Write to a PDS member by specifying the member name in parentheses after the data set names, as in: EXPORT DSN=TEST.SOURCE(PROG5) INPUT=MYPROG5 You can use the SET STATS command to control the SPF directory information that is placed in the directory entry whenever a member is added or updated. ■ Write to an uncataloged data set by including the serial number with the VOL= operand, as in: EXPORT DSN=TEST.SOURCE(PROG5) VOL=SHAR=1 ■ Add to the end of an existing data set by specifying MOD with the DISP operand, as in: EXPORT DSN=TEST.PROJ,DISP=MOD where the contents of the active AWS is added to the end of the original contents of the data set. You can also use the EXPORT command to write data to an existing CA-Librarian master file or to an existing CA-Panvalet member. For more information about EXPORTing, see the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide.

27-60 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

27.14 Writing to a Data Set

Using EDSN: Use the EDSN command to edit a data set by establishing a data set editing session. ■ If you do not specify any operands, as in: EDSN the Edit Data Set Facility, as shown in the following example, will be displayed. Edit Data Set Facility Display

7 <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+.. 8 EDIT DATASET FACILITY FUNCTION ===> DATA SET ===> VOLUME ===> UNIT ===> E

PASSWORD ===> ARCHIVE LEVEL ===>

- EDIT DATASET

X

- TERMINATE EDIT DATASET

You can only perform two functions from this panel: Edit or Terminate. To edit a data set, specify E in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate data set name in the DATA SET field. If a volume, unit, password, or archive level are required, you will be prompted accordingly. Edit (E) will begin the data set editing session, and the specified data set will be attached in a modifiable AWS. ■ If you specify a data set name with the command, as in: EDSN TEST.STAT the data set will be displayed in your AWS. Once the data set is displayed, you can edit it using CA-Roscoe editing conventions. (See Chapter 14, “AWS: Changing Data Within an AWS” for information about editing and manipulating data within an AWS.) If there is data in the AWS before the EDSN command is invoked, it is temporarily replaced by the data set. That is, the AWS that the data set is placed in becomes active, and your other AWS(s) is (are) placed in the background. (Use the STATUS AWS command to display information about all AWSs in use. See Chapter 17, “AWS: Displaying/Changing AWS Information” for details.) Executing a command that causes output to the Execution Area (for example, ATTACH LIB) or pressing the CLEAR key places the Data Set Editing Facility in a 'pending' state. The data set can be edited again at any time by issuing: EDSN Q When you have completed editing the data set, save the data by entering: SDSN

Chapter 27. Data Sets: Performing Data Management Tasks 27-61

27.14 Writing to a Data Set

The data set will be saved (or updated if it already exists) and the editing session will be discontinued. If you do not want to save the data set, enter: CDSN The Data Set Edit Facility remains active until explicitly deactivated using the SDSN or CDSN commands, selecting X from the Edit Data Set Facility panel, or until the CA-Roscoe session is ended. For complete information about the EDSN, CDSN, and SDSN commands, see the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide.

27-62 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Part IV. Jobs (Submitting and Managing Jobs) Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities 28.1 Check Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.1.1 JCL Syntax Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.1.2 COBOL Syntax Checking . . . . . . . . . . . 28.2 Submitting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.2.1 Controlling Notification Messages . . . . . . 28.2.2 Controlling Sequence Numbers . . . . . . . . 28.2.3 Expanding +INC Statements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.2.4 Expanding -INC Statements 28.3 Using the Job Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.3.1 Wildcard Characters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.3.2 Using Job Facility Functions . . . . . . . . . 28.4 Using Job Selection Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28.4.1 Job Facility Operator Control . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information 29.1 Displaying Job Execution Status . . . . . . . . . . . 29.2 Displaying Class/Destination Status . . . . . . . . . 29.3 Displaying Initiator Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.4 Displaying Job Queue Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29.5 Displaying Job-Specific Information . . . . . . . . . Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30.1 Attaching Job Output . . . . . . . . . 30.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . 30.2 Browsing Job Output . . . . . . . . . 30.2.1 Detaching Job Output . . . . . . 30.2.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . 30.2.3 Positioning the Display . . . . . 30.2.4 Reattaching Job Output . . . . . 30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks 30.3.1 Altering File Attributes . . . . . 30.3.2 Copying Job Output . . . . . . . 30.3.3 Displaying File Attributes . . . . 30.3.4 Printing Job Output . . . . . . . 30.3.5 Canceling a Job . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

28-1 28-2 28-2 28-3 28-4 28-4 28-5 28-6 28-7 28-9 28-11 28-12 28-13 28-15 29-1 29-2 29-4 29-5 29-6 29-7 30-1 30-2 30-2 30-7 30-7 30-8 30-12 30-15 30-17 30-17 30-20 30-23 30-26 30-30

CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities CA-Roscoe provides facilities that allow you to: ■ Syntax check your jobs before submitting them. ■ Submit the contents of the active AWS and/or one or more library members for execution. ■ Use a menu and selection lists to manipulate jobs and job output. ■ Display information about jobs in execution, job queues and initiators. ■ View jobs at the terminal. Once attached, you can browse the output and perform such tasks as copying or printing individual files. This chapter describes how you can: ■ Syntax check the data you are about to submit for execution. ■ Control the submission of that data. ■ Use the Job Facility to monitor and process jobs.

Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities 28-1

28.1 Check Syntax

28.1 Check Syntax CA-Roscoe provides commands that allow you to syntax check JCL and COBOL source programs.

28.1.1 JCL Syntax Checking The job control language syntax checker is invoked by the JCK command. It can be used to check JCL statements in the active AWS or a library member. To check JCL that is in the active AWS, enter: JCK JCL in a library member can be syntax-checked by including the RUN command. With RUN, you can define input from a source other than that normally used with a command. For example, to syntax check JCL statements in the library member ARJOB, enter: RUN JCK ARJOB The following example assumes the JCL to be checked is in the active AWS. The resulting display shows the error messages provided after the JCK command is executed. Jobs: Syntax Checking a Jobstream

7

JCK

8

> > AWS( ) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 > <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5. ...... ================================ T O P ============ =====1 //STARTJCL JOB ==2=5,ROBERTS,CLASS=X =====2 // MSGCLASS=A =====3 //COB EXEC PGM=IKFCBL== =====4 //SYSLIN DD DSN=&&LOADSET,DISP=(,PASS), =====5 // UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(TRK,(5,5)) =====6 //SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=A =====7 //SYSUT1 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,4,4) =====8 //SYSUT2 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(4,4)) =====9 //SYSUT3 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(4,4)) ====1= //SYSUT4 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,(4,4)) ====11 //SYSIN DD Q ============================= B O T T O M ========

U

28-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

V

28.1 Check Syntax

7

> > ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... // MSGCLASS=A CAY6==6S VERB 'MSGCL' IS UNKNOWN

8

//SYSLIN

DD DSN=&&LOADSET,DISP=(,PASS), UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(TRK,(5,5)) CAY6=87W BLKSIZE NO SPECIFIED FOR NEW OR DUMMY DATA SET POTENTIAL S=13 IN EXECUTION //SYSUT1 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,4,4) CAY6=48E '4' IS ILLEGAL OPERAND FOR 'RLSE' PARAMETER OF 'SPACE' CAY6===

3 STATEMENTS FLAGGED IN JOB 'STARTJCL'. MAXIMUM SEVERITY IS 12

U

V

28.1.2 COBOL Syntax Checking The COBOL syntax checker is invoked by the COB command. It can check COBOL source code in the active AWS or in a specified library member. To check source code that is in the active AWS, enter: COB To check source code in a CA-Roscoe library member, enter the command RUN COB, followed by the library member name. For example, to check the contents of the library member INVLIST, enter: RUN COB INVLIST Extensions to the COB command allow you to check: 1. The source code against various COBOL language standards. See the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide for a list of the language standards available. 2. A particular division of the program. The codes to check a single division are also described in the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide.

Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities 28-3

28.2 Submitting Data

28.2 Submitting Data You can submit the contents of the active AWS or one or more library members to the operating system at any time during the terminal session. ■ To submit the contents of the active AWS: Enter the command SUBMIT with no operands, as in: SUBMIT ■ To submit one or more CA-Roscoe library members: Enter the command SUBMIT followed by the name(s) of the member(s) to be submitted. You can submit a maximum of 21 members in a single execution of the command. For example, to submit the library members COBJCL, INVLIST and DATA1, you would enter: SUBMIT COBJCL INVLIST DATA1 Based on the names of these members, they probably constitute a continuous jobstream. It is valid to submit multiple members where each member represents a separate job. ■ To submit a mixed jobstream consisting of one or more library members and the contents of the active AWS: Use the keyword AWS to indicate where the contents of the active AWS is to be inserted in the jobstream. For example, assume the member COBJCL contains the JCL statements needed to execute a COBOL program, the active AWS contains the COBOL program, and the member DATA1 contains the test data to be used by that program. The job submission would look like: SUBMIT COBJCL AWS DATA1

28.2.1 Controlling Notification Messages When you submit a job, a message is displayed on the Response Line. It contains the job name (taken from the JOB statement), job number (assigned by the system) and time the job was submitted. If you do not want to receive this informational message, you can suppress it by modifying the STATUS SESSION display or issuing the command: SET MSGLEVEL ERROR By site option, you can receive JES2 or JES3 messages at your terminal when your job completes execution. If your site permits this notification, your site management will tell you what change needs to be made to the JOB statement in your JCL.

28-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

28.2 Submitting Data

28.2.2 Controlling Sequence Numbers If the data you are submitting has the sequence number attribute NOSEQ, no sequence numbers will be included in the data. If the data has the attribute SEQ, you can use the SET SUBMIT command to control whether sequence numbers are included, where: ■ SET SUBMIT NOSEQ excludes sequence numbers. ■ SET SUBMIT SEQ places sequence numbers in the location defined by the data's sequence number attribute. If you submit data without specifying the SET SUBMIT command and the data are in: ■ The active AWS; the AWS sequence attribute controls whether sequence numbers are to be included. Use the SEQ or NOSEQ command to change the sequence attribute of the active AWS. NOSEQ suppresses the insertion of sequence numbers, while SEQ specifies that sequence numbers are to be included and designates the location of those sequence numbers. ■ A library member; the member's sequence attribute controls whether sequence numbers are to be included. The following table summarizes how you can control sequence numbers in submitted jobs.

Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities 28-5

28.2 Submitting Data

Data Source

Attribute

Command Override

Action

AWS

NOSEQ

no command

Numbers excluded.

SET SUBMIT NOSEQ

No affect

SET SUBMIT SEQ

No affect

NOSEQ

No affect

SEQ

Numbers included at location designated by command.

no command

Numbers included at location designated by atrribute.

SET SUBMIT NOSEQ

Numbers excluded.

SET SUBMIT SEQ

Numbers included at location designated by atrribute.

NOSEQ

Numbers excluded.

SEQ

Numbers included at location designated by command.

NOSEQ

no command SET SUBMIT NOSEQ SET SUBMIT SEQ

Numbers excluded. No affect. No affect.

SEQ

no command

Numbers included at location designated by attribute.

SET SUBMIT NOSEQ

Numbers excluded.

SET SUBMIT SEQ

Numbers included at location designated by attribute.

SEQ

Library Member(s)

28.2.3 Expanding +INC Statements You can include one or more +INC statements in the data you submit for execution. This special CA-Roscoe statement identifies where to include the contents of the active AWS or a library member within the jobstream. ■ Defining +INC Statements: +INC statements must begin in the first position of the line and be the only data on that line. The format of this statement is:

28-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

28.2 Submitting Data

──+INC──┬─AWS───────────┬───────────────────────────────── └──┬──────┬─mem─┘ └─pfx.─┘

where: AWS

Includes the contents of the active AWS.

mem

Name of the library member whose contents is to be included. If the member belongs to another user, that individual's prefix must be included.

The data being submitted (like the active AWS and/or library members) can contain any number of +INC statements. It can even contain only +INC statements, as in: +INC LEADJCL +INC MYPROG +INC ENDJCL The included data can contain +INC statements. You are allowed 64 levels of +INC nesting. ■ Enabling Expansion: The SET SUBMIT command controls whether or not +INC statements are to be expanded when the job is submitted. To have +INC statements expanded (for example, to include the library member or active AWS contents), specify the INCLUDE operand with SET SUBMIT before issuing the SUBMIT command, as in: SET SUBMIT INCLUDE SUBMIT Once you have enabled expansion, it remains in effect until you disable it or terminate your session. You can disable +INC expansion by specifying: SET SUBMIT NOINCLUDE

28.2.4 Expanding -INC Statements You can include one or more CA-Librarian -INC statements in the data you submit for execution. The SET MASTER command controls whether these statements are to be expanded when the job is submitted. For example, you might enter: SET MASTER ROSCOE.LIBR SUBMIT TEST1 SET MASTER OFF SUBMIT TEST2 SET MASTER ON

: : : : :

Activate and name master file -INCs in member TEST1 expanded Deactivate -INC expansion -INCs in TEST2 not expanded Reactivate with same master file

Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities 28-7

28.2 Submitting Data

Once you identify the CA-Librarian master file to be used, it remains in effect until you: ■ specify another master file, ■ disable expansion, or ■ terminate your session.

28-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

28.3 Using the Job Facility

28.3 Using the Job Facility The CA-Roscoe AJOB command invokes a panel-driven RPF system, similar to the DSN and LIB facilities. It is referred to as the Job Facility. The Job Facility can be used to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

attach jobs, display a job's execution status, display job-related information, alter file attributes, copy jobs, print jobs, and cancel jobs.

It can also be used to execute operator commands and check the system console. You can display the Job Facility by issuing the command: AJOB If you enter this command with no operands, the Job Facility primary menu is displayed. You can include a job name and job number with the AJOB command to qualify the job display. If a specified job can be found, it is attached and AJOB terminates. If the specified job cannot be found, or if the job name uses a wildcard specification, then a Job Selection list is presented based on the JOB/GRP NAME value. When you are viewing job output, you can redisplay the primary menu at any time by entering: SELECT MENU on the command line. PA keys will take you back one level. To end AJOB processing, select the function X (TERMINATE) from the main menu. The CLEAR key will discontinue AJOB processing from any Job Facility panel or display from which it is pressed (with the exception of a CONSOLE display caused by a command from the OPERATOR COMMAND panel). It will leave the most recent job attached that had been selected for viewing. When CLEAR is pressed during a CONSOLE display, it will cause the CONSOLE display to be cleared and will redisplay the OPERATOR COMMAND panel.

Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities 28-9

28.3 Using the Job Facility

Jobs: Job Facility Menu

7

8 <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+.... JOB FACILITY FUNCTION

===>

JOB/GRP NAME JOB NUMBER FILE NUMBER PAGE NUMBER LINE NUMBER

===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

A - ATTACH JOB AI - ATTACH INITIATORS AT - ALTER JOB

DEST/CLASS ACTIVE JOB TYPE CONTROL CHARS CONFIRM CANCEL C - COPY JOB CN - CANCEL JOB

I L

===> ===> ===> NO ===> YES

- INFO JOB - SYSTEM LOG

(ALL,JES,STC,TSO) (Y,N) (Y,N) OP - OPER CONTROL P - PRINT JOB X - TERMINATE

U

V

The fields comprising this menu include: FUNCTION

The job function to be performed. Specify one of the codes listed on the bottom of the menu. (See 28.3.2, “Using Job Facility Functions” on page 28-12 for a complete description of each function.)

JOB/GRP NAME

The specific name or prefix (wildcard) of job(s) to be included in the selected function.

JOB NUMBER

Number of the job. Must be numeric or left blank.

FILE NUMBER

Number of the file to qualify the selected display. Must be numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1 is used.

PAGE NUMBER

Number of the page to qualify the selected display. Must be numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1 is used.

LINE NUMBER

Line number of job data to qualify the selected display. Must be numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1 is used.

DEST/CLASS

The printer destination used in the PRINT JOB function, or class of jobs displayed by the ATTACH JOB function.

28-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

28.3 Using the Job Facility

ACTIVE JOB TYPE The qualification to show active TSO jobs (TSO), active tasks submitted through JES (JES), active started tasks (STC), or all active jobs (ALL) displayed for the ATTACH JOB function. A value here causes the JOB/GRP NAME value to be ignored. CONTROL CHARS

Specifies whether control characters are included when a job is attached, copied, or printed. A default of NO is used when the AJOB facility is initially invoked.

CONFIRM CANCEL Specifies whether a confirmation panel is displayed for any jobs selected for cancel. A default of YES is used when the AJOB facility is initially invoked.

28.3.1 Wildcard Characters The following table contains the wildcard characters that may be used to create the criteria for an entry's inclusion in a Job Selection list. The job name used to create a selection list may use the asterisk (*), plus sign (+), or wildcard characters, but not both in the same wildcard. Code

Meaning and Examples

*

None, one or more characters. ROS*JCL*

+

ROSAJCL ROSJCL ROSJCLEND ROSXJCLX

None, one or more trailing characters. DROS+

DROS DROSCOE DROSTSO

Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities 28-11

28.3 Using the Job Facility

28.3.2 Using Job Facility Functions You can use the Job Facility to perform a variety of job functions. (Each function is listed on the bottom of the AJOB menu. See “Jobs: Job Facility Menu” on page 28-10) Some functions are performed explicitly. Many functions display a corresponding panel on which you must enter information specific to that function. The following table lists each function code and its corresponding description and action. Code

Function

Action

A

Attach a job.

Performed, if job found. If job not found, displays selection list.

AI

Request active initiator information.

Panel displayed.

AT

Alter a job.

Panel displayed.

C

Copy a job.

Panel displayed.

CN

Cancel a job.

Confirmation panel displayed if CONFIRM CANCEL is YES; or cancel the job with no confirmation if CONFIRM CANCEL is NO.

I

Inquire about job information.

Panel displayed

L

Attach the System log.

Panel displayed

OP

Send OPERATOR commands.

Panel displayed

P

Print a job.

Panel displayed

X

Terminate AJOB processing.

Performed

28-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

28.4 Using Job Selection Lists

28.4 Using Job Selection Lists When a job name (with or without wildcards) is specified with the AJOB command and no job number accompanies it, a Job Selection list will be displayed. The following example shows the selection list for all jobs beginning with the letters SAMP: Jobs: Job Facility Selection List

7

FUNCTION ===> (M - MENU; F JOB NAME ===> SAMPQ FILE ===> LINE ===1 OF ==13 JOBNO JOBNAME STATUS ----- -------- ------------------__ 284 SAMPCSTT AWAITING PRINT (H) __ 283 SAMPDSTT AWAITING PRINT (H) __ 411= SAMPSTR1 AWAITING PRINT (H) __ 6843 SAMPLOGP AWAITING PRINT (H) __ 2993 SAMPDSTT AWAITING PRINT (H) __ 7158 SAMPETC EXECUTING 24:42:53 __ 716= SAMPCICS EXECUTING 24:42:48 __ 4596 SAMPCCCS EXECUTING 8:4=:5= __ 5477 SAMPDSTT EXECUTING 5:39:45 __ 7667 SAMPCSTT EXECUTING 3:24:35

FORWARD; B - BACK; X - EXIT) PAGE ===> LINE ===> C PTY SID - --- ---1 ANY 1 ANY 1 ANY 1 ANY 1 ANY 3 11 XAD1 3 11 XAD1 3 11 XAD1 3 11 XAD1 3 11 XAD1

ORIGIN --------LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL SYSTEMC LOCAL LOCAL

14.36.=8

8

HELD/ STEP/LINES CPU TIME ---------- --------

SAMPETC SAMPCICS SAMPCCCS MUF8= CICS

298.45 63.13 18.79 8.45 36.23

--------------------------------------------------------------------------A - ATTACH C - COPY L - LAST FILE S - STATUS AT - ALTER CN - CANCEL P - PRINT NN - NTH FILE PF1/13: MENU PF3/15: EXIT PF7/19: BACK

U

V

The fields comprising the job selection list can be used to change or further qualify the display, and include: FUNCTION

requires M, F, B, or X; M invokes the Primary Menu; X will discontinue AJOB processing (exits to CA-Roscoe); F will cause a scroll forward for a large display; B will cause a scroll backward for a large display; F and B are retained in this slot for subsequent scrolling by hitting the ENTER key; Any other value redisplays the screen with new information (beginning with the first job). The PF key numbers listed at the bottom of the display will achieve the same result as the functions.

JOB NAME

FILE

The name or prefix of jobs shown in the display. It can include a wildcard character. Users can change this value to show jobs with a different job name or job prefix. (This slot shows no value and is unmodifiable if the ATTACH INITIATORS selections was made from the Primary Menu.) Number of the file within the job to qualify the function request. Must be numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1 is used.

Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities 28-13

28.4 Using Job Selection Lists

PAGE

Number of the page within the job to qualify the function request. Must be numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1 is used.

LINE

Line number within the job to qualify the function request. Must be numeric or Last; if no value is specified, a value of 1 is used.

You can manipulate the jobs in the selection list by using the line commands displayed at the bottom. Specify the following codes in the field to the left of a job to invoke the corresponding service (multiple selections may be made): A

ATTACH this job using the FILE, PAGE, or LINE values appearing in their respective locations.

AT

Present the ALTER JOB panel for the corresponding job.

C

Present the COPY JOB panel for the corresponding job.

CN

Present the CANCEL JOB confirmation panel for the corresponding job if CONFIRM CANCEL is YES on the Primary Menu; or cancel the job with no confirmation if CONFIRM CANCEL is NO on the Primary Menu.

L

ATTACH JOB LAST FILE for this job using PAGE, and/or LINE values appearing in their respective locations. The value appearing in the FILE ===> slot is ignored, and is reset to LAST for subsequent displays of this panel.

P

Present the PRINT JOB panel for the corresponding job.

S

ATTACH the corresponding job using the STATUS JOB display.

NN

ATTACH JOB FILE NN for the corresponding job using PAGE or LINE values appearing in their respective locations; The value appearing in the FILE field is ignored, and is reset to this value for subsequent displays of this panel.

Notes: When you issue selections A, L, S, and NN, the AJOB facility is placed in a suspended display state (you will see PGM(xx.AJOB) appearing on the CA-Roscoe status line) and the following is true: ■ The job is attached and CA-Roscoe commands can be issued on the command line to do any job or non-job processing. ■ RPFs are NOT SUPPORTED while AJOB is in this state. ■ The SCREEN command is NOT SUPPORTED while AJOB is in this state. ■ PF keys set to SPLIT, SWAP, and END will not be recognized, however, issuing the corresponding :S or :W commands on the command line and pressing PF12 will cause the SPLIT and SWAP functions to take place.

28-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

28.4 Using Job Selection Lists

■ Any PA key or any of the following commands cause a suspended AJOB to continue: AJOB SELect MENU SELect NEXT SELect PREV Next Job PREV Job FIRST Job LAST Job DETach Job (job is detached first)

28.4.1 Job Facility Operator Control The Job Facility contains an option that enables you to issue operator commands and check the system console from a panel environment. If you have user privileges which enable you to execute system and operator commands, you can use the Operator Control function on the Job Facility primary menu. To invoke the Operator Control display from the Job Facility menu, enter the code OP in the FUNCTION field. The following example illustrates this. Jobs: Job Facility Menu

7

8 <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+.... JOB FACILITY FUNCTION

===> OP

JOB/GRP NAME JOB NUMBER FILE NUMBER PAGE NUMBER LINE NUMBER

===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

A - ATTACH JOB AI - ATTACH INITIATORS AT - ALTER JOB

DEST/CLASS ACTIVE JOB TYPE CONTROL CHARS CONFIRM CANCEL C - COPY JOB CN - CANCEL JOB

I L

===> ===> ===> NO ===> YES

- INFO JOB - SYSTEM LOG

(ALL,JES,STC,TSO) (Y,N) (Y,N) OP - OPER CONTROL P - PRINT JOB X - TERMINATE

U

V

When you select the OPER CONTROL function, the Operator Control panel will be displayed. From this panel, you can: ■ Execute CONSOLE commands using the CMD and CMM subcommands. ■ Execute CONSOLE commands you may have in a CA-Roscoe library member.

Chapter 28. Jobs: Introducing Job Output Facilities 28-15

28.4 Using Job Selection Lists

■ Display the MVS Master Trace Table using the CONSOLE MTT command. ■ Display the UCB address of defined consoles currently active in the system. ■ Display messages written to a designated console. This panel consists of four fields, as shown in the following example. Jobs: Operator Control Display

7

8 <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+.... OPERATOR CONTROL OPTION

===>

COMMAND - OR LIB MEMBER

===>

UCB ADDRESS

===>

(CMD, CMM, LIB, MTT, STA, UCB, X - EXIT)

===>

Fill in the fields with the following information: OPTION

requires CMD, CMM, LIB, MTT, STA, UCB, or X. X returns to Job Facility Primary Menu; CMD causes a CONSOLE CMD command to be issued using the command in the COMMAND slot; CMM causes a CONSOLE CMM command to be issued using the command in the COMMAND slot; LIB causes a RUN CONSOLE command to be issued using the library member named in LIB MEMBER slot; MTT causes a CONSOLE MTT command to be issued; STA causes a CONSOLE STATUS command to be issued; UCB causes a CONSOLE UCB command to be issued using the UCB address specified in UCB ADDRESS slot; Any other value is diagnosed as an error.

COMMAND

An operator command to be issued. Required with option CMD or CMM.

LIB MEMBER

A CA-Roscoe member containing operator command to be issued. Required with option LIB.

UCB ADDRESS A UCB address of a console to be displayed. Required with option UCB. Note: CONSOLE is a Monitor command. For more information about the CONSOLE command and the CMD and CMM subcommands, see the CA-Roscoe System Commands Guide.

28-16 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information This chapter describes how to monitor the status of a job using the AJOB command or the DISPLAY command. ■ AJOB enables you to display a job menu or selection list. From these displays you can select functions to determine the status of a job and obtain information regarding it. ■ DISPLAY can be used to directly monitor the status of a job. AJOB and DISPLAY allow you to determine: ■ the job's execution status (awaiting execution, executing, awaiting print, and so on), ■ the job's position in the job queue, ■ what initiators are assigned to each job class, and ■ how many jobs are associated with a specific job class or remote destination. | |

Note: CA-Roscoe supports the six-digit job number support added with z/OS JES2/JES3 1.2.

Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information 29-1

29.1 Displaying Job Execution Status

29.1 Displaying Job Execution Status You can determine job execution status for: ■ All jobs with the same job name. For example, entering: DISPLAY COMPILE might result in the display shown below.

7

8 > > ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+... JOBNO JOBNAME STATUS C PRTY SID ORIGIN STEP/LINE HELD CPUTIME ----- ------- ------------ - ---- ---- ------ --------- ---- ------2=85 COMPILE AWAIT PRT(H) 1 SYSH R1= 4678 COMPILE EXEC =:==:2= X 6 SYSH R1= LINKMOD =1.44 5232 COMPILE AWAIT EXEC X 6 SYSH R1= QPOS(18) YES

The information displayed above can be displayed using the Job Facility. Enter: AJOB COMPILE The following example is displayed. Jobs: AJOB Execution Status

7

FUNCTION ===> (M - MENU; F JOB NAME ===> COMPILE FILE ===> LINE ===1 OF ==13 JOBNO JOBNAME STATUS ----- -------- ------------------__ 2=85 COMPILE AWAITING PRINT(H) __ 4678 COMPILE EXECUTING =:==:2= __ 5232 COMPILE AWAITING EXECUTION

FORWARD; B - BACK; X - EXIT) PAGE ===> LINE ===>

14.36.=8

8

HELD/ C PTY SID ORIGIN STEP/LINES CPU TIME - --- ---- --------- ---------- -------1 SYSH R1= X 6 SYSH R1= LINKMOD =1.44 X 6 SYSH R1= QPOS(18) YES

--------------------------------------------------------------------------A - ATTACH C - COPY L - LAST FILE S - STATUS AT - ALTER CN - CANCEL P - PRINT NN - NTH FILE PF1/13: MENU PF3/15: EXIT PF7/19: BACK

U

V

■ All jobs containing your prefix in the site-designated location of the job name. Enter:

29-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

29.1 Displaying Job Execution Status

DISPLAY

or

AJOB

If your site requires your CA-Roscoe prefix to be part of the job name, the resulting display shows the status of all jobs that contain your prefix in the designated location. ■ All jobs beginning with specific characters. For example, DISPLAY ROS+

or

AJOB ROS+

displays status information about all job names beginning with ROS. (The plus sign (+) indicates that additional characters may follow those specified. ■ All jobs that contain specific characters in a specific location. For example, entering: DISPLAY MASK=R*SC*E

or

AJOB R*SC*E

might display the status of jobs named ROSCOE or RASCAE. (The asterisk (*) represents any character that is valid in a job name. See 28.3.1, “Wildcard Characters” on page 28-11 for information on using wildcard characters in job names.) ■ Any job whose name matches a DISPLAY subcommand, as in: DISPLAY JOB=QUEUE

Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information 29-3

29.2 Displaying Class/Destination Status

29.2 Displaying Class/Destination Status Use the NAME subcommand to display the names of jobs directed to a specific job class or destination. For example, to display the names and status of each job in class 0, enter: DISPLAY NAME =

29-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

29.3 Displaying Initiator Status

29.3 Displaying Initiator Status Use the INIT subcommand, as in: DISPLAY INIT to display information about all initiators used by the operating system and the names and number of executing jobs. You can also specify: AJOB INIT and receive the same result.

Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information 29-5

29.4 Displaying Job Queue Status

29.4 Displaying Job Queue Status Use the QUEUE subcommand to display the number of jobs waiting to execute in a particular job class. For example, to display the number of jobs waiting to execute in class X, enter: DISPLAY QUEUE X

29-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

29.4 Displaying Job Queue Status

29.5 Displaying Job-Specific Information Use the Job Facility Job Information panel to display accurate updates of data related to a specific job. Specify the AJOB command to invoke the Job Facility. From the main menu, specify I in the FUNCTION field, and the name of the job to be referenced, as shown in the following example.

7

<...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+.... JOB FACILITY

A

FUNCTION

===> I

JOB/GRP NAME JOB NUMBER FILE NUMBER PAGE NUMBER LINE NUMBER

===> COMPILE ===> ===> ===> ===>

- ATTACH JOB

C

DEST/CLASS ACTIVE JOB TYPE CONTROL CHARS CONFIRM CANCEL

- COPY JOB

I

===> ===> ===> NO ===> YES

8

(ALL,JES,STC,TSO) (Y,N) (Y,N)

- INFO JOB

OP - OPER CONTROL

U

V

Information about the specified job will be displayed in the format shown in the following example. Jobs: Information Display (Job Facility)

7

8 <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+.... JOB INFORMATION OPTION

===> I

(I - INFO; R - AUTOREFRESH; X - EXIT)

JOB NAME ===> COMPILE JOB NUMBER ===> 1234 REFRESH INTERVAL ===> =4 JOB STATUS JOB CLASS PRIORITY SYSID

: : : :

EXECUTING 3 11 XXX1

(=1 - 6=)

27:49:5=

STEP/LINES CPU TIME HELD ORIGIN

: CICS : 1=.56 : : SYSTEMX

The first four fields of the Job Information panel are variable. They will contain the name and number of the job you entered on the primary menu. If you would like to display a different job, you must change the following job information:

Chapter 29. Jobs: Displaying Job-Related Information 29-7

29.5 Displaying Job-Specific Information

OPTION

requires I, R, or X; X returns to Primary Menu; I indicates to show current information for this job; R indicates to begin autorefresh mode; Any other value redisplays the Job Information screen.

JOB NAME

The name of the job for which information is required.

JOB NUMBER

The job number corresponding to the job name specified.

REFRESH INTERVAL The number of seconds to wait during autorefresh mode before showing updated information. Must be a number from 1 to 60; the default is 4. The remaining fields display information specific to the job you have indicated. The screen will be automatically refreshed according to the value you specify in the REFRESH INTERVAL field. To exit this panel, select the option X (EXIT). You will be returned to the Job Facility main menu.

29-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output This chapter describes how you can: ■ Attach a job at your terminal. ■ Browse the job output to: – Locate and note the specific occurrences of a string. – Position the display to a specific line or to a line to which you have assigned a name. – Reattach the job after viewing an AWS, data set object or library member. – Finally, detach the job. ■ Perform such tasks as copying all or part of a file into an AWS, changing file attributes, controlling the printing of the files comprising the job, and cancelling a job.

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30-1

30.1 Attaching Job Output

30.1 Attaching Job Output You can use a primary command, the Job Facility menu, or a job selection list to attach job output.

30.1.1 Using a Primary Command Use the ATTACH JOB command to view the files comprising a job at your terminal. To attach the job named SAMPLE, enter: ATTACH JOB SAMPLE If there are multiple jobs with the same name, include the number of the job you want to examine, as in: ATTACH JOB SAMPLE 2=85 | |

Note: CA-Roscoe supports the six-digit job number support added with z/OS JES2/JES3 1.2. If you do not include a job number, the first available job is selected and attached. You can also attach a job by specifying just its job number, as in: ATTACH JOB 2=85 When a job is attached, the display begins with the first line of the first file. The files are presented to you in a format that is similar to a hard-copy listing. For example, assume that the job SAMPLE compiles, link-edits and executes a COBOL program in an MVS/JES2 environment. Its output is divided into the following files: File File File File File File

1 2 3 4 5 6

JES2 job log. Listing of JCL statements. Allocation and condition code messages. Listing produced by the COBOL compiler. Listing produced by the linkage editor. Output produced by the COBOL program.

You can begin the display at any location within the job by including the number of the appropriate file, page and/or line with the ATTACH JOB command. For example, to begin the display of the job SAMPLE with the tenth line on the second page of the third file, enter: ATTACH JOB SAMPLE FILE 3 PAGE 2 LINE 1=

30-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

30.1 Attaching Job Output

30.1.1.1 Using the Job Facility To attach a job from the Job Facility menu, enter the code A in the function field and the appropriate job name in the JOB/GRP NAME field. The following example illustrates this. Jobs: Attaching Through the Job Facility

7

8 <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+... JOB FACILITY FUNCTION

===>A

JOB/GRP NAME JOB NUMBER FILE NUMBER PAGE NUMBER LINE NUMBER

===> SAMPLE ===> ===> ===> ===>

A - ATTACH JOB AI - ATTACH INITIATORS AT - ALTER JOB

U

DEST/CLASS ACTIVE JOB TYPE CONTROL CHARS CONFIRM CANCEL

C - COPY JOB CN - CANCEL JOB

I L

===> ===> ===> NO ===> YES

- INFO JOB - SYSTEM LOG

(ALL,JES,STC,TSO) (Y,N) (Y,N)

OP - OPER CONTROL P - PRINT JOB X - TERMINATE

V

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30-3

30.1 Attaching Job Output

30.1.1.2 Using a Job Selection List To attach a job from a job selection list, enter the code A in the command field on the far left, next to the job to be attached. The following example illustrates this. Jobs: Attaching Through a Job Selection List

7

FUNCTION ===> (M - MENU; F JOB NAME ===> SAMPLE FILE ===> LINE ===1 OF ==13 JOBNO JOBNAME STATUS ----- -------- ------------------A_ 284 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) __ 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) __ 2652 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) __ 5=41 SAMPLE EXECUTING 27:38:11 __ 7158 SAMPLE EXECUTING 24:42:53

FORWARD; B - BACK; X - EXIT) PAGE ===> LINE ===> C PTY SID - --- ---1 ANY 1 ANY 1 ANY 3 11 XAD1 3 11 XAD1

ORIGIN --------LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL SYSTEMC LOCAL

14.36.=8

8

HELD/ STEP/LINES CPU TIME ---------- --------

$$$$$$@ SAMPLE

1=.53 298.45

--------------------------------------------------------------------------A - ATTACH C - COPY L - LAST FILE S - STATUS AT - ALTER CN - CANCEL P - PRINT NN - NTH FILE PF1/13: MENU PF3/15: EXIT PF7/19: BACK

U

V

30.1.1.3 When Can a Job be Viewed? If your site is: JES2

The output files of your job can be attached at any time. (If an output file's attributes are to be modified, you must submit the job with a special site-defined SYSOUT class.) If your job is: AWAITING EXECUTION: The JCL and all SYSIN data can be viewed. (This is the only time this information is displayed.) EXECUTING: The JCL and that much of the job log and SMB that is currently written to the spool can be viewed, plus all available files. (If a file is open and empty, only the end of file message is presented when that file is displayed.) AWAITING PRINT: All SYSOUT files that have not been printed or purged can be viewed.

JES3

30-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

If an output file exists, you can examine it at any time. You can only modify attributes of files routed to a SYSOUT class held for an external writer (when ETSO is not active) or TSO (when ETSO is active). (A special site-defined SYSOUT class designates that the output is to be held.)

30.1 Attaching Job Output

30.1.1.4 What is the SYSOUT class? Your site management will tell you what special SYSOUT class(es) they have established. The following example assumes the site has defined T and H as special SYSOUT classes. As illustrated, you can specify one of the special SYSOUT classes with the individual DD statements or with the MSGCLASS= operand on the JOB statement. (DD statements containing SYSOUT=* use the SYSOUT class specified with MSGCLASS=.) Notice that two of the SYSPRINT files are directed to class T while the third is directed to class H. Jobs: Sample Jobstream Using MSGCLASS Parameter:

7

> > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 >....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6 ==================================== T O P ================= //SAMPLE

8

JOB (account-info),CLASS=X,PRTY=6,MSGCLASS=T

//COB EXEC PGM=IKFCBL== ... //SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=H //SYSIN DD Q COBOL program inserted here //LKED EXEC PGM=LINKEDIT ... //SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=Q //GO EXEC PGM=Q.LKED.SYSLMOD,... //SYSOUT DD SYSOUT=A //SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=Q //SYSIN DD Q test data

U

V

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30-5

30.1 Attaching Job Output

30.1.1.5 What Is the Current Status of the Submitted Job? To determine your job's status, you can: 1. Receive notification at your terminal when your job completes execution. (If you can use this facility, your site management will tell you what change needs to be made to your JCL to receive the JES2/JES3 messages.) 2. Use the DISPLAY command. For example, to determine the status of a job named SAMPLE, you would enter: DISPLAY SAMPLE

30.1.1.6 Who Can Attach a Job? Unless restricted by site management, any user can attach any job. Also, the same job can be attached by multiple users. ■ If you are the first person to attach the job, you have control over the: – File Disposition: You can use the modifiable STATUS display or the ALTER command to change the attributes of the files comprising the job. – Job Disposition: If you issue the DETACH JOB command, the job is released. Other users will be notified the next time they press the ENTER key or use a PF key to scroll. ■ If you are not the first person to attach the job, you cannot change the disposition of the job's files or release the job. If you attempt to change the disposition of a file, you will receive a message indicating the user who has control. If the message does not identify a specific user and you detach and then attach the job, you may get control of the job.

30-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

30.2 Browsing Job Output

30.2 Browsing Job Output This section describes how, while browsing a job, you can: ■ Detach the job. ■ Locate the specific occurrences of a string in a file. ■ Position the display to a specific line or to a line to which you have assigned a name. ■ Reattach the job after browsing an AWS, data set object or library member.

30.2.1 Detaching Job Output 30.2.1.1 Using Primary Commands You can explicitly detach a job by entering the command: DETACH JOB With this form of the command, all files from the hold queue are released and all user-assigned NOTE names are deleted. Each file is disposed of according to its PRINT/NOPRINT status. (Files marked PRINT are routed to the appropriate printer; files marked NOPRINT are deleted.) Other forms of this command include: ■

DETACH JOB HOLD Releases the job and deletes all files marked NOPRINT. (Those files marked PRINT are kept on the hold queue and can be viewed again at a later time. NOTE names associated with these files are retained.)

■

DETACH JOB NOACT Releases a job without deleting any files. (In addition to retaining the files on the hold queue for later viewing, all associated NOTE names are retained.)

If you are the first person to attach the job and you release it, the job is released. Other users will be notified the next time they press the ENTER key or use a PF key to scroll. If you execute a command that causes output to the Execution Area (like ATTACHing an AWS) or if you press the CLEAR key, the attached job is placed in a pending state and can be reattached at any time.

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30-7

30.2 Browsing Job Output

30.2.1.2 Using the Job Facility If you are using the Job Facility, you can detach a job from the Alter Job/File Attributes panel. Select the function AT from either the Job Facility menu, or from a job selection list. This will display the Alter Job/File Attribute panel. Note: See 30.3.1.2, “Using the Job Facility” on page 30-18 for more information about the Alter Job panel. From the Alter Job display, you can select the options DETACH (DJ) or DETACH HOLD (DH). Enter the appropriate code in the OPTION field and the corresponding job name in the JOB NAME field and press ENTER. The request will then be issued. The DETACH commands can also be issued while the Job Facility is in a suspended state.

30.2.2 Locating Data This section describes how you can use a variety of commands to scan a job for all or specific occurrences of a string. While this description assumes you are locating strings that are in character format, you can also locate the hexadecimal representation of a string. See the section, 30.2.2.3, “Customizing the Operation” on page 30-10 for details.

30.2.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences You can use the following commands to find and display specific occurrences of a string within the currently attached file. FIRST NEXT LAST PREV

Locate Locate Locate Locate

the the the the

first occurrence of a string. next occurrence of a string. last occurrence of a string. previous occurrence of a string.

For example, if you enter: FIRST DIVISION The first occurrence of the string DIVISION in the currently attached file will be the first line of the resulting display. To find the last occurrence of the same string, all you need enter is: LAST Once you have specified a search string, it is remembered and used with any subsequent EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV command that does not include a string.

30-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

30.2 Browsing Job Output

By default, the entire file (for example, the full length of every line) is searched for your string. You can include column and/or line numbers with the command to qualify the search for a single operation. For example: NEXT 1= 3= SAMPLE examines columns 10 through 30 for the next occurrence of SAMPLE. After the command executes, the defaults are reestablished. To change the column boundaries for the remainder of your session, use the SET BOUNDS command. (See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information.) By including a value after the string, you can limit the search to a specific number of lines. For example, to find the last occurrence of SAMPLE within the last 200 lines of currently displayed data, you would enter: LAST SAMPLE 2==

30.2.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String You can use the INCL command to display every occurrence of a particular string within a given number of lines. For example, to find every occurrence of the string TEST-DATA in the next 100 lines of the currently displayed data, you would enter: INCL TEST-DATA 1== If you do not specify a number, the site-defined number of lines are searched. (You can use the SET JOBCNT command to establish your own search limit. See the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide for details.) You can also also limit the search for the character string to particular columns. For example, if you want to display every line that does not contain the string TEST-DATA in columns 30 through 80, you would enter: EXCL 3= 8= TEST-DATA If the number of lines to be displayed exceeds the size of your terminal screen, press one of the PF keys to which a scrolling function is assigned. The INCL or EXCL operation resumes scanning for the previously specified string (for example, TEST-DATA). The direction of the scan depends on the value assigned to the PF key. (The search string is remembered for subsequent use; column number limits and line number limits apply only to the command with which they are specified.) Note: Column boundaries specified with the command affect only the execution of that command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for information about changing boundaries for the terminal session. If you determine that you want to see the data that follows a particular line, use: ■ The cursor positioning keys to move the cursor to the appropriate line and then press the ENTER key, or ■ The POINT command. For example, if an EXCL display includes line 150 and you want to display the lines following it, you would enter:

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30-9

30.2 Browsing Job Output

POINT LINE 15= The resulting display will begin with line 150. Doing either of these actions or entering any primary command terminates the INCL/EXCL operation.

30.2.2.3 Customizing the Operation Translating the String The current setting of the SET MODE command determines how the string specified with FIRST, NEXT, LAST, PREV, INCL or EXCL is to be treated. See Chapter 3, “Controlling Character Recognition” for additional information. Delimiting the Search String In all of the examples used thus far, the search string has not been delimited. With these commands, delimit the string only when it: ■ Includes a space (like FIRST /TEST DATA/), ■ Is a numeric (like NEXT /519/), or ■ Is the same as a keyword operand or operand abbreviation of the command (like INCL /JOB/). Qualifying the Search String By default, CA-Roscoe searches for any set of characters and/or spaces that exactly match the specified string. To limit the search operation, you can include the qualifier operands. These operands are WORD, PREFIX, BEGIN, EMBED, END and SUFFIX. For example, assume the attached file contains the line: 'THE OTHER BROTHER ATE THEIR APPLE DURING THE CONTEST' and you want to search for the string THE. Without qualification, the words THE, BROTHER and THEIR match the search string. By including a qualifier, you can designate the type of string match that is to occur, as in: THE WORD

Qualifies the string as a word; only THE matches.

THE PREFIX

Qualifies the string as beginning a word; only THEIR matches.

THE BEGIN

Qualifies the string as beginning or being a word; THE and THEIR match.

THE EMBED

Qualifies the string as contained within a word; OTHER and BROTHER match.

TEST END

Qualifies the string as ending or being a word; only CONTEST matches.

TEST SUFFIX Qualifies the string as ending a word; only CONTEST matches.

30-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

30.2 Browsing Job Output

30.2.2.4 Specifying the Hexadecimal Representation of a String To designate the hexadecimal representation of a string, use the format: X'string' where the string is bound by apostrophes and contains an even number of characters, as in: FIRST X'C1' When using the primary commands FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL or EXCL, you do not need to delimit the hexadecimal string. To locate a character string that could be interpreted as being in hexadecimal representation, either: ■ Use the LITERAL operand with the FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL or EXCL primary commands, as in: FIRST X'C1' LITERAL ■ Specify the string so that it does not conform to hexadecimal notation. This method can be used with both primary and line commands. For example, to find the character string X'C1' you might specify: /X'C1/ or /X'C1' / or /X'C1'/

30.2.2.5 Screen Positioning If a line containing (or not containing) the search string is found, it becomes the first displayed line of the resulting display. By specifying a screen positioning operand with the command, you can control how the display is positioned. The screen positioning operands are: CJUSTIFIED

The display margins are to be altered if the entire matching string does not fall within the current margin. (This is the default positioning.)

JUSTIFIED

The display margins are always to be altered so that the first character of the string begins in the left-most position of the line.

CENTERED

The display margins are to be altered to center the matching string on the line. If centering would cause an invalid left margin (for example, less than 1), the display is not altered.

LOCKED

The display margins are not to be altered even if the matching string occurs to the left or right of the current margins.

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30-11

30.2 Browsing Job Output

30.2.3 Positioning the Display This section describes how you can: ■ Position between the files comprising a job. ■ Position to a specific line within a file. ■ Assign names to specific lines within a file and then later reposition the display to begin with a named location.

30.2.3.1 Positioning Between Multiple Files The files comprising your job are presented to you individually. For example, assume you are currently viewing a file and now want to view the next sequential file, you can do this by entering: NEXT FILE Note: You can display a list of the files in your job by issuing the STATUS JOB command. When using these commands to locate a string, once you have specified the object of your search (like FILE in this case), it is remembered. To return to the previous file, you only need enter: PREV To view the last file, you would enter: LAST To then return to the first file, you would enter: FIRST You can also use the POINT command to position to a specific file. For example, to view the fifth file in your job, enter: POINT FILE 5 If you want to begin the display with the second page of the fifth file, you would enter: POINT FILE 5 PAGE 2 Caution: The number of the currently displayed file and page are shown above the Scale Line to assist you in keeping track of your location within your job output.

30-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

30.2 Browsing Job Output

30.2.3.2 Positioning Within a File If the contents of the file you are viewing exceeds the number of lines in your terminal screen, you can position the display within the file by: ■ Pressing any of the scrolling PF keys. ■ Using the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands with the PAGE or LINE keyword operand. For example, to position the display to begin with the last page of the currently displayed file, you would enter: LAST PAGE While to position to the first line of that file, you would enter: FIRST LINE ■ Using the POINT command with the PAGE or LINE operands. For example, to position the display to begin with line 500 of the currently attached file, you would enter: POINT LINE 5== To position to the first or last line, you would enter: POINT LINE T POINT LINE B

or

30.2.3.3 Positioning to Named Lines When you are browsing a file, you can assign a one- to six-character name to the line containing the string; thus enabling you to return to that line later. For example, to assign the name LOC1 to the first displayed line, you would enter: NOTE LOC1 NOTE QLOC1

or

The asterisk (*) is optional. If omitted or specified without qualification, it represents the first displayed line. To assign a name to a line that is not the first displayed line, qualify the asterisk. For example, to assign the name LOC2 to the line that is five lines after the first displayed line, you would enter: NOTE Q+5 LOC2 Once you have assigned a name to a specific line, you can return to that line at any time by using the POINT command. To return to the line noted as LOC1, you would enter: POINT LOC1 If you issue the command: STATUS NOTES

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30-13

30.2 Browsing Job Output

the resulting display shows each assigned name and the file, page and line to which it is assigned. If you determine that you no longer need to note a specific line, you can eliminate the NOTE name with the DROP command, as in: DROP LOC2 Any outstanding NOTE names are automatically deleted when you detach the member, attach another member or return to the menu.

30-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

30.2 Browsing Job Output

30.2.4 Reattaching Job Output Using Primary Commands: While you are working with job output, you can attach an AWS, a data set object or a library member/list, browse that data and then return to your data. The following example illustrates how you can ATTACH the active AWS, browse it and then reATTACH the data you have been viewing using the ATTACH JOB command. Jobs: Reattaching Job Output

7

8

ATTACH_ > > JOB(INVREPT,5283) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===73 F 4 P 1 > <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+... ============================== T O P ============ =====1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. =====2 PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT. =====3 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

7

8

ATTACH JOB ) > J PENDING > AWS(PRI.INVREPT) SCRL FULL COLS ====7 ===72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.... ...... ======================== T O P ================= ===1== IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. ===2== PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT. ===3== ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

7>

8

> JOB(INVREPT,5283) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===73 F 4 P 1 > <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+... ============================= T O P ============= =====1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. =====2 PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT. =====3 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

The center screen in the previous examples shows J PENDING. This note is provided to remind you that the job may be reattached at any time.

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30-15

30.2 Browsing Job Output

When you reattach the job, the display begins with the first line of the prior display. To reattach at a different location within the same data, you can: ■ Use the FILE, PAGE and/or LINE operands of ATTACH to specify the desired starting location, as in: ATTACH JOB Q FILE 3 ATTACH JOB Q FILE 3 LINE 12== ATTACH LIB Q FILE 3 PAGE 2 ■ Use the POINT command to begin the display with a specific location, as in: POINT JOB FILE 4 POINT JOB FILE 4 LINE 12== POINT JOB FILE 4 PAGE 2 or with the line assigned a NOTE name, as in: POINT LIB NAME1 ■ Use the JOB operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands to begin the display the the line containing a specific string, as in: FIRST JOB /DD/ ■ Use the JOB operand with the INCL or EXCL command to begin the display with a list of lines containing (or not containing) a specific string, as in: INCL JOB /DD/

30.2.4.1 Using the Job Facility If you are working with jobs using AJOB and the Job Facility, you can also attach an AWS, a data set object or a library member/list, browse that data and then return to job output. AJOB will be suspended while you process other data. You can issue any of the following commands to return to the job data and continue AJOB processing: AJOB ELect MENU SELect NEXT SELect PREV Next Job

PREV Job FIRST Job LAST Job DETach Job

Note: You can enter the commands shown above as listed, or you can use their abbreviations which are shown in uppercase (for example, SEL MENU).

30-16 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks This section describes how you can perform such tasks as: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Altering the attributes of one or more files comprising a job. Copying all or part of a file into an AWS, Display information about the files comprising the currently attached job. Printing the currently displayed file. Canceling a job.

These tasks can be performed using primary commands, the Job Facility menu, or a job selection list.

30.3.1 Altering File Attributes 30.3.1.1 Using Primary Commands Multiple users can attach the same job. If you are not the first person to attach the job, you cannot change the attributes of its files. If you are the first person to attach the job, you can change the attributes of its files by using: ■ The modifiable STATUS JOB display. The display produced by STATUS job can be used to control the printing of a file at a system or 328x-type printer. (See section, 30.3.3, “Displaying File Attributes” on page 30-23 for additional information.) ■ The ALTER command. Use ALTER to change the system printer attributes associated with one or more files, as in: ALTER JOB PRINT CLASS A which changes the SYSOUT class for the currently displayed job to A. If the file is not currently displayed, you must identify it, as in: ALTER JOB FILE 3 NOPRINT which prevents the third file in the job from being printed. To mark all files to be printed, use the ALL operand. (Use of this operand may be restricted by site management.) For example, to mark all files to be printed in Class V, enter: ALTER JOB ALL PRINT CLASS V Other operands permit you to change the printer ID (DEST), the number of copies to be printed (COPIES), and the output form number (FORM).

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30-17

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks

30.3.1.2 Using the Job Facility To alter file attributes from the Job Facility menu, enter the code AT in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate job name in the JOB/GRP NAME field. The following example shows how to alter a job from the Job Facility menu. Jobs: Alter Job Through the Job Facility

7

8 <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+... JOB FACILITY FUNCTION

===> AT

JOB/GRP NAME JOB NUMBER FILE NUMBER PAGE NUMBER LINE NUMBER

===> SAMPLE ===> ===> ===> ===>

A - ATTACH JOB AI - ATTACH INITIATORS AT - ALTER JOB

DEST/CLASS ACTIVE JOB TYPE CONTROL CHARS CONFIRM CANCEL

C - COPY JOB CN - CANCEL JOB

I L

===> ===> ===> NO ===> YES

- INFO JOB - SYSTEM LOG

(ALL,JES,STC,TSO) (Y,N) (Y,N)

OP - OPER CONTROL P - PRINT JOB X - TERMINATE

U

V

When you select the ALTER JOB function, the Alter Job panel will be displayed. It will contain the name of the job which was entered on the primary menu, as shown in the following example. Jobs: Alter Job Panel Display

7

8 <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+... ALTER JOB/FILE ATTRIBUTES OPTION

===>

(AT - ALTER; DJ - DETACH; DH - DETACH HOLD; X - EXIT)

JOB NAME JOB NUMBER FILE NUMBER PRINT STATUS DESTINATION COPIES

===> SAMPLE ===> 1234 ===> (NN, ALL) ===> (P, NOP) ===> ===>

CLASS FORM

===> ===>

Select one of the four OPTIONs listed on the screen and fill in all appropriate fields, which consist of the following: OPTION

30-18 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Requires AT, DJ, DH, or X; X returns to invoking Primary Menu or Job Selection display; AT will issue an ALTER JOB request; DJ will issue the DETACH JOB request; DH will issue

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks

the DETACH JOB HOLD request; Any other value redisplays the Alter Job screen. JOB NAME

The specific job name to be altered.

JOB NUMBER

The specific job number to be altered.

FILE NUMBER

File to be altered; must be numeric or ALL.

PRINT STATUS

Must be P for PRINT or NOP for NOPRINT. Required only if changing the print status is desired.

DESTINATION

The printer destination used in the PRINT JOB function, or class of jobs displayed by the ATTACH JOB function.

COPIES

Must be numeric or left blank. Required only if altering the number of copies desired.

CLASS

Print class to be assigned to a job file.

FORM

Form to be assigned to a job file.

30.3.1.3 Using a Job Selection List To alter file attributes from a job selection list, enter the code AT in the command field to the left of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may be selected. The following example shows how to alter a job from a job selection list. Jobs: Alter Job Through Selection List

7

FUNCTION ===> (M - MENU; F JOB NAME ===> SAMPLE FILE ===> LINE ===1 OF ==13 JOBNO JOBNAME STATUS ----- -------- ------------------__ 284 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) AT 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) AT 411= SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) __ 4596 SAMPLE EXECUTING 8:4=:5= __ 5477 SAMPLE EXECUTING 5:39:45 __ 7667 SAMPLE EXECUTING 3:24:35

FORWARD; B - BACK; X - EXIT) PAGE ===> LINE ===> C PTY SID - --- ---1 ANY 1 ANY 1 ANY 3 11 XAD1 3 11 XAD1 3 11 XAD1

ORIGIN --------LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL SYSTEMC LOCAL LOCAL

14.36.=8

8

HELD/ STEP/LINES CPU TIME ---------- --------

SAMPLECS MUF8= CICS

18.79 8.45 36.23

--------------------------------------------------------------------------A - ATTACH C - COPY L - LAST FILE S - STATUS AT - ALTER CN - CANCEL P - PRINT NN - NTH FILE PF1/13: MENU PF3/15: EXIT PF7/19: BACK

U

V

When you select the ALTER function, the Alter Job/File Attributes panel will be displayed. It will contain the name of the first job which was selected from the selection list. See the Alter Job panel and its description in “Jobs: Alter Job Panel Display” on page 30-18.

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30-19

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks

30.3.2 Copying Job Output 30.3.2.1 Using Primary Commands You can use a variety of commands to copy all or part of the currently attached job output file into the AWS. These commands include: COPY JOB

Copies all or part of a file into an AWS, as in: COPY JOB T [TO SAMPLE] which copies all of the currently attached job to the top of the AWS named SAMPLE. (If an AWS name is not included, the data are copied to the active AWS.)

COPYS JOB

Copies one or more lines containing the specified string from the attached file into an AWS, as in: COPY JOB /DD/ 28== 53== 1== which copies every line containing the string DD between line 2800 and 5300 to (or after) line 100 in the active AWS.

COPYX JOB

Copies one or more lines not containing the specified string from the attached file into an AWS.

XCOPY JOB

Copies all or part of the attached file from one split screen into the active AWS of the screen containing the command.

XCOPYS JOB

Copies one or more lines containing the specified string from the attached file in one split screen into the active AWS of the screen containing the command.

XCOPYX JOB Copies one or more lines not containing the specified string from the attached file in one split screen into the active AWS of the screen containing the command. For additional information about these commands and how they may be used, see Chapter 15, “AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS.”

30.3.2.2 Using the Job Facility You can use the Job Facility menu to copy all or part of a job into the AWS. Enter the code C in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate job name in the JOB/GRP NAME field. The following example shows how to copy a job from the primary menu.

30-20 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks

Jobs: Copy Job Through Job Facility Menu

7

8 <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+... JOB FACILITY FUNCTION

===> C

JOB/GRP NAME JOB NUMBER FILE NUMBER PAGE NUMBER LINE NUMBER

===> SAMPLE ===> ===> ===> ===>

A - ATTACH JOB AI - ATTACH INITIATORS AT - ALTER JOB

DEST/CLASS ACTIVE JOB TYPE CONTROL CHARS CONFIRM CANCEL

C - COPY JOB CN - CANCEL JOB

I L

===> ===> ===> NO ===> YES

(ALL,JES,STC,TSO) (Y,N) (Y,N)

- INFO JOB - SYSTEM LOG

OP - OPER CONTROL P - PRINT JOB X - TERMINATE

U

V

When you select the COPY JOB function, the Copy Job panel will be displayed. It will contain the name of the job which was entered on the primary menu and its corresponding job number, as shown in the following example. Jobs: Copy Job Display

7

8 <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+... COPY JOB OPTION

===> C

JOB NAME JOB NUMBER FILE NUMBER FIRST LINE LAST LINE COPIES

===> SAMPLE ===> 1234 ===> ===> ===> ===>

(C - COPY; X - EXIT)

AWS TARGET ===> AWS NAME ===> CONTROL CHARS ===> NO

(Y, N)

Select the Copy option and fill in all appropriate fields, as listed below: OPTION

requires C or X; X returns to invoking Primary Menu or Job Selection display; C indicates to issue a COPY JOB request; Any other value redisplays the Copy Job screen.

JOB NAME

The specific job name to be copied.

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30-21

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks

JOB NUMBER

The specific job number to be copied.

FILE NUMBER

File to be copied; Must be numeric.

FIRST LINE

First line of file to be copied. Must be numeric or left blank.

LAST LINE

Last line of file to be copied. Must be numeric or left blank.

COPIES

Number of times to copy file to AWS. Defaults to 1.

AWS TARGET

Location in the AWS to which the file is copied. Must be a line number, T (Top), B (Bottom), or R (Replace).

AWS NAME

Name of AWS to receive the copied file. It must be the name of an existing AWS.

CONTROL CHARS

Specifies whether control characters are included when the file is copied. Value is initially set to that specified on the Primary Menu.

30.3.2.3 Using a Job Selection List To copy a job from a job selection list, enter the code C in the command field to the left of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may be selected. The following example shows how to copy a job from a selection list. Jobs: Copy Job Through Selection List

7

FUNCTION ===> (M - MENU; F JOB NAME ===> SAMPLE FILE ===> LINE ===1 OF ==13 JOBNO JOBNAME STATUS ----- -------- ------------------__ 284 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) C_ 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) C_ 411= SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) __ 4596 SAMPLE EXECUTING 8:4=:5= __ 5477 SAMPLE EXECUTING 5:39:45 __ 7667 SAMPLE EXECUTING 3:24:35

FORWARD; B - BACK; X - EXIT) PAGE ===> LINE ===> C PTY SID - --- ---1 ANY 1 ANY 1 ANY 3 11 XAD1 3 11 XAD1 3 11 XAD1

ORIGIN --------LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL SYSTEMC LOCAL LOCAL

14.36.=8

8

HELD/ STEP/LINES CPU TIME ---------- --------

SAMPLECS MUF8= CICS

18.79 8.45 36.23

--------------------------------------------------------------------------A - ATTACH C - COPY L - LAST FILE S - STATUS AT - ALTER CN - CANCEL P - PRINT NN - NTH FILE PF1/13: MENU PF3/15: EXIT PF7/19: BACK

U

V

When you select the COPY function, the Copy Job panel will be displayed. It will contain the name of the first job which was selected from the selection list. See the Copy Job panel and its description in “Jobs: Copy Job Display” on page 30-21.

30-22 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks

30.3.3 Displaying File Attributes 30.3.3.1 Using a Primary Command You can display information about the currently attached job by entering: STATUS If your job is attached but not currently displayed, you can display the same information by including the JOB keyword, as in: STATUS JOB The following example shows the type of information that is displayed using either method. Jobs: STATUS JOB Display

7

> > STA(SAMPLE,2=85) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 JOB PENDING ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+ ROSCOE ALTER/STATUS PROCESSOR JOB NAME NO SAMPLE 2=85

FILE 1

LINE 1

PAGE/ 1

LINE 1

FIND LIMIT 2==

8

I/O COUNT 1=

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) A FILE STA C DEST LINES FORM CPY NOTES 1 NOP T R1! 5 STD. 2 NOP T R1! 36 STD. 3 NOP T R1! 1=4 STD. 4 NOP T R1! 263 STD. 5 NOP T R1! 18 STD. 6 NOP T R1! 6 STD. ===================== END OF OUTPUT FILES ======================

U

V

The status information includes: JOB NAME

Name of the job currently attached.

NO

Number of the job currently attached.

FILE

Number of the file currently pointed to.

LINE

Number of the line within the file currently pointed to.

PAGE/

Number of the page currently pointed to.

LINE

Number of the line within the page currently pointed to.

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30-23

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks

FIND LIMIT

Current search limit (the number of lines to be searched). This value is used when an EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV command is entered with no search limit. It is either the site default or the number you specified with the SET JOBCNT command.

I/O COUNT

Current number of blocks read from the system spool. (This field is meaningless at JES3 sites.)

A (Modifiable)

Use this field to: 1. Redisplay the job beginning with a specific file by entering, before the appropriate file. A or S

Attach file.

2. Alter the printing status of a file by entering: P Print file at system or 328x-type printer. D or N Do not print the file. FILE

CA-Roscoe-assigned file number.

STA

Printing status (disposition) of each file. (The disposition can be modified as noted with A.)

C (Modifiable)

Use this field to change the SYSOUT class of a file by overtyping the character with any class valid for the designated system or 328x-type printer.

DEST (Modifiable)

Use this field to change the printing destination of a file by overtyping with: 1. A system printer ID. 2. A 328x-type printer destination. To use the default destination associated with your terminal, enter an R. (Erase any other characters appearing in the field.) If there is a name conflict between a 328x-type printer and a system printer, the system printer is assumed. To force the 328x-type printer to be used, precede the name with an R. For example, if LOCAL is the name of both a system and 328x-type printer, enter R LOCAL to direct the file to the 328x-type printer.

LINES

Number of print lines in each file or N/A if the number is unavailable.

FORM (Modifiable)

Use this field to indicate the FORMAT or TYPE status of a file by entering ANS, MCC, DUMP, CHEX or VHEX. For a file directed to a system printer, this field can be used to change the output form number.

30-24 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks

CPY (Modifiable)

Use this field to change the number of copies of a file to be printed.

NOTE

CA-Roscoe-assigned file description.

If you change one or more of the modifiable fields and then decide that these changes should not be applied, you can: 1. Overtype the appropriate field(s), or 2. Press PA1 or the CLEAR key to refresh the display.

30.3.3.2 Using the Job Selection List To display the status of a job from a job selection list, enter the code S in the command field to the left of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may be selected. The following example shows how to display status information from a job selection list. Jobs: Job Status Through Job Selection List

7

FUNCTION ===> (M - MENU; F JOB NAME ===> SAMPLE FILE ===> LINE ===1 OF ==13 JOBNO JOBNAME STATUS ----- -------- ------------------__ 284 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) S_ 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) S_ 411= SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) __ 4596 SAMPLE EXECUTING 8:4=:5= __ 5477 SAMPLE EXECUTING 5:39:45 __ 7667 SAMPLE EXECUTING 3:24:35

FORWARD; B - BACK; X - EXIT) PAGE ===> LINE ===> C PTY SID - --- ---1 ANY 1 ANY 1 ANY 3 11 XAD1 3 11 XAD1 3 11 XAD1

ORIGIN --------LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL SYSTEMC LOCAL LOCAL

14.36.=8

8

HELD/ STEP/LINES CPU TIME ---------- --------

SAMPLECS MUF8= CICS

18.79 8.45 36.23

--------------------------------------------------------------------------A - ATTACH C - COPY L - LAST FILE S - STATUS AT - ALTER CN - CANCEL P - PRINT NN - NTH FILE PF1/13: MENU PF3/15: EXIT PF7/19: BACK

U

V

When you select the STATUS function, the first job selected will be ATTACHed to the STATUS JOB display. See the STATUS Job display and its description in “Jobs: STATUS JOB Display” on page 30-23.

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30-25

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks

30.3.4 Printing Job Output 30.3.4.1 Using Primary Commands There are a variety of commands you can use to request that one or more files be printed at a system or 328x-type printer. ■ Use the PRINT command to direct all or the currently attached file to a system or 328x-type printer. For example, if you enter: PRINT JOB All of the currently attached file is printed at the 328x-type printer associated with your terminal. For a detailed description of the PRINT command and how requests can be monitored and controlled, see Chapter 7, “Printing Data.” Use the ALTER command to change a file's print status and alter its system printer destination. When the job is released, the file will be printed. ■ Use the modifiable STATUS JOB display or a Job List 'A' panel to designate whether a file is to print at a system or 328x-type printer. ■ Use the CK function of the Job List Facility. The job is terminated, and a listing of the job output is produced.

30.3.4.2 Using the Job Facility You can use the Job Facility menu to print a job. Enter the code P in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate job name in the JOB/GRP NAME field. The following example shows how to print a job from the primary menu.

30-26 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks

Jobs: Print Job Through Job Facility Menu

7

8 <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+... JOB FACILITY FUNCTION

===> P

JOB/GRP NAME JOB NUMBER FILE NUMBER PAGE NUMBER LINE NUMBER

===> SAMPLE ===> ===> ===> ===>

A - ATTACH JOB AI - ATTACH INITIATORS AT - ALTER JOB

DEST/CLASS ACTIVE JOB TYPE CONTROL CHARS CONFIRM CANCEL

C - COPY JOB CN - CANCEL JOB

I L

===> ===> ===> NO ===> YES

- INFO JOB - SYSTEM LOG

(ALL,JES,STC,TSO) (Y,N) (Y,N)

OP - OPER CONTROL P - PRINT JOB X - TERMINATE

U

V

When you select the PRINT JOB function, the Print Job panel will be displayed. It will contain the name of the job which was entered on the primary menu, as shown in the following example. Jobs: Print Job Display

7

8 <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+... PRINT JOB OPTION

===> P

JOB NAME JOB NUMBER FILE NUMBER

===> SAMPLE ===> 1234 ===>

DESTINATION CLASS FIRST LINE LAST LINE FIRST COLUMN LAST COLUMN

U

===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

(P - PRINT; X - EXIT)

TAG OUTPUT TYPE TOP MARGIN BOT MARGIN PAGE LENGTH PAGE WIDTH

===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

COPIES NOTIFY SEPARATOR ALIGN SEQ NUMS

===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

(Y, (Y, (Y, (Y,

N N N N

V

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30-27

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks

Select the PRINT option and fill in all appropriate fields, which consist of the following: OPTION

requires P or X; X returns to invoking Primary Menu or Job Selection display; P indicates to issue a PRINT JOB request; Any other value redisplays the Print Job screen.

JOB NAME

The specific job name to be printed.

JOB NUMBER

The specific job number name to be printed.

FILE NUMBER

File to be printed; Must be numeric.

DESTINATION

The printer destination used to print the job file.

CLASS

Print class to be assigned to the job file.

FIRST LINE

First line of file to be printed. Must be numeric or left blank.

LAST LINE

Last line of file to be printed. Must be numeric or left blank.

FIRST COLUMN

First column of file to be printed. Must be numeric or left blank.

LAST COLUMN

Last column of file to be printed. Must be numeric or left blank.

TAG

Name to be assigned to print request. Defaults to user's CA-Roscoe ID.

OUTPUT TYPE

Specification of print format. Must be DEF, ANS, or MCC, or left blank (defaults to DEF).

TOP MARGIN

Number of blank lines to be skipped from the top of the page before printing begins. Must be numeric or left blank. (Applicable only when OUTPUT TYPE is specified DEF).

BOTTOM MARGIN

Number of blank lines to be skipped at bottom of page. Must be numeric or left blank. (Applicable only when OUTPUT TYPE is specified DEF).

PAGE LENGTH

Length of paper in number of print lines. Must be numeric or left blank. (Applicable only when OUTPUT TYPE is specified DEF).

PAGE WIDTH

Width of paper in printing columns. Must be numeric or left blank.

COPIES

Number of times to print file. Defaults to 1.

NOTIFY

Specifies whether a notification message is displayed when the request is printed. Must be YES, NO, or left blank.

SEPARATOR

Specifies whether separator pages are included. Must be YES, NO, or left blank.

ALIGN

Specifies whether a physical page alignment is forced. Must be YES, NO, or left blank.

30-28 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks

SEQ NUMS

Specifies whether sequence numbers are included when the data are printed. Must be YES, NO, or left blank.

30.3.4.3 Using the Job Selection List To print a job from a job selection list, enter the code P in the command field to the left of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may be selected. The following example shows how to print a job from a job selection list. Jobs: Print Job Through Selection List

7

FUNCTION ===> (M - MENU; F JOB NAME ===> SAMPLE FILE ===> LINE ===1 OF ==13 JOBNO JOBNAME STATUS ----- -------- ------------------__ 284 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) P_ 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) P_ 411= SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) __ 4596 SAMPLE EXECUTING 8:4=:5= __ 5477 SAMPLE EXECUTING 5:39:45 __ 7667 SAMPLE EXECUTING 3:24:35

FORWARD; B - BACK; X - EXIT) PAGE ===> LINE ===> C PTY SID - --- ---1 ANY 1 ANY 1 ANY 3 11 XAD1 3 11 XAD1 3 11 XAD1

ORIGIN --------LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL SYSTEMC LOCAL LOCAL

14.36.=8

8

HELD/ STEP/LINES CPU TIME ---------- --------

SAMPLECS MUF8= CICS

18.79 8.45 36.23

--------------------------------------------------------------------------A - ATTACH C - COPY L - LAST FILE S - STATUS AT - ALTER CN - CANCEL P - PRINT NN - NTH FILE PF1/13: MENU PF3/15: EXIT PF7/19: BACK

U

V

When you select the PRINT function, the Print Job panel will be displayed. Fill in the appropriate fields there to print the job. See the Print Job display and its description in “Jobs: Print Job Display” on page 30-27.

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30-29

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks

30.3.5 Canceling a Job 30.3.5.1 Using Primary Commands The PURGE monitor command can be used to cancel a job from the system queue. Note: Sites have the option of restricting the use of this command; check with your site system programmer for more information about using PURGE. For example, to cancel the job named SAMPLE, enter: PURGE SAMPLE If there are multiple jobs with the same name, you must specify the number of the job, as in: PURGE SAMPLE 1234

30.3.5.2 Using the Job Facility You can use the Job Facility menu to cancel a job. Enter the code CN in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate job name in the JOB/GRP NAME field. Check the value displayed in the CONFIRM CANCEL field to see whether a confirmation panel will be presented. The default, YES, will present the Cancel Job Confirmation panel from which you can confirm the job information. If you do not want to confirm job cancellations, overtype this value with NO. The following example illustrates how to cancel a job from the Job Facility menu. Jobs: Cancel Job Through Job Facility Menu

7

8 <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+... JOB FACILITY FUNCTION

===> CN

JOB/GRP NAME JOB NUMBER FILE NUMBER PAGE NUMBER LINE NUMBER

===> SAMPLE ===> ===> ===> ===>

A - ATTACH JOB AI - ATTACH INITIATORS AT - ALTER JOB

U

30-30 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

DEST/CLASS ACTIVE JOB TYPE CONTROL CHARS CONFIRM CANCEL

C - COPY JOB CN - CANCEL JOB

I L

===> ===> ===> NO ===> YES

- INFO JOB - SYSTEM LOG

(ALL,JES,STC,TSO) (Y,N) (Y,N)

OP - OPER CONTROL P - PRINT JOB X - TERMINATE

V

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks

When you select the CANCEL JOB function, and the CONFIRM CANCEL value is YES, the Cancel Job Confirmation panel will be displayed: Jobs: Confirm Job Cancel

7

8 <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7....+... CANCEL JOB CONFIRMATION CONFIRM CANCEL ===> N

(Y - YES, N - NO)

JOB INFORMATION: 1234 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H)

15

ANY LOCAL

From this screen, select Y (YES) to cancel the job listed under JOB INFORMATION. If you do not want to cancel the job, select N (NO) and you will be returned to the job menu.

30.3.5.3 Using the Job Selection List To cancel a job from a job selection list, enter the code CN in the command field to the left of the appropriate job(s). More than one job may be selected. The following example shows how to cancel a job from a job selection list. Jobs: Cancel Job Through Selection List

7

FUNCTION ===> (M - MENU; F JOB NAME ===> SAMPLE FILE ===> LINE ===1 OF ==13 JOBNO JOBNAME STATUS ----- -------- ------------------__ 284 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) CN 283 SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) CN 411= SAMPLE AWAITING PRINT (H) __ 4596 SAMPLE EXECUTING 8:4=:5= __ 5477 SAMPLE EXECUTING 5:39:45 __ 7667 SAMPLE EXECUTING 3:24:35

FORWARD; B - BACK; X - EXIT) PAGE ===> LINE ===> C PTY SID - --- ---1 ANY 1 ANY 1 ANY 3 11 XAD1 3 11 XAD1 3 11 XAD1

ORIGIN --------LOCAL LOCAL LOCAL SYSTEMC LOCAL LOCAL

14.36.=8

8

HELD/ STEP/LINES CPU TIME ---------- --------

SAMPLECS MUF8= CICS

18.79 8.45 36.23

--------------------------------------------------------------------------A - ATTACH C - COPY L - LAST FILE S - STATUS AT - ALTER CN - CANCEL P - PRINT NN - NTH FILE PF1/13: MENU PF3/15: EXIT PF7/19: BACK

U

V

When you select the CANCEL function, the Cancel Job Confirmation panel will be displayed. Select YES to cancel the job. See the confirmation display and its description in “Jobs: Confirm Job Cancel.”

Chapter 30. Jobs: Viewing Job Output 30-31

30.3 Performing Output Management Tasks

30-32 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Part V. The Library System (Browsing and Managing Local Data) Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility 31.1 Notes About the Library System . . . . . . . . . . . 31.2 Attaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.3 Using Library Facility Function Panels . . . . . . . 31.4 Using the Library Facility Selection List . . . . . . 31.4.1 Entering Function Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . 31.4.2 Refreshing a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal 32.1 Attaching a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1.2 Using the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1.3 Format of Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.1.4 Reordering the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2 Attaching a Member Directly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2.2 Using the Library Facility Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.2.4 Format of Member Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32.3 Selecting the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data . . . 33.1 Detaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2 Locating Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences . . . . . . . . 33.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String 33.2.3 Customizing the Operation . . . . . . . . . . 33.3 Positioning the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33.3.1 Positioning to Specific Lines . . . . . . . . . 33.3.2 Positioning to Named Lines . . . . . . . . . 33.4 Reattaching the Library Facility . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks 34.1 Altering Member Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.1 Using a Primary Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.1.3 Using a Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2 Copying a Member/Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.1 Using Primary Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34.2.2 Using a Function Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

31-1 31-2 31-3 31-6 31-7 31-8 31-10 32-1 32-2 32-2 32-5 32-6 32-9 32-10 32-10 32-11 32-11 32-12 32-13 33-1 33-2 33-3 33-3 33-4 33-5 33-8 33-8 33-8 33-10 34-1 34-2 34-2 34-3 34-3 34-5 34-5 34-8

34.2.3 Using a Selection List . . 34.3 Delete a Member . . . . . . . 34.3.1 Using a Primary Command 34.3.2 Using a Function Panel . 34.3.3 Using a Selection List . . 34.3.4 Delete Confirmation Panel 34.4 Inquiring About a Member . . 34.5 Printing a Library Member . . 34.5.1 Using a Primary Command 34.5.2 Using a Function Panel . 34.5.3 Using a Selection List . . 34.6 Renaming Library Members . 34.6.1 Using a Primary Command 34.6.2 Using a Function Panel . 34.6.3 Using a Selection List . .

CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34-9 34-11 34-11 34-12 34-13 34-14 34-15 34-17 34-17 34-17 34-21 34-22 34-22 34-22 34-23

Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility The CA-Roscoe library system provides a permanent storage area for data that is in an AWS. The data are stored in a library member that you create through the SAVE command. This chapter describes how you can: ■ Attach a library member or Selection List of members. ■ Browse through the attached member or Selection List. While browsing, you can locate and note the occurrences of specific character strings. You can also browse other types of attached data (like an AWS) and then return to the data you were browsing. ■ Perform a variety of library management functions which include: – Copying all or part of a library member or Selection List into an AWS. – Printing all or part of a library member or Selection List at a system or 328x-type printer. – Renaming or deleting a library member. – Changing library member attributes. You can perform all of these operations using the Library Facility or primary commands. Many of these operations can also be performed using the Selection List provided through the Library Facility. Note: See Chapter 23, “AWS: Saving and Updating a Library Member” for additional information.

Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility 31-1

31.1 Notes About the Library System

31.1 Notes About the Library System ■ When you attach a library member, the contents of that member is not modifiable. To modify it, you must first bring a copy of it into an AWS. When you have finished modifying the copy in that AWS, you must explicitly update the member to alter its contents. ■ You need not attach a member to: – Submit the contents of one or more members to the operating system for execution. – Write the content of one or more members to a data set. – Copy one or more members into an AWS. – Print one or more members. ■ When you create a library member, your CA-Roscoe prefix is associated with it. It is this prefix that guarantees your library member name is unique. For example, if you and another user each create a member named TESTJCL, the names are unique because of the addition of your unique prefixes. You do not need to specify your prefix when working with your library members. When working with members belonging to another user, you must include that person's prefix, as in: ATTACH TESTJCL ATTACH ABC.TESTJCL

: attach your own member : attach another user's member

■ CA-Roscoe provides a multi-level security system which allows: – you to assign an access attribute to your members. For example, if you assign the access attribute EXECONLY to a member containing an RPF program, other users can execute your member but cannot access it in any other way. – site management to assign you to a security group. These security groups define the type of access people have to members that you have defined as shareable. This system thus ensures the integrity of your library members from deletion or modification by unauthorized users.

31-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

31.2 Attaching the Library Facility

31.2 Attaching the Library Facility You can attach the Library Facility menu by issuing the command: ATTACH LIB LIBRARY

or

You can include a function code and library name with this command. If you include a function code and that function has a panel associated with it, you can bypass the Library Facility menu and display the function panel. For example, if you enter: LIBRARY C COBTEST the Copy Function Panel is displayed with COBTEST in the MEMBER field. If you are currently using the Library Facility, you can redisplay the menu by entering: SELECT MENU The variable information shown on the menu is determined by the format of the menu. To change the format, you can use the command: SELECT ALT [v] If you omit the number v, you will proceed sequentially through the different formats. If you specify a number, it can be: 1 2 3 4

To To To To

show show show show

the the the the

last last last last

specific member name. executed RPF program name. generic member name. prefix or key.

Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility 31-3

31.2 Attaching the Library Facility

Library: Library Facility Menu

7

> > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===79 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7 LIBRARY FACILITY FUNCTION

==>

PREFIX MEMBER SIGNON KEY FORMAL KEY SEARCH CONFIRM DELETE

==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==>

A C

- ATTACH LIBRARY D - COPY MEMBERS I

LIB ALTER

8

===> EXPLICIT

(SHR,RES,EXE,NOD)

- DELETE MEMBERS - INFO MEMBERS

U

P R X

- PRINT MEMBER - RENAME MEMBERS - TERMINATE LIB

V

The fields comprising this menu include: FUNCTION

Enter the appropriate code to perform the desired action. The codes and their related actions are shown at the bottom of the menu.

PREFIX

Enter the two- or three-character prefix associated with the individual whose members are to be involved in the operation.

MEMBER

Enter the one- to eight-character name of the member to be involved in the operation. (This name may be composed of one or more wildcard characters.)

SIGNON KEY

Enter the sign-on key associated with the individual whose members are to be involved in the operation.

FORMAL KEY

Protected field containing the formal key associated with the individual identified through the PREFIX or SIGNON KEY field.

31-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

31.2 Attaching the Library Facility

SEARCH

Enter one or more of the following codes to qualify the search operation. If omitted, all members are included in the operation. The codes are: SHR RES EXE NOD

CONFIRM DELETE

Members Members Members Members

with a shared access attribute. with a restricted access attribute. with an execute-only access attribute. that have no description.

Designate whether delete operations are to be confirmed prior to execution by specifying: YES

Operation should be confirmed. (Can be abbreviated as Y.)

NO

Operation should not be confirmed. (Can be abbreviated as N.)

The first time you use the Library Facility, this field is set to YES. The setting in effect when you sign-off is remembered and reinstated when you sign back on. LIB ALTER

Designate whether altering the DESCRIPTION, ATtRibute, or sequence number(SEQNO) fields of the Library Selection List is to be done explicitly. Specify: EXPLICIT

Changes are made on the Selection List, using the AT line command and overtyping the data to be altered.

IMPLICIT

Changes are made on the Selection List by directly overtyping the data to be altered.

Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility 31-5

31.3 Using Library Facility Function Panels

31.3 Using Library Facility Function Panels You can use the Library Facility to perform a variety of functions. Each function is identified by a specific code. The codes can be specified with the LIBRARY command or through the Library Facility menu. Code

Function

Action

A

Attach a member or Selection List.

Performed.

C

Copy a member or Selection List.

Panel displayed.

D

Delete a member.

Panel displayed.

I

Inquire about a member.

Performed.

P

Print a member or Selection List.

Panel displayed.

R

Rename a member.

Panel displayed.

X

Terminate the Library Facility.

Performed.

The field ACTION in indicates whether the function is performed directly or requires additional information. For example, the information you provide through the menu is sufficient to attach a member (function code A) but is insufficient to rename a member (function code R). When additional information is needed, a function-related panel is displayed. When such a panel is displayed, you can move from it to another panel or to the menu by entering in the first panel field: =[code.code] ■ If you enter only the equal sign (=), you are returned to the menu. ■ If you specify =X, the Data Set Facility is terminated. ■ If you specify any other code (like =C), the appropriate function-related panel is displayed. If the function-related panel is displayed while the screens are split, you can use PF keys to scroll the panel. All of the Library Facility functions are described in detail in Chapter 34, “Library: Performing Library Management Tasks.”

31-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

31.4 Using the Library Facility Selection List

31.4 Using the Library Facility Selection List You can use the Library Facility or a primary command to create and attach: ■ A list of all or selected members that you own. ■ A list of all or selected members belonging to another user. The information is displayed as a Selection List in the Execution Area of the screen. This allows you to issue primary commands in the Command Area while working with the Selection List. The first line of a Selection List contains a top marker (==TOP==). If the bottom marker (==BOTTOM==) is not displayed, the number of members in the list exceeds the screen size. You can use PF keys to scroll within the List. The information displayed in the Selection List is separated into specific fields. Some fields contain Library information and remain constant as you scroll through the Selection List (for example, the SIGNON KEY and MEM fields.) There are also fields which contain member-specific information. By default, these fields are displayed alphabetically by member name, or by the order designated by the SET LIB ORDER command. To designate a specific Selection List order, enter the field and order criteria, as in: SET LIB ORDER LINES ASC See the CA-Roscoe Command Reference Guide for more information about using the SET LIB ORDER command. The amount of information available with each Selection List exceeds the width of 80-column screens. The information is, therefore, divided into alternate display formats. To view the different formats sequentially, enter the command: SELECT ALT To view a specific format, enter the number of that format with the command, as in: SELECT ALT 2 See Chapter 32, “Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal,” for information about displaying each type of Selection List. The information includes a description of the fields comprising each list. The alternate display numbers shown with the description are for 80-column screens. Additional formats (containing variations of the information) are available at terminals supporting wider screen sizes.

Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility 31-7

31.4 Using the Library Facility Selection List

31.4.1 Entering Function Codes You can use the Selection List to perform a variety of functions. Each function is identified by a specific code. You can enter one or more codes per Selection List. As illustrated in the following figure the function codes are entered in the shaded area shown at the left of the display. If you specify the same function code multiple times, they are processed sequentially. If you specify different function codes, the codes are processed sequentially within the following function hierarchy:

| |

X D R AT P I C A E SU

Terminate Library Facility. Delete member. Rename member. Alter member attributes/description. Print a member. Inquire about member. Copy a member. Attach member. Edit a member Submit a member

The following example illustrates how you can enter multiple functions codes on a Selection List. You can further qualify any function by specifying information in the STATUS field (the second shaded area). (See Chapter 34, “Library: Performing Library Management Tasks” for information about each of the functions you can perform through a Selection List.) Library: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example

7

> > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== SIGNON KEY MEM EXCL BLOCKS M-LINES LINES SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1 MEMBER STATUS DESCRIPTION LINES ATR SEQNO A I D R

XYZ.ABLE XYZ.BEGINJCL XYZ.COBTEST1 XYZ.COBTEST2 XYZ.JUNK XYZ.MYRPF DOJCL

31-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

JCL: Link-Edit Sample COBOL Prog. RPF: Builds JCL

1 1= 193 4=3 87 519

SHR N SHR = SHR = SHR N

8

31.4 Using the Library Facility Selection List

Using the example in “Library: Selection List Function Hierarchy Example” on page 31-8, the functions are processed in the following order: 1. The member JUNK will be deleted. (A delete confirmation panel may be displayed.) 2. The member MYRPF will then be renamed using the name specified in the STATUS field (for example, DOJCL). 3. An information panel for COBTEST1 is then presented and any remaining unexecuted functions are placed in a pending state. After viewing the information, you can: ■ Resume function code execution by entering the command SELECT NEXT. The next function (for example, attach BEGINJCL) will be performed. ■ Terminate execution by entering SELECT PREV (to return to the Selection List) or SELECT MENU (to return to the Library Facility menu). In either case, any unexecuted functions are ignored. 4. Finally, the member BEGINJCL is displayed. Notes: ■ All function codes are evaluated before any one is executed. If an invalid or incomplete function is specified, the functions are placed in a pending state and a message is displayed. To resume execution, you must either: 1. Correct the invalid/incomplete function, or 2. Remove it by typing a space over. ■ If multiple function codes are specified and one of them is X, all of the other function codes are ignored. The Library Facility is immediately terminated.

Chapter 31. Library: Introducing the Library Facility 31-9

31.4 Using the Library Facility Selection List

31.4.2 Refreshing a Selection List After a function is performed, the STATUS field contains the appropriate completion message. The following example illustrates how the Selection List might appear after performing the actions noted in the previous figure. Library: Selection List Before REFRESHing

7

> > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== SIGNON KEY MEM EXCL BLOCKS M-LINES LINES SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1 MEMBER STATUS DESCRIPTION LINES ATR SEQNO XYZ.ABLE XYZ.BEGINJCL XYZ.COBTEST1 XYZ.COBTEST2 XYZ.JUNK XYZ.MYRPF

U

)ATTACH )INFO

JCL: Link-Edit Sample COBOL Prog.

)DELETE )RENAME

RPF: Build JCL

1 1= 193 4=3 87 519

SHR SHR SHR SHR SHR SHR

8

NOSEQ =73,8 ==1,6 ==1,6 NOSEQ NOSEQ

V

The more functions you perform through the same Selection List, the more completion messages will be displayed. At any point, you can redisplay the Selection List with the most current information (for example, the deleted members removed and renamed members shown with their new names). To do this, enter the command: REFRESH

31-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal This chapter describes how you can display: ■ A Library Member Selection List, or ■ A library member directly.

Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal 32-1

32.1 Attaching a Selection List

32.1 Attaching a Selection List You can use a primary command or the Library Facility menu to display a Selection List containing information about all or selected members that either belong to you or to another CA-Roscoe user.

32.1.1 Using a Primary Command You can use the ATTACH LIB command to produce a Selection List containing information about: ■ All Members: To display a list of all of your own members, enter: ATTACH LIB + To display a list of all members associated with another individual, enter: ATTACH [LIB] KEY SMITH where SMITH is the sign-on key assigned to the individual whose members are to be listed, or ATTACH [LIB] XYZ. where XYZ is the prefix assigned to the individual whose members are to be listed. (When specifying a prefix, you must include the terminating period.)

32-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

32.1 Attaching a Selection List

■ Selected Members: You can use wildcard characters to produce a qualified Selection List containing specific information about members that belong to you or another user. For example, to display a Selection List containing only those names that include the characters JCL, you would enter: ATTACH LIB QJCLQ

or

ATTACH LIB XYZ.QJCLQ

or ATTACH LIB XYZ.QJCLQ The following table shows the wildcard characters that you can specify through the primary command or the Library Facility menu. Code

Meaning and Examoles

?

Any single character. Example: Matches: RO?

*

None, one or more characters. *JCL*

+

ROE ROS ROW

AJCL JCL JCLEND XJCLX

None, one or more trailing characters. RO+

RO ROE ROSCOE

These wildcards can be used in the same search string, as in: ATTACH [LIB] S?AQJCL+ where the member names STARTJCL1 would match. Note that consecutive asterisks (**) or an asterisk and plus sign (*+) are invalid. You can further qualify the list by using: – Access attributes (like SHARED, EXECONLY and RESTRICTED) to limit the Selection List to members assigned specific access attributes. For example, to limit the List to only those members with an EXECONLY access attribute, enter: ATTACH LIB + EXECONLY or ATTACH [LIB] XYZ. EXECONLY (Site management can limit the amount of information you receive about another user's members.)

Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal 32-3

32.1 Attaching a Selection List

– NODESC to limit the display to those members that have no descriptions, as in: ATTACH LIB + NODESC or ATTACH [LIB] XYZ. NODESC – The ORDER operand to sort the display by specific criterion. You can sort a Library Selection List by fields or parts of fields (prefixes, suffixes, or parts of dates) in ascending or descending order. For example, to attach a Library Selection List and order it by member name suffixes in descending order, and by their attributes, enter: ATTACH LIB + ORDERED BY MEMBER COL 7 9 DESCENDING AND ATR ATTACH [LIB] XYZ. ORDERED BY MEM COL 7 9 DES AND ATR Finally, you can combine several qualifiers, as in: ATTACH LIB QJCLQ SHARED EXECONLY NODESC or ATTACH [LIB] XYZ.QJCLQ SHARED EXECONLY NODESC where only these members whose names contain the characters JCL are initially selected. This group is then further qualified so that only those matching members with a shared or execute-only access attribute or no description are included in the resulting Selection List. Using the LIB Operand: As illustrated in the preceding examples, LIB is required only when the selection criteria begins with a wildcard character.

32-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

or

32.1 Attaching a Selection List

32.1.2 Using the Library Facility To attach a Selection List containing all members that you or another user own, type the code A in the FUNCTION field. Then, enter the appropriate prefix or sign-on key, as illustrated in below. Library: Attaching a Selection List (All Members)

7

> > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. LIBRARY FACILITY FUNCTION

===> A

PREFIX MEMBER SIGNON KEY

===> XYZ ===> ===>

8

To create a qualified Selection List, type an A in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate prefix in the PREFIX field. Then use wildcard characters with the name typed in the MEMBER field. As illustrated in the following example, you can use the SEARCH field to further limit the members that are to be included in the List. Library: Attaching a Qualified Selection List

7

> > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===79 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. LIBRARY FACILITY FUNCTION

==>

A

PREFIX MEMBER SIGNON KEY FORMAL KEY SEARCH

==> ==> ==> ==> ==>

XYZ RO+ SHR

8

(SHR,RES,EXE,NOD)

Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal 32-5

32.1 Attaching a Selection List

32.1.3 Format of Selection List The following example illustrates the format of the Library Facility Selection List. Library: Selection List Description

7

> > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== SIGNON KEY MEM EXCL BLOCKS M-LINES LINES SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1 MEMBER STATUS DESCRIPTION LINES ATR SEQNO XYZ.ABLE XYZ.BEGINJCL XYZ.COBTEST1 XYZ.COBTEST2 XYZ.JUNK XYZ.MYRPF

JCL: Link-Edit Sample COBOL Prog. RPF: Builds JCL

1 1= 193 4=3 87 519

SHR SHR SHR SHR SHR SHR

8

NO =7 == == NO NO

U

V

You can use this Selection List to perform one or more of the following function: A AT C D I P R X *

Attach a member Alter attributes Copy a member Delete a member Display member information Print a member Rename a member Terminate Library Facility Position Selection List

Type the appropriate code(s) in the first shaded area shown in the previous figure. With Alter, Copy, Print and Rename, you must provide additional information in the STATUS field. (See the appropriate sections for details.) After performing a function, the STATUS field will indicate the result of the operation. Screens which do not contain STATUS fields are not modifiable.

32-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

32.1 Attaching a Selection List

32.1.3.1 Selecting Alternate Displays The amount of information provided through the Selection List exceeds the width of 80-column screens. The information is, therefore, divided into alternate displays. You can change the display to view different information by entering: SELECT ALT [v] where v is the number of the display to be viewed next. If you omit the number, you will proceed sequentially through all of the different displays. The ALT field in the following table contains the number of the alternate display in which each field appears on an 80-column screen. If you are using a terminal supporting a wider screen, additional displays (containing variations of the same information) are available.

32.1.3.2 Field Descriptions The first two lines in the Execution Area (following the TOP marker) remain constant as you scroll through the Selection List and show: SIGNON KEY

Sign-on key associated with the individual whose members are included in the display.

MATCH

Optional field included only when selection criteria was used to produce the List.

MEM

Number of library members included in the Selection List.

EXCL

Number of library members that site management excluded from the display.

BLOCKS

Number of library blocks used by the members included in the List.

M-LINES

Maximum number of lines the owner of these members may save in the library or N/A if the owner has no limit.

LINES

Number of lines contained within all of the members included in the display.

The remaining fields identify the individual members comprising the List, and include the information shown in the following table.

Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal 32-7

32.1 Attaching a Selection List

Field Name

Description

Alt

Attrib.

MEMBER

Name of the member matching the selection criteria

All

Asc

DESCRIPTION

Description of the member, if available

ALL

Asc

LINES

Number of lines the member contains

1

Des

ATR

Member's access attribute

1

Asc

SEQNO

Member's sequence number attribute

1

Asc

CREATED

Date the member was created

1

Des

UPDATED

Date the last member was updated

2/3

Des

ACCESS

Date the member was last accessed

3

Des

If your terminal screen displays more than 80 characters, you can issue SELECT ALT 4 to view all of the preceding information. At all terminals, you can place all of this information into an AWS by using the FULL operand of the COPY (LIB) command. An additional field is provided when you view or copy all of the library information. The field is named CRT and indicates how the member was created. It will contain: ■ ■ ■ ■

Blanks, if the member was created online. BCH, if the member was created by a batch program. MON, if the member was created by a Monitor command. POS, if the member was created by an obsolete post-processor.

32-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

32.1 Attaching a Selection List

32.1.4 Reordering the Display The fields listed in the previous table can be used to qualify the Library Selection List display. Each field has a default sorting attribute (ascending or descending). By default, a Selection List is sorted by member names, in ascending order. Use the ORDER command to change the display and order it by any one (or more) of the fields. For example, to reorder a Selection List by the number of lines in members, in descending order (default), enter: ORDER LIB LINES The 'LIB' operand is required if the Library Facility is not active. For example, to sort a displayed Selection List by year of member creation date, in ascending order, enter: ORDER CREATED COL 7 8 ASC Notice that the CREATED field is on the second alternate screen. The list will be reordered even if the CREATED field is not displayed. Use the SELECT ALT command to display the CREATED field. You can also reorder more than one field at a time. For example, to reorder a Selection List by sequence attributes and ascending line count, enter: ORDER LIB SEQNO LINES ASC Sorting is done in order of the operands specified. So, in the last example, the Selection List is reordered by sequence attributes, and then by line counts. Note: A maximum of six order criteria are permitted. You can set the default order of a Library Selection List to a specific field. Every time you attach a Library Selection List, it will be sorted by that criterion. Use the SET LIB ORDER command, as in: SET LIB ORDER LINES Any subsequent order commands will override this setting. To reset the Library Selection List display to the site default, specify: SET LIB ORDER DEFAULT

Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal 32-9

32.2 Attaching a Member Directly

32.2 Attaching a Member Directly You can use the ATTACH primary command, the Library Facility menu or the Selection List to view a library member.

32.2.1 Using a Primary Command You can attach a library member by entering the ATTACH command and the appropriate library member name, as in: ATTACH TESTJCL To browse a member that belongs to another user, you must include that user's prefix. For example, to attach the member COBPROG that belongs to the individual assigned the prefix ABC, you would enter: ATTACH ABC.COBPROG Operands of this command allow you to control the display. For example, you can: ■ Begin the display with a specific line, as in: ATTACH TESTJCL LINE 12== ■ Begin the display with the first line containing a specific string, as in: ATTACH TESTJCL /SYSOUT=/ Additional operands allow you to qualify the string. For example, to begin the display with the first line containing a word that begins with SYS, you would enter: ATTACH TESTJCL /SYS/ PREFIX All of these operands can be used together, as in: ATTACH TESTJCL /SYS/ PREFIX LINE 12== which will start at line 1200 of the member TESTJCL to search for the first word beginning with the prefix SYS.

32-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

32.2 Attaching a Member Directly

32.2.2 Using the Library Facility Menu As illustrated in the following example, to attach a member from the Library Facility menu, type an A in the FUNCTION field and the appropriate name in the MEMBER field. (If the member belongs to another individual, that person's prefix must be specified in the PREFIX field.)

7

> > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. LIBRARY FACILITY FUNCTION

===> A

PREFIX MEMBER SIGNON KEY

===> ABC ===> COBPROG ===>

8

32.2.3 Using a Selection List To attach a member through a Selection List, specify the A (for Attach) function code to the left of the member name, as illustrated below. Library: Attaching a Member Through a Selection List

7

> > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== SIGNON KEY MEM EXCL BLOCKS M-LINES LINES SMITH 352 = 971 2==== 117=1 MEMBER STATUS DESCRIPTION LINES ATR SEQNO

A

XYZ.ABLE XYZ.BEGINJCL XYZ.COBTEST1

JCL: Link-Edit Sample COBOL Prog.

8

1 SHR NOSEQ 1= SHR =73,8 193 SHR ==1,6

Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal 32-11

32.2 Attaching a Member Directly

32.2.4 Format of Member Display The following example illustrates the display format used when a library member is attached.

7

8 > > LIB(XYZ.COBTEST1) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===73 LINE =====1 > <....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.. ============================= T O P ================ =====1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. =====2 PROGRAM-ID. COBTEST. =====3 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION. =====4 CONFIGURATION SECTION. =====5 SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81. =====6 OBJECT-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81.

The System Information Line begins with LIB and is followed by the prefixed name of the currently attached library member. The right side of the System Information Line shows the number of the first line in the current display. This is to assist you in keeping track of where you are as you scroll forward and backward through the data. The attached data itself is delimited by a top (==TOP==) and bottom (==BOTTOM==) marker. You can position the display by using primary commands and/or the PF keys to which scrolling functions are assigned.

32-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

32.3 Selecting the Display

32.3 Selecting the Display When you are viewing either attached data or a Selection List, you can use the SELECT command to reposition the display between various levels of the Library Facility. You can enter: SELECT MENU

To display the Library Facility menu.

SELECT DIR

To display the Library Selection List.

SELECT mem

To display a specific library member. The name must have appeared in a previously displayed Library Selection List.

SELECT PREV

To display the previous level in the processing hierarchy.

SELECT NEXT

To perform the next function specified on the Selection List. For example, suppose you indicated on the Selection List that you wanted to attach three members. If you are now browsing one of those members, you can see the next one by entering SELECT NEXT.

When you are browsing a Selection List, you can use the SELECT command to change the display by entering: SELECT ALT

To position to the next sequential alternate display format. To position to a specific alternate format, specify a number with the command, as in: SELECT ALT 3

Chapter 32. Library: Attaching Library Data at the Terminal 32-13

32-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data This chapter describes how, while browsing the contents of a library member or Selection List, you can: ■ Detach the Library Facility. ■ Locate the specific occurrences of a string within the attached member or Selection List. ■ Position the display to a specific line, or to a line to which you have assigned a name. ■ Reattach the library member or Selection List after browsing an AWS, a data set object or job output file.

Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data 33-1

33.1 Detaching the Library Facility

33.1 Detaching the Library Facility You can explicitly detach the Library Facility by entering the command: DETACH LIB The Library Facility is also detached by entering the function code X on the menu, any function panel or the Selection List. (If you enter X on the Selection List with other function codes, those functions will be ignored.) ATTACHing another library member implicitly detaches the currently attached member. If you have assigned NOTE names to the member, those names are deleted when the member is detached. If you execute a command that causes output to the Execution Area (like ATTACHing an AWS) or if you press the CLEAR key, the Library Facility is placed in a pending state and can be reattached at any time.

33-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

33.2 Locating Data

33.2 Locating Data This section describes how you can use a variety of commands to scan a member or Selection List for all or specific occurrences of a string. While this description assumes you are locating strings that are in character format, you can also locate the hexadecimal representation of a string. See 33.2.3, “Customizing the Operation” on page 33-5 for details.

33.2.1 Locating Specific Occurrences When you initially attach a library member, you can cause the display to begin with the first line containing a specific string by including that string with the command, as in: ATTACH COBTEST1 /PROCEDURE/ In this example, the first line containing the string PROCEDURE in the member COBTEST1 will be the first displayed line. Once attached, you can use the following commands to find and display specific occurrences of a string. FIRST NEXT LAST PREV

Locate Locate Locate Locate

the the the the

first occurrence of a string. next occurrence of a string. last occurrence of a string. previous occurrence of a string.

For example, if you enter: FIRST DIVISION The first occurrence of the string DIVISION in the currently attached member will be the first line of the resulting display. To find the last occurrence of the same string, all you need enter is: LAST Once you have specified a search string, it is remembered and used with any subsequent EXCL, FIRST, INCL, LAST, NEXT or PREV command that does not include a string. By default, the entire member (for example, the full length of every line) is searched for your string. You can include column and line numbers with the command to qualify the search for a single operation. For example: NEXT 1= 3= SAMPLE examines columns 10 through 30 for the next occurrence of SAMPLE.

Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data 33-3

33.2 Locating Data

After the command executes, the defaults are reestablished. To change the column boundaries for the remainder of your session, use the SET BOUNDS command. (See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for additional information.) By including a value after the string, you can limit the search to a specific number of lines. For example, to find the last occurrence of SAMPLE within the last 200 lines of currently displayed data, you would enter: LAST SAMPLE 2==

33.2.2 Including/Excluding Lists Containing a String You can use the INCL command to display every occurrence of a particular character string within a given number of lines. For example, to find every occurrence of the string TEST-DATA in the next 100 lines of the currently displayed data, you would enter: INCL TEST-DATA 1== If you do not specify a number, every line is searched. You can also limit the search for the character string to particular columns. Note: Column boundaries specified with the command affect only the execution of that command. See Chapter 4, “Defining Column Boundaries” for information about changing boundaries for the terminal session. For example, if you want to display every line that does not contain the string TEST-DATA in columns 30 through 80, you would enter: EXCL 3= 8= TEST-DATA If the number of lines to be displayed exceeds the size of your terminal screen, press one of the PF keys to which a scrolling function is assigned. The INCL or EXCL operation will resume scanning for the previously specified string (like TEST-DATA). The direction of the scan depends on the value assigned to the PF key. (The search string is remembered for subsequent use; column number limits and line number limits apply only to the command with which they are specified.) If you determine that you want to see the data that follows a particular line, use: ■ The cursor positioning keys to move the cursor to the appropriate line and then press the ENTER key, or ■ The POINT command. For example, if an EXCL display includes line 150 and you want to display the lines following it, you would enter: POINT LINE 15= The resulting display will begin with line 150. Doing either of these actions or entering any primary command terminates the INCL/EXCL operation.

33-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

33.2 Locating Data

Note: When you create an INCL/EXCL display from a Selection List, you can enter any function code(s). If a function results in another display (that is, attaching an entry in the list), the INCL/EXCL operation is terminated.

33.2.3 Customizing the Operation This section describes how you can qualify a search operation.

33.2.3.1 Translating the Search String The current setting of the SET MODE command determines how the string specified with FIRST, NEXT, LAST, PREV, INCL or EXCL is to be treated. See Chapter 3, “Controlling Character Recognition” for additional information.

33.2.3.2 Delimiting the Search String In all of the examples used thus far, the search string has not been delimited. With these commands, you only need to delimit the string when it: ■ Includes a space (like FIRST /TEST DATA/), ■ Is a numeric (like NEXT /519/), or ■ Is the same as a keyword operand or operand abbreviation of the command (like INCL /JOB/).

Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data 33-5

33.2 Locating Data

33.2.3.3 Qualifying the Search String By default, CA-Roscoe searches for any set of characters or spaces that exactly match the specified string. To limit the search operation, you can include the qualifier operands. These operands are WORD, PREFIX, BEGIN, EMBED, END and SUFFIX For example, assume the attached member contains the line: 'THE OTHER BROTHER ATE THEIR APPLE DURING THE CONTEST' and you want to search for the string THE. Without qualification, the words THE, BROTHER and THEIR match the search string. By including a qualifier, you can designate the type of string match that is to occur, as in: THE WORD

Qualifies the string as a word; only THE matches.

THE PREFIX

Qualifies the string as beginning a word; only THEIR matches.

THE BEGIN

Qualifies the string as beginning or being a word; THE and THEIR match.

THE EMBED

Qualifies the string as contained within a word; OTHER and BROTHER match.

TEST END

Qualifies the string as ending or being a word; only CONTEST matches.

TEST SUFFIX Qualifies the string as ending a word; only CONTEST matches.

33.2.3.4 Specifying the Hexadecimal Representation of a String To designate the hexadecimal representation of a string, use the format: X'string' where the string is bound by apostrophes and contains an even number of characters, as in: FIRST X'C1' When using the primary commands FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL or EXCL, you do not need to delimit the hexadecimal string.

33-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

33.2 Locating Data

To locate a character string that could be interpreted as being in hexadecimal representation, either: ■ Use the LITERAL operand with the FIRST, LAST, NEXT, PREV, INCL or EXCL primary commands, as in: FIRST X'C1' LITERAL ■ Specify the string so that it does not conform to hex notation. This method can be used with both primary and line commands. For example, to find the character string X'C1' you might specify: /X'C1/ or /X'C1' /

33.2.3.5 Screen Positioning If a line containing (or not containing) the search string is found, it becomes the first displayed line of the resulting display. By specifying a screen positioning operand with the command, you can control how the display is positioned. The screen positioning operands are: CJUSTIFIED

The display margins are to be altered if the entire matching string does not fall within the current margin. (This is the default positioning.)

JUSTIFIED

The display margins are always to be altered so that the first character of the string begins in the left-most position of the line.

CENTERED

The display margins are to be altered to center the matching string on the line. If centering would cause an invalid left margin (for example, less than 1), the display is not altered.

LOCKED

The display margins are not to be altered even if the matching string occurs to the left or right of the current margins.

Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data 33-7

33.3 Positioning the Display

33.3 Positioning the Display This section describes how you can: ■ Position to a specific line within a library member. ■ Assign names to specific lines within a library member and then later reposition the display to begin with a named location.

33.3.1 Positioning to Specific Lines If the contents of the member or Selection List you are viewing exceeds the number of lines in your terminal screen, you can position the display by: ■ Pressing any of the scrolling PF keys. ■ Using the POINT command. For example to position the display to being with line 500 of the currently attached data, you would enter: POINT LINE 5== To position to the first or last line of the display, you would enter: POINT LINE T

or

POINT LINE B

When browsing the Selection List, entering an * (asterisk) in the first unprotected field for a specific entry repositions the display to begin with that entry.

33.3.2 Positioning to Named Lines When you are browsing a member, you can assign a one- to six-character name to the line containing the string; thus enabling you to return to that line later. For example, to assign the name LOC1 to the first displayed line, you would enter: NOTE LOC1

or

NOTE Q LOC1

or NOTE Q LOC1 The asterisk (*) is optional. If omitted or specified without qualification, it represents the first displayed line.

33-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

33.3 Positioning the Display

To assign a name to a line that is not the first displayed line, qualify the asterisk. For example, to assign the name LOC2 to the line that is five lines after the first displayed line, you would enter: NOTE Q+5 LOC2 Once you have assigned a name to a specific line, you can return to that line at any time by using the POINT command. To return to the line noted as LOC1, you would enter: POINT LOC1 If you issue the command: STATUS NOTES a list of all the names that you have assigned is displayed. If you determine that you no longer need to note a specific line, you can eliminate the NOTE name with the DROP command, as in: DROP LOC2 Any outstanding NOTE names are automatically deleted when you detach the member, attach another member or return to the menu.

Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data 33-9

33.4 Reattaching the Library Facility

33.4 Reattaching the Library Facility While you are working with a member or Selection List, you can attach an AWS, data set object or a job, browse that data and then return to your data. The following example illustrates how you can ATTACH the active AWS, browse it and then reATTACH the data you have been viewing:

7

ATTACH_

8

> > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===73 LINE ==1 > <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.... ============================== T O P ============ =====1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. =====2 PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT. =====3 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

7

ATTACH LIB )

8

> L PENDING > AWS(PRI.INVREPT) SCRL FULL COLS !!!!7 !!!72 > ...1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.... ...... ======================== T O P ================= !!!1!! IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. !!!2!! PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT. !!!3!! ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

7

> > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===73 LINE ==1 > <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+.... ============================= T O P ============= =====1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. =====2 PROGRAM-ID. INVREPT. =====3 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION.

8

The center screen above shows L PENDING. This note is provided to remind you that the Library Facility may be reattached at any time.

33-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

33.4 Reattaching the Library Facility

When you reattach the Library Facility, the display begins with the first line of the prior display. To reattach at a different location within the same data, you can: ■ Use the LINE operand of ATTACH to specify the desired line number, as in: ATTACH LIB Q LINE 5== ■ Use the POINT command to begin the display with the line assigned a NOTE name, as in: POINT LIB NAME1 ■ Use the LIB operand with the FIRST, NEXT, LAST and PREV commands to begin the display the line containing a specific string, as in: FIRST LIB /DD/ ■ Use the LIB operand with the INCL or EXCL command to begin the display with a list of lines containing (or not containing) a specific string, as in: INCL LIB /DD/

Chapter 33. Library: Browsing Attached Data 33-11

33-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks This chapter describes how you can perform any of the following functions during your terminal session: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Alter a member's access attribute, sequence number attribute or description. Copy all or part of the attached member or Selection List. Delete one or more library members. Inquire about a member. Print all or part of the attached member or Selection List. Rename one or more members.

These functions can be performed using primary commands, the Library Facility menu or the appropriate Selection List. You cannot modify the contents of a library member. To change a member's contents, you must place a copy of it in an AWS. When you have finished making your changes, you must use the UPDATE command to update the original member contents with the contents of the active AWS. For example, to renumber the contents of the member SAMPLE, you might enter: FETCH SAMPLE RENUMBER UPDATE Q

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks 34-1

34.1 Altering Member Attributes

34.1 Altering Member Attributes You can change the attributes and description of a library member through a primary command, the INFO panel or the Selection List.

34.1.1 Using a Primary Command You can use the ALTER command to change the description, sequence number attribute and/or access attribute of a library member, as in: ALTER COBTEST2 /Test COBOL Prog./ NOSEQ ALTER does not affect any attributes that are not specified with the command. The following table summarizes the values you can specify with this command. These values can also be used when using a primary command to rename a library member. DESCRIPTION

1 to 30 characters bound by a special character not found within the description itself.

SEQUENCE NUMBER ATTRIBUTE

SEQ

Include sequence number in columns 73 through 80 when the data are submitted.

SEQ COBOL

Include sequence numbers in columns 1 through 6.

SEQ s l

Include sequence numbers, starting in column s for a length of l.

NOSEQ

Do not include sequence numbers.

SHARED

Allow anyone to access and/or execute your member.

EXECONLY

Allow anyone to execute your member. (Meant for members containing RPF programs.)

ACCESS ATTRIBUTE

RESTRICTED Prevent anyone from accessing or executing your member.

34-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

34.1 Altering Member Attributes

34.1.2 Using a Function Panel You can use the Library Member Information panel to change a member's description or attributes. To do so, overtype the currently displayed values of the fields with a value listed below. ATTRIBUTE

The access attribute can be set to: SHR (for SHARED), EXE (for EXECONLY) or RES (for RESTRICTED).

SEQUENCE

The sequence number attribute can be set to: NOSEQ (to omit sequence numbers) or s,l (to include sequence numbers in the designated location), where:

DESCRIPTION

s

One to three digits indicating the starting position of the field. (Leading zeros may be omitted).

l

One digit between 1 and 8 indicating the length of the field.

The description can be one to 30 characters in length.

34.1.3 Using a Selection List You can use a Library Selection List to change a member's description or attributes. The LIB ALTER field of the Library Facility Main Menu determines how list members are to be altered. As illustrated in the following example, it will contain either EXPLICIT or IMPLICIT. EXPLICIT

Changes are made on the Selection List using the AT line command and overtyping the field to be altered.

IMPLICIT

Changes are made on the Selection List by directly overtyping.

7

> > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===79 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6....+....7 LIBRARY FACILITY FUNCTION

==>

PREFIX MEMBER SIGNON KEY FORMAL KEY SEARCH

==> ==> ==> ==> ==>

LIB ALTER

8

===> EXPLICIT

(SHR,RES,EXE,NOD)

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks 34-3

34.1 Altering Member Attributes

The following example illustrates how you can use the Selection List to change the description and attributes of a member EXPLICITly.

7

> > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== SIGNON KEY MEM EXCL BLOCKS M-LINES LINES SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1 MEMBER STATUS DESCRIPTION LINES ATR SEQNO XYZ.ABLE 2 SHR NOSEQ XYZ.BEGINJCL JCL: Link-Edit 1= SHR =73,8 XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR ==1,6 AT XYZ.COBTEST2 test cobol prog._ 4=3 SHR =

8

After typing an AT before the name of the appropriate member, tab to the DESCRIPTION, ATR or SEQNO field and overtype the current values. (You can use the values described in the table in the first subsection of 34.1, “Altering Member Attributes” on page 34-2.

34-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

34.2 Copying a Member/Selection List

34.2 Copying a Member/Selection List You can use primary commands, the Copy Function panel or a Selection List to copy all or part of a member or Selection List into an AWS.

34.2.1 Using Primary Commands You can use a variety of primary commands to copy all or portions of the currently attached data into an AWS. The following example illustrates how the COPY LIB command can be used to copy lines 1 through 200 to the top of the active AWS. Note: See Chapter 15, “AWS: Copying Data Within and Into an AWS” for additional information about these commands. Library: Copying Attached Data

7

8

COPY LIB 1 2!! T > > LIB(XYZ.COBTEST) SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===73 LINE =====1 > <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5.. ============================= T O P ================ =====1 IDENTIFICATION DIVISION. =====2 PROGRAM-ID. COBTEST. =====3 ENVIRONMENT DIVISION. =====4 CONFIGURATION SECTION. =====5 SOURCE-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81. =====6 OBJECT-COMPUTER. IBM-3=81.

If no line numbers are included, all of the attached data are copied to the designated destination within the active AWS. You must indicate the appropriate AWS destination by specifying one of the following: v T B * R

Copy at or after the line specified by v. Copy to the top of the AWS. Copy to the bottom of the AWS. Copy after the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned. Replace the contents of the AWS with the copied data.

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks 34-5

34.2 Copying a Member/Selection List

Other primary commands that you can use include: COPYS

Copies line(s) that contain a specified character string from a member or Selection List into the active or a specific AWS.

COPYX

Copies line(s) not containing the specified character string from library data into the active or a specific AWS.

XCOPY

Copies all or part of attached library data from one split screen into the active AWS of the screen containing the command.

XCOPYS and XCOPYX Copies selected lines from attached data in one split screen into the active AWS of the screen containing the command. Each of these commands allows you to limit the number of lines to be copied, as in: COPYS LIB /DATE-FIELD/ 9== 18== 1== which causes every line containing the string DATE-FIELD within lines 900 through 1800 of the currently attached data to be copied at or after line 100 in the AWS. When copying from a Selection List, you can designate whether you want the header portion of the list included with the data. (By default, the header is included.) For example, if a Selection List is displayed: COPYX LIB /JCL/ T NOHDR copies every line not containing the string JCL within the currently attached Selection List to the top of the AWS. No header information is included in the copied data.

34-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

34.2 Copying a Member/Selection List

34.2.1.1 Copying Unattached Data You can also use these same commands to copy a library member that is not currently attached into an AWS. To do so, specify the member name with the command, as in: COPY COBTEST1 ... or COPYS COBTEST1 /DATE-FIELD/ ... Other commands that you can use to bring one or more library members into the active AWS include: FETCH

Brings all or part of a library member into the active AWS, as in: FETCH INVLIST or FETCH INVLIST 5== 27== where all (or lines 500 through 2700) of the member named INVLIST are copied into the active AWS. If the active AWS contained data, that data are overlaid by the contents of the member. To bring in data from a library member owned by another individual, include the person's CA-Roscoe prefix with the member name, as in: FETCH RLM.LISTSEQS Optionally, you can renumber the data that you bring into the AWS, as in: FETCH INVLIST START 1== BY 5= where the data, after being placed in the AWS, is renumbered starting with 100 and incremented by 50.

CHAIN

Brings one or more members into the active AWS in the order specified in the command, as in: CHAIN MEM1 MEM2 MEM3

MERGE

Brings one or more members into the active AWS and merges the contents of those members by their line numbers.

A library member's access attribute determines the extent of access (like ATTACH, COPY, and so on) other CA-Roscoe users have to that member. If a member has an EXECONLY or RESTRICTED access attribute, only the owner of that member can access it. While site management has the option of changing the extent of access their users have to SHARED members, the default is that any CA-Roscoe user can access members with this attribute.

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks 34-7

34.2 Copying a Member/Selection List

34.2.2 Using a Function Panel The Copy Function panel is displayed when you specify the C function code on the Library Facility menu or with the LIBRARY command. The following example illustrates how you might use this panel to place one copy of lines 900 through 1800 of the member COBTEST1 at the top of the active AWS. Library: Copying Through the Menu

7

8 > > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... COPY LIBRARY MEMBER OPTION

===> S

PREFIX MEMBER

===> XYZ ===> COBTEST1

1ST LINE AWS TARGET LIST HEADERS

===> 9== ===> T ===> NO

LAST LINE ===> 18== AWS COPY COUNT ===> 1

M-DISPLAY MEMBER LIST

S-COPY SINGLE MEMBER

U

V

The fields comprising this panel include: OPTION

Enter the code that is appropriate for the action you want to perform. The codes are: S

Copy a single member.

M

Display a Selection List. (If only a prefix is specified, the Selection List will contain all members associated with that prefix. If the MEMBER field contains a name that includes wildcard characters, a qualified Selection List is displayed.)

PREFIX

Enter the two- or three-character prefix assigned to the individual whose member is to be copied. (Required only if the displayed prefix is inappropriate.)

MEMBER

Enter the name of the member to be copied. (Required only if the displayed member name is inappropriate.)

34-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

34.2 Copying a Member/Selection List

1ST LINE

Enter the number of the first line to be copied. If omitted, the operation begins with the first line.

LAST LINE

Enter the number of the last line to be copied. If omitted, the operation ends with the last line.

AWS TARGET

Enter the destination of the operation by specifying: v

Number of the line at or after which the data are to be copied within the active AWS.

*

After the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned.

T

Before the first line of the active AWS.

B

After the last line in the active AWS.

R

Replace the contents of the active AWS with the copied data.

Unless changed, the default is R. AWS COPY COUNT

Enter the number of copies of the attached data are to be placed in the active AWS. If omitted, the default is 1.

LIST HEADERS

Enter YES or NO to designate whether Selection List header lines are to be included in the copy operation.

34.2.3 Using a Selection List If the Selection List is produced through the Copy Function panel, the only operation you can perform is a copy. If the Selection List is not provided through the Copy Function panel, you can perform any of the functions that are valid with the Selection List. To copy members, place a C before the name of each appropriate member. Then, tab to the STATUS field and enter a destination code. (If the Selection List is produced through the Copy Function Panel and you omit a destination code, the member replaces the current contents of the active AWS.)

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks 34-9

34.2 Copying a Member/Selection List

The destination codes are: * v B R T

Copy after the line at which the AWS pointer is currently positioned. Copy at or after the line specified by v. Copy to the bottom of the active AWS. Replace the contents of the active AWS with the copied data. Copy to the top of the active AWS.

The following example illustrates how you can copy multiple library members from a Selection List. Library: Copying Through a Selection List

7

> > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== SIGNON KEY MEM EXCL BLOCKS M-LINES LINES SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1 MEMBER STATUS DESCRIPTION LINES ATR SEQNO C C C

XYZ.A XYZ.BEGINJCL B XYZ.COBTEST1 T XYZ.COBTEST2 XYZ.JUNK XYZ.MYRPF T

U

34-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

JCL: Link-Edit Sample COBOL Prog. RPF: Builds JCL

1 1= 193 4=3 87 519

SHR SHR SHR SHR SHR SHR

8

NOSEQ = = = N N

V

34.3 Delete a Member

34.3 Delete a Member You can use a primary command, the Delete Function panel (from the Library Facility menu) or the Selection List to delete a member. Notes: ■ If you delete a member and then determine that you need it, contact your site management. As long as the member has been saved on a library system backup, it can be restored. ■ When deleting a member through the Delete Function panel or the Selection List, you have the option of requesting that a Delete Confirmation panel be displayed. You can control this option using the ATTACH LIB command or the Library Facility menu. – When CONFIRM DELETE is in effect, a Delete Confirmation panel is displayed. This panel contains the name of each member you marked for deletion. You must confirm this operation before it is performed. – When CONFIRM DELETE is not in effect, the designated data members are deleted when you press the ENTER key. See 34.3.4, “Delete Confirmation Panel” on page 34-14 for additional information.

34.3.1 Using a Primary Command You can use the DELETE command to delete a member, as in: DELETE JUNK

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks 34-11

34.3 Delete a Member

34.3.2 Using a Function Panel Type the D function code on the Library Facility menu or with the LIBRARY command to display the Delete Function panel. The following example illustrates how you might use this panel to delete the member named JUNK. Library: Deleting Through the Menu

7

8 > > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... DELETE LIBRARY MEMBER OPTION

===> S

PREFIX MEMBER

===> XYZ ===> JUNK

The fields comprising this panel include: OPTION

Enter the code that is appropriate for the action you want to perform. The codes are: S

Delete the designated member.

M

Display a Selection List. (If only a prefix is specified, the Selection List will contain all members associated with that prefix. If the MEMBER field contains a name that includes wildcard characters, a qualified Selection List is displayed.)

PREFIX

Enter the two- or three-character prefix assigned to the individual who owns the member. (Required only if the displayed prefix is inappropriate.)

MEMBER

Enter the name of the member to be deleted. (Required only if the displayed name is inappropriate.)

34-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

34.3 Delete a Member

34.3.3 Using a Selection List If the Selection List is produced through the Delete Function panel, the only operation you can perform is a delete. If the Selection List is not produced through the Delete Function panel, you can perform any of the functions that are valid with that Selection List. As illustrated in the following example, you can delete one or more members by typing a D before each appropriate member name. Library: Deleting through a Selection List

7

> > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== SIGNON KEY MEM EXCL BLOCKS M-LINES LINES SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1 MEMBER STATUS DESCRIPTION LINES ATR SEQNO D D

XYZ.COBTEST1 XYZ.COBTEST2 XYZ.JUNK

Sample COBOL Prog.

8

193 SHR ==1,6 4=3 SHR ==1,6 87 SHR NOSEQ

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks 34-13

34.3 Delete a Member

34.3.4 Delete Confirmation Panel You can use the ATTACH LIB command or the Library Facility menu to designate whether delete confirmation is required. The following example illustrates the confirmation panel that might be displayed when CONFIRM DELETE is in effect and you attempt to delete one or more members through a Selection List.

7

> > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... CONFIRM ==> ENTER (Y)ES TO CONFIRM DELETE MEMBER CREATED UPDATED ACCESS DESCRIPTION COBTEST1 =6/=4/87 11/=9/88 11/=9/88 Sample COBOL Prog. JUNK 12/=1/85 =6/=6/86 =6/=6/86

8

To delete the entries, enter either YES or Y in the CONFIRM field. Entering any other value in this field terminates the operation. (You will be returned to the Delete Function panel or the previous Selection List. The STATUS field of that Selection List will contain *DENYDEL.) If you enter a primary command when a delete confirmation panel is displayed, the operation is either terminated or paused. If the command is: ■ Related to the Library Facility (for example, SELECT MENU): the operation is terminated and the action is performed. ■ Not related to the Library Facility (for example, ATTACH DSN): the operation is paused. The panel is redisplayed when the Library Facility is reattached, allowing you to complete the operation.

34-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

34.4 Inquiring About a Member

34.4 Inquiring About a Member You can obtain detailed information about a library member by issuing the INFO command, as in: INFO LIB COBTEST1 or, specifying the I function code and member name on the Library Facility menu, as in the following example.

7

> > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. LIBRARY FACILITY FUNCTION

===> I

PREFIX MEMBER

===> XYZ ===> COBTEST1

8

or, specifying the I function code on the Selection List, as in the following example. Library: Inquiring Through a Selection List

7

8 > > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== SIGNON KEY MEM EXCL BLOCKS M-LINES LINES SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1 MEMBER STATUS DESCRIPTION LINES ATR SEQNO XYZ.A 1 SHR NOSEQ XYZ.BEGINJCL JCL: Link-Edit 1= SHR =73,8 I XYZ.COBTEST1 Sample COBOL Prog. 193 SHR ==1,6 XYZ.COBTEST2 4=3 SHR ==1,6

The following example illustrates the type of information displayed.

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks 34-15

34.4 Inquiring About a Member

Library: Member Information Display

7

8 > > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. LIBRARY MEMBER INFORMATION PREFIX MEMBER

===> XYZ ===> COBTEST1

LAST ACCESS LAST UPDATE CREATION RECORD COUNT BLOCK COUNT ATTRIBUTE SEQUENCE DESCRIPTION

===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

11/=4/88 =5/29/87 =5/23/86 193 3 SHR ==1,6 Sample COBOL Prog.

U

V

The member information includes: PREFIX NAME LAST ACCESS LAST UPDATE CREATION RECORD COUNT BLOCK COUNT ATTRIBUTE SEQUENCE DESCRIPTION

Prefix assigned to the individual who owns the member. Name of the library member. Date the member was last accessed. Data the member was last updated. Date the member was created. Number of lines in the member. Number of library blocks used by the member. Member's access attribute. Member's sequence number attribute. Member's description, if available.

The last three fields are unprotected. See 34.1, “Altering Member Attributes” on page 34-2 for information about changing these fields.

34-16 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

34.5 Printing a Library Member

34.5 Printing a Library Member You can use a primary command, the Print Function panel (from the Library Facility menu) or the Selection List to print all or part of a member or Selection List at a system or 328x-type printer. When the data are scheduled for printing, a message is displayed. It contains the printing location, tag (if specified) and print request number assigned by CA-Roscoe. Once scheduled, all references to a specific print request must be by its tag or number.

34.5.1 Using a Primary Command To print all of the currently attached member or Selection List, enter: PRINT LIB All of the operands of the PRINT command can be used when printing attached data. For example, to print only lines 500 through 2500 of the currently attached data, you would enter: PRINT LIB 5== 25== While Selection Lists do not include line numbers, you can treat them as though they are numbered from 1 by 1. Note: See Chapter 7, “Printing Data” for additional information about the PRINT command and how requests can be monitored and controlled.

34.5.2 Using a Function Panel When you specify the P function code on the Library Facility menu or with the LIBRARY command, the Print Function panel is displayed. The following example illustrates how you might use this panel to print a copy of the member named MYPROG.

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks 34-17

34.5 Printing a Library Member

Library: Printing a Member

7

> > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6... PRINT LIBRARY MEMBER OPTION

===> S

PREFIX MEMBER

===> XYZ ===> MYPROG

1ST LINE TAG NAME DEST PAGE WIDTH TYPE/FORMAT 1ST COL

===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

1

LAST LINE SEPARATOR PR17 COPIES PAGE LEN DEF TOP MARGIN 1 LAST COL

M-DISPLAY MEMBER LIST

===> ===> ===> ===> ===> ===>

999999 NOTIFY YES FORCEALIGN 1 CLASS SEQ NUMBRS BOT MARGIN 32767

8

===> ===> NO ===> = ===> YES ===>

S-PRINT SINGLE MEMBER

U

V

The fields comprising this panel include: OPTION

Enter the code that is appropriate for the action you want to perform. The codes are: S

Print a single member.

M

Display a Selection List. (If only a prefix is specified, the Selection List will contain all members associated with that prefix. If the MEMBER field contains a name that includes wildcard characters, a qualified Selection List is displayed.)

PREFIX

Enter the two- or three-character prefix assigned to the individual who owns the member. (Required only if the displayed prefix is inappropriate.)

MEMBER

Enter the member name. (Required only if the displayed name is inappropriate.)

You can use the following fields to customize the print operation. 1ST LINE

Enter the number of the line at which the print operation is to begin. If omitted, the first line is assumed.

LAST LINE

Enter the number of the last line to be included in the print operation. If omitted, the end of the member/Selection List is assumed. While Selection Lists do not contain line numbers, treat them as though they are numbered from 1 by 1.

34-18 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

34.5 Printing a Library Member

NOTIFY

Designate whether you want an RPS notification message displayed when this data are printed by specifying either: YES NO

Display notification message. Do not display message.

If omitted, the site-defined value is used. Site management has the option of prohibiting the use of NOTIFY. TAG NAME

Enter the name to be assigned to the print request. The name cannot exceed eight characters, must start with an alphabetic character and be bound by apostrophes (').

SEPARATOR

Designate whether separators are required by specifying either: YES NO

Separators are required. Separators are not required.

The default is site-defined. FORCEALIGN

Designate whether physical page alignment is required by specifying either: YES

Physical page alignment is to be forced (for example, there is to be a page eject for each separator and body page).

NO

Physical page alignment is not required.

If omitted, the site-defined value is used. DEST

Enter the name of the printing location where the request is to print. Use this operand to override the current printing location for this execution.

COPIES

Enter the number of copies of the request to be printed. The maximum number is a site-defined value between 1 and 255. The default is 1 copy.

CLASS

Enter the print class to be used at the location where the request is to print. (Site management will tell you which classes are valid for 328x-type printers and which are valid for system printers.)

PAGE WIDTH

Enter the width of the paper in printing columns as a numeric value between 0 and 255. The default is site-defined.

PAGE LEN

Enter the length of the paper in number of print lines as a numeric value between 0 and 99. On printers with the hardware capability to set page length, the number must be the same length as specified to the printer. The default is site-defined.

SEQ NUMBRS

Designate whether sequence numbers are to be printed by specifying either: YES

Designates that sequence numbers are to be printed.

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks 34-19

34.5 Printing a Library Member

NO

Designates that sequence numbers are not to be printed.

If omitted, the default is YES. TYPE/FORMAT

Designate the format of the output by specifying either: DEF

(Default.) A top and bottom margin may be set.

ANS

ANSI print control characters are recognized.

MCC

Machine printer control characters are recognized.

DUMP

Format each line with offsets, hexadecimal data and EBCDIC data to the right of the line.

CHEX

Format each line with offsets and hexadecimal data to the right of the line.

VHEX

Format each line in character data with hexadecimal data shown vertically below.

TOP MARGIN v

(Recognized only with TYPE DEF.) Enter the number of blank lines to be skipped from the top of the page before printing begins. v can be 0 through 99. The default is site-defined.

BOT MARGIN v

(Recognized only with TYPE DEF.) Enter the number of blank lines to be skipped at the bottom of the page. v may be 0 through 99. The default is site-defined.

1ST COL

Number of the column at which the print operation is to start. The value must be between 1 and the maximum length of the line. If omitted, the default is 1.

LAST COL

Number of the column at which the print operation is to stop. The value must be greater than the starting column and not exceed the maximum line length. If omitted, the maximum line length is assumed. (The maximum line length of a library member is 255.)

34-20 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

34.5 Printing a Library Member

34.5.3 Using a Selection List If the Selection List is produced through the Print Function panel, you can only perform a print operation. Otherwise, you can perform any of the functions that are valid with that Selection List. To print one or more members, type a P before the name of each member. By default, the request will print at the printing location assigned for the terminal you are using. To print at a different location, tab to the STATUS field and enter the appropriate destination name. The following example illustrates how you can print multiple entries from the Selection List.

7

> > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== SIGNON KEY MEM EXCL BLOCKS M-LINES LINES SMITH 82 = 223 2==== 117=1 MEMBER STATUS DESCRIPTION LINES ATR SEQNO P P

XYZ.BEGINJCL XYZ.COBTEST1 XYZ.COBTEST2 PR99

JCL: Link-Edit Sample COBOL Prog.

8

1= SHR 193 SHR 4=3 SHR

In this example, the member BEGINJCL will print at the terminal's default printing location. The member COBTEST2 will print at the location identified as PR99.

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks 34-21

34.6 Renaming Library Members

34.6 Renaming Library Members To change the names of one or more library members, you can use a primary command, the Library Facility menu or the Selection List.

34.6.1 Using a Primary Command You can use the RENAME command to change the name of a library member. For example, to change the member name from TESTJCL to PRODJCL, you would enter: RENAME TESTJCL PRODJCL Optionally, you can also change the description or attributes of the member, as in: RENAME TESTJCL PRODJCL /Production JCL/ SHARED SEQ See 34.1, “Altering Member Attributes” on page 34-2 for additional information.

34.6.2 Using a Function Panel Function Panel If you specify an R function code on the Library Facility menu or with the LIBRARY command, the Rename Function panel is displayed. Library: Renaming Through a Function Panel

7

8 > > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+.... RENAME LIBRARY MEMBER OPTION

===> S

PREFIX NAME

===> ABC ===> TESTJCL

NEW PREFIX NEW MEMBER

===> ABC ===> PRODJCL

M

- DISPLAY MEMBER LIST

S

- RENAME SINGLE MEMBER

U

V

This example illustrates how you can use this panel to change a member name from TESTJCL to PRODJCL. The fields comprising the panel include:

34-22 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

34.6 Renaming Library Members

OPTION

Enter the code that is appropriate to perform the desired action. The codes are: S

Rename a single member.

M

Display a Selection List. (If only a prefix is specified, the Selection List will contain all members associated with that prefix. If the MEMBER field contains a name that includes wildcard characters, a qualified Selection List is displayed.)

PREFIX

Enter the two- or three-character prefix assigned to the individual who owns the member. (Required only if the displayed prefix is inappropriate.)

MEMBER

Enter the member's current name. (Required only if the displayed name is inappropriate.)

NEW PREFIX

Enter the two- or three-character prefix assigned to the individual who owns the member. (Site management may allow users to rename members belonging other users.)

NEW NAME

Enter the new member name. The name must comply with the CA-Roscoe member naming conventions and must not currently exist in your library.

34.6.3 Using a Selection List If the Selection List is produced through the Rename Function Panel, the only operation you can perform is a rename. If the Selection List is not produced through the Rename Function panel, you can perform any of the functions that are valid with the Selection List. To rename one or more members, use the R function code and type the member name in the STATUS field. (When the Selection List is redisplayed, the STATUS field will contain *RENAMED - confirming the operation performed successfully.) Library: Renaming Through a Selection List

7

8 > > LIB() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 LINE ====1 ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6.. ==================================== T O P =================== SIGNON KEY MEM EXCL BLOCKS LINES SMITH 352 = 971 5=984 MEMBER STATUS DESCRIPTION LINES ATR SEQNO

R

XYZ.A XYZ.BEGINJCL XYZ.COBTEST1 XYZ.COBTEST2 INVREPT XYZ.JUNK XYZ.MYRPF

JCL: Link-Edit Sample COBOL Prog. RPF: Builds JCL

1 1= 193 4=3 87 519

SHR SHR SHR SHR SHR SHR

N = = = N N

Chapter 34. Library: Performing Library Management Tasks 34-23

34.6 Renaming Library Members

34-24 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Part VI. Additional Facilities

|

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.1 Beginning a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.1.1 What can you do? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.2 Message Selection List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.3 Viewing a Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.3.1 Viewing a Thread Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.4 Create a Thread or Thread Entry 35.5 BulletinBoard Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.1 The Utility Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.2 Setting BulletinBoard Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.3 View News Announcements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.4 Prune a BBS Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.5 Deleting an Unwanted Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.6 Print a Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.5.7 Print a Thread . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.6 CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.6.1 Send a Message to Another CA-Roscoe User . . . . . . . . . 35.6.2 The ZMsg Mode and Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.6.3 ZMsg Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.6.4 Viewing Messages on ZMsg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.6.5 Sending a Message to a CA-Roscoe User . . . . . . . . . . . 35.6.6 Set ZMsg Message Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35.6.7 Locate Another CA-Roscoe User VIA CA-SysView Interface Chapter 36. CA-Roscoe and DB2

. . . .

35-1 35-2 35-2 35-3 35-5 35-6 35-8 35-11 35-12 35-13 35-15 35-16 35-16 35-17 35-18 35-20 35-20 35-21 35-22 35-24 35-25 35-27 35-28

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

36-1

Chapter 37. DMF - Dialog Management Facility

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System 38.1 Determining Executable Applications . . . . . . 38.2 Executing Applications Under ETSO . . . . . . 38.2.1 Allocating Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38.2.2 Querying and Freeing Files . . . . . . . . . 38.2.3 Initiating Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38.3 Executing Distributed Application . . . . . . . . 38.4 Executing TSO Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . Chapter 39. RPF - Roscoe Programming Facility

. . . .

37-1

. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

38-1 38-2 38-3 38-4 38-7 38-8 38-9 38-10

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

39-1

Chapter 40. SKETCH - CICS/IMS Panel Generator

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . .

40-1

CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System The BulletinBoard System is an online message system, established to support the interchange of technical information between CA-Roscoe users. The facilities provided with BulletinBoard System can be used by all CA-Roscoe users, and can be performed in conjunction with other CA-Roscoe activities. You can use the BulletinBoard System to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

view general news announcements that are broadcast by your site, view posted message threads and any thread entries they contain, create new threads, add entries(replys) to existing threads, send messages to other CA-Roscoe users.

The BulletinBoard System follows CUA standards. It is a mode dependent system, so you must move from one mode to another to perform each task. All tasks associated with a BulletinBoard component are PF-key functions, and are listed on the bottom of each screen.

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System 35-1

35.1 Beginning a Session

35.1 Beginning a Session To begin a BulletinBoard System session, enter:

pfx.BBSX.

where: pfx

is the prefix of the profile containing the panels and programs comprising this facility. The default is RBX.

This is the distributed RPF program that invokes the BulletinBoard System. At initial sign-on, the BBS (BulletinBoard System) News Announcement screen will be presented. After you view this screen, it will not be presented again unless you specifically request it (using PF2/14 for NEWS or through UTILITY.) If any new announcements are posted, this screen will be presented automatically at your next sign-on.

35.1.1 What can you do? After viewing the announcements, press ENTER, and you will be placed into the Message Selection List. This screen contains all existing message threads. From here, you can view any message, create a new message thread, or send another CA-Roscoe user a message. Note: Sending another CA-Roscoe user a message makes use of the CA-Roscoe SEND command. The message goes only to the specified user (or ID) and does not get posted on the BulletinBoard system. All tasks available in each mode are PF-key functions and are displayed at the bottom of each screen. To send a message or perform any function, use the corresponding PF-key. Some screens have functions which are specific to one task only. Many screens have the same PF-key options. This means that a particular PF-key number may have several different functions, changing from screen to screen, according to the mode level. If a PF-key is blank, it has no function. The following PF-keys have the same function on every screen (or are disabled): PF7/19 Backward PF8/20 Forward PF10/22 Top PF11/23 Bottom

Scrolls the display backward, toward the top of the member. Scrolls the display forward, toward the bottom of the member. Makes the base entry for the thread the first line of the screen. Displays the bottom of the message text.

And on every screen except the one that is used to create a thread title, PF3/15 Exit

35-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Returns to the previous mode level. (On the "create a thread title" screen, PF3/15 CANCEL cancels the thread that was just created.)

35.2 Message Selection List

35.2 Message Selection List The Message Selection List is the first screen you will see once you have signed on and viewed the BBS News Announcement screen.

Message Selection list

7

8 -- BBS ----------------------------------------------------------------------Thread Titles New Message Thread Entry-2 ZZB No Threads------------------ ZZD

New Message Thread Entry-1

ZZC

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------PF1 Utility 2 Ignore! 3 Exit 4 Lastread 5 Firstnew 6 Addmsg 7 Backward 8 Forward 9 Refresh 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 Zmsg

U

V

The top line, containing hyphens, is the Error/Status line. It contains the current processing RPF ID. In this case, it will be BBS, for BulletinBoard System. Any messages returned from BBS will appear on this line. The portion of the screen just below the Error/Status line contains the titles of all message threads. A thread is a series of one or more related messages. The threads, as listed here, are the initial message topics. All related responses are threaded to this message entry. Each thread can contain 999 messages. All threads have prefix codes, beginning with ZZZ, through AAA. Each new thread is given a corresponding code. This can be used as a quick reference, to associate the thread by code instead of its title. This code will be the prefix of all of the thread's entries.

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System 35-3

35.2 Message Selection List

By default, the threads that have not been viewed will be in high intensity. If you have already viewed the thread and all of its corresponding messages, the thread will be in low intensity. Note: The threads are highlighted following CA-Roscoe standard panel attribute coding. The Utility function (PF1/13) allows the changing of these thread attributes. By default, unread threads and messages are unprotected and high intensity (UH), and the threads and messages that have been read are unprotected and low (normal) intensity (UL). All of the possible tasks a user can perform from the Message Selection list are listed at the bottom of the screen as PF-key functions. The PF-keys that are specific to this screen are: PF1/13 Utility

Brings up the BulletinBoard Utility menu from which options may be set, messages and threads can be printed, the News can be viewed, or the user profile can be condensed.

PF2/14 Ignore!

Marks a selected thread in low (normal) intensity, as if it was read. If there are any new entries added, they will not be marked by high intensity. No entries will be highlighted, so the entire thread can be "ignored." If Ignore! is already active, PF2 will deactivate Ignore!

PF4/16 Lastread

Brings up the last message you read.

PF5/17 Firstnew

Brings up the first new message you have not read. (NEW denotes not yet viewed).

PF6/18 Addmsg

Adds a thread or a message to a thread, using the AddMsg panel.

PF9/21 Refresh

Refreshes the screen with any new information.

PF12/24 Zmsg

Sends another CA-Roscoe user a message, using the Zmsg panel.

Many of these functions are duplicated throughout BBS.

35-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

35.3 Viewing a Thread

35.3 Viewing a Thread To view any of the threads listed on the Message Selection list, place the cursor in the field containing the thread title and press ENTER. This is the same as using the function PF5 FIRSTNEW, if you have not previously viewed a message in that thread. This will take you to the screen containing all messages composing the thread. The Message Thread Selection List is shown below. Message Thread Selection list

7

-- BBS ----------------------------------------------------------------------New Message Thread Entry-1 New Message This will This will This will This will

Thread Entry-1 === be entry #2 =>ZZC ==2 be entry #4 =>ZZC ==4 be entry #6 =>ZZC ==6 be entry #8 =>ZZC ==8

8

Prefix: This will be This will This will This will

entry #1 be entry be entry be entry

=>ZZC ==1 #3 =>ZZC ==3 #5 =>ZZC ==5 #7 =>ZZC ==7

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------PF1 Utility 2 Ignore! 3 Exit 4 Prevnew 5 Nextnew 6 Addmsg 7 Backward 8 Forward 9 Refresh 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 Zmsg

U

V

The first line following the error/status line is the title of the thread you selected from the previous screen. The prefix of that thread is on the far right of the same line. The title is also the first thread of the list, and will have the code 000. Each subsequent entry is given a code incremented by one. This code is added to the prefix to create a member name for the thread entry. Each thread entry can be associated by its member name, and its title. This screen also has PF-key functions listed on the bottom. The PF-keys specific to this screen are: PF4/16 Prevnew

Displays the first new message that precedes the thread you are currently displaying. (NEW is the same as not yet viewed.)

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System 35-5

35.3 Viewing a Thread

PF5/17 Nextnew

Displays the next new message that follows the thread you are currently displaying. Note: If there are no new (unviewed) messages within that thread, Prevnew and Nextnew will not execute. You should receive a message on the Error/Staus line that will tell you there are "no new messages that way," (where that way will either be before the message - Prev, or following the message- Next). Use Enter to view the message.

35.3.1 Viewing a Thread Entry To view one of the listed thread entries, place your cursor on the desired entry and press ENTER. The following panel displays the text of the selected thread. A Message Thread Entry

7

-- BBS -----------------------------------------------------------------------

8

Title: This will be entry #7 =>ZZC LAST Name: ZZC==7 Date&co -----------------------------------------------------------------------------From: RO, ROSCOE.CONTROL Date: Tuesday August 6, 1991

Time: 16.2=.27

This will be message number 7

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------PF1 Utility 2 Ignore! 3 Exit 4 Prevmsg 5 Nextmsg 6 Addmsg 7 Backward 8 Forward 9 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 Zmsg

U

V

The fields of this panel are: Error/Status line

This is the line of hyphens at the top. It contains the mode BBS on the left. Any messages issued by BBS will be displayed on the right.

Title

This is the thread title that appeared on the previous screen.

35-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

35.3 Viewing a Thread

Conditional data field The field to the right of the title will contain conditional data. This data can be FIRST, LAST, or ONLY. If the thread entry you are viewing is the first, last, or only thread entry, the corresponding word will be displayed. If the entry is not one of the above items, this field will be blank. Note that on the screen above, the word LAST is in this field. This thread entry is the last entry under the thread ZZC. Name field

This field contains the member name of the thread entry you are viewing, made up of the prefix and thread code. You can associate each thread entry by name.

Date

This is the date the member was created.

Entry Text

The thread entry text follows the second line of hyphens. The text consists of: ■ the ID and key that created the message, listed in the From field, ■ the date and time the message was created, and ■ the message.

The PF-key functions specific to this screen are the same as the previous screen, except for PF4, PF5, and PF9: PF4/16 Prevmsg

Displays the thread entry that precedes the currently displayed entry.

PF5/17 Nextmsg

Continues to the next sequential message.

PF9/21

Is not used.

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System 35-7

35.4 Create a Thread or Thread Entry

35.4 Create a Thread or Thread Entry Note: Only users having Library Administration privileges may create or update threads. You can add a new thread to the Message Selection List or a new thread entry to an existing thread from any screen that has PF6/18 Addmsg. With the cursor on any thread or entry, press PF6/18. You will be placed in the Reply mode; the error/status line will have Reply in the left corner. Create a New Thread -- Insert Mode

7

-- Reply ---------------------------------------------------------------------

8

New Message Thread Entry-2 From: RO, ROSCOE.CONTROL Date: Tuesday August 6, 1991

Time: 16.==.=4

This will be a new message number 2 Insert Mode 7 lines Seq . ----+----¬----+¬---2----+----3----+----4----¬----5----+----6----+----7-¬ --- Q --- Q --- Q --- Q --- Q --- Q --- Q --- Q --- Q -----------------------------------------------------------------------------PF1 Help 2 CopyMem 3 Exit 4 Bwd (Top) 5 Fwd (Top) 6 7 Backward 8 Forward 9 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 ZMsg

U

V

As shown in the above panel, Reply is a split screen mode. The top half of the screen displays the thread or entry your cursor was on (when you press PF6/18). This part of the screen is protected. It contains: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

the the the the the

original thread or message title, CA-Roscoe ID and key the message was sent from, date the original thread or message was created, time the original thread or message was created, original thread or message text.

The bottom half of the screen is in the Insert mode, and is open for entering text. There is a sequence line number at the top of the insert area. It is much like the sequence line number in your CA-Roscoe Edit session. All of the parameters you have set for CA-Roscoe editing are propagated in the BBS Editor session (that is, tab settings and the tab character).

35-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

35.4 Create a Thread or Thread Entry

The line just above the sequence line number will display the Insert Mode, and the number of lines that are available for entering data. To the left of the insert area is the sequence number field and a one character command area. This single character field will contain asterisks when you are in the insert mode. Once you press ENTER or a PF-key, you will be in the Edit mode, and this field will contain a period that is Unprotected Low-intensity. Enter the text of the message you want to create. You can then edit the message either by typing over the existing text of the message, or by issuing line commands in the single character command area. There are two edit commands that can be used in this field: d

deletes any line it is placed next to.

i

opens the lower portion of the screen to the insert mode, just after the line on which it was entered.

Create a New Thread -- Edit Mode

7

-- Reply ---------------------------------------------------------------------

8

New Message Thread Entry-2 From: RO, ROSCOE.CONTROL Date: Tuesday August 6, 1991

Time: 16.==.=4

This will be a new message number 2

Seq ==1 ==2 ==3 ==4

. . . . .

----+----¬----+¬---2----+----3----+----4----¬----5----+----6----+----7-¬ This is the message text. It can be any message. It can be as long as you want. End of message.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------PF1 Help 2 CopyMem 3 Exit 4 Bwd (Top) 5 Fwd (Top) 6 7 Backward 8 Forward 9 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 ZMsg

U

V

After you have completed entering the text, you can select one of the commands listed at the bottom of the Reply screen. The functions specific to this screen are: PF1/13 PF2/14 PF4/16 PF5/17

Help CopyMem Bwd (Top) Fwd (Top)

Invokes the Help facility. Copies a member you specify into the message text. Scrolls the top half of the screen backward one screen. Scrolls the top half of the screen forward one screen.

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System 35-9

35.4 Create a Thread or Thread Entry

If you do not want to use any of the functions, and the thread or message text is complete, Exit from the Reply panel using PF3/15. This will take you to a screen that has only one open field. This is the thread title panel of the BBS. Enter the title of your thread or message. The title field will accept up to 30 characters. Create a Thread Title

7

8 -- BBS ----------------------------------------------------------------------Thread Prefix: ZZB - title: New Message Thread Entry-2 Message title: New Message Thread Entry-2 Your message title:

<

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------PF1 2 NewThread 3 Cancel 4 5 6 EditAgain 7 8 9 1= 11 12

U

V

There are only four functions you can perform from this screen. 1. If you created a new thread, use PF2/14 NewThread. This will add your thread to the Message Selection list, under the title you issue on this screen. 2. If you do not want to add a thread or message at this time, you can use PF3/15 Cancel, and cancel the entire message. You will return to the panel you were on before using PF6/18 Addmsg. 3. If you want to go back to the message text and edit it, use PF6/18 EditAgain. You will return to the Reply panel, and will be in Edit Mode. 4. If you want to create the thread or message that will be added to an existing thread, press ENTER. This will add your thread or message, and you will return to the panel you were at when you selected PF6/18 Addmsg.

35-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

35.5 BulletinBoard Utilities

35.5 BulletinBoard Utilities The BulletinBoard System includes a Utilities panel that provides access to basic BulletinBoard functions, such as: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

setting session specific options. redisplaying the BBS News Announcements. printing an entire thread (thread and all entries). printing a single message entry. pruning (or condensing) your profile.

Each utility is described further on the following pages.

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System 35-11

35.5 BulletinBoard Utilities

35.5.1 The Utility Screen The BulletinBoard utilities are listed in a menu format. To display this menu, press PF1/13 UTILITY from any BBS mode screen. To select a Utility, place the cursor on that utility and press ENTER. The Utility Menu

7

8 -- BBS ----------------------------------------------------- Press PF3 to exit Current message: ZZB=== - New Message Thread Entry Place the cursor on the desired utility and press ENTER. Set Options Print Thread

Show News

Prune Profile

Print Message

Note: The BBS index data are NOT refreshed after any of these functions.

U

V

The Utility display has several fields: Error/Status

As seen previously, this is the line of hyphens at the top. It will contain any messages issued by Utility.

Current message: This is the thread entry you were viewing or pointing to when you entered the Utility panel. The display will contain the member name of the message (thread prefix + code), and the message title. Utilities

The five BBS utilities: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

35-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Set Options Show News Prune Profile Print Message Print Thread

35.5 BulletinBoard Utilities

35.5.2 Setting BulletinBoard Options To set up BulletinBoard parameters that will be specific to your session, select the first Utility option: Set Options. This will place you in the BBSOpt mode. The BBSOpt panel ( shown below) contains seven BBS options. The default values are initially listed. As noted on the panel, entering a null field will restore the default values. The parameter values you set will be saved from one BulletinBoard session to the next. They will remain in effect until you change them again. BBS Options Panel

7

8 -- BBSOpt -------------------------------------------------- Press PF3 to exit Save AWS on entry (Y/N)? Y Saved AWS name prefix: BBSAWS

Panel member name prefix: ZZZZZP

Unread messages attribute: UH

Read messages attribute: UL

ROSCOE printer name: DEFAULT.

Message editor: BBM.REX.....

Note: Enter a null field to restore the default values.

U

V

The BBSOpt fields are: ■ Save AWS on entry(Y/N)? Before entering the BBS, the AWS can be saved so that you can resume processing when you exit. This is important if you do not want to lose the data in your active AWS. The default is set to 'Y', to save the AWS. ■ Saved AWS name prefix: This is a prefix you can give to the saved AWS that was saved on entry to the BBS. You can give the AWS a six-character prefix so you will know it was created by BBS. The default prefix is BBSAWS.

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System 35-13

35.5 BulletinBoard Utilities

■ Unread messages attribute: All threads and thread entries you have not read will have a high intensity setting. This allows you to easily select those entries you have not seen. The default attribute for unread messages is UH. This will make all unread messages Unprotected and Highlighted. ■ Read message attribute: All threads and thread entries that you have read will be highlighted according to this setting. This helps you to identify the messages you have already viewed. The default attribute for read messages is UL. This makes all messages you have read Unprotected and Low (normal) Intensity. Note: The attributes follow CA-Roscoe standard panel attribute coding. BBSOpts accepts the following attributes: UH UL SH SL

Unprotected, High Intensity Unprotected, Low (normal) Intensity Skip protected, High Intensity Skip protected, Low Intensity

BBS will accept the same attribute for both read and unread messages. ■ CA-Roscoe printer name: Specify the name of the printer that you want to print all requested threads and entries. The default will be set by your site.

35-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

35.5 BulletinBoard Utilities

35.5.3 View News Announcements The BBS News Announcement screen allows a site to broadcast news and information to all BulletinBoard System users. It can contain whatever data your site chooses to be relevant to BBS users. The BBS News panel is displayed to you the very first time you sign onto the BulletinBoard System. You will not be presented with the announcements again unless you specifically request it or new announcements are posted. When this information is updated, you will be presented with the BBS News screen when you sign-on BBS. There may be times when you need to refer to this information again. The Show News utility will allow you to specifically request to view the announcements. You can redisplay the BBS News Announcement panel from the Utility Option menu. The field Show News will place you in the ZAnn mode. This is the Announcement mode. The screen will contain all current BBS news and information that is posted by your site. Shown below is a sample of the information that a site can 'Broadcast.' BBS News Announcements -- Show News

7

8 -- ZAnn ---------------------------------------------------------------------more => Current BBS News ============== S T A R T O F A N N O U N C E M E N T S ============= 91/=6/27 - This BulletinBoard System System has been established to support interchange of technical information within the L1== Technical Group. You may view messages on the bulletin board, add messages to existing threads, and create new threads. ===>

You will not be presented with this 'news' again unless you request it or it changes. Now, PRESS PF3 to Exit this 'news' and enter the Bulletin Board System.

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------PF1 Help 2 3 Exit 4 5 6 7 Backward 8 Forward 9 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 ZMsg

U

V

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System 35-15

35.5 BulletinBoard Utilities

35.5.4 Prune a BBS Profile A BBS session can accumulate too much data and it may be necessary to clean up a profile. All information stored in your BBS profile will be revised to include only the last thread viewed and the date of the last News Announcement. The Utility to do this is Prune Profile. No user input is required; just select Prune Profile, and you will receive the message: PRUNING IN PROGRESS

on the Error/Status line, on the right side. After BBS has finished the Pruning function, you will remain in the initial BBS Utility menu panel. | |

Note:

Pruning deletes all but the last viewed thread entry.

35.5.5 Deleting an Unwanted Thread To delete specific unwanted threads, you must manually delete the thread numbers from the BBS library.

35-16 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

35.5 BulletinBoard Utilities

35.5.6 Print a Message To print one of the message entries listed on the BBS, select the Print Message Utility. The message entry your cursor was on when you pressed PF1/13 UTILITY will be the Current message. The Current message field must contain the member name and title of the message you want to print. If this member is incorrect, EXIT the Utility screen and select the correct message entry. The Print Message Utility will put you in DoPrint mode, and will display the screen shown in the panel below. Print a Thread Entry

7

8 -- DoPrint ------------------------------------------------------------------Destination: DEFAULT.

PRINT Tag: ZZB===..

------------------------------------------------------------------ Line 1 of 9 =================================== T O P ==================================== --------------------------------------------- New Message Thread Entry-2 From: RO, ROSCOE.CONTROL Date: Tuesday August 6, 1991

Time: 16.==.=4

This will be a new message number 2 ================================ B O T T O M =================================

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------PF1 Help 2 3 Exit 4 Print 5 6 7 Backward 8 Forward 9 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 ZMsg

U

V

The Print Message screen contains the following fields: Error/Status

As seen previously, this is the line of hyphens at the top. The mode on the left will be DoPrint. The right side of the line will display any messages issued by DoPrint.

Destination:

The destination output is sent to. If this is blank, the default set with the Set Options utility will be used.

PRINT Tag

The name that will identify the printed output.

Message text

The text of the message you want to print will be displayed in the bottom portion of this screen. The first line of the message will contain its title.

To print the message, fill in the two fields listed on the top of the screen, and press PF4/16 PRINT. You will receive a response on right side of the Error/Status line that will tell you if the print request was successful.

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System 35-17

35.5 BulletinBoard Utilities

35.5.7 Print a Thread You can print an entire thread; this includes the thread and all of its entries. To do this, invoke the last utility on the menu, Print Thread. The thread your cursor was on when you pressed PF1/13 UTILITY will be selected. Or, if you are viewing only a message entry, the thread that the entry is listed under will be selected for printing. The Print Thread Utility will put you in DoPrint mode, shown in the following panel. Print Entire Thread

7

8 -- DoPrint ------------------------------------------------------------------more => Destination: DEFAULT. PRINT Tag: ZZB..... ----------------------------------------------------------------- Line 1 of 36 =================================== T O P ==================================== Thread title: New Message Thread Entry-2 --------------------------------------------- New Message Thread Entry-2 From: RO, ROSCOE.CONTROL Date: Tuesday August 6, 1991

Time: 16.==.=4

This will be a new message number 2 -------------------------------------------- This will be entry #1 =>ZZB From: RO, ROSCOE.CONTROL Date: Tuesday August 6, 1991

Time: 16.19.36

Add this the zzc Thread -------------------------------------------- This will be entry #2 =>ZZB

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------PF1 Help 2 3 Exit 4 Print 5 6 7 Backward 8 Forward 9 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 ZMsg

U

V

The Print Thread screen contains the following fields: Error/Status

As seen previously, this is the line of hyphens at the top. The mode on the left will be DoPrint. The right side of the line will display any messages issued by DoPrint.

Destination:

The printer destination the output will be sent to. If this is blank, the default set with the Set Options utility will be used.

35-18 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

35.5 BulletinBoard Utilities

PRINT Tag

The name that will identify the printed output. The thread prefix code will be the first three characters.

<= more =>

This field will be displayed if the threads comprise more that one screen.

Thread entries

The rest of the display will contain the thread and all the thread entries comprising it. Each thread will be separated by a line of hyphens; the thread entry title will be on the right side and the thread it defines will be below.

To print the thread, fill in the two fields listed on the top of the screen, and press PF4/16 PRINT. You will receive a response on right side of the Error/Status line telling you if the print request was successful.

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System 35-19

35.6 CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities

35.6 CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities 35.6.1 Send a Message to Another CA-Roscoe User The CA-Roscoe/BulletinBoard contains a feature that allows you to send messages to other CA-Roscoe users, and still remain in your BulletinBoard session. These messages are like any other CA-Roscoe SEND messages. This is done through the ZMsg Mode. ZMsg functions include: ■ Sending and/or receiving one-line messages to and from other CA-Roscoe users. ■ Viewing all of the messages in your ZZZZZMSG member. ■ Viewing an account of all of the messages you have sent. ■ Deleting all ZZZZZMSG messages; clearing this file allows you to keep daily, weekly, etc., accounts of messages sent and received. ■ Checking to see if another CA-Roscoe user is signed on, and what command they last executed. Note: To inquire about another CA-Roscoe user requires that the CA-Roscoe/ CA-SysView interface be active.

35-20 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

35.6 CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities

35.6.2 The ZMsg Mode and Functions ZMsg is a facility that allows you to carry on a conversation with one or more CA-Roscoe users. The ZMsg panel displays the current contents of your ZZZZZMSG member in a full-screen environment. It also records any messages you send to other users and puts them in the same member as your messages. This gives you a complete record of the conversation(s) you have. Because the display is your ZZZZZMSG member, you can receive all of your CA-Roscoe console messages to this same member. To view all messages in your ZZZZZMSG member, or to send another CA-Roscoe user a message while you are in the BulletinBoard System, use the following function: PF12/24 ZMSG.

This function is listed on all screens, in all modes (except when already within the ZMsg mode), and is always PF12/24. Issuing the ZMsg command will place you in the ZMsg mode. Some other information regarding ZMsg: ■ ZMsg requires a screen which contains at least 13 lines. ■ Sending another CA-Roscoe user a message through ZMsg makes use of the CA-Roscoe SEND command. The message(s) you send does not get posted on the BulletinBoard, but goes only to the CA-Roscoe prefix or ID you specify. ■ The first time you enter ZMsg mode, you will be presented with the latest ZMsg News Announcements. After you view this screen, press ENTER to continue to your messages. This announcement screen will not be presented to you again, unless you specifically request it (using PF2/14 News). If any new ZMsg announcements are posted, this screen will be issued the next time you enter the ZMsg mode. ■ ZMsg will run in split screen mode; you may keep it active in one screen while you work in another. ■ If you have suppression set, it is possible (but not likely) that you will miss a message between the time you press PF3/15/CLEAR to exit ZMsg and the time ZMsg restores your original SEND option.

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System 35-21

35.6 CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities

35.6.3 ZMsg Function The ZMsg Mode Screen

7

-- ZMsg ------------------------------------------------------------- 11.14.44 Enter prefix: Message:

8

or key:

GetMsgs active ------------------------------------------------------ Column 1 =================================== T O P ================================== JOB NOTI: JES REQUEST =====3 SUBMITTED TO DEST ADRPMVS3 ================================ B O T T O M ===============================

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------PF1 Help 2 News 3 Exit 4 Swap 5 Delete 6 FindUser 7 Backward 8 Forward 9 SetOpts 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 Refresh

U

V

The ZMsg display shown above has several fields: Error/Status

The first line of hyphens at the top. If you request an invalid function, ZMsg will issue a highlighted error message in this field. Otherwise, the field will contain the time the screen was last updated.

Prefix/Key

Enter the 2- or 3- character CA-Roscoe prefix, or the CA-Roscoe key of the user to which you are sending a message. If you enter data in both fields, only the prefix is used. ZMsg then checks that a valid prefix or key was entered. If it is invalid, you will be notified in the Error/Status line.

<= more =>

This field and its arrows are displayed when there are more messages to be viewed, but do not fit on the screen. If '<=' is shown, press PF7/19 to scroll backward to view more messages. If '=>' is shown, press PF8/20 to scroll forward.

Message

The line on which you enter the text of the message to be sent to another CA-Roscoe user.

35-22 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

35.6 CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities

Options

This is the second line of hyphens. It has two fields: 1. on the far left: GetMsgs active and/or Suppress active 2. on the far right: COLUMN N. GetMsgs active

Indicates that the GetMsgs processing is active. The contents of ZZZZZMSG are processed to make them easier to read. If GetMsgs is not active, the message text will not be modified.

Suppress active

Indicates the Suppress (CA-Roscoe message) processing is active. This will prevent any messages you receive, while in ZMsg, from being redisplayed to you when you exit the BBS. Note: The function PF9/21 SETOPTS will allow you to set GetMsgs and Suppress on or off.

Column n

The columns to be displayed on the screen. This number will be either 1 to display columns 1 through 40, or 40 to display columns 40 through 80. The displayed columns can be changed using the SWAP function (PF9/21).

The current messages This area contains all of the messages you sent, received, and those which are in your ZZZZZMSG member. They are surrounded by the TOP and BOTTOM file markers.

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System 35-23

35.6 CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities

35.6.4 Viewing Messages on ZMsg When you invoke ZMsg, you are presented with all of the messages currently in your ZZZZZMSG member. This message display is updated every time you press ENTER or a PF-key. The time posted in the left corner of the Status/Error line will contain the time of the last screen update. If you want to begin your ZMsg message communications with a clear message display, use PF5/17 Delete. This will delete all messages contained in the display (the ZZZZZMSG member). About the messages: ■ If GetMsgs processing is not active, the contents are shown exactly as they appear in the member. The newest messages are displayed first. ■ If GetMsgs is in effect, messages are shown in chronological order, with the oldest shown first. ■ You can distinguish which messages you received from those you sent by the character notation that precedes the message, as well as the highlighting of the message. – The messages you send have a low intensity attribute setting (default) and are denoted by the following characters: *>> . These characters are directly followed by the prefix of the recipient, and then the message text. For example, if you send a message to the prefix USR, you will see the following in your ZMsg member: *>>USR : THIS IS THE MESSAGE I SENT TO USR.

If GetMsgs is not active, the date, time, and your key will be on the line directly above the message(the message will be in ZZZZZMSG format): MM/DD/YY HH:MM:SS MYKEY (*>>USR) THIS IS THE MESSAGE I SENT TO USR.

– The messages you receive are highlighted, and contain the first eight characters of the sender's CA-Roscoe key, followed by the message text (and the date and time if GetMsgs is inactive.)

35-24 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

35.6 CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities

35.6.5 Sending a Message to a CA-Roscoe User To send a one-line message to another CA-Roscoe user, fill in the ZMsg fields. Enter the CA-Roscoe prefix or the key of the user you are sending the message to. If the key or prefix does not exist, you will receive an error message on the Error/Status line. Enter the message text in the Message field. To send the message, press ENTER. The message will be sent, and your message field will be immediately updated to include this information. The following panel displays this activity. Message Sent Results

7

8 -- ZMsg ----------------------------------------------- Message sent to pfx=ro Enter prefix: RO or key: Message: send this message to myself GetMsgs active ------------------------------------------------------ Column 1 =================================== T O P ================================== JOB NOTI: JES REQUEST =====3 SUBMITTED TO DEST ADRPMVS3 ROSCOE.C: send this message to myself Q>>RO : send this message to myself ================================ B O T T O M ===============================

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------PF1 Help 2 News 3 Exit 4 Swap 5 Delete 6 FindUser 7 Backward 8 Forward 9 SetOpts 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 Refresh

U

V

You can see that the Status line on the top of the screen tells you that the message was sent, and to what prefix. Because GetMsgs is active, you see only the message and key or prefix. Notice that the new messages are added after the existing message from the Console. In this example, the user sent a message to himself, so the display contains both messages sent and received. From this ZMsg panel, you can also choose any of the PF-key functions listed on the bottom. The following functions are specific to this ZMsg screen: PF1/13 Help

Displays Help for ZMsg.

PF2/14 News

Displays the current News Announcements specific to the ZMsg mode.

PF4/16 Swap

Switches text display from column 1 to 40, and back.

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System 35-25

35.6 CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities

PF5/17 Delete

Deletes your ZZZZZMSG member.

PF6/18 FindUser

Checks if a specified CA-Roscoe user is signed on.

PF9/21 SetOpts

Invokes ZMsgOpts, to set up specific ZMsg options.

PF12/24 Refresh

Updates the display.

ENTER

Sends a message to a specified user.

CLEAR

Exits ZMsg.

35-26 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

35.6 CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities

35.6.6 Set ZMsg Message Options You can set up your ZMsg environment to support your processing needs or preferences. Use PF9/21 SETOPTS, to display the ZMsgOpts panel. ZMsg Options Panel

7

8 -- ZMsgOpts ------------------------------------------------------ PF3 to exit Suppress ROSCOE messages when exiting ZMsg? (Y/N): N GetMsgs processing active? (Y/N): Y Save AWS on entry to ZMsg for ROSCOE 5.6 and lower (Y/N)? N

U

V

The above panel shows the ZMsg options: 1. Suppress CA-Roscoe messages when exiting ZMsg? (Y/N): This controls whether you receive all of the messages that were sent to you while you were in the BBS. If this is set to 'Y', or YES, the words "Suppress active" will appear on the right side of the Options line. When Suppress is active, a CA-Roscoe SET SEND OPR command is issued. This command permits only those messages sent by the operator to be displayed at your terminal, and therefore suppresses all other messages. When you exit the BBS, you will not receive the CA-Roscoe messages you already viewed in the ZMsg member. If it is set to 'N', all CA-Roscoe messages will be redisplayed on the Response line, one at a time, after you exit the BBS. 2. GetMsgs processing active? (Y/N): This controls how the ZMsg member is displayed. When this is set to 'Y'(default), the words "GetMsgs active" will appear on the right side of the Options line. The contents of ZZZZZMSG are processed to make them easier to read. The message text will only contain the key you sent the message to or received the message from, a colon, and the message text. If GetMsgs is not active, the message text will not be modified. It will contain the time and date, and will be in the original ZZZZZMSG format. Note: When GetMsgs is active, ZMsg will be slower, especially if there are many messages.

Chapter 35. BBS - BulletinBoard System 35-27

35.6 CA-Roscoe User Dialog Capabilities

35.6.7 Locate Another CA-Roscoe User VIA CA-SysView Interface If the CA-SysView interface for CA-Roscoe is active at your site, you can check if another CA-Roscoe user is signed on. From any of the ZMsg panels, press PF6/18 FindUser. This will display the FindUser mode. Enter the CA-Roscoe prefix or key for the user. You will receive the information shown in the following panel/ Find User Information

7

8 -- FindUser -----------------------------------------------------------------Enter the prefix: djh or the key: Job name -------ROSCOE1 ROSCOE2 ROSCOE3

Status Time ------------------------TERM IO WAIT ==:==:=8.86 DSN SUBTASK ==:==:=3.31 TERM IO WAIT ==:=1:57.64

S Last command, if any - -------------------1 A L+ (COMM) 1 A D ROSCOE.+ (COMM) 1 i b (COMM)

-----------------------------------------------------------------------------PF1 Help 2 News 3 Exit 4 5 6 7 Backward 8 Forward 9 1= Top 11 Bottom 12 ZMsg

U

V

The information provided through FindUser is the same as the data you receive when you issue the following command. LOO D ROS ST Key(or PFx)=Id All other functions that can be executed from this panel have been previously described.

35-28 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 36. CA-Roscoe and DB2 CA-Roscoe supports the IBM program product DATABASE2 (DB2). This means that you can execute the DB2 Command Processor. (This is controlled by site management. See your site management to determine if this facility is available and how you can execute the DB2 Command Processor.) The option CA-Roscoe/DB2 may also be available at your site. It provides facilities that can be used by application developers and data base administrators for the creation of DB2 applications and objects. With this interface, these DB2 activities can be performed during your CA-Roscoe session with other CA-Roscoe activities. DB2: Sample Menu

7

8

ROSCOE TO DB2 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

ROSCOE USING SQL TERMINAL INPUT SOURCE LANGUAGE DECLARES CREATE APPLICATION PLAN REPLACE APPLICATION PLAN REMOVE APPLICATION PLAN ISSUE DB2 COMMANDS EXECUTE PROGRAM UNDER ETSO

DESIRED FUNCTION ===> _

REFRESH

(RUSTI) (DECLGEN) (BIND) (REBIND) (FREE) (CMNDS) (RUN)

DB2 SYSTEM ===> ____

PFK3 EXIT

U

V

As illustrated by this sample menu, you can use this facility to execute the following DB2 services: ■ Dynamic SQL Execution: SQL statements entered into the active AWS or saved in a CA-Roscoe library member can be executed and the results displayed at the terminal.

Chapter 36. CA-Roscoe and DB2 36-1

■ High-Level Language Structure Definition: COBOL, COBOL2, C or PLI language structures and SQL table declares can be created from existing DB2 table or view definitions. ■ Application Plan Services: Data Base Request Modules (DBRM) created through the DB2 pre-compiler can be bound to create an application plan. Application plans can also be replaced and removed. ■ DB2 Command Execution: Authorized DB2 commands can be executed to request the DB2 subsystem to perform an operator function. ■ User-Program Execution: User-written DB2 application programs can be executed under the CA-Roscoe/DB2 execution environment. For detailed information about using this facility, see the CA-Roscoe/DB2 User Guide.

36-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 37. DMF - Dialog Management Facility DMF (Dialog Management Facility) is an application subsystem written in the RPF language. It is designed to assist you in creating and maintaining applications that are heavily panel-oriented. When developing an application, you are presented with a series of prompt panels that allow you to: ■ Paint the panels that you want to use in the application. DMF takes the information you supply and builds a panel which it then saves as a member in your library. It places no restriction on the type of panel you can define. ■ Designate the sequence in which the panels are to be used. All you have to do is provide the name of the member containing the next panel to be displayed. DMF generates the linkage between the panels to ensure that they are displayed in their proper sequence. ■ Designate how the panel information is to be processed. When creating a panel, you can specify validation criteria for the input fields. DMF generates an RPF program to verify those fields and invokes the program when appropriate. You can preset a panel field while defining the panel or through an initialization RPF program. This flexibility means that you can include, for example, specific default values (such as account numbers) when defining the panel or writing an initialization program that provides variable values (such as a user's sign-on key). The only RPF program you need to write is the execution program that evaluates and processes the contents of the panel. Once you have associated this program with your panel, DMF ensures that it is invoked at the appropriate point during the execution of your application. Since DMF builds the panels, you only have to be concerned with formatting the information unique to each panel. DMF provides each panel with a title line, error message line and lines for displaying PF key assignments.

Chapter 37. DMF - Dialog Management Facility 37-1

DMF also provides a set of basic functions that you can assign to any of the PF keys. Once you have made the assignments, DMF includes them in every generated panel. If the terminal user presses a PF key to which you have assigned a function, DMF handles the processing. One of the PF key functions is a Help facility. To use this facility, all you need do is tell DMF which DMF Help panel to use. If the individual executing the application requests Help, DMF will display the appropriate Help panel. With these features, DMF frees you from doing the repetitive or routine portions of your panel-driven application. For additional information, see the CA-Roscoe RPF Language Guide.

37-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System ETSO (Extended Time-Sharing Option) is an application execution system that is distributed as part of CA-Roscoe. You can use it to execute online under CA-Roscoe most purchased or site-developed applications without modification.

Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System 38-1

38.1 Determining Executable Applications

38.1 Determining Executable Applications The types of applications that can be executed include: ■ Applications that provide an interactive environment of their own. For example, applications that use the Statistical Analysis System (SAS) from the SAS Institute. ■ Applications for data entry/inquiry against a data base. ■ Applications to handle site-specific tasks that extend CA-Roscoe capabilities. For example, an application might be written that uses a batch program to process data in an AWS. ■ Applications that use CLISTs and REXX execs. Both explicit (EXEC) and implicit (%) invocations are supported. ETSO can also be used to execute interactive applications. Many of the applications that currently run under TSO execute successfully under ETSO. If you are interested in executing a specific application, you should contact your site management to determine: 1. If the application is already defined to ETSO. 2. If not, what procedures should be followed to have the site evaluate the application for execution under ETSO. If you are interested in executing an application containing CLISTs or REXX execs, you should contact your site management to determine if the TSO command is supported at your site. A requirement to execute those facilities is TSO/E 2.1 or above.

38-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

38.2 Executing Applications Under ETSO

38.2 Executing Applications Under ETSO Conceptually, there is little difference between executing an application in background through CA-Roscoe or online through ETSO. In both cases, you must allocate the files used by the application and then initiate execution of that application. Frequently, sites provide RPF programs that handle file allocation and application invocation. Thus, all you need to do is execute the RPF program. The sample RPF programs shown in the following example illustrate two methods of executing the IBM utility IEBCOPY. ETSO: Application Execution Comparison

7

8

IEBCOPY1 > > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 > <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5... ...... ================================ T O P ============== ===1== <> : Execute Via ETSO ===2== ALLOCATE SYSPRINT SYSOUT=T ===3== ALLOCATE INDD DSN=SAMPLE.INPUT,DISP=SHR ===4== ALLOCATE OUTDD DSN=SAMPLE.OUTPUT,DISP=SHR ===5== ALLOCATE SYSUT3 UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2) ===6== ALLOCATE SYSUT4 UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2) ===7== ALLOCATE SYSIN DSN=SAMPLE.CONTROL,DISP=SHR ===8== CALL IEBCOPY ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) ) IEBCOPY2 > > AWS() SCRL FULL COLS ====1 ===72 > <...+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5... ...... ================================ T O P ============== ===1== <> : Execute Batch Job ===2== WRITE AWS T ===3== '//BATCHJOB JOB . . . ' ===4== '// EXEC PGM=IEBCOPY' ===5== '//SYSPRINT DD SYSOUT=T' ===6== '//INDD DD DSN=SAMPLE.INPUT,DISP=SHR' ===7== '//OUTDD DD DSN=SAMPLE.OUTPUT,DISP=SHR' ===8== '//SYSUT3 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2)' ===9== '//SYSUT4 DD UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2)' ==1=== '//SYSIN DD DSN=SAMPLE.CONTROL,DISP=SHR' ==11== ENDWRITE ==12== SUBMIT

U

V

As illustrated in the upper portion of the screen, the ALLOCATE command allocates the needed files and assigns them DD names that will be referenced by the application during execution. The CALL command is then used to identify and initiate execution of the application.

Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System 38-3

38.2 Executing Applications Under ETSO

38.2.1 Allocating Files ETSO dynamically allocates the files that you designate (through the ALLOCATE command) for use by the application. Note that the term file has a special meaning to ETSO. With ETSO, you can allocate data sets and CA-Roscoe-managed files (like an AWS, a library member, or the terminal).

38.2.1.1 Allocating an AWS You can allocate one or more AWSs. An AWS can be used as either an input or output file or it can be both. To allocate the active AWS, use the AWS keyword with the command, as in: ALLOCATE SYSIN AWS To allocate a specific AWS, use the AWS= keyword to identify the appropriate AWS, as in: ALLOCATE SYSIN AWS=SAMPLE If an AWS is defined as an input file, the application will read from that AWS until the end of the AWS is reached. If an AWS is defined as both an input and output file, the input data in that AWS is overlaid by the output data written to it when the application ends (either successfully or unsuccessfully) or the application closes the output file.

38.2.1.2 Allocating a Library Member A library member can also be used as both an input and output file. To allocate a library member, include the member name with the keyword MEM=. If the library member belongs to another user, include that user's prefix, as in: ALLOCATE SYSIN MEM=XYZ.CONTROL If a library member is designated as an input file, the contents will be read until the end of the member is reached. If you designate a library member as an output file and that member does not currently exist, the member is created when data are written to it. (If the non-existent member is defined as an input file, the application will terminate.)

38-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

38.2 Executing Applications Under ETSO

38.2.1.3 Allocating the Terminal To designate that the terminal is to be used as an input and/or output file, include an asterisk (*) with the command, as in: ALLOCATE SYSIN Q When the terminal is used as an input or output file, you should determine what escape sequence you want before executing the application. You need the escape sequence to: ■ Indicate the end of input. When the application begins executing, the keyboard is locked. The keyboard unlocks when the application requests input. To force an end-of-input condition, enter the escape sequence in response to a prompt for input. ■ Terminate an application. If the terminal is defined as an output file, the keyboard is unlocked when output exceeding a screen is written to the terminal. At that time, you can terminate the application by entering the escape sequence. While site management has the option of changing the default, it is usually two consecutive periods (..). To change the escape sequence, use the SET ESCAPE command, as in: SET ESCAPE // which changes the escape sequence to two consecutive slashes.

38.2.1.4 Allocating Data Sets Any sequential data set, PDS member or temporary data set can be designated by the ALLOCATE command. For example: ■ To designate that all read/write operations to a file are to be ignored, follow the DD name with the keyword DUMMY, as in: ALLOCATE IGNOREDD DUMMY ■ To designate an output file, include the appropriate SYSOUT information, as in: ALLOCATE SYSPRINT SYSOUT=(W,,LTRH) DEST=ABCD COPIES=2 ■ To allocate space for a data set that is to be referenced by the application, you might specify: ALLOCATE SAMPLE DSN=ROSCOE.TEST DISP=SHR VOL=STOR=2 UNIT=338= SPACE=(TRK,(2=,2=)) RECFM=FB LRECL=122 BLKSIZE=798 This example illustrates the type of information you can specify with the command. It does, however, violate the rule that a command entered from the terminal cannot exceed the width of the screen (it cannot be continued). ■ To use the attributes associated with a previously defined data set, use the LIKE= operand. If the IBM DFSMS is not installed at the site, the existing data set's DCB parameters are used. If DFSMS is installed, the attributes copied from the

Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System 38-5

38.2 Executing Applications Under ETSO

existing data set are AVGREC, KEYLEN, KEYOFF, LRECL, RECORG (or RECFM) and SPACE. ALLOCATE SAMPLE2 DSN=ROSCOE.TEST2@LIKE=ROSCOE.TEST SPACE=(TRK,(1=,5)) In this example, the SPACE= operand is used to override the space allocation in the existing data set. ■ To allocate a data set that is defined in the CA-Roscoe JCL, use the JCLDD= operand, as in: ALLOCATE MYDD JCLDD=SITEDD where SITEDD is the DD name associated with the data set. This form of allocation is useful for data sets that are frequently referenced by one or more users. ■ To concatenate data sets, list the data set object names in the appropriate order. You can concatenate a maximum of ten names. They must be bound by parentheses. ALLOCATE SITELIB DSN=(ROSCOE.TEST1, ROSCOE.TEST2)... ■ To allocate a temporary data set, omit the keywords DUMMY, SYSOUT= and DSN=, as in: ALLOCATE SYSUT3 UNIT=SYSDA,SPACE=(CYL,2)

38-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

38.2 Executing Applications Under ETSO

38.2.2 Querying and Freeing Files By default, you can allocate a maximum of 19 files during your session. (Your site management has the option of defining the maximum number of files that a user may allocate.) This includes any combination of CA-Roscoe-managed files and data sets. If, during the course of your session, you want to find out what files are allocated, you can use the command: QUERY ALLOCATE The following example illustrates the type of information that might be displayed. ETSO: Sample QUERY ALLOCATE Display

7

> > ....+....1....+....2....+....3....+....4....+....5....+....6. DDNAME TYPE DISP MEMBER DATA-SET NAME ------------ -----------------SYSIN AWS SYSIN1 LIBRARY pfx.CONTROL IGNOREDD DUMMY SYSPRINT SYSOUT CLASS=W FORM NAME=LTRH DATASET NEW ROSCOE.TEST DATASET NEW ROSCOE.TEST2 SYSUT3 DATASET NEW

8

When your application completes its execution, you should release all of the files that you allocated. You can use the FREE command to release these files. For example, to release the file with the DD name SYSIN, you would enter: FREE SYSIN To release all of the files you have allocated, enter: FREE ALL If any of your files are still allocated when your terminal session ends, they are automatically released. Also, if your application dynamically allocates any files, they are freed when your application ends.

Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System 38-7

38.2 Executing Applications Under ETSO

38.2.3 Initiating Execution To initiate execution of an application under ETSO, enter the CALL command and the application name, as in: CALL IEBCOPY You can pass information to the application through the CALL command. For example, if the application TEST expects an inventory number to be passed, you might invoke the application by entering: CALL TEST /SR2O5==/ If, after initiating execution, you decide to end the program, you can do so by pressing the Attention key. You also have the option of suspending application execution when it is prompting you for input. To do so, enter: :U in any unprotected field and press PF12. The cursor must immediately follow the command. (Note that the colon and PF key assignment are the CA-Roscoe defaults. Use the STATUS SYSTEM display to determine if your site management has changed these defaults.) When an application is suspended, an E is displayed at the right of the Response Line. If you originally initiated application execution by entering a CALL command, you can resume execution by entering: RESUME ETSO If you initiated execution through an RPF program, that program will tell you how to resume execution.

38-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

38.3 Executing Distributed Application

38.3 Executing Distributed Application One of the sample applications distributed with CA-Roscoe is named MORTGAGE. This application, written in FORTRAN, computes the rate, life, amount borrowed or monthly payment of a mortgage loan. If your site has made this application available, you can perform the following steps to execute it. 1. Allocate the necessary input and output files. MORTGAGE uses three files. To assign FT05F001 and FT06F001 to the terminal and FT07F001 to the active AWS, enter: 2. ALLOCATE FT=5F==1 Q 3. ALLOCATE FT=6F==1 Q 4. ALLOCATE FT=7F==1 AWS where: ■ FT05F001 is the DD name of the input file. ■ FT06F001 is the DD name of an output files that writes the prompts and computed results. ■ FT07F001 is the DD name of a second output file that writes the computed mortgage tables. 5. Initiate execution of the application. The CALL command initiates execution of applications defined to ETSO. Therefore, to execute MORTGAGE, enter: CALL MORTGAGE Because of the allocations, MORTGAGE writes prompts to the terminal requesting the necessary input and reads your responses from the terminal. After you have entered all of the information, MORTGAGE performs its calculations and writes the results to the terminal and the active AWS. When the applications end, you should use the FREE command to deallocate the files. If you do not, your allocated files are automatically released when you sign off CA-Roscoe. If you want to change an allocation or execute another application that uses a file with the same DD name, you must release it before reallocating it. For example, to reexecute MORTGAGE and have the output written to the terminal instead of the active AWS, you would enter: FREE FT=7==1 ALLOCATE FT=7==1 Q CALL MORTGAGE

Chapter 38. ETSO - Application Execution System 38-9

38.4 Executing TSO Commands

38.4 Executing TSO Commands An extension to ETSO has been created to allow you to easily switch between the use of TSO facilities and native CA-Roscoe facilities. You can execute CLISTs and REXX execs. These procedures are executable directly from the CA-Roscoe command line, from within each other (nesting), and from within ISPF dialogs. Both explicit (EXEC) and implicit (%) invocations are supported. Use the TSO command to execute TSO commands from within an RPF or from the CA-Roscoe command line. The TSO command can be used in place of or in conjunction with a CALL command. For example, to allocate files necessary for logging onto ISPF, enter: TSO EXEC 'TSTPRN.TSTPRN)=1.CLIST(LOGTSO)' Or, to execute the CLIST MYEXEC from your TSO CLIST library, enter: TSO %MYEXEC If the TSO command invokes a full-screen process, that process will take over the screen. If the process is a line-mode TSO command, output will be written to the execution area.

38-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 39. RPF - Roscoe Programming Facility RPF is a high-level, interactive structured programming language. It supports a full arithmetic capability, built-in functions and a variety of variables that are assigned values by RPF and the user. Its commands can be used to: ■ Converse with the terminal user by issuing line-by-line and/or full-screen displays. ■ Validate data entered by the user against specified criteria. ■ Choose among several possible courses of action based upon the data entered by the user. ■ Transfer control to another location within the same program or to other programs. Perhaps its most important feature is that RPF is designed to take full advantage of all CA-Roscoe commands and facilities. All of the commands can be incorporated without modification into RPF programs. By using CA-Roscoe commands with RPF's interactive language, error-prone and complicated tasks can be simplified so that it becomes easy to: ■ Enter, verify and edit data. ■ Create, save, access and modify library members. ■ Build, verify, submit and track jobs. ■ Retrieve, examine and, optionally, save resulting output. ■ Control utility functions and housekeeping tasks performed against OS data sets. RPF programs are stored in the CA-Roscoe library, with names that follow standard CA-Roscoe naming conventions.

Chapter 39. RPF - Roscoe Programming Facility 39-1

To execute an RPF program, enter its name in the Command Area and press the ENTER key. For example, assume the RPF program that updates a customer master file is saved as the member CUSTOMER. To execute this program, you would enter: CUSTOMER It might prompt for information by displaying a full-screen panel such as the one shown in the following example. RPF: Sample Full-Screen Panel

7

8 U P D A T E

C U S T O M E R

M A S T E R

COMPANY NAME: _

TELEPHONE:

CONTACT:

ADDRESS:

F I L E

TITLE: CONTRACT NO:

LAST ORDER DATE:

ENTER "X" IF NO MORE UPDATES:

U

V

If the RPF program you wish to execute belongs to another user, you must precede the name with that user's prefix (for example, AAA.CUSTOMER). Occasionally, an RPF program may be given a name that is also the name of a CA-Roscoe command (SAVE, for example). When this occurs, more explicit invocation of the program is required to avoid executing the CA-Roscoe command. To explicitly execute an RPF program, precede the program name with the EXEC command. For example, to execute an RPF program named SAVE, you would enter: EXEC SAVE For additional information about the RPF language and how to write RPF programs, see the CA-Roscoe RPF Language Guide. You can also use TRAINING, which is an interactive application that introduces RPF. For information about using this learning aid, enter: HELP TRAINING

39-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Chapter 40. SKETCH - CICS/IMS Panel Generator SKETCH is a menu-driven RPF application that simplifies the generation of panels used by programs running under: ■ CICS. SKETCH generates BMS (Basic Mapping Support) macros that define panels to CICS applications. ■ IMS. SKETCH generates the MFS (Message Format Services) statements that define panels to IMS applications. Using just a few prompt panels, you can use SKETCH to: ■ Design a BMS or MFS map. The input can be from: 1) your responses to SKETCH prompts, 2) an RPF panel, or 3) an existing map. ■ Specify individual fields within a map. Default values for the fields (for example, attributes and colors) are automatically supplied by SKETCH. You have the option of modifying the site-defined default values that are used in generating the macros/statements defining: 1) all maps and map fields, or 2) a particular map. ■ Generate the macros/statements used in creating the map(s). Before generating the macros, you have the option of displaying a prototype map, thus ensuring that the map you are about to generate is correct. ■ Generate the JCL to: – Assemble and link-edit the BMS macros. You can also designate whether the resulting output is to be used in an Assembler, COBOL or PL/I application program. – Create the online blocks for the MFS statements. You can designate whether the resulting output is to be placed in the production or test library. While a familiarity with BMS or IMS is helpful, it is not essential when defining the panels and then generating them to create maps. SKETCH allows you to create and maintain panels by using the WYSIWYG (What You See Is What You Get) method. For additional information, see the CA-Roscoe Extended Development Tools Guide.

Chapter 40. SKETCH - CICS/IMS Panel Generator 40-1

40-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Appendixes Appendix A. Using Typewriter Devices With CA-Roscoe A.1 Beginning a Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.2 Establishing Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.3 Signing On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.4 Ending a CA-Roscoe Session . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.5 Using a Typewriter Device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.6 Using CA-Roscoe Commands and Facilities . . . . . . A.7 Using the Data Set Facility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.8 Viewing Job Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.9 Non-Executable Commands and Facilities . . . . . . .

A-1 A-2 . A-3 . A-4 . A-6 . A-7 . A-9 A-10 A-11 A-12

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Appendix A. Using Typewriter Devices With CA-Roscoe To CA-Roscoe, a 'typewriter device' is an IBM 3767 or any device that operates in a manner similar to a Teletype terminal.

Appendix A. Using Typewriter Devices With CA-Roscoe A-1

A.1 Beginning a Session

A.1 Beginning a Session Before signing on to CA-Roscoe, you must first establish connection between your typewriter device and your site's computer.

A-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

A.2 Establishing Connection

A.2 Establishing Connection Your site management will tell you what telephone number to dial to establish connection with the computer. After dialing the number, the computer 'answers' with a high-pitched tone. Turn the terminal on. Place the hand set in the acoustic coupler (located by, or as a part of, the terminal), or put the mode on data mode, depending on the type of terminal connection. When the green terminal connection light lights up, or the terminal clicks the keyboard open, depress the RETURN key one or more times until CA-Roscoe responds with a sign-on prompt message.

Appendix A. Using Typewriter Devices With CA-Roscoe A-3

A.3 Signing On

A.3 Signing On At typewriter devices, CA-Roscoe issues a sign-on prompt like the one below: SON03 ENTER KEY FOR CA-Roscoe version - date time To sign on, type the sign-on key given to you by your site management and depress the RETURN key. If RACF protection is in effect at your site and group codes are used, the group code should be entered with the sign-on key (separated by a slash), as in: sign-on key/group code If the account has previously been assigned a password (either by you or site management), the following prompt is issued: SON04 ENTER PASSWORD After this prompt is issued, the terminal types meaningless characters in the field where the password is to be entered. This provides a mask, so that other users will not be able to see your password as you enter it.

A-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

A.3 Signing On

A new password can be entered at the same time as the current password. The two passwords must be separated by a slash, as follows: current password/new password Once you have signed on, CA-Roscoe responds in a manner identical to that found at 3270-type terminals (that is, sign-on procedures are executed, the sign-on message is displayed, and so forth.).

Appendix A. Using Typewriter Devices With CA-Roscoe A-5

A.4 Ending a CA-Roscoe Session

A.4 Ending a CA-Roscoe Session To sign off of CA-Roscoe, enter: OFF To sign off of CA-Roscoe and redisplay the sign-on prompt, enter: OFFON

A-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

A.5 Using a Typewriter Device

A.5 Using a Typewriter Device Teletype terminals operate in half-duplex mode (that is, the terminal can either send or receive data but not both at once). When CA-Roscoe is reading data from the terminal, the terminal is locked. It is unlocked when CA-Roscoe is either writing to the terminal or waiting for a response from the terminal. CA-Roscoe normally notifies you that the terminal is unlocked and ready for input by typing the prompt character, the backarrow (<-). On some terminals, the backarrow is replaced by an underscore (_). If a line sent from the terminal to CA-Roscoe cannot be received due to noise on the phone line, CA-Roscoe displays the following message: CMD27: TERMINAL I/O ERROR - DATA LOST Retype and resend the line. If such an error occurs while the terminal is executing an RPF program, the program is terminated. If the error occurs while CA-Roscoe is attempting to send data to the terminal, retry procedures are executed. In the rare case that errors are found during the retry procedures (indicating severe communication problems), CA-Roscoe signs the terminal off. Attempt to reestablish connection from another terminal. Signoff procedures may be forced by CA-Roscoe in response to any of the following conditions: ■ The operator requests CA-Roscoe to sign you off. ■ You turn the power off or hang up the phone. ■ Unrecoverable error conditions occur on the phone line, leaving the line inoperable.

Appendix A. Using Typewriter Devices With CA-Roscoe A-7

A.5 Using a Typewriter Device

When any of these conditions occur, your are signed off. Any data in an AWS is saved in your library as the member SAVAWSnn where 'nn' is a unique identifier. Teletype Terminal Keyboard: CTRL-E Keys

Depressing the CTRL and E keys in unison cancels an input line, causing CA-Roscoe to reissue a sequence number prompt.

CTRL-I Keys

Depressing the CTRL and I keys in unison simulates a hardware TAB key. This action is recognized only if tab positions have been defined through the TAB command. On most Teletype terminals, the carrier or cursor is not moved by this action.

CTRL-S Keys

Depressing the CTRL and S keys in unison simulates a RETURN key, transmitting data from the terminal to CA-Roscoe.

RETURN Key (or CR) Transmits data from the terminal to CA-Roscoe. Backslash Key

Erases the last character entered. It can also be used to erase entire words. (On some models, this function is handled by the shift-L keys.)

In addition to the above, the software BREAK feature is supported as follows: ■ To terminate output, depress the RETURN key. ■ To resume listing after a pause, depress the CTRL-S keys.

A-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

A.6 Using CA-Roscoe Commands and Facilities

A.6 Using CA-Roscoe Commands and Facilities The following commands are available only at typewriter devices: BREAK

Controls the number of lines written to the terminal before pausing. BREAK should only be used if the terminal does not have a hardware BREAK key. Output is continued upon receiving a CTRL-S. Output is terminated upon receiving a carriage return.

SCALE

Writes a Scale Line identical in function to the Scale Line displayed at 3270-type terminals.

TTY

Sets the speed characteristics for the terminal. Site management will tell you of the value associated with each terminal type and the site defaults.

WIDTH

Physically changes the width of the print line from the default value to a value between 72 and 132 characters.

Appendix A. Using Typewriter Devices With CA-Roscoe A-9

A.7

Using the Data Set Facility

A.7 Using the Data Set Facility Primary commands (such as READ DSN) that do not cause a full-screen display are supported. Commands that require interaction through a panel (for example, DSN) may not be used at a typewriter device. If a PAUSE state is entered without a DETACH command being issued, one is assumed. This means that Selections Lists and data cannot be displayed at the terminal but may be processed by commands such as COPY DSN or READ DSN. Note that the DETACH need not be an explicit DETACH DSN. This permits the data set process to be suspended over a pause and allows a future RPF program or primary command to continue to access the data/Selection List.

A-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

A.8 Viewing Job Output

A.8 Viewing Job Output Use the SET DISPLAY command to designate the length of the line to be printed (for example, SET DISPLAY 1 80 causes the first 80 characters of the line to be printed). If the device supports lines longer than 80 characters, you can set the appropriate line length (for example SET DISPLAY 1 132). (The maximum line length you can specify is 150.) If the line is longer than 132 characters, characters in excess of 132 are wrapped to the next line. Use the ATTACH JOB command to begin printing the output. After the number of lines specified by the BREAK command have printed, the carriage stops at the right side of the device. To continue listing the job, enter: ATTACH JOB *

Appendix A. Using Typewriter Devices With CA-Roscoe A-11

A.9 Non-Executable Commands and Facilities

A.9 Non-Executable Commands and Facilities The following commands are not executable at typewriter devices: ■ All line commands and SET DISPLAY NUMX. ■ INCL and EXCL. (SEARCH and OMIT may be used.) ■ SET ■ All SET-related commands used to control the 3270-type terminal display (for example, SET AWSDSPLY and SET SCROLL). The following facilities are not available at typewriter devices: ■ The split-screen facility ■ PF/PA key support ■ RPF panel facility

A-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Index Special Characters - (Reexecuting Last Command) 2-6 -INC Statement Expansion Changing 6-16 Using 28-7 ,, (Representing Last Line) 2-5 :C (To Copy Screen) Using 15-9 :E (To End Split Screens) Using 8-11 :L (To Lock Screen) Using 8-14 :P (To Print Screen) Using 7-2 :S (To Split Screen) Using 8-8 :SK (PRINT Formatting Pseudo-Command) 7-4 :TOP (PRINT Formatting Pseudo-Command) 7-4 :W (To Swap Split Screens) Using 8-11 .SK (PRINT Formatting Pseudo-Command) 7-4 .TOP (PRINT Formatting Pseudo-Command) 7-4 < (Less Than Sign) As Special Character 4-5 * (Asterisk) As Reserved Character 2-6 Deferring Command Execution 2-6 Representing Name of Last FETCHed, SAVEd, UPDATEd Member 23-5 & Change Command Delimiter 6-15 +INC Statement Expansion Changing 6-17 Using 28-6 + (Plus Sign) As Reserved Character 2-7 Redisplaying Last Executed Command 2-13, 2-14

> (Greater Than Sign) As Special Character

4-5

Numerics 3270-Type Devices DELETE Key 16-7 ERASE EOF Key Control Use Of 6-16, 16-6 Screen Components Command Area 8-3 Execution Area 8-6 System Control Area 8-3—8-5 Screen Format Change 8-12 Full/Partial 8-7 Terminal Lock 8-13, 8-14 Signing Off 10-13 Signing On 10-2—10-3

A A (Destination) Line Command 15-4 With Move 21-4 Access Attribute, Library Member Changing Default 6-17 AD (Destination/Drop) Line Command With COPY 15-5 Addmsg Function (BBS) 35-4 AJOB Command Job Execution Status 29-2 Job Facility Menu 28-9 Selection List 28-13 Job Information 29-7 ALLOCATE Command Data Sets Using 27-2, 27-3 Under ETSO 38-4—38-5

Index X-1

Allocate Function Panel Description Of 27-4 Using 27-3 Allocate SMS Function Panel Description Of 27-7 Using 27-3 Allocating Files Data Set Under ETSO 38-5 Data Sets 27-2, 27-3 Library Member 38-4 Terminal 38-5 ALTER Command AWS Attributes 13-5 Job File Attributes 30-17 Library Member Attributes 34-2, 34-3 Altering AWS Attributes 13-5 Job File Attributes Commands 30-17 Job Facility 30-18 Selection List 30-19 STATUS JOB Display 30-23—30-24 Library Member Attributes Command 34-2, 34-3 Function Panel 34-15, 34-16 Selection List 34-3, 34-4 Arithmetic symbols (syntax diagrams) xxvi ATTACH Command AWS 13-3 Controlling Pausing 6-15 Data Set Facility Catalog Selection List 25-7, 25-8, 25-9—25-12 Data Set 25-26, 25-27 GDG 25-14 LIBRARIAN Module 25-15—25-17 LIBRARIAN Selection List 25-2 Menu 24-2 PDS Member 25-15—25-17 PDS Selection List 25-18, 25-19 Volume Selection List 25-28 Job Output 30-2—30-6 Library Facility Member 32-10, 32-11 Menu 31-3—31-5 Selection List 32-2 VTOC Selection List 25-33—25-34 Attributes Job Output File Change Using Command 30-17 Change Using Job Menu 30-18 Change Using Selection List 30-19 Change Using STATUS JOB Display 30-23—30-24

X-2 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Attributes (continued) Job Output File (continued) Displaying 30-23—30-24 Library Member Changing Default Access 6-17 Automatic Indentation Controlling 6-15 Using 18-15 Line Insertion Controlling 6-15 Using 18-9 Signoff Controlling 6-15 Site Defaults 6-12 Terminal Lock Controlling 6-17 Site Defaults 6-12 AWS Adding String To Line At Beginning 14-2 At End 14-2 Between Specific Columns 14-2 Attaching 13-3 Bringing Data Into 13-4 Creating 13-6, 13-7 Deleting Contents Using Line Commands 16-4 Using Primary Commands (By Line Number) 16-2 Using Primary Commands (Lines Containing String) 16-3 Detaching 13-8 Discarding Change Attribute 13-5 Display/Change Attributes 17-5 Explicit 13-9 Display/Change Attributes 17-1—17-6 Editing Data Changed Line Indicator (Controlling) 6-16 Controlling Column Boundaries 4-1—4-5 Editing Data (Character Strings) Tracking Changes 14-8—14-10 Using Line Commands 14-7 Using Primary Command 14-6, 14-7 Editing Data (Characters) Using Line Commands 14-5 Using Primary Command 14-4 Entering Data Controlling Number of Inserted Lines 6-15 From Command Area 18-14 Using a Mask 18-11—18-12

AWS (continued) Entering Data (continued) Using Automatic Line Insertion 18-9 Using I and IB Line Commands 18-8 Using PF Key 18-13 Using Primary Commands 18-2—18-7 Using TE Line Command 18-10 With Automatic Indentation 18-15 Fill Character, Trailing 6-16 introduction 13-1 Keyword on System Information Line 8-3 Locate/Display Data All Occurrences (Modifiable Display) 20-6—20-9 All Occurrences (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-7, 20-8 By Occurrence, Line Commands 20-5 By Occurrence, Primary Command 20-3 Contents in HEX 5-7, 5-8 Customizing Display 20-10 Non-Matching Occurrence (Modifiable Display) 20-6 Non-Matching Occurrence (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-8 Positioning Display By Pointer Position 13-10 Using Line Commands 13-12 Using Primary Command 13-11 Print Contents of 7-2 Reattaching 13-13 Recovery Change Attribute 13-5 Display/Change Attributes 17-5 Set Attributes 13-6 Renaming 13-5 Renumber Contents of Any Time 22-1—22-3 Reorder Contents 14-3 Save Contents of 23-2 Selecting 13-14 AWS Attributes Change 13-5 Display/Change 17-1—17-6 Establish 13-6, 13-7 AWS Display Display Format 5-7, 5-8 Display/Change 17-1—17-6 Sequence Number Display 5-6

B B (Destination) Line Command 15-4 With Move 21-4 BASIC Mode Character Translation/Recognition 3-3 BB (Destination) Line Command 15-4 With Move 21-4 BBD (Destination/Drop) Line Command With COPY 15-5 BBS Overview 35-1, 35-2 BBSOpt Mode 35-13 BBSSAV 35-13 BD (Destination/Drop) Line Command With COPY 15-5 Boundaries See Column Boundaries BOUNDS Line Command 4-5 BulletinBoard System Addmsg Function 35-8, 35-9 Create Message Threads 35-8, 35-9 Create Thread Entries 35-8, 35-9 deleting unwanted thread 35-16 Edit Mode 35-9, 35-10 Error/Status Line 35-3 GetMsgs Processing 35-23 Locate CA-Roscoe Users 35-28 Message Display Description 35-24 Message Selection List 35-3 News Announcements 35-2 Overview 35-1 Print Message Thread 35-18, 35-19 Thread Entry 35-17 Prune Profile 35-16 Reply/Insert Mode 35-8, 35-9 Send Messages 9-5 Sending Messages to CA-Roscoe Users Description 35-20 Using ZMsg 35-25—35-27 Session parameters, Set 35-13 Set Defaults Options (Utility) 35-13 Printer 35-14 Read Message Attribute 35-14 Unread Message Attribute 35-14 Signing On 35-2 Suppress Message Processing 35-23 Utility (PF1/13) 35-11—35-19 View News Announcements 35-15

Index X-3

BulletinBoard System (continued) Viewing Message Thread 35-5 Viewing Thread Entries 35-6, 35-7 ZMsg Function (PF12/24) 35-21—35-27 ZMsg Mode 9-5

C C Line Command 15-3 CA-Librarian -INC Statement Expansion Controlling 6-16 Attaching Module 25-15 Attaching Selection List 25-2 Using EXPORT Command 27-60 CA-Panvalet EXPORT Command Using 27-60 CA-Roscoe Controlling Info Messages 6-16 Documentation, User 12-2 HELP Facility 12-3—12-5 Online Tutorial 12-6 Sign On From CA-Roscoe 10-4, 10-5 From CICS 10-6 From TSO 10-7 From VTAM 10-3 Sign-on Screen 10-2—10-3 CA-SysView Interface (BBS) 35-28 CALL Command 38-8 Cancel Function (BBS) 35-10 Cancel Job Using Job Facility 30-30 Using Selection List 30-31 Capitalize Text Initial Cap Using Line Commands 19-6 Using Primary Command 19-5 Lowercase All Using Line Commands 19-5 Using Primary Command 19-5 Printing 7-3 Uppercase All Using Line Commands 19-5 Using Primary Command 19-5 CATALOG Command 27-11, 27-12 Catalog Selection List Attaching 25-7, 25-8 Description Of 25-9—25-12 Detaching 26-2

X-4 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Catalog Selection List (continued) Function Codes List Of 25-9—25-12 Reattaching 26-10, 26-11 Search for String All Occurrences 26-4 By Occurrence 26-3 Non-Matching Occurrences 26-4 Selecting Different Level 25-38 CB Line Command 15-4 CC Line Command 15-4 CDSN Command 27-62 Center Text Using Line Commands 19-3, 19-4 Using Primary Command 19-2 CHAIN Command 34-7 Character Set Description Of 2-5 Display/Change Using STATUS AWS 17-5 Language Changing 6-15 Defining 3-2 Reserved Characters 2-5, 2-6 Translation Mode Changing 6-16 Defining 3-3 Character Translation Display/Change 17-5 Character, Replace Using Line Command 14-5 Using Primary Command 14-4 CICS Signing On Via 10-6 COB Command 28-3 COBOL Syntax Checker 28-3 COLS Field on System Information Line 8-6 Column Boundaries Display/Change 6-2, 6-3 Using STATUS AWS 17-3 Session Change Using BOUNDS Line Command 4-5 Using SET BOUNDS 4-4 Using STATUS AWS 4-3 Using STATUS DISPLAY 4-3 Temporary Change 4-2 Comma repeat symbol, use in xxix Command Area Change Size of 6-15 Description 8-3

Command Area (continued) Use To Enter AWS Data 18-14 Commands Correcting Invalid/Incomplete 2-10 Defaults, Site-defined 6-12, 6-13 Deferring Command Execution 2-6 Delimiter Changing 6-15 Using 2-2 Evaluation Hierarchy 2-9 Execution Hierarchy 2-9 Redisplaying Executed In Command Area 2-13, 2-14 In Execution Area 2-13 Reexecuting 2-6 Types Of 2-2, 2-3 COMPRESS Command 27-21 Compress PDS 27-21 COPY Command From Data Set Facility 27-13 Into AWS From AWS 15-8—15-10 From Job Output 30-20 From Library Facility 34-5, 34-6 From Screen 15-8—15-10 Specific Information 15-8—15-10 Within AWS 15-2, 15-3 Copy Function Panel Data Set Facility Descripiton 27-16 Displaying 27-16 Library Facility Description 34-8, 34-9 Displaying 34-8, 34-9 Copying Data Between Screens All or Range 15-12, 15-13 Based on String 15-13, 15-14 Into AWS All or Range 15-8—15-10 Based on String 15-10, 15-11 From AWS 15-8—15-10 From Data Set Facility (Commands) 27-13 From Data Set Facility (Function Panel) 27-16 From Data Set Facility (Selection List) 27-20 From Job Output 30-20 From Screen 15-8—15-10 Using :C 15-9 Using Commands 34-5, 34-6 Using Function Panel 34-8, 34-9 Using Selection List 34-9, 34-10

Copying Data (continued) Within AWS Description 15-2, 15-3 Using Line Commands 15-3, 15-4 Using Repeat Line Command 15-7 CopyMem Function 35-9 COPYS Command From Data Set Facility 27-13 From Library Facility 34-6 Into AWS From AWS 15-8—15-10 From Screen 15-8—15-10 COPYX Command From Data Set Facility 27-13 From Library Facility 34-6 Into AWS From AWS 15-8—15-10 From Screen 15-8—15-10 Create AWS 13-6, 13-7 CREATE Command 13-6 CSR (SCRL Field Value) 8-5 CT Line Command 15-4 Cursor Positioning After Command Execution Changing 6-15 After Lines Inserted Changing 6-15

D D Line Command 16-4 DASD Space, Release Unused 27-52 Data Set Display Display Format 5-7, 5-8 Sequence Number Display 5-6 Data Set Facility Attaching Catalog Selection List 25-7, 25-8, 25-9—25-12 Data Set 25-26, 25-27 GDG 25-14 LIBRARIAN Module 25-15—25-17 LIBRARIAN Selection List 25-2—25-6 Menu 24-2, 24-3 PDS Member 25-15—25-17 PDS Selection List 25-18, 25-19 Volume Selection List 25-28 VTOC Selection List 25-33—25-34 Cataloging 27-11, 27-12 Define GDG Function Panel 27-25

Index X-5

Data Set Facility (continued) Defining Alias 27-22 Detaching 26-2 Function Panels 24-10 Inquiring About Data Set (Selection List) 27-36 Volume 27-40 Menu Description 24-3—24-7 Printing 27-44 Releasing Space 27-52 Renaming 27-54 Search for String All Occurrences 26-4 By Occurrence 26-3 Non-Matching Occurrences 26-4 Selecting Display 25-38 Selection Lists Function Code Hierarchy 24-13 Overview 24-12 Refreshing 24-15 Uncataloging 27-58 Data Sets Allocating Command 27-2, 27-3 Attaching 25-26, 25-27 Cataloging 27-11, 27-12 COMPRESS Message Control Changing 6-16 Compressing PDS Description 27-21 Copying Using Command 27-13 Using Function Panel 27-16 Using Selection List 27-20 Define Alias Using Command 27-22 Using Function Panel 27-23 Define GDG Using Command 27-25 Using Function Panel 27-25 Deleting Using Command 27-28, 27-29 Using Function Panel 27-29 Using Selection List 27-33 Display Contents in HEX 5-7, 5-8 DSCB Empty Control 6-16 Editing 27-61 Function Panel 27-4 Inquiring About 27-36 Migration Recall Control 6-16 Printing Using Command 27-44

X-6 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Data Sets (continued) Printing (continued) Using Function Command 27-46 Using Selection List 27-51 Releasing Space 27-52 Renaming Using Command 27-53 Using Function Panel 27-54 Using Selection List 27-57 Searching For String Lines Limit, Changing 6-16 Lines Limit, Site Default 6-13 Uncataloging 27-58 Writing To Controlling Directory Updates 6-17 Description 27-59, 27-60 Using EDSN 27-61 Using EXPORT 27-59 Date Format Changing 6-15 Display Current 6-14 Site Defined 6-13 DB Line Command 16-4 DB2 and CA-Roscoe 36-1 DD Line Command 16-4 Default values (syntax diagrams) xxix DEFINE ALIAS Command 27-23 DEFINE GDG Command 27-25 Defining Alias Function Panel Description 27-23 Displaying 27-22 Using 27-22 GDG Function Panel Description 27-25 Displaying 27-25 DELETE Command AWS Contents 16-2 Data Set Object 27-28, 27-29 Library Member 34-11 Delete Confirmation Panel Data Set Facility 27-33 Library Facility Description Of 34-14 Detaching 34-14 Delete Function Panel Data Set Facility 27-29 Library Facility 27-29 DELETE Hardware Key 16-7 DELETES Command 16-3

DELETEX Command 16-3 Deleting AWS Contents Using ERASE EOF Key (Controlling Extent) 6-16 Using Line Commands 16-4 Using Primary Commands (By Line Number) 16-2 Using Primary Commands (Lines Containing String) 16-3 Data Set/Member/Module Using Command 27-28, 27-29 Using Function Panel 27-29 Using Selection List 27-33 Library Member Function Panel 34-12 Selection List 34-13 Using Command 34-11 Print Request 7-13 Deleting thread entries 35-16 Delimiter Command 6-15 PF/PA Keys 6-17 String 2-8 Delimiters syntax diagrams, use in xxvii DETACH Command Job Output 30-7 Library Facility 33-2 Detaching AWS 13-8 Data Set Facility 26-2 Job Output Using Commands 30-7 Using Job Facility 30-7 Library Facility 33-2 Dialog Management Facility (DMF) Description Of 37-1 Discarding AWS Display/Change Attributes 17-5 Explicitly 13-9 DISPLAY Command Job Execution Status 29-2 Number of Jobs in Class 29-6 Status of Initiators 29-5 Status of Jobs in Class 29-4 Display Format Display Data in HEX 5-7, 5-8 Display Information About 6-2, 6-3 Sequence Numbers Display Margins 5-6

Display Margins Display/Change Description 6-2, 6-3 Using SET DISPLAY 5-5 Using STATUS AWS 17-4 Using STATUS DISPLAY 5-4 Temporary Change 5-3, 5-4 Display Mode Display/Change Using STATUS AWS 17-4 Displaying Data in HEX 5-7, 5-8 DMF, Description Of 37-1 Documentation, Description of User 12-2 DoPrint Mode (BBS) 35-17—35-19 DROP Command With Data Set, Member, Module 26-9 DS Line Command 16-5 DSB Line Command 16-5 DSN Keyword on System Information Line 8-4 DST Line Command 16-5 DT Line Command 16-4 DU Line Command 16-5 DX Line Command 16-5 DXB Line Command 16-5 DXT Line Command 16-5

E E Line Command 14-7 EB Line Command 14-7 Edit Messages (BBS) 35-9, 35-10 EditAgain Function (BBS) 35-10 Editing Data BulletinBoard System Messages 35-9, 35-10 Changing Indicator Option 6-16 Character Using Line Commands 14-5, 14-7 Using Primary Command 14-4, 14-6, 14-7 Track Changes 14-8—14-10 EDSN Command 27-61 EE Line Command 14-7 Entering Data In AWS From Command Area 18-14 Using a Mask 18-11—18-12 Using Automatic Line Insertion 18-9 Using Line Commands I and IB 18-8 TE 18-10 Using PF Key 18-13 Using Primary Commands INPUT Command 18-2—18-5

Index X-7

Entering Data In AWS (continued) Using Primary Commands (continued) INPUT TEXTENTR Command 18-6, 18-7 With Automatic Indentation 18-15 ERASE EOF Key Controlling Extent of Deletion 6-16 Using to Delete (AWS Data) 16-6 ET Line Command 14-7 ETSO Allocating Data Sets 38-5 Files 38-4—38-5 Terminal 38-5 Applications Executing 38-3 Change Escape Sequence 6-16 Determining Executable Applications 38-2 Executing Applications 38-3, 38-8 TSO Procedures 38-10 Freeing Files 38-7 Overview 38-1 Querying Files 38-7 Release Allocated Files 38-7 Resume Application Execution 38-8 Suspend Application Execution 38-8 EXCL Command AWS 20-6, 20-7 Job Output 30-9 Library Facility 33-4 EXCL Line Command 20-8, 20-9 Execution Area 8-6 Exit Function (BBS) 35-2 EXPLICIT LIB ALTER Operand 34-3, 34-4 EXPORT Command 27-59, 27-60 Extended Time-Sharing Option See ETSO

F FETCH Command 34-7 Fill Character AWS 6-16 Display/Change 17-4 FILL Command 14-2 FindUser Function (BBS) 35-28 FIRST Command AWS 20-3 Job Output Locate String 30-8 Position Within 30-12

X-8 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

FIRST Command (continued) Library Facility 33-3, 33-4 FIRST Line Command 20-5 Firstnew Function (BBS) 35-4, 35-5 Forced Signoff 3270-Type Devices STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15 Formatting Data Using Automatic Indentation 6-15 Using Line Commands 19-11, 19-12 Using Primary Command 19-10, 19-11 Using TAB Facility 18-16, 18-17 FRAM (SCRL Field Value) 8-4 FREE Command 38-7 FULL (SCRL Field Value) 8-4

G Generation Data Group (GDG) See Data Set Facility GetMsgs Processing (BBS) 35-23 GROUP CODE Field on Sign-on Screen

10-3

H HALF (SCRL Field Value) 8-4 HELP Command 12-3—12-5 HELP Facility 12-3—12-5 Hex Locate String In 20-11, 20-12 Hexadecimal Display Setting 5-7, 5-8 Hierarchy Command Evaluation 2-9 HLP Keyword on System Information Line

I I Line Command 18-8 IB Line Command 18-8 Ignore! Function (BBS) 35-4 IM Line Command 18-11 IMPLICIT LIB ALTER Operand 34-3, 34-4 INCL Command AWS 20-6, 20-7 Job Output 30-9 Library Facility 33-4 INCL Line Command 20-8, 20-9

8-4

Initial Cap Text Using Line Commands 19-6 Using Primary Command 19-5 INPUT Command Entering Data 18-3—18-5 Using Power Typing 18-6, 18-7 Insert Data In AWS From Command Area 18-14 Using a Mask 18-11—18-12 Using Automatic Line Insertion 18-9 Using Line Commands I and IB 18-8 TE 18-10 Using PF Key 18-13 Using Primary Commands INPUT Command 18-2—18-5 INPUT TEXTENTR Command 18-6, 18-7 With Automatic Indentation 18-15 Internal Pointer Positioning AWS 13-10

J JCK Command 28-2, 28-3 JCL Syntax Checker 28-2, 28-3 JES Printers Change Location For Request 7-10 For Session 7-10 Displaying Locations 7-11 Print At 7-2 JOB Keyword on System Information Line Job Facility Alter Job Display Description 30-18 Using 30-18 Cancel Job 30-30 Copy Job Display Description 30-21 Using 30-20 Detaching Job 30-7 Displaying Menu 28-9 Selection List 28-13 Operator Control 28-15 Print Job Display Description 30-28 Using 30-26 Job Information AJOB Command 29-7

8-4

Job Output Attaching 30-2—30-6 Cancel Job Using Commands 30-30 Using Job Facility 30-30, 30-31 Copy to AWS Job Menu 30-20 Primary Commands 30-20 Selection List 30-22 Description 30-5 Detaching Using Commands 30-7 Using Job Facility 30-7 Display Format 5-7, 5-8 Displaying Data in HEX 5-7, 5-8 Execution Status 29-2 File Attributes 30-23—30-24 Sequence Number Displaying 5-6 File Attributes Change Using Command 30-17 Change Using Job Menu 30-18 Change Using Modifiable Display 30-23—30-24 Change Using Selection List 30-19 Positioning Display Between Files 30-12 To String 30-8 Printing Files Using Commands 30-26 Using Job Menu 30-26 Using Job Section List 30-29 Reattaching 30-15 Searching For String All Occurrences 30-9 Line Limit, Changing 6-16 Lines Limit, Site Default 6-13 Non-Matching Occurrences 30-9 Specific Occurrence 30-8 SYSOUT Class Requirements 30-5 Job Selection List Alter Job 30-19 Copy Job 30-22 Job Status 30-25 Print Job 30-29 Join Lines Using Line Commands 19-18 Using Primary Command 19-15, 19-16

Index X-9

K KEY Field on Sign-on Screen 10-2 Keywords (syntax diagrams) xxvi

L Language Character Set Changing 6-15 LAST Command AWS 20-3 Job Output Locate String 30-8 Position Within 30-12 Library Facility 33-3, 33-4 LAST Line Command 20-5 Lastread Function (BBS) 35-4 LC Line Command 19-5 LCB Line Command 19-5 LCC Line Command 19-5 LCT Line Command 19-5 LIB Keyword on System Information Line 8-4 LIBRARIAN Selection List Detaching 26-2 Reattaching 26-10, 26-11 Search for String All Occurrences 26-4 By Occurrence 26-3 Non-Matching Occurrences 26-4 Selecting Different Level 25-38 LIBRARY Command 31-3—31-5 Library Facility Alter Member Attributes 34-2, 34-3 Attaching Member 32-10, 32-11 Selection List 32-2 Copying 34-5, 34-6 Deleting 34-11 Detaching 33-2 Function Panels Description 31-6 Inquiring About Member 34-15, 34-16 Library System 31-1 Menu 31-3—31-5 Printing 34-17 Reattaching 33-10, 33-11 Selection List Function Code Hierarchy 31-8, 31-9 Refresh 31-10 Using 31-7 Wildcard Characters 32-3

X-10 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

Library Member Attaching 32-10, 32-11 Copying Using Command 34-5, 34-6 Using Function Panel 34-8, 34-9 Using Selection List 34-9, 34-10 Creating 23-2 Deleting Using Command 34-11 Using Function Panel 34-12 Using Selection List 34-13 Display Format 5-7 Displaying Data in HEX 5-7, 5-8 Format of Display 32-12 HEX display 5-7, 5-8 Inquiring About 34-15, 34-16 Position Display To Named Line 33-8 To Specific Line 33-8 Printing Using Command 34-17 Using Function Panel 34-17 Using Selection List 34-21 Renaming Using 34-22 Using Command 34-22 Using Function Panel 34-22 Using Selection List 34-23 Save AWS Contents As 23-2 Search for String All Occurrences 33-4 Non-Matching Occurrences 33-4 Specific Occurrence 33-3, 33-4 Update Contents 23-5 Library Member Display Display Format 5-8 Sequence Number Display 5-6 Library System, Description 31-1 Line Commands Correcting Invalid/Incomplete 2-10 Description of Use 2-3, 2-4 Display Format Description 2-2 Evaluation Hierarchy 2-9 Locate CA-Roscoe Users (BBS) 35-28 Locate/Display Data All Occurrences In AWS (Modifiable Display) 20-7, 20-8, 20-9 In AWS (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-7, 20-8 By Occurrence In AWS (Line Commands) 20-5 In AWS (Primary Command) 20-3

Locate/Display Data (continued) Change Search Boundaries (For Command) 4-2 Change Search Boundaries (For Session) Using BOUNDS Line Command 4-5 Using SET BOUNDS 4-4 Using STATUS AWS 4-3 Using STATUS DISPLAY 4-3 Customizing Display 20-10 Non-Matching Occurrence In AWS (Modifiable Display) 20-6 In AWS (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-7, 20-8 Position Display 20-13 Qualify String 20-10 Translate Search String 20-10 Using HEX String 20-11, 20-12 Logical Not (¬) Change Tab Character 17-5 LOWCASE Command 19-5 Lowercase Data All Characters Using Line Commands 19-5 Using Primary Command 19-5 With Initial Cap Using Line Commands 19-6 Using Primary Command 19-5 LSHIFT Command 19-10, 19-11

M M Line Command 21-3 Manipulate Text Center Using Line Commands 19-3, 19-4 Using Primary Command 19-2 Initial Cap Using Line Commands 19-6 Using Primary Command 19-5 Join Lines Using Line Commands 19-18 Using Primary Command 19-15, 19-16 Lowercase All Using Line Commands 19-5 Using Primary Command 19-5 Reformat Using Line Command 19-8—19-9 Using Primary Command 19-7, 19-8 Shift Lines Using Line Commands 19-11, 19-12 Using Primary Command 19-10, 19-11 Split Line Using Line Commands 19-17 Using Primary Commands 19-13, 19-14

Manipulate Text (continued) Uppercase All Using Line Commands 19-5 Using Primary Command 19-5 Margins, Display Change Using SET DISPLAY 5-5 Change Using STATUS DISPLAY 5-4 Temporary Change 5-3, 5-4 MASK Line Command 18-11—18-12 MAX (SCRL Field Value) 8-5 MB Line Command 21-3 MERGE Command 34-7 Message Selection List(BBS) Description 35-3 PFKey Functions 35-4 Message Thread Entry (BBS) Create 35-8, 35-9 Description 35-6 PFKey Functions 35-7 Message Thread Selection List(BBS) Description 35-5 PFKey Functions 35-5 Message Threads (BBS) Create 35-8, 35-9 Description 35-3 Print 35-18, 35-19 Viewing 35-5 Message Title (BBS), Create 35-10 Messages CA-Roscoe Info Messages 6-16 Controlling Display SEND Messages (Received) 9-2, 9-3 Submit Confirmation 28-4 Monitor Error Messages 6-16 Monitor Info Messages 6-16 PRINT Completion 7-8 Transmit Via BulletinBoard System 9-5 Transmit Via SEND 9-4, 9-5 View Using BulletinBoard System 35-21—35-24 MM Line Command 21-3 Monitor Commands Controlling Messages Error 6-16 Informational 6-16 Deferring Command Execution 2-6 Reexecuting 2-6 MOVE Command 21-2 Moving Lines Within AWS Using Line Commands 21-3, 21-4 Using Primary Command 21-2

Index X-11

MT Line Command

21-3

N Name Field on System Information Line 8-3 Print Request Assigning 7-6 Displaying 7-13 News Announcements (BBS) Description 35-2 View 35-15 NewThread Function (BBS) 35-10 NEXT Command AWS 20-3 Job Output Locate String 30-8 Position Within 30-12 Library Facility 33-3, 33-4 NEXT Line Command 20-5 Nextnew Function (BBS) 35-6 NONUM Define Sequence Number Display 5-6 NOPRESERVE Mode Character Translation 3-4 NOTE Command With Data Set, Member, Module 26-8, 26-9 With Job Output 30-13 With Library Member 33-8, 33-9 Note Names Library Member 33-8, 33-9 Notification Messages PRINT Completion 7-8 NUM Define Sequence Number Display 5-6 NUM2 Define Sequence Number Display 5-6 NUMX Define Sequence Number Display 5-6

O O (Destination/Overlay/Drop) Line Command With COPY 15-4 O (Destination/Overlay) Line Command With COPY 15-4 With Move 21-4 OB (Destination/Overlay) Line Command With COPY 15-5 With Move 21-4

X-12 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

OM Line Command 18-12 OMB Line Command 18-12 OMIT Command 20-7, 20-8 OMT Line Command 18-12 OO (Destination/Overlay) Line Command With COPY 15-5 With Move 21-4 Operator Job Facility 28-15 ORDER Command 14-3 ORDER Operand, Library Facility 32-9 Ordering Library Selection List 32-9 OT (Destination/Overlay) Line Command With COPY 15-5 With Move 21-4 Overlay Line Commands With COPY 15-6 With Move 21-5

P Parentheses syntax diagrams, use in xxvii Password Changing User During Session 10-8, 10-9 When Signing On 10-3, 10-8 PASSWORD Field on Sign-on Screen 10-2 PAU Keyword on System Information Line 8-4 PDS Member 25-15—25-17 PDS Selection List Attaching 25-18, 25-19 Description Of 25-20 Detaching 26-2 Function Code List 25-20—25-22 Inquire About Load Module 25-20—25-22 Source Module 25-23—25-25 Reattaching 26-10, 26-11 Search for String All Occurrences 26-4 By Occurrence 26-3 Non-Matching Occurrences 26-4 Selecting Different Level 25-38 PF/PA Keys BulletinBoard System 35-2 Changing Assignment Description 11-8, 11-9 Fixed Assignment 11-10, 11-11 Scroll Functions 11-13 Special Functions 11-15 Variable Assignment 11-11, 11-12

PF/PA Keys (continued) Command Delimiter 11-11 Changing 6-17 Default Assignments 11-2 Processing Hierarchy 11-7 Using 11-4 PFv (SCRL Field Value) 8-5 PGM Keyword on System Information Line 8-4 Plus sign Redisplaying last executed command 2-13 POINT Command 13-11 Library Facility 33-4 With Data Set, Member, Module 26-8 With Job Output Position Within 30-12 To Noted Line 30-13 Power Typing (Data Entry) Using Line Command 18-10 Using Primary Command 18-6, 18-7 PREFIX Command 14-2 PRESERVE Mode Character Translation 3-4 PREV Command AWS 20-3 Job Output Locate String 30-8 Position Within 30-12 Library Facility 33-3, 33-4 PREV Line Command 20-5 Prevnew Function (BBS) 35-5 Primary Commands Controlling Info Messages 6-16 Correcting Invalid/Incomplete 2-10 Deferring Command Execution 2-6 Description of Use 2-2 Reexecuting 2-6 Using With Line Commands 2-2 PRINT CANCEL Command 7-13 PRINT Command Data Set 27-44 Description 7-2 Job Output Commands 30-26 Job Facility 30-26 Selection List 30-29 With Library Facility 34-17 PRINT DEVICE Command 7-12 Print Function Panel Data Set Facility 27-46 Library Facility 34-17

PRINT HOLD Command 7-14 PRINT LOCATION Command 7-11 Print Message Utility (BBS) 35-17—35-19 PRINT RELEASE Command 7-14 PRINT ROUTE Command 7-14 PRINT STATUS Command 7-13 Printing (At 328x/System Printer) ANSI Controlled 7-4 Cancelling Request 7-13 Changing Priorities 7-14 Designating Location 7-10 Display Information About Printers 7-12 Printing Locations 7-10 Request Status 7-13 Formatting Request 7-3—7-5 Holding Requests 7-14 Naming Requests 7-6 Notification Messages, Requesting 7-8 Partial Requests 7-7 Referencing Requests 7-6 Releasing Requests 7-14 Requesting Copies 7-6 Rerouting Requests 7-14 System Printer Controls 7-9 Using :P 7-2 PRINT Command 7-2 Printing Data Message Thread (BBS) 35-18, 35-19 Notification Messages Setting Default 6-17 Thread Entry (BBS) 35-17 Using Data Set Facility 27-46 Printing Location Changing For Request 7-10 For Session 7-10 Displaying All 7-11 Current 6-4 Profile Cleanup (BBS) 35-16 Program Access Keys See PF/PA Keys Program Attention Keys See PF/PA Keys Program Function Keys See PF/PA Keys Programs comma repeat symbol, use in xxix

Index X-13

Programs (continued) parentheses syntax diagrams, use in xxvii punctuation syntax diagrams, use in xxvi Prune Profile Utility (BBS) 35-16 Punctuation marks (syntax diagrams) xxvi PURGE Command Job Output 30-30

R R Line Command 15-7 RBX Prefix 35-2 Read Message Attribute (BBS) 35-14 Reattaching AWS 13-13 Data Set Object 26-10, 26-11 Job Output 30-15 Library Facility 33-10, 33-11 Reexecuting Last Command/RPF 2-6 Reformat Lines Using Line Command 19-8—19-9 Using Primary Command 19-7, 19-8 REFRESH Command Data Set Facility 24-15 Library Facility 31-10 Refresh Function (BBS) 35-4 Refreshing Selection List Data Set Facility 24-15 Library Facility 31-10 RELEASE Command 27-52 RENAME Command AWS 13-5 Data Set Object 27-53 Library Member 34-22 Rename Function Panel Data Set Facility 27-54 Renaming AWS Using Command 13-5 Using STATUS AWS 17-3 Data Set Object Using Command 27-53 Using Function Panel 27-54 Using Selection List 27-57 Renumber AWS Contents Any Time 22-1—22-3 RENUMBER Command 22-1—22-3 Reserved Characters 2-5, 2-6

X-14 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

RESET Line Command 2-11 Response Line 8-3 RPF Programs Description Of 39-1 Execution Library, Control Use Of Looping Change Limit 6-17 Limit Defaults 6-13 Write Limit Change Setting 6-17 Site Defaults 6-13 RR Line Command 15-7 RSHIFT Command 19-10, 19-11

S SAVE Command Assigning Attributes 23-4 Assigning Description 23-4 Creating Library Member 23-2 Saving AWS Contents 23-2 Scale Line 8-6 Screen Change Copy Destination 6-15 Size 8-12 Components of Command Area 8-3 Description 8-2 Execution Area 8-6 Response Line 8-3 Scale Line 8-6 System Control Area 8-3—8-5 System Information Line 8-3 Copy 15-9 Print 7-2 Split Full 8-7—8-8 Overview 8-7 Partial 8-9 Resplit 8-10 Swap 8-10, 8-11 Terminate 8-11 Types of Full/Half 8-7 Terminal Lock 8-13, 8-14 SCREEN Command 8-12 Screen Types of 10-2—10-3 Sign-on 10-3 Sign-on' 10-2

6-16

SDSN Command 27-62 SEARCH Command 20-7, 20-8 SELECT Command (CA-Roscoe) With AWS 13-14 With Library Facility 32-13 Selection Lists Copying From 27-20 Data Set Facility Catalog 25-7, 25-8, 25-9—25-12 Data Set 25-26, 25-27 Function Code Hierarchy 24-13 LIBRARIAN 25-2—25-6 Overview 24-12 PDS Load 25-20—25-22 PDS Source 25-23—25-25 Printing From 27-51 Refreshing 24-15 Source 25-23—25-25 Volume 25-30—25-31 VTOC 25-35—25-37 Library Facility Attach Member 32-11 Copy 34-9, 34-10 Description 31-7, 32-2 Detaching 33-2 Function Code Hierarchy 31-8, 31-9 Refreshing 31-10 Sorting Display (ORDER Command) 32-9 SEND Command Controlling Message Display 6-17 Receiving Messages 9-2, 9-3 Transmitting Messages 9-4, 9-5 Sequence Number Attributes AWS Change Using STATUS AWS 17-4 Change When Printing 7-3 Change When Submitting 28-5 Sequence Numbers Display 5-6 Printing 7-3 Renumbering 22-2 SESSION duplicate commands saving 6-16 Session Attributes :C (COPY) Destination Changing 6-15 +INC Statement Expansion Changing 6-17 ATTACH Pause Setting 6-15 Automatic Indentation, Display/Change 6-15

Session Attributes (continued) Automatic (continued) Line Insertion, Display/Change 6-15 Signoff, Site Defaults 6-12 Terminal Lock, Site Defaults 6-12 AWS Data Protection 6-15 Edit Indicator 6-16 ERASE EOF Key Control 6-16 Fill Character (Trailing Blanks) 6-16 Highlighting 6-15 Recovery, Change 17-5 Selection, Change 17-5 Sequence Number Attribute, Change 17-6 Tab Character/Positions, Change 17-5 CA-Librarian -INC Expansion Changing 6-16 Character Set Changing 6-15 Using 3-2 Character Translation Changing 6-16 Using 3-3 Column Boundaries 6-15 Command Area Changing 6-15 Command Delimiter (CA-Roscoe) Changing 6-15 Using 2-2 Command Delimiter (PF/PA Key) Changing 6-17 Cursor Positioning 6-15, 6-16 Data Set Objects COMPRESS Message Control, Changing 6-16 Directory Update Setting 6-17 DSCB Empty Setting 6-16 Migration Recall 6-16 Search Limits, Changing 6-16 Date Format 6-15 Display CA-Roscoe ID 6-17 List of All 6-4 User ID 6-17 Display Format Change All 6-15 Change Display Format 5-7, 5-8 Change Display Margins 5-5 Change Sequence Number Display 5-6 DSCB Setting, Change 6-16 ETSO Escape Sequence Changing 6-16

Index X-15

Session Attributes (continued) Jobs -INC Expansion Control, Changing 6-16 +INC Expansion Control 6-17 Data Width Control 6-17 Search Limits, Changing 6-16 List Of 6-4 Messages, Controling Display From CA-Roscoe 6-16 From Monitor 6-16 PRINT Completion Notification Changing 7-8 Printing Destination Changing 6-17 Printing Location Establish 7-10 Printing Notification Changing 6-17 RPF Control Execution Library Use 6-16 Control Loop Limit 6-17 Control Write Limit 6-17 Screen Copy Destination Changing 6-15 Screen Positioning When String Located 6-17 SCRL Field Value Changing 6-17 Search Column Boundaries Changing 6-15 Sequence Number Display 6-17 Signoff Changing Option 6-15 SET ATTACH Command 6-15 SET AUTOFF Command Site Defaults 6-12 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15 SET AUTOINDENT Command Inserting Lines 18-15 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15 SET AUTOINSERT Command Insert Additional Lines 18-9 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15 SET AWSDSPLY Command 6-15 SET BOUNDS Command Change Column Boundaries 4-4 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15 SET CHARSET Command Changing Language Code 3-2 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15 SET CMDLINES Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15

X-16 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

SET Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15 SET COPYDEST Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15 SET CURSOR Command 6-15 SET DATEFORM Command 6-15 SET DISPLAY Command Change Display Format 5-7, 5-8 Change Display Margins 5-5 Change Sequence Number Display 5-6 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-15 SET DSNCMLST Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16 SET DSNCNT Command Site Default 6-13 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16 SET DSNEMPTY Command 6-16 SET DSNRECALL command 6-16 SET DUPCR command 6-16 SET EDITCHNG Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16 Tracking Changed Lines 14-8—14-10 SET EOF Command Control ERASE EOF Use 16-6 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16 SET ESCAPE Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16 SET EXECPFX command 6-16 SET FILL Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16 SET JOBCNT Command Site Default 6-13 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16 SET MASTER Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16 SET MODE Command Control Character Recognition/Translation 3-3 Control Non-Displayable Character Translation 3-4 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16 SET MONLEVEL command 6-16 SET MONTRAP command 6-16 SET MSGLEVEL Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16 With Job Submission 28-4 Set Options Utility (BBS) 35-13 SET PFKDELIM Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-16 SET RPSDEST Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-9 SET RPSNOTIFY Command For PRINT Completion Notification 7-8

SET RPSNOTIFY Command (continued) STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-17 SET SAVEATTR Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-17 SET SCROLL Command STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-17 SET SEARCH Command 6-17 SET SEND Command Controlling Display 9-2, 9-3 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-17 SET STATS Command 6-17 SET STMTCNT Command 6-17 Site Default 6-13 SET SUBMIT Command Controlling Sequence Numbers 28-5 Expanding +INC Statements 28-7 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-17 SET SYSID Command 6-17 SET TLOCK Command Activating Terminal Lock 8-13 Site Defaults 6-12 STATUS DISPLAY Information 6-17 SET USERID Command 6-17 SET WRITECNT Command 6-17 SetOpts Function (ZMsg BBS) 35-27 Shifting Data Description Using Line Commands 19-11, 19-12 Using Primary Command 19-10, 19-11 Using TAB Facility 18-16, 18-17 Show News Utility (BBS) 35-15 Sign On BulletinBoard System 35-2 From CA-Roscoe 10-4, 10-5 From CICS 10-6 From Sign-on Screen 10-2—10-3 From TSO 10-7 Using VTAM 10-3 Sign-on Program Creating 10-10, 10-11 Sign-on Screen 10-2—10-3 Signoff Automatic Description 10-12 Site Defaults 6-12 Explicit 10-13 SKETCH Description Of 40-1 SMS-Managed Data Set Allocating Using Function Panel 27-7

SMS-Managed Data Set (continued) Cataloging 27-11, 27-12 SMS-Managed Data Sets Allocating Using Command 27-2, 27-3 Special Characters Asterisk (*) 2-6 Double Comma (,,) 2-5 Minus Sign (-) 2-6 Plus Sign (+) 2-7 Wildcard Characters 2-5 Split Line Using Line Commands 19-17 Using Primary Commands 19-13, 19-14 Split Screen Facility Full 8-7—8-8 Overview 8-7 Partial 8-9 Resplitting 8-10 Swapping 8-10, 8-11 Terminating 8-11 Split screen setting 6-10 STA Keyword on System Information Line 8-4 STANDARD Mode Character Translation/Recognition 3-3 STATUS AWS Command 17-1—17-6 STATUS COMMAND Command 2-13 STATUS DISPLAY Command Changing Column Boundaries 4-3 Display Format 5-7, 5-8 Sequence Number Display 5-6 Description 6-2, 6-3 STATUS SESSION Command 6-4 STATUS SYSTEM Command 6-12, 6-13 String Handling Adding At Beginning 14-2 At End 14-2 Changing Character Within Using Line Commands 14-5 Using Primary Command 14-4 Changing String Tracking Changes 14-8—14-10 Using Line Commands 14-7 Using Primary Command 14-6, 14-7 Delimiter Characters 2-8 HEX Display In 5-7, 5-8 Locate All Occurrences In AWS (Modifiable Display) 20-7, 20-8, 20-9 In AWS (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-7, 20-8

Index X-17

String Handling (continued) Locate Non-Matching Occurrence In AWS (Modifiable Display) 20-6, 20-7, 20-8 In AWS (Non-Modifiable Display) 20-7, 20-8 Locating By Occurrence In AWS (Line Commands) 20-5 In AWS (Primary Command) 20-3 Translate On Input/Edit 3-3 With Command 3-3 SUBMIT Command 28-4 Submitting Data Changing Defaults 6-17 Description 28-4 SUFFIX Command 14-2 Suppress Message Processing (BBS) 35-23 Syntax Checking COBOL 28-3 JCL 28-2, 28-3 Syntax diagrams reading (how to) xxvi—xxx SYSOUT Class Requirements 30-5 System Control Area 8-3—8-5 System Information Line 8-3 System Printers Changing Locations For Request 7-10 For Session 7-10 Displaying Locations 7-11 Setting Parameters 7-9 Using 7-2

T Tab Character Change Via STATUS AWS 17-5 TAB Command 18-16, 18-17 TC Line Command 19-3 TCB Line Command 19-3 TCC Line Command 19-3 TCT Line Command 19-3 TE Line Command 18-10 Terminal Lock Facility Changing Options 6-17 Invoking 8-13, 8-14 Site Defaults 6-12 Terminating 8-13, 8-14 Terminate Split Screens 8-11 Terminal Lock Screen 8-13

X-18 CA-Roscoe 6.0 User Guide

TEXTENTR (Operand of INPUT Command) 18-6, 18-7 TF Line Command 19-8—19-9 Thread entries, deleting 35-16 Thread Entry (BBS) Create 35-8, 35-9 Print 35-17 View 35-6 Thread Title (BBS), Create 35-10 TIME Command 6-14 Time, Display 6-14 Title, Message/Thread (BBS) 35-10 TJ Line Command 19-18 TRACE Command 14-10 Tracking Changed Lines 14-8—14-10 Translation, Character Non-display 3-4 When Entering/Editing Data 3-3 When Searching For String 3-3 When Specified with CA-Roscoe Commands 3-3 TS Line Command 19-17 TSO Command 38-10 Procedure Execution 38-10 Signing on to CA-Roscoe 10-7 TSO Command 38-10 TT (Destination) Line Command 15-4 With Move 21-4 TTD (Destination/Drop) Line Command With COPY 15-5 TUTORIAL, CA-Roscoe Description 12-6 TXTCENT Command 19-2 TXTFLOW Command 19-7 TXTJOIN Command 19-15, 19-16 TXTLCASE Command 19-5 TXTSPLIT Command 19-13, 19-14 Typewriter Devices Establishing Communications A-2 Non-Executable Commands A-12 Signing Off A-6 Signing On A-4 Using The Data Set Facility A-10 Viewing Job Output A-11

U UC Line Command 19-5 UCB Line Command 19-5 UCC Line Command 19-5 UCT Line Command 19-5

Uncataloging Data Set 27-58 UNCATLG Command 27-58 Unread Message Attribute (BBS) 35-14 UPCASE Command 19-5 UPDATE Command 23-5 Uppercase Data Using Line Commands 19-5 Using Primary Command 19-5 Using PF/PA Keys Inserting Data In AWS 18-13 Utility Function (BBS) 35-4, 35-12 Utility Menu (BBS) 35-12

V Variables (syntax diagrams) xxvi Viewing Message Thread (BBS) 35-5 Viewing Message Thread Entries (BBS) 35-6, 35-7 Volume Selection List Attaching 25-28 Description Of 25-30—25-31 Detaching 26-2 Function Code List 25-30—25-31 Reattaching 26-10, 26-11 Search for String All Occurrences 26-4 By Occurrence 26-3 Non-Matching Occurrences 26-4 Selecting Different Level 25-38 Wildcard Characters 25-29 VTAM Sign-on Initial 10-3 Signing Off 10-13 VTOC Selection List Attaching 25-33—25-34 Description Of 25-35—25-37 Detaching 26-2 Function Code List 25-35—25-37 Reattaching 26-10, 26-11 Search for String All Occurrences 26-4 By Occurrence 26-3 Non-Matching Occurrences 26-4 Selecting Different Level 25-38 Wildcard Characters 24-8, 25-33

Wildcard Characters (continued) With Library Facility 32-3

X XCOPY Command Between Screens 15-12—15-14 XCOPYS Command Between Screens 15-12—15-14 XCOPYX Command Between Screens 15-12—15-14 XL Line Command 14-5 XLB Line Command 14-5 XLT Line Command 14-5 XTENDED Mode Character Translation/Recognition XTPM Signing On CA-Roscoe 10-4

3-3

Z ZAnn Mode (BBS) 35-15 ZMsg (BBS) Function 35-4 Mode, Using 35-21—35-27 PFKey Functions 35-25 Set Options 35-27 ZMsgOpts Display (BBS) 35-27 ZZZZZMSG Member View Using BulletinBoard System

35-21—35-24

W Wildcard Characters With Data Set Facility For Catalog/VTOC Selection List 24-8 For LIBRARIAN/PDS/Volume Selection List 24-9

Index X-19